M2000 V200R009

Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)
Issue Date 10 2010-09-06

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document provides the system administration tasks, the related concepts, the detailed operation procedures of the system administration tasks, the routine maintenance, and the troubleshooting and emergency maintenance. The document is used in the following situations:
l l l

The operating system is Solaris 10. The database device is a bare device. The database is Sybase15.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name M2000 Version V200R009

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are network administrators.

Revision History 10 (2010-09-06)
Formal release for the tenth time. Compared with 09 (2010-07-30), the following content is modified.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

About This Document

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Content 14.1.19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays 14.1.20 How Should I Uninstall the OceanStor Monitoring Software

Description New added.

New added.

09 (2010-07-30)
Formal release for the ninth time. Compared with 08 (2010-06-15), the following content is modified. Content 7.2.3 Starting the M2000 System Services 7.2.4 Stopping the M2000 Services 8.4 Backing Up M2000 Databases 10.2.4 Periodically Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data 10.2.6 Restoring the M2000 Dynamic Data 11.3.10 Backing Up the M2000 Description The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed.

08 (2010-06-15)
Formal release for the eighth time. Compared with 07 (2010-03-30), the following content is modified. Content 2.5.8 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client 5.2.5 Changing the Password of User ftpuser 5.3.2 Changing the Password of User sa 7.1.61 son_agent Process 7.1.62 swm_agent Process
iv

Description The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

About This Document

Content 10.2.6 Restoring the M2000 Dynamic Data

Description The content descriptions are changed.

07 (2010-03-30)
Formal release for the seventh time. Compared with 06 (2010-01-20), the following content is modified. Content 3.2.3 Changing the IP Address of Ethernet Port nxge3 on the M2000 Server 14.1.13 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Command Mode)? 14.1.21 How Should I Check the Running Status of the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? 14.1.22 How Should I Start the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? 14.1.23 How Should I Check the Running Status of the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? 14.1.24 How Should I Start the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? 14.4.10 How Should I Handle an Incremental Backup Failure? Description The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed.

New added.

New added. New added.

New added. New added.

06 (2010-01-20)
Sixth commercial release. Compared with V200R009 05 issued on December 10 of 2009, this version has the following modifications: The content descriptions are optimized in 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

About This Document

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

05 (2009-12-10)
Fifth commercial release. Compared with V200R009 04 issued on October 31 of 2009, this version has the following modifications: The content descriptions are optimized in 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off.

04 (2009-10-31)
Fourth commercial release. Compared with V200R009 03 issued on September 20 of 2009, this version has the following modifications: The content descriptions are optimized in 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off.

03 (2009-09-20)
Third commercial release. Compared with V200R009 02 issued on July 25 of 2009, this version has the following modifications: The content descriptions are optimized in 7.1 Introduction to M2000 Processes and Services.

02 (2009-07-25)
Second commercial release. Compared with V200R009 01 issued on June 30 of 2009, this version has the following modifications: The content descriptions are optimized in 7.1 Introduction to M2000 Processes and Services.

01 (2009-06-30)
Initial release. Also, the first formal release.

Organization
1 Powering the M2000 On or Off This chapter describes how to power on and power off the M2000 server.
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

13 Troubleshooting the M2000 This chapter describes the procedures for troubleshooting the M2000. 5 Managing the M2000 Users This chapter describes the four types of users involved in the operation of the M2000 system: Solaris user. collecting NM log files. 4 Managing the M2000 Clients This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 clients. 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks This chapter describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 server and client. only for reference. monitoring the M2000 server. S10) About This Document 2 Setting the M2000 Time This chapter describes how to set the M2000 time. you can viewing NE partitioning. To enable the M2000 time to meet the time requirements. 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server This chapter describes how to set the host name and the IP address of the M2000 server. You must manage the M2000 clients to ensure their normal operation. integrated task management. 8 Managing the M2000 Databases This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 databases.. The graphic user interface (GUI) on the M2000 client supports the O&M for the NEs and enables you to monitor the M2000. In addition. 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 processes and services. according to field requirements. vii . 6 Managing OSS System The M2000 provides the OSS management function. it describes the management and monitoring operations related to the types of users and M2000 user groups. By using this function. client emergency maintenance. Specific maintenance items are required in real applications. managing the M2000 license. 14 FAQs (Sun) Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Sybase user. network management user. you must synchronize the time of the M2000 with the time of the other Huawei devices in the Huawei mobile network. 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance This chapter describes the maintenance items and the procedures required to conduct the M2000 routine maintenance.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. however. These items are. and emergency maintenance for the server power-off. Ltd. This chapter covers the server emergency maintenance. and NE user. 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 This chapter describes how to back up and restore M2000 data. check OMC status. 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance This chapter describes the emergency maintenance in the case of a critical fault in the M2000 server or client.

data loss. S10) This chapter describes FAQs and solutions related to the M2000. which if not avoided. Command arguments are in italics. Names of files. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk. performance degradation. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.. could result in minor or moderate injury.About This Document M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk. directories. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For example. Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. which if not avoided. Book titles are in italics. which if not avoided. Convention Boldface Italic viii Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. folders. or unexpected results. Ltd. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation.could result in equipment damage. and users are in boldface. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. log in as user root.

choose File > Create > Folder. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. tabs. click OK. menus. ix . Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars... ] { x | y | . Press the keys concurrently.. For example.. press Enter and press Tab. ]* GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Several items or no item can be selected.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. For example. Ltd. } [ x | y | . }* Description Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.. pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. and dialog titles are in boldface. For example.. For example.. pressing Alt. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.. window. Press the keys in turn. S10) About This Document Convention [] { x | y | . One item is selected or no item is selected. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Key 2 Description Press the key. [ x | y | .. parameters. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons. For example.

S10) Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.About This Document M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

....................................................... Time...1-6 1.................1-8 1.....2-16 2.................................4 Introduction to the DST.....1-2 1.....................................1-14 1..................1-16 1......................................1-1 1.........1-2 1.............2-19 2..........................................................5..................1-4 1.5..............................................................................................................................................................................................5....................2 Powering Off the M2000 (E4900)......................................... and Time Zone on the M2000 Client..................................................................2-17 2..........................2 Introduction to the NTP/SNTP...................2-12 2.....................................1-8 1.1.............................3 Changing the Time Zone of the M2000 Server Without Using DST.2-15 2...3 Time Synchronization Modes of Huawei Mobile Network.......................1..................................................................................1 Powering On the M2000 (M4000/M5000).............5 Setting the M2000 Server as the NTP Client................4 Powering the M2000 On or Off (T5220)..................................1 Powering the M2000 On or Off (Netra240)...............1-16 1.....................................................................................................................................................1 Powering On the M2000 (V890).....................................................................................................................2 Powering the M2000 On or Off (V890).................. S10) Contents Contents About This Document......................................................4 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console.3...........................1-16 1.....................2 Powering Off the M2000 (T5220).............1 Time Management for the Huawei Mobile Network.............4............4 Modifying the Date......................................................5........1.............................................................2-17 2.......................................................2 Powering Off the M2000 (M4000/M5000)................................................1-20 2 Setting the M2000 Time......................................................................................................................................2 Modifying the Date and Time on the M2000 Server..........................1-4 1.....3.2..............1 Checking the Time Settings of the M2000 Server...5.2-20 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............................................................2-12 2....................................................4..............................................2-6 2.....................................................................................................................................................................2-19 2..2-1 2...........2 Powering Off the M2000 (Netra 240)............................................1............ 2-2 2...............................................................2-14 2...........1 Powering On the M2000 (Netra240)...2-3 2............... xi ........................1 Introduction to Time Synchronization...................... Ltd................5 Configuring the NTP Service of the M2000..............................................1...............................2 Setting the M2000 Administration Console as the Secondary NTP Server.......3 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console...........1-12 1.............................1-15 1..............................1 Powering On the M2000 (E4900).....................M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.................................................5.................1.........................5.....................1 Powering On the M2000 (T5220).......................................................................2 Powering Off the M2000 (V890)...........iii 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off........................................3 Powering the M2000 On or Off (E4900)..................................................................................................2..........................................................................................1-3 1...................2-2 2...................5 Powering the M2000 On or Off (M4000/M5000)..........

.4......................................................................................3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the E4900 Server................................................................1...................................3-17 3..........................1.........3 Changing the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode)............ S10) 2...........3-17 3.............................1 Changing the Host Name of the M2000 Server.................................................1 Introduction to Solaris Users.......................................3.....................3........................4-4 4...................................................5-10 5.......................5-2 5...................3......................1.........................................................................................................................................................................6 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Server....................2 Changing the Password of User root..................4...............................................................4.....................................5..................................1 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the Netra 240 Server.........................2 Monitoring the Login Status of the M2000 Clients..........3 Changing the Password of User dbuser......3-20 3..............................................................................3-23 3..........................................................3-14 3...........................3.................3.............................................3-23 3................................................2-23 2............5-2 5........2....6 Setting DST for the M2000............5-8 5......................3-27 3............................................3-5 3.............................2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client.......................................1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients.....................................................2...............................5 Principles of NE User Authorization....5-4 5..Contents M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.............................................5-7 5.......................................................1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System......3-16 3.........................................................................4-5 4.....1 Modifying the Date..............5-4 5....1.................................3-2 3.............................................................................................2...........................................2..........2 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client... Ltd...1 Modifying the IP Address of the 3320 Disk Array................5........................................2-25 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server.............4..........4-2 4......................................................................................................................4..........................3-24 3...2 Changing the IP Address of the M2000 Server.........................4 Changing the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode)..................2 Modifying the IP Address of the M2000 Server..............................................................................5-1 5........................4 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the T5220 Server.................3-5 3....................3-6 3..8 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client...............................3 Changing the IP Address of Ethernet Port nxge3 on the M2000 Server.....4 Modifying the IP Address of the Disk Array............................................................................................4 Principles of NM User Authorization........................................... Time.........1 Adding or Deleting Routes on the M2000 Server.....................4-7 4......................7 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Server............1 Introduction to Solaris Users.............................................................5-11 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.............5.... Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .............4-7 5 Managing the M2000 Users............................3-15 3...1 Types of M2000 Users........3-1 3................................................................2 Changing the IP Address of the RSC on the V890 Server....1................................................................................................2 Managing Solaris Users.......4-5 4...4-6 4...............................3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC or RSC or XSCF on the M2000 Server......2...2..................................................1.............................3 Setting the Number of Clients Accessible on a PC.4-2 4.............................2-22 2................................................3-20 3.............................2-21 2...... and Time Zone on the M2000 Client...................3 NE Users..............................................................................................................................................1........................3-31 4 Managing the M2000 Clients....................5 Changing the IP Address of the XSCF on the M4000/M5000 Server...................................................................5-7 5.......................................................5-6 5.....................4.................2 Introduction to Sybase Users................................................2 Changing the IP Address of the S3200 Series Disk Array (Serial Port Mode).............4-1 4...........................4 Setting the Time Information on the M2000 Client.................................................................................

.......................................6-6 6.............................7............6-21 6..........................................................4 Changing the Password of User omcuser.......................................5-11 5..................................................................................................7................2..............................1..........................................1 Interface Description: Managing Timing Tasks.....6-22 6....................................................7.............................................1 Introduction to Sybase Users..........................................5 Checking the M2000 Services.............................................................................3 Collecting NM Log Files...1.........................................6 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes...........................................5-19 6 Managing OSS System.....................6-21 6............4 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client ............................3 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client.....6-51 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..........................7 Deleting a Solaris User.6-4 6..........................................................................................1................................8 Reference of the OSS Management GUI..5-15 5..........................................7.7................................2..........................................6 Check OMC status.........................6-5 6.................6-46 6.............................2................6-22 6........................................6-43 6.............................................................................6-38 6...............6-10 6..............................6-3 6.....................................................6-7 6...................................................................6-10 6........................................................................2 Interface Description: M2000 Log Information Collector..3 Changing the Name of the Database Server.................................................................................................3 Managing Sybase Users.................................6-22 6......4 Managing OM Users................ Ltd..5-17 5...........................6-18 6....4 Querying NE Subareas.........................1 Monitoring the M2000 Server......................................................................5-14 5............................5...........................1...............................7........................5-15 5..................1....................................................................................................7...........1...........6-42 6...........................................5 Changing the Password of User ftpuser.................1.....................6-24 6.........6-8 6...3........................................6-36 6.....9 Setting Alarm Thresholds for the M2000.........2 Changing the Password of User sa...........1.......................................................7 Viewing the Information about M2000 Server Components......................................................................8 Downloading Result Files....................................................................6-47 6........1 Basic Knowledge...................................................................................................................................................2...........7 Integrated Task Management.....5-12 5............1 Querying the M2000 License............................. S10) Contents 5..............................................................................................................................................................................................6-9 6..........................................................................6-23 6.........................6 Creating a Solaris User........................................................3.................................................................................................................................................6-39 6................5.............................................................................................................7................................3..............................................................................................................5 Managing the M2000 License.................................................................2 Checking the CPU and Memory Usage Information About the M2000 Server...............6-37 6.............3 Creating a User Timing Task..........................................8.........................................4 Modifying a Timing Task......2 Querying the System Logs of the M2000..........................................................................8 Saving the Monitoring Information.................................................1..................................................................5 Managing Timing Tasks.....................6-19 6.................................................8.....6-4 6..................8.....................6-49 6.......7 Viewing the Task Execution.3 Parameters for the NE Partitioning Information....................7............................................9 Technical Specifications of Centralized Task Management.....................5-15 5...........................................1 Refreshing the Monitoring Information....6-51 6....................................................................5-14 5............................2 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks.......................M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.......................... xiii .............6 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks..................................................................................6-1 6..................................................................................6-42 6............................................2 Updating the M2000 License....

..................................................................6-90 6...............................15 Parameters for Modifying NE Basic Information Export Task....................6-91 6.....5 Parameters for Setting Monitoring Parameters of the M2000 Server.8..................8 cmeserver_agent Process..............6-86 6......................... 6-77 6......6 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Service Status................7-6 7................................................................................. 6-82 6.......................1..........................6-93 6........................................26 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying the Export of NE Upgrade Log...............................20 Parameters for Creating............................................................5 ce_agent Process.....................8.............................................6-88 6......................................18 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying MML Command Script.....8..............................3 adss_agent Process..8............................................2 adn_agent Process..................6-60 6.....7-7 7..........8.................................9 cmexp_agent Process.......................................................32 Parameters for Selecting Objects for Device Check...............................................................4 antenna_agent Process.............................8........1......................................................8.................1.........................9 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Database Status...................................................................................6-89 6...1.........7-2 7..25 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying iSStar Script........................1........................7-7 7....................6-78 6.....8.............6-93 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services...................................................8.........16 Parameters for Modifying Alarm Timing Acknowledgement...1 Introduction to M2000 Processes and Services...............................6-77 6................................6-80 6............7 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Process Status...........................................................7-5 7.......................................................................7 cmengine_agent Process..........................................1...........6-52 6............8..............6-62 6...........................................6-92 6.............................................................................8..........8.............8.......8...........................8..8...................8..............................8...........6-61 6..........................................8................8..........1 3rdTool_agent Process...4 Parameters for Querying the M2000 License ......6-87 6.......17 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup Task.......8....... Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ...........................................7-6 7.....10 cmserver_agent Process.......................... Viewing......................................................................14 Parameters for Modifying Synchronization task....................................................................8..........................8...........................8..........19 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying RAN Report Task..........................11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks.......................................8.........Contents M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun....................33 Parameters for Collecting NM Logs Parameters............6 cmdc_agent Process...................8..............................6-64 6.....................................6-89 6................8....................13 Parameters for Modifying File interface Task..................8 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Hard Disk Status........................... 6-91 6...22 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying an RSSI Test Task..........................................8......................................................................1...............................................28 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Parameters Compare Task.....6-59 6....6-88 6..21 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a Task for Testing BTS Cabinet-Top Power..............................10 Parameters for Setting Task Filter Conditions...............8...................................... 6-60 6......................................7-7 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........6-78 6.............. Ltd...................................1.................... S10) 6........7-6 7....7-1 7..29 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Consistency Check Task..........7-6 7........... or Modifying a Scheduled Report Task...........8..............24 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Dual-Home Management................................27 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Upload Task..........12 Parameters for Modifying Database Capacity....7-6 7................................................................................................ 6-69 6....................7-5 7.............6-87 6............. 6-82 6.....1........................6-65 6...........................................23 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Software Download........6-53 6........31 Parameters for Setting Time of Timing Tasks..................1............................................30 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Current Area Export Task............................................................................................

..............................7-18 7....................................................................................................1................................................7-15 7................. Ltd..................35 neuser_agent Process................12 corba_agent Process......................................................................................................................7-15 7...................................1.....1........................................................7-8 7....7-9 7....................................................................................................1..........................1.......................13 cpm_agent Process.........................................................30 lte_agent Process...............................................................................................1............................................................................................7-11 7.............7-12 7..............7-13 7.......7-8 7..............48 pmncdXX01_agent Process................................................................1...40 nhcservice_agent Process............................................................................................................................................1..........................................................................15 dsXXXX agent Process........................................................................1................................7-8 7...............................................................................................20 fnlicense_agent Process..........................7-16 7......21 glmssyn_agent Process.............36 ngnffs_agent Process..............................................11 cnnhc_agent Process.41 nicservice_agent Process....7-14 7..38 ngnni112_agent Process.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-16 7.....7-10 7............................................7-15 7........................................................................................................................7-14 7.....................................................1.........................................51 PRSAssistantService_agent Process...................................................................................................................................................44 partition_agent Process.............1....22 ifms_agent Process..........................................................................................................................7-9 7....................................................................................1.....1...........1......7-13 7...........................1..................................................................43 nms_mml_agent Process..1...................................................................................................23 ipqdt_agent Process....7-13 7......................27 lcsserver_agent Process....................................................................................................1....................................19 FMPreServiceXXXX_agent Process.............1.....................................1...........50 proxy_agent Process...................................................................1.............16 eam_agent Process..18 fmnotify_agent Process..............................................................1............7-11 7..7-17 7..............................................................................................................................29 log_agent Process........M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.......34 nelicense_agent Process..................7-16 7......................................................................1....................1............................................7-10 7.............46 pmexp_agent Process.......................................1.............................................................................................1......7-12 7..............1...................7-10 7..........................................................39 ngntestmanage_agent Process.....................7-15 7....................1.........................................24 ipm_agent Process...........................................................33 medXXXX_agent Process........31 maintain_agent Process....................................1.1.................................................7-8 7................7-13 7..............................1.......45 pm_agent Process.......................................................................1..................................................................................................................26 itm_agent Process........7-17 7..................28 lic_agent Process............7-15 7..........................7-11 7...........................................................1...................1...............42 nimserver_agent Process.........7-16 7...........................................................................17 fars_agent Process......7-17 7........ S10) Contents 7....................1.....................................................52 prsdc_agent Process..........................................................................7-18 7........................................................1................7-8 7....................7-9 7..........................................................1..........................1.............................................7-15 7..........................47 pmmon_agent Process....................14 devdoc_agent Process................................37 ngnnis_agent Process.7-18 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co........................................................................................................................................25 irp_agent Process...........................1.............................................7-14 7.......................................32 manager_agent Process.......49 porttrunk_agent Process.........1..............................................1.........1..............................7-13 7.................................. xv ........1.....7-17 7...............................................................................................7-10 7..........

.......................................................................13 swmdb Database..............4 Stopping the M2000 Services.......................................6 omclogdb Database..........................................................................................Contents M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun......1.....1...........................................................................................1.............1.........8-12 8...........1..............................1......8-1 8..................8-4 8............................ 7-19 7.........................................................................................1.............................8-9 8.... 7-20 7.................7-19 7...7-21 7........................................2 Viewing the States of M2000 Databases ....................7-21 7................. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ..................................................................................................5 omceamdb Database......................7-21 7...........1 M2000 Database....2.....................................64 uap_agent Process..................................................................................2 fmdb Database.......8-17 8...............................................................................8-13 8. 7-20 7...........................2...............................................................................1.......................................................................................................................................................11 pmdb Database.........................................................................1.................................................................................................12 sumdb Database....................10 pmcomdb Database.........8-9 8............54 prsreport_agent Process..............................2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services..... 7-27 8 Managing the M2000 Databases...................1..................................3 itfndb Database............................................................................1..63 threshold_agent Process........8-8 8.................................................................... Ltd...................8-3 8..1...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-25 7............................................68 Processes and Services Related to Each Northbound Interface....................60 snmp_agent Process.....................1........................................................................................... 8-20 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.......................................................................................................................................7-19 7..............................................................66 umgupdsvr_agent Process....................................................................61 son_agent Process...........8-2 8...7-22 7..............................................................8-17 8......1.........................................................................4 omcdb Database.....1............................................................................................ 7-26 7...2.............. 8-19 8............1.................................................1...1........................................1..................................................................3 Clearing M2000 Databases..................2....................................................1.................................................................7-23 7......8-5 8... 7-20 7..............................................1........................................1 farsdb Database.............................8-7 8........7-24 7...............9 omctmdb Database........57 ScriptModuleService_agent Process..........2 Managing M2000 Services........7-24 7.......................................67 xftpXX01_agent Process.........2 Viewing the Database Usage of the M2000 Server Using Sybase Commands...................................................................................................8-18 8......................................1 Checking the M2000 Services.............................69 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes.............................................1.............................................................................1 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client ....................................................................................................53 prsfs_agent Process.............................................8-4 8................................................................................2.....1............1......1.................................................................................................8 omctempdb Database.............7 omcsmdb Database.................................7-18 7...............................................................8-10 8..............7-21 7.........................................................................3 Starting the M2000 System Services........................................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.............1................59 sm_agent Process.58 scriptserver_agent Process....................................................................................................................1........... S10) 7..............65 udpdispatch_agent Process................... 7-19 7...................56 rn_agent Process..................................................................................................................................................................................7-21 7.....................2...............1.....1....................................7-19 7...............................1..............................................8-6 8......62 swm_agent Process...................55 prssum_agent Process.................................................................................................................................

......................11-15 11..........................1 Backup of M2000 Dynamic Data.....................4 Periodically Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data.....................2..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-1 9.............................9 Checking the Error Log of the Solaris...........9-5 9..........................................2 Policies of M2000 Data Backup..........................2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client..11-6 11...........11-4 11.........2 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Through the Client.......2 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client..........................2 Checking the Missing Performance Result..................8 Checking M2000 Logs..................9-15 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000..................... S10) Contents 8.......11-5 11....2.....1 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Using Solaris Commands..9-5 9........13 Checking the Core Files on the Server....4 Checking the NMS Connection..........2......1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients................2............................11-11 11.........10-2 10....................1.............................................1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System............1 Checking the Status of Performance Measurement................................................................9-13 9...................4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server...2..........1 M2000 Routine Maintenance Items.....................1 Introduction to the M2000 Server File System....10-14 10....................................................................10 Checking the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server....7 Checking Connections Between the M2000 and NEs..................................................................................8-22 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks .............................5 Checking the Functionality of Alarm Box...3 Setting the Wait Time for Replacing a Tape.11 Checking the States of M2000 Databases..........................................2..........................11-14 11...3 Checking the Alarm Reception..........................2...............2........1.................................................................3 Viewing the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server Using Solaris Commands.......................................................................4 Backing Up M2000 Databases................2............................................................11-7 11........2...........................10-5 10................................................................................2..............2..........................3 Weekly Maintenance Operations..............................................................10-16 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................9-2 9........................................................6 Check OMC Alarms/Events.............................................3 Scenarios of M2000 Data Restoration..................................................................2................2 Managing Files and Disks on the M2000 Server...............................M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun........11-10 11........................11-7 11..........2...............5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data...........................11-1 11..............9-14 9............................2...11-7 11.......................2...............................................................................................................2 Daily Maintenance Operations............................................11-6 11.........................................11-14 11.........................10-9 10..........................................1..................................10-3 10......11-15 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........2 Backing Up and Restoring M2000 Dynamic Data.........................11-13 11......................................................1.............................................11-2 11.. xvii ..............................................11-12 11...1 M2000 Backup and Restore Solutions..2......................................................12 Checking the States of M2000 Services.............1...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2...2.............2...............................10-7 10...................................11-11 11..........10-1 10..........................................................2...........................9-4 9.....................................................................10-4 10............................................ Ltd.....................14 Checking the Hardware of the M2000 Server.............................2......10-2 10...........10-4 10.....................................................9-2 9.................................15 Checking the SMC Collection Results..........................................................................11-13 11......................2....2..........................................................2.....................................................................................6 Restoring the M2000 Dynamic Data...10-10 10.

...3 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Log............2 Collecting M2000 Site and Software Information..............11-31 11....3................................11-31 11.........................11-17 11...........................................................12-5 13 Troubleshooting the M2000...............................................1 About Solaris......................................................13-4 13..............................14-3 14........................................1 Checking the Configuration of Alarm Timing...................................................3........................................4.............................13-5 13...........................................................12-2 12...........................................6 Collecting the M2000 Version............3...................................4...3....2 How to Log In the M2000 Server as the root User Through FTP............................... Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .4 How Do I Select the Tape Drive?.................................................3........11-18 11...........................................................................13-4 13....................................................14-4 14.............1 Procedure for Troubleshooting the M2000 ...........................12-2 12.........................................................3........................2.....12-3 12.......2 Checking the Configuration of Automatic Log Dump....2 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Client......3 Checking the Front Panel of a Disk Array...........................................................5 Checking the Configuration of System Backup........................................................................................................3.1 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server.............................................................14-4 14........................................................................................................................................................................13-1 13........................13-3 13...............................3..............................................................................................1.11-18 11........1.............................2..................3 Collecting the IP Address of the M2000 Server.....................1 Checking the Power Supply of the M2000 Server...........................................................................................13-2 13...12-1 12............3.............1...............................................Contents M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun..1 Collecting the M2000 Site Information....6 Checking the Configuration of System Monitoring.................. Ltd......................................8 Checking the Threshold of Network Management Capability...............10 Backing Up the M2000 ....................................3 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server in Case of Power Failure..........................................................4..13-6 14 FAQs (Sun).........11-28 11...........1.........................11-32 11.....................3...............................................................2...................................11-34 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance.................3 Collecting Fault Data Using the Log Information Collector.......................2 Checking the Peripherals of the M2000 Server..9 Checking the Status of the M2000 Routes..........11-33 11.....................2 Collecting the Time of M2000 Fault Occurrence.....................................11-27 11..............................3............1 Troubleshooting: Failure to Start the Solaris Due to Loss of System Files.................................................4 Querying the M2000 License.......................4..........................2 Troubleshooting: System Switched into the Maintenance Mode and Prompting You to Run fsck Manually....11-19 11...................................5 Collecting Sybase Version Information.......3..... S10) 11.................2....................11-28 11......4 Collecting the Solaris Version...........14-2 14...................1 How Do I Log In to the M2000 Server as User root Through Telnet?........................3....................3...................13-6 13.........................................2............................................................14-5 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................11 Checking the Time of the M2000 Server........11-20 11..............11-28 11................11-34 11..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Troubleshooting: Failure to Restore the Database Though the File System Is Intact...............12 Checking the States of M2000 Disks.......11-16 11....3 How to Check the Status of the Tape Drive........................................................3............................................3.....................................................2.....4 Monthly Maintenance Operations....12-2 12......................................................12-4 12.........................................13-4 13..4 Checking the Configuration of the File Server .............................................................................13-3 13...........14-1 14......................................12-4 12...............................................................7 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Configuration.....11-33 11....3 Troubleshooting: Loss of Database Device Files After the Restoration of the File System........................................

............................12 What Should I Do When the Client Is Disconnected Due to Damaged System Tables in the Database? ......2.....2..........................................................14-6 14............14-35 14.....................23 How Should I Check the Running Status of the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server?............2....14-36 14.....................14-51 14...............................10 Why the Mouse Pointer Changes into an Hourglass upon History Alarm Query.............................................4 About Server Software.......................................................................14-19 14...........................................8 Why Unable to Enter the Domain Console of Fire E4900.................................................................................................. Ltd.................................... xix .......................................................19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays......14-49 14......................1..............14-34 14....d Folder of Solaris........................14-17 14................13 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Command Mode)?...1....................14-25 14..............1................14-43 14..........................................14-47 14.......1...............3..............................................2......................................................14-11 14..2....................1.......2.........2...................................................................14-34 14.........14-50 14......14-12 14.........2................................22 How Should I Start the FTP Service on the M2000 Server?......1 Why M2000 Services Restart Abnormally..................14-50 14...............................3 About TCP/IP Network.2.......14-35 14............................2 How to Start the Sybase......7 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After the Server Restarted...11 How Do I Stop the NTP Service on the M2000 Server.14-25 14............10 How to Query the Time Zone Name.............14-45 14....................................14-15 14..........5 What are the files in the etc/rc2...sh............1..........................................9 Why the Sybase Backup Database Abort......14-32 14..........14-41 14..........14-44 14........................1.........dat' already in use Message?................14 How Do I Change the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Command Mode)..............9 How to Modify the Port Number of the FTP Server?.............................14-33 14...........12 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S3200 Disk Array (Command Mode).................................................1..............................1...............1............14-38 14..11 What Should I Do When the Database Cannot Be Started Properly?......................................................................................................8 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After Run svc_profile..2.......14-38 14..............14-8 14...........14-40 14.....................20 How Should I Uninstall the OceanStor Monitoring Software.............................2 How to Connect the Client to the Server with More than One IP Address........6 How to View the Hardware Settings of the M2000 Server......................wrong magic number Message?.........................4..............................1............................1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?...3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?....15 What Should I Do When the CD-ROM Drive Cannot Read the CD-ROM?....................3.......................... S10) Contents 14....1 Why the Network Port Is Abnormal.....1............................................................................................2.......................2...................14-7 14...2 About Sybase..........................................17 What Should I Do When the Server Disk Space Is Insufficient?................................................................................1..24 How Should I Start the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server?............................................14-37 14...................1.........................................1.................5 How to Handle Database Alarms.................................................................................1............................13 What Should I Do When the Number of Database Connections Is Insufficient?......7 How to Check the Device Status of the M2000 Server...................M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.......14-49 14.........................1...............14-12 14..................................16 How to Handle the corrupt label ................................21 How Should I Check the Running Status of the FTP Service on the M2000 Server?...........................14-39 14............14-29 14..................................14-52 14........14-42 14...........................14-53 14.........14-54 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..2 Why M2000 Services Stop Abnormally.14-27 14...................................15 What Should I Do to Handle Database Startup Failure Due to Incorrect User Type?......14-14 14................4 How to View the Name of the Sybase Server........................18 How to Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array.1...............................2...14-24 14....................6 How to View Database Deadlock Information.......14-43 14..............................2..........1......1.......2.......................4........................14 How to Handle the '/export/home/sybdev/master............

..........................................14-66 14.......... S10) 14..........................14-60 14.14-55 14.....................................................3 What Should I Do When I Fail to Start the M2000 Services?...........................................4 What Should I Do When I Fail to Stop the M2000 Services?........................14-67 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........................4.........................................7 How Do I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the Administration Console (In Encryption Mode)?...............................................................................4............4................................................4................... Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ..10 How Should I Handle an Incremental Backup Failure?.Contents M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun...............................................14-54 14. Ltd..............12 How Should I Power On the T5220 Server Through the Serial Port of the SC...........................14-64 14.........................................14-56 14......................6 How to Set the M2000 Administration Console as the Intermediary-Layer NTP Server (In Encryption Mode)............................................ and Disk............................4.....14-58 14.................14-65 14...............4..........4...5 Why M2000 Dynamic Data Backup Fails..................................................4...............11 How Should I Periodically Monitoring the CPU..............4..............9 How Should I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the M2000 Server (In Encryption Mode)?.................................. Memory..8 How to Set the M2000 Server as the NTP Client (In Encryption Mode)......14-61 14...4.......................

.............................................. S10) Figures Figures Figure 1-1 Netra 240 server...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-5 Process Monitor tab page.................................................................................................................................................................3-29 Figure 3-5 Serial ports of the 6140 disk array....................................................................1-5 Figure 1-3 V890 server...................6-5 Figure 6-2 Hard Disk Monitor tab page................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-3 Database Monitor tab page...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-6 System Monitor Settings dialog box....................................................................................3-29 Figure 3-4 Successful login dialog box.................1-18 Figure 1-14 The front operation panel of SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000...........................................................................................3-28 Figure 3-3 Successful connection interface...................... xxi ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-19 Figure 1-15 Disk array (I).....................................1-3 Figure 1-2 6140 disk array................................................................................................................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-4 6140 disk array (I).............................................2-4 Figure 2-2 NTP layered architecture...................................................................................1-21 Figure 2-1 NTP rationale..............................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-9 6140 disk array (I)..............1-7 Figure 1-5 6140 disk array (II)............................................2-9 Figure 2-5 Networking of device A and the intermediate-layer NTP server...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-2 Serial ports provided by the S2600 disk array....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-14 Figure 1-11 T5220 server............................ 1-21 Figure 1-16 Disk array (II)......................................................6-7 Figure 6-4 Service Monitor tab page............................................. 2-11 Figure 3-1 Serial ports of the S3X00.............1-7 Figure 1-6 Netra 240 server.......................... 6-11 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co................................ 1-10 Figure 1-8 E4900 server.................2-7 Figure 2-4 Directly connecting device A and the NTP server...............1-15 Figure 1-12 S2600 disk array...............................................................................................M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun...........................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Schematic diagram of time synchronization for device A...........1-17 Figure 1-13 S3200 disk array............2-10 Figure 2-6 Directly connecting device A to the highest layer NTP server................................................................................... Ltd....................................................................................................................................1-9 Figure 1-7 6140 disk array.............................3-31 Figure 6-1 Server Monitor tab page.................................................................................................................... 1-13 Figure 1-10 6140 disk array (II)...............................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................6-35 Figure 6-8 Timing Task Management interface............................................................................................................................................................................14-31 xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............................................................................................................................................................................... Ltd........................................................................................11-30 Figure 13-1 Log Information Collector dialog box..............8-24 Figure 9-1 Hard Disk Monitor tab page..............................................................................................11-29 Figure 11-2 Periodic backup................................................................10-13 Figure 10-5 Manual backup.........................................................................................................................................................................................6-51 Figure 7-1 Process Monitor tab page....Figures M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.........................................................................................................................................................6-50 Figure 6-9 M2000 Log Information Collector interface...........9-14 Figure 10-1 Setting the storage device (I)..8-23 Figure 8-3 Periodic backup.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-8 Figure 10-2 Setting the storage device (II).......................................................................................................10-12 Figure 10-4 Periodic backup...........................................................................................................10-15 Figure 11-1 Periodic backup.............13-7 Figure 14-1 SNMP tab page............................................................................................................10-9 Figure 10-3 Periodic backup............................................................................................ Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ............................................................................................................. S10) Figure 6-7 State transition of a scheduled task.............................8-18 Figure 8-2 Periodic backup..................7-25 Figure 8-1 Database Monitor tab page................................................................................................................................7-24 Figure 7-2 Service Monitor tab page........................

.................................6-72 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co......6-25 Table 6-7 Tasks grouped according to task features.................................6-32 Table 6-10 Description of the task description parameters.............................................................6-13 Table 6-3 Database Monitor...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-29 Table 6-8 Description of system timing tasks........................................................................................................................... xxiii ..............M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.........5-9 Table 6-1 Server Monitor...................................6-70 Table 6-23 Parameters for Modifying the Export of Performance Data...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-68 Table 6-22 Parameters for Modifying an Alarm Data Export Task................................6-57 Table 6-16 Service Monitor...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Privileges of M2000 users.................................................................................................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-5 Setting the properties of a serial port....................................................................................................................................3-19 Table 3-4 Setting properties of the serial port......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-32 Table 4-1 M2000 client software directory.............................................................6-53 Table 6-14 Hard Disk Monitor...............................................3-18 Table 3-3 Parameters for the standby controller..................3-6 Table 3-2 Parameters for the standby controller................................6-65 Table 6-19 Parameters of performance database capacity management tasks...........................................6-58 Table 6-17 Common Parameters.3-28 Table 3-6 Setting properties of the serial port.................6-29 Table 6-9 Description of user timing tasks...............................................................................................................................................................................6-66 Table 6-20 Parameters of NE log database capacity management tasks.............................6-68 Table 6-21 Parameters of M2000 log database capacity management tasks.................................................6-12 Table 6-2 Hard Disk Monitor......................................6-34 Table 6-11 Allowable operations for different task types....................................... S10) Tables Tables Table 3-1 Adding or deleting a route...........................................................................................................5-6 Table 5-3 Solaris user accounts.................................................................................................................................6-54 Table 6-15 Database Monitor..............................................................................................................6-25 Table 6-6 Tasks grouped according to functions........................................................................................................................6-50 Table 6-13 Server Monitor..................................4-2 Table 5-1 Solaris user accounts....................6-16 Table 6-4 Service Monitor.............................................................................................................. Ltd......................6-43 Table 6-12 Description of the Timing Task Management interface....................................................................................................................6-64 Table 6-18 Parameters of alarm database capacity management tasks.................................................................................................................................................6-17 Table 6-5 Tasks grouped according to execution periods................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................9-12 Table 9-10 Disk partitions of the S3200 disk array................................................................................................9-13 xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...8-8 Table 8-8 Name and function of each table in the omctempdb database................................................9-9 Table 9-5 Planning for the 6140 disk array................................................................. Ltd.................................................................. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-10 Table 9-7 Planning for the 6140 disk array............8-4 Table 8-3 Tables of the itfndb database and the corresponding functions....................................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-12 Function subsets and period tables in the pmcomdb database and their functions...............................................6-84 Table 6-33 Description of extended parameters..............8-12 Table 8-13 Template tables in the pmdb database and their functions....................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-11 Template information tables in the pmcomdb database and the corresponding functions......8-13 Table 8-16 Name and function of each system setting information table in the sumdb database..................6-92 Table 7-1 Relations between northbound interfaces and their corresponding processes and services.....8-7 Table 8-6 Names and functions of the tables in the omclogdb database.................................................................................. S10) Table 6-24 Parameters for Modifying the Export of Inventory Data.................................................6-75 Table 6-27 Extension parameters of Configuration Data Export tasks........................................................................................................................8-13 Table 8-15 Name and function of each object type information table in the sumdb database..........6-74 Table 6-26 Parameters for Modifying the Export of M2000 Logs..........................................9-10 Table 9-6 Planning for disk partitioning on the server (E4900).............................................................................................................................8-8 Table 8-7 Tables of the omcsmdb database and the corresponding functions................................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-10 Counter information tables in the pmcomdb database and the corresponding functions...8-3 Table 8-2 Tables of the fmdb database and the corresponding functions...............................................................................................................6-74 Table 6-25 Parameters for Modifying the Export of NE Logs.......6-77 Table 6-30 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup in the M2000.....................................9-2 Table 9-2 Directories related to the M2000 server software........................................................................................8-9 Table 8-9 Names and functions of the tables in the omctmdb database.....................6-76 Table 6-28 Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of NE Configuration Data.......................8-4 Table 8-4 Names and functions of tables in the omcdb database......6-89 Table 6-34 Descriptions of parameters for setting timing task time..............................8-14 Table 8-17 Name and function of each report information table in the sumdb database....................................................................Tables M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun...........................................................................6-77 Table 6-29 Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of Inventory Data...........................9-6 Table 9-3 Planning of the server disk partitions (Netra 240)........................8-16 Table 8-19 Tables of the swmdb database and the corresponding functions.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-22 Table 8-1 Tables of the farsdb database and the corresponding functions................................9-8 Table 9-4 Planning for disk partitioning on the server (V890).................8-13 Table 8-14 Function subset tables and period tables in the pmdb database and the corresponding functions .......................................................................................................................9-11 Table 9-8 Planning of the Sun T5220 server disk partitions......9-13 Table 9-11 Disk partitions of the S2600 disk array...8-5 Table 8-5 Name and function of each table in the omceamdb database.9-11 Table 9-9 Partitioning of the local server disks (M4000/M5000)..............................................................................................................................................6-79 Table 6-32 Predefined Macros.......8-17 Table 9-1 M2000 client software directory......................................6-79 Table 6-31 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying NE Backup..........................................................................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-18 Name and function of each performance result table in the sumdb database............

..................................11-8 Table 11-3 Alarms that need to be handled within one day..................................................................................................................................... xxv ...............................................14-7 Table 14-3 Commands for checking the device status...............................................11-2 Table 11-2 Alarms that need to be handled immediately..........M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun..........................................................................11-26 Table 14-1 Tape drive status.......................................11-9 Table 11-7 Events that need to be focused on during network expansion......10-6 Table 11-1 List of maintenance items......................................................................................................................................11-9 Table 11-6 Events that need to be handled within one day................................14-21 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................11-8 Table 11-4 Alarms to be focused on during network expansion........................................................................................14-8 Table 14-4 Example of the matching table between countries and time zone names.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-2 Table 10-2 Values of backup media..............................14-13 Table 14-5 Setting the properties of the serial port........................................................11-9 Table 11-5 Alarms about malicious operations............................................................11-9 Table 11-8 Server Monitor...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-21 Table 11-9 Hard Disk Monitor................................ Ltd..............................................................................................14-5 Table 14-2 Checking the server configuration.........................11-22 Table 11-10 Database Monitor................................................................................................................... S10) Tables Table 10-1 Introduction to dynamic data backup..........11-25 Table 11-11 Service Monitor............................................................................................................................................................................................

.

3 Powering the M2000 On or Off (E4900) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off (Netra240) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the Netra 240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server.4 Powering the M2000 On or Off (T5220) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 system by following a specific operation sequence to guarantee the system security. 1. Ltd.2 Powering the M2000 On or Off (V890) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off 1 About This Chapter Powering the M2000 On or Off This chapter describes how to power on and power off the M2000 server.5 Powering the M2000 On or Off (M4000/M5000) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 system by following a specific operation sequence to guarantee the system security. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1-1 . 1.. 1. 1. 1.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

For details. Ltd. 1. NOTE The devices to be checked include the M2000 server.1. Turn the rotary switch beside the power supply to the normal position (I).2 Powering Off the M2000 (Netra 240) This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the Netra 240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. KVM.2 Powering Off the M2000 (Netra 240).1. 1. S10) 1. 2. set it to OFF. networking devices.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . as shown in Figure 1-1.1 Powering On the M2000 (Netra240) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the Netra240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. Ensure that the power switches of all devices are set to OFF. 1. Step 2 Power on the Netra240 server. see1. 1. 1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..1. and cabinet.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off (Netra240) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the Netra 240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. Prerequisite The M2000 system is already shut down.1.1 Powering On the M2000 (Netra240) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the Netra240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. If any switch is set to ON. Set the power switch of the cabinet to ON. 1. Procedure Step 1 Prepare to power on the M2000.

For details about how to stop the M2000. sync. Press the On/Standby button of the power switch to start the Netra240 server. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 is running.2. If the Solaris operating system. Ltd.dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase. Then the system automatically starts the Sybase and the M2000 applications. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. stop it.00$ exit Step 3 Switch to user root and power off the Netra 240 server.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. -bash-3. refer to 7. and M2000 server applications are successfully installed. sync. ----End 1. # sync. l 3. Sybase. sync. Step 2 If Sybase is running. enter boot to start the operating system. sync. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off Figure 1-1 Netra 240 server 1 4 Power switch Normal position 2 5 Rotary switch Lock position 3 6 Forced turn-off Diagnosis position 2. 1-3 .2 Powering Off the M2000 (Netra 240) This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the Netra 240 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. l If the Solaris operating system is not installed. stop it. # su .. the system is switched to the ok state after the Netra240 server is powered on.4 Stopping the M2000 Services.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Turn the rotary switch to the locked position. the system automatically starts them. If the system is switched to the ok state.1. refer to 14.2.

2 Powering Off the M2000 (V890) This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server.. see1. set it to OFF.2.2. ----End 1.2. set the power switches of the cabinet and the other devices in the cabinet to OFF. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Prepare to power on the M2000 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .1 Powering the M2000 On or Off M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and cabinet. Set the two power switches on the rear of the 6140 disk array to ON. disk array. 1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CAUTION Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite. If any power switch is ON. networking devices. 1.2 Powering Off the M2000 (V890).1 Powering On the M2000 (V890) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. NOTE The devices to be checked include the M2000 server. Set the power switch of the cabinet to ON. 1.2. For details. S10) Step 4 If required. The disk array is shown in Figure 1-2.2 Powering the M2000 On or Off (V890) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. 1.1 Powering On the M2000 (V890) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. 1. 2. Ensure that the power switch of each device in the cabinet are in the OFF state. Step 2 Power on the 6140 disk array. Prerequisite The M2000 system is already shut down.

1-5 . S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off Figure 1-2 6140 disk array 1 Off 2 On Step 3 Power on the V890 server. 1. Figure 1-3 V890 server 1 4 Power switch Normal position 2 5 Rotary switch Lock position 3 6 Forced turn-off Diagnosis position 2.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Press down the power switch to start the V890 server. Turn the rotary switch beside the power supply to the normal position (I).. as shown in Figure 1-3.

2 Powering Off the M2000 (V890) This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the V890 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. Check whether the LEDs of the cache on the rear of the controller go out. # sync.00$ exit Step 3 Switch to user root and power off the V890 server. Wait for two minutes.. the system automatically starts them. Figure 1-4 shows the 6140 disk array. # su . For details about how to stop the M2000. Step 2 If the Sybase is running. sync.2. sync. S10) If the Solaris operating system is not installed. sync.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. stop it. refer to 14.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and M2000 server applications are successfully installed. -bash-3.2. Ltd. the system is switched to the ok state after the V890 server is powered on. sync. 1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the Solaris operating system.2. Then the system automatically starts the Sybase and the M2000 applications. 1.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. enter boot to start the operating system. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 is running. l 3.dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase. refer to 7. If all the LEDs go out. Turn the rotary switch to the locked position. Sybase. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5 Step 4 Power off the 6140 disk array. If the system is switched to the ok state. stop it. ----End 1. it indicates that all the data is written into the disk and that the cache does not hold data.

Set the two power switches at the rear of the controller to OFF. 1-7 . Ensure that all the LEDs of all the disk drives at the front of controller stop blinking. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off Figure 1-4 6140 disk array (I) 1 Off 2 On 2.. Figure 1-5 6140 disk array (II) 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 1-5.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd.

2 Powering Off the M2000 (E4900) This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. 1. Turn the rotary switch beside the power supply to the normal position (I).1 Powering the M2000 On or Off NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Netra 240 administration console. set the power switches of the cabinet and the other devices in the cabinet to OFF. 1.3.1 Powering On the M2000 (E4900) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. Procedure Step 1 Make the following preparations to power on the M2000: 1. Ensure that the power switch of each device in the cabinet is in the OFF state.3 Powering the M2000 On or Off (E4900) This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. see1.2 Powering Off the M2000 (E4900). networking devices. Set the power switch of the cabinet to ON. Step 5 If required. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . as shown in Figure 1-6. and cabinet. 1.3.3. S10) Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite..1 Powering On the M2000 (E4900) This section describes how to power on the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server. Step 2 Start the administration console Netra 240. disk array. KVM. ----End 1. 2. NOTE The devices to be checked include the M2000 server.3. 1. For details. Ltd. Prerequisite The M2000 system is already shut down.

If the Solaris operating system is installed on the M2000 server. Turn the rotary switch to the locked position.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 1-9 . Step 3 Power on the 6140 disk array. Ltd. All the equipment starts automatically after the power is turned on. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off Figure 1-6 Netra 240 server 1 4 Power switch Normal position 2 5 Rotary switch Lock position 3 6 Forced turn-off Diagnosis position 2. CAUTION Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite.. The disk array is shown in Figure 1-7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Press down the On/Standby button on the power switch of the Netra 240 server to start the M2000 system. Turn on the power of KVM and that of all the network equipment. 4. l 3. enter boot to start the Solaris operating system. If the M2000 system is switched to the ok state. Set the two power switches on the rear of the 6140 disk array to ON. the M2000 system automatically starts the Solaris operating system. the M2000 system is switched to the ok state. l If the Solaris operating system is not installed on the M2000 server.

as shown in Figure 1-8.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. 1-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Set the power switches of the E4900 server to ON.. 1. S10) Figure 1-7 6140 disk array 1 Off 2 On Step 4 Power on the E4900 server. only two SCs are powered on. Currently. The front indicators of the three power boards remain at steady blue. The E4900 server has three power switches in total.

2. Ltd.S10). On the Platform Shell interface.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Run the following command to enable the failover function of the SC: sc> setfailover on NOTE If the SC of the E4900 server is not configured yet. run the console -d a command to switch to domain A. Select 0 to open the Platform Shell interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. configure the SC by seeing M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (Sun. 4. To power on all boards. run the poweron all command. 3. 1-11 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. This process lasts for about 20 minutes. Run the telnet logical IP address of the SC of the E4900 server command to log in to the SC. All the boards are powered on when all domains are closed. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off Figure 1-8 E4900 server 1 Off 2 On NOTE The SC of the E4900 server serves as the console. and then run the setkeyswitch on command to start domain A.

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off
l

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

If the enter to domain A fails because the system is busy, troubleshoot the fault by referring to 14.1.8 Why Unable to Enter the Domain Console of Fire E4900. If the Solaris operating system is not installed, the system is switched to the ok state after the E4900 server is powered on. If the Solaris operating system, Sybase, and M2000 server applications are installed successfully, the system automatically starts these operations. If the system is switched to the ok state, enter boot to start the operating system. The system automatically starts the Sybase and the M2000 applications.

l

l

----End

1.3.2 Powering Off the M2000 (E4900)
This section describes how to power off the M2000 when the E4900 minicomputer serves as the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop the M2000 if it is running. For details about how to stop the M2000, refer to 7.2.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. Step 2 Stop the Sybase if it is running. # su - dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase, refer to 14.2.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. -bash-3.00$ exit Step 3 Power off the E4900 server. 1. Log in to the E4900 server as user root, and then run the following commands to power off the system: # sync; sync; sync; sync; sync; sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5 2. Run the telnet command to log in to the SC. Select 0 to open the Platform Shell interface. telnet Logical IP address of the SC of the E4900 server
NOTE

l l

If the IP address of the SC is not assigned, use the HyperTerminal to log in from the serial port of the SC. Use the Huawei 04042025 serial port cable to connect the SC and the PC. One end of the Huawei 04042025 serial port cable uses the DB-25 interface, which is inserted into the serial port of the SC. The other end uses the DB-9 interface, which is inserted into one COM port of the PC. The port properties of the HyperTerminal must be restored to the default values. This means that you must set the baud rate to 9600, data digit to 8, parity check to none, stop bit to 1, and data stream control to none.

3.

Run the showkeyswitch command to check which domains are in the ON state. osssvr-sc0:SC> showkeyswitch
Domain Domain Domain Domain A B C D keyswitch keyswitch keyswitch keyswitch is: is: is: is: on off off off

1-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

4.

Run the setkeyswitch -d a off command to close domain A. osssvr-sc0:SC> setkeyswitch -d a off
Powering boards off ...
NOTE

If some domain is on, run the corresponding command to close the domain.

5.

Run the poweroff all command to power off all the systems. Except the two SCs, all boards including three power boards are powered off. osssvr-sc0:SC> poweroff all
/N0/SB4: is already off /N0/IB6: is already off /N0/IB8: is already off RP0: is already off RP2: is already off PS0: powered off PS1: powered off PS2: powered off osssvr-sc0:SC>

Step 4 Shut down the 6140 disk array. 1. Wait for two minutes. Check whether the LEDs of the cache on the rear of the controller go out. If all the LEDs go out, it indicates that all the data is written into the disk and that the cache does not hold data. Figure 1-9 shows the 6140 disk array. Figure 1-9 6140 disk array (I)

1

Off

2

On

2.

Ensure that all the LEDs of all the disk drives at the front of controller stop blinking, as shown in Figure 1-10.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Figure 1-10 6140 disk array (II)

3.

Set the two power switches at the rear of the controller to OFF.
NOTE

Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite.

Step 5 Power off the Netra 240 console. 1. 2. Log in to the Netra 240 console as user root. Run the following commands to power off the Netra 240 console: # sync; sync; sync; sync; sync; sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5 Step 6 Set the power switch of the E4900 server to OFF. Set the power switches of the cabinet and other devices in the cabinet to OFF if required. ----End

1.4 Powering the M2000 On or Off (T5220)
This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 system by following a specific operation sequence to guarantee the system security. 1.4.1 Powering On the M2000 (T5220) This section describes how to power on the M2000 system before starting the T5220 server when the M2000 is installed on the T5220 server. 1.4.2 Powering Off the M2000 (T5220)
1-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

This section describes how to power off the M2000 by following a specific operation sequence when the M2000 system is installed on the T5220 server.

1.4.1 Powering On the M2000 (T5220)
This section describes how to power on the M2000 system before starting the T5220 server when the M2000 is installed on the T5220 server.

Prerequisite
l

The M2000 system is powered off. For details, see 1.4.2 Powering Off the M2000 (T5220). The PC terminal communicates with the server well.

l

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare for powering on the M2000. 1. Before powering on the M2000, shut down the power supply of all the devices.
NOTE

The devices to be checked are the M2000 server, all the network devices, and cabinet.

2.

Power on the cabinet.

Step 2 Start the T5220 server. Waiting for 3 minutes, press the power switch to power on the T5220 server when the LED indicator is lighted, as shown in Figure 1-11.
NOTE

You can also power on the T5220 server through the serial port of the SC. For details, see 14.4.12 How Should I Power On the T5220 Server Through the Serial Port of the SC.

Figure 1-11 T5220 server

l

If the Solaris operating system is not installed, the system is switched to the ok state after the T5220 is started. If the Solaris, Sybase, and M2000 server software are correctly installed, the system automatically starts the Solaris, Sybase, and M2000 services after the T5220 is started. If the system is switched to the ok state, type boot to start the operating system. The system automatically starts the Sybase and the M2000.

l

----End
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-15

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

1.4.2 Powering Off the M2000 (T5220)
This section describes how to power off the M2000 by following a specific operation sequence when the M2000 system is installed on the T5220 server.

Prerequisite
You have logged in to the server as user root.

Procedure
Step 1 If the system is running the M2000 services, stop the services. For details, see 7.2.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. Step 2 If the system is running the Sybase service, stop the service. # su - dbuser Stop the Sybase service, see 14.2.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. -bash-3.00$ exit Step 3 Switch to user root and power off the T5220 server. # sync; sync; sync; sync; sync; sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5
NOTE

Shutting down the server takes a long time. Wait for 30 minutes before performing the subsequent operations.

Step 4 If required, shut down the power supply of the cabinet and the devices in the cabinet. ----End

1.5 Powering the M2000 On or Off (M4000/M5000)
This section describes how to power on and power off the M2000 system by following a specific operation sequence to guarantee the system security. 1.5.1 Powering On the M2000 (M4000/M5000) This section describes how to power on the M2000 system before starting the M4000/M5000 server when the M2000 is installed on the M4000/M5000 server. 1.5.2 Powering Off the M2000 (M4000/M5000) This section describes how to power off the M4000/M5000 server according to a specific operation sequence when the M2000 system is installed on the M4000/M5000 server.

1.5.1 Powering On the M2000 (M4000/M5000)
This section describes how to power on the M2000 system before starting the M4000/M5000 server when the M2000 is installed on the M4000/M5000 server.
1-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

Prerequisite
l l

The M2000 is stopped. For details, see 1.5.2 Powering Off the M2000 (M4000/M5000). The communication between the PC and the port 0 on the XSCF of the server is normal.

Context
l

For the M2000 single-server system using the M4000/M5000 server, configure the S3200 disk array, the 6140 disk array or the S2600 disk array for the system. The methods for starting the S3200 disk array or the 6140 disk array are the same. The S3200 disk array is taken as an example in the description of powering on the M2000 system.

l

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare for powering on the server. 1. Ensure that each device in the cabinet is switched off.
NOTE

The devices to be checked include the M2000 server, disk array, all the network devices, and cabinet.

2.

Power on the cabinet.

Step 2 Power on the disk array. Option S2600 disk array S3200 disk array or 6140 disk array Description Perform Step 2.1. Perform Step 2.2.

1.

Insert the two plugs at the rear of the disk array into the socket, as shown in Figure 1-12. When the hard disk LEDs of all the disk arrays stop blinking, the disk array are started successfully.

CAUTION
l l

Each disk array has two plugs. Ensure that both plugs are inserted into the socket. The S2600 disk array does not have a power switch. After you insert the plug into the socket, the S2600 disk array is automatically powered on.

Figure 1-12 S2600 disk array

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-17

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

(Disk array with a controller)

(Hard disk frame of the disk array)

2.

Set the two power switches at the rear of the S3200 disk array to ON, as shown in Figure 1-13.

CAUTION
Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite.

Figure 1-13 S3200 disk array

1

OFF

2

ON

Step 3 Power on the M2000 server. 1. Start the PuTTY on the PC and log in to the XSCF of the server through the telnet.

1-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)
NOTE

1 Powering the M2000 On or Off

l l l l l

The XSCF of the M4000/M5000 server functions as the system console. Log in to the XSCF of the M4000/M5000 server through the IP address of port 0 on the XSCF. Log in to the http://support.huawei.com to download the PuTTY to the PC. For details about how to log in to the XSCF through the PuTTY, see M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (T5220&M4000&M5000, S10) If the XSCF of the M4000/M5000 server is not configured yet, configure the XSCF by referring to M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (T5220&M4000&M5000, S10).

2.

Log in to the XSCF as user adminuser. The recommended password of user adminuser is adminuser.

3.

On the front panel of the M2000 server, switch the key to the position for Maintenance, as shown in Figure 1-14. Figure 1-14 The front operation panel of SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000

1 Power indicator 4 Power button 7 Mode switch

2 LED of available XSCF 5 Locked - -

3 LED of check status 6 Maintenance - -

4.

Run the following command to power on domain 0. XSCF> poweron -d 0
DomainIDs to power on: 00 Continue? [y|n] :y

The server automatically starts and performs self-check. This process lasts about 20 minutes. 5. Run the following command to switch to area 0: XSCF> console -d 0
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-19

00$ exit Step 3 Power off the M2000 server. If the Solaris. sync. Sybase. stop them.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. 7. the 6140 disk array or the S2600 disk array for the system. S10) When the system displays the following information.4.2. Connect to DomainID 0? [y|n] :y l If the Solaris operating system is not installed on the server. sync.5. Sybase. 1-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 and Step 4. -bash-3. stop it. Ensure that the LED of available XSCF on the operation panel is in green. The communication between the PC and the server is normal. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 server as user root. If the system switches to the ok state. sync. Context l l For the M2000 single-server system using the M4000/M5000 server. and M2000 server software are correctly installed. 6. l ----End 1.2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . see 7. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 services are running.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the system automatically starts the Solaris. configure the S3200 disk array. Step 2 If the Sybase service is running. Then. the server switches to the ok state. type boot to start the operating system.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. For details about how to stop M2000 services. the S3200 disk array is taken as an example in the description of powering off the M2000 system. see 14. switch the key to the position for Locked. # sync. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i5 Step 4 Power off the disk array. On the front panel of the M2000 server. The methods of starting the S3200 disk array or the 6140 disk array are the same.. # su .2 Powering Off the M2000 (M4000/M5000) This section describes how to power off the M4000/M5000 server according to a specific operation sequence when the M2000 system is installed on the M4000/M5000 server. sync. Ltd. Option S2600 disk array S3200 disk array or 6140 disk array Description Perform Step 4.2. and M2000 services. the system automatically starts the Sybase and the M2000. enter y to confirm the information.1 and Step 4. Perform Step 4.dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase service.

Check the cache LED on the controller and determine whether any data on the cache needs to be written to the disk. NOTE a. Check whether the I/O activities of the disk arrays are stopped. it indicates that all the data is written into the disk and that the cache does not hold data. Ensure that the LEDs of all the drive and caches stop blinking. If the LED indicators of all the drives and caches stop blinking.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 1-21 . Remove the two plugs at the rear of the disk array from the socket. Wait for two minutes. 3. Wait for two minutes.. a. b. 2. Check whether the I/O activities of the disk arrays are stopped. c. If all the LEDs stop blinking. See Figure 1-16. Figure 1-16 Disk array (II) Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 1 Powering the M2000 On or Off 1. Ltd. it indicates that the read and write operations of the disk array are stopped. OFF 2 ON Ensure that all the LEDs of all the disk drives at the front of the controller stop blinking. See Figure 1-15 . Figure 1-15 Disk array (I) 1 b.

Ltd. ----End 1-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Powering the M2000 On or Off M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Set the two power switches at the rear of the controller to OFF. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. NOTE Each disk array has two power switches and their directions are opposite. Step 5 If required. S10) 4. shut down the cabinet and other devices.

and time zone on the M2000 client that is based on the Windows operating system.6 Setting DST for the M2000 This section describes how to set the time zone of the M2000 server to enable the M2000 support DST. 2. 2. 2. and time zone of Windows. you must set the server time correctly. the M2000 supports the setting of DST and the automatic change according to the preset DST rules. time. ensure that the M2000 can handle the data reported by the NE and that no reported data is missing. By using the time synchronization solution.1 Time Management for the Huawei Mobile Network This section describes the time synchronization solution of the Huawei mobile network.2 Modifying the Date and Time on the M2000 Server The server time is associated with NE data collection. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If DST change occurs on an NE. You need to change the time zone of the M2000 server to ensure that the time zone meets the requirement. and time zone on the M2000 client means modifying the date. The correct setting of the time zone on the M2000 server is essential to the local time display and NTP service..5 Configuring the NTP Service of the M2000 This section describes how to set the M2000 server as the NTP client and synchronize time with the upper-layer server and how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client and synchronize time with the M2000 server. you can synchronize time between the M2000 and other Huawei mobile network devices. 2-1 . To enable the M2000 time to meet the time requirements.3 Changing the Time Zone of the M2000 Server Without Using DST This section describes how to change the time zone of the M2000 server without using DST. 2.4 Modifying the Date. In addition. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time 2 About This Chapter Setting the M2000 Time This chapter describes how to set the M2000 time. Modifying the date. time. you must synchronize the time of the M2000 with the time of the other Huawei devices in the Huawei mobile network. 2. time. 2. timing task handling. and database information dump.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Therefore. and Time Zone on the M2000 Client This section describes how to modify the date. Time. Ltd.

2 Introduction to the NTP/SNTP This introduces the rationale of time synchronization and the layered architecture of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).1.1.1 Introduction to Time Synchronization This section describes the purpose and definition of time synchronization. In addition. the M2000 supports the setting of DST and the automatic change according to the preset DST rules. and the associations between alarms may be misjudged. By using the time synchronization solution. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 2.4 Introduction to the DST This section describes the daylight saving time (DST) and the DST impact on the M2000 system.1 Introduction to Time Synchronization This section describes the purpose and definition of time synchronization. the elements of the time synchronization solution.1 Time Management for the Huawei Mobile Network This section describes the time synchronization solution of the Huawei mobile network. S10) 2. the elements of the time synchronization solution. the sequence of generated alarms. 2. The uniform OM mode of NEs in a mobile network requires the time synchronization between NEs. Definition of Time Synchronization Time synchronization is the synchronization of absolute time.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The networking mode of a mobile network is complex if the mobile network has multiple NEs. l Therefore. Inaccurate time may lead to the following scenarios: l If the alarm time is inaccurate. time synchronization enables the system to automatically adjust the OM time of NEs. Time synchronization aims to adjust the time of devices according to the received time. and the impact on system performance and other OM features after the time synchronization solution is implemented. 2. This ensures that the M2000 correctly manages the alarms and performance data reported by the NEs. Purpose of Time Synchronization Time synchronization enables you to synchronize time between the M2000 and other NEs.1. 2.. you can synchronize time between the M2000 and other Huawei mobile network devices. and the impact on system performance and other OM features after the time synchronization solution is implemented.1. Ltd. the statistics are incorrect owing to inaccurate time. 2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. The start time of a signal should be consistent with the universal coordinated time (UTC). the interval between alarm generation and alarm reporting. When the M2000 collects the statistics of performance data.3 Time Synchronization Modes of Huawei Mobile Network This section describes the modes of time synchronization and how to deploy the time synchronization network for the M2000 and NE devices in Huawei mobile network.1.

If the time is inaccurate or the time of NEs in the entire network is not the same.2 Introduction to the NTP/SNTP This introduces the rationale of time synchronization and the layered architecture of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). information accuracy. Has a significant impact on recording. display. these connections consume mass resources. the common method is to implement time synchronization according to the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). if you use the NTP protocol to construct a time synchronization network. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time Elements of the Time Synchronization Solution At least two elements are involved in the time synchronization solution. such as the CPU and the memory of the NTP server. Impact on OM The time synchronization feature is vital for the OM of the mobile network. Time reference sources aim to provide the standard reference time for the time synchronization network. and analyzing performance data in performance management. In addition. l Impact on System Performance If time synchronization is implemented in client/server mode described in the NTP protocol. collecting.1. Has a significant impact on services such as call tracing and problem locating. the number of NTP nodes under an NTP server should not exceed 300. the message frame between the NTP client and the NTP server is 128 bytes. a mistake may be made during the fault identification and handling. audit. the performance of the NTP server may be affected. the log record is incorrect and the log audit is also affected..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. It has the following impacts on the other features: l Ensures the accuracy and consistency of the time on the M2000 and NEs in a mobile network. If a great number of NTP clients request to connect to the NTP server at the same time. Therefore. If the number exceeds 300. query. A common time reference source is the GPS satellite. 2-3 . the performance of the NTP server is affected. and fault correlation analysis in fault management. and thus may result in invalid performance data. l l l 2. l In the architecture of the current time synchronization networking. If the time is inaccurate or the time of NEs in the entire network is not the same. the method of time synchronization and the choice of time reference sources. and analysis. The interval for the time synchronization request of an NTP client should be 30 minutes or longer. time synchronization does not affect the performance of network transmission. If the time is inaccurate or the time of NEs in the entire network is not the same. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This ensures the accuracy of the time reference in the entire network. the call tracing service may fail. namely. If the NE time is inaccurate or inconsistent with the M2000 time. Has a significant impact on the accuracy of log record. As a result. you need to reduce the probability of concurrent requests. the time of NE performance data records and the dot time may be inaccurate. Therefore. Ltd. Time synchronization plays a key role in timely fault reporting.

When the NTP message reaches device B. device A can easily calculate the time to be adjusted to synchronize with device B. The unidirectional transmission of data package between device A and device B takes one second. Theoretically. which is 11:00:01am (T2). The time synchronization process is as follows: 1. which is 10:00:00am (T1). Device B is configured as the NTP server. l l To synchronize the time between device A and device B. That is. Based on the IP and UDP stack protocol in the TCP/IP protocols. the time on device A is set to 10:00:00 and the time on device B is set to 11:00:00. Both devices have their own system time. entity. The message records the stamp of the leaving time from device A. S10) Rationale of NTP Time Synchronization NTP is used to synchronize the time between the distributed time server and the client. 2. you need synchronize the time on device A with that on device B. To implement the automatic synchronization of system clocks.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Figure 2-1 NTP rationale Device A and device B communicate through the network. ensure that: l Before you synchronize the system time of device A and device B.. which is the loss during the time synchronization between device A and device B If the previous information is available. Device A sends an NTP message to device B. It defines the structure. Figure 2-1 shows the rationale of NTP time synchronization. ensure that the following information is available: l l Offset. algorithm. the error is less than one nanosecond. NTP can also be used by other protocol groups. Ltd. The NTP protocol stipulates the method for calculating the values of the offset and delay between device A and device B. device B adds its own time stamp. which is the time difference between device A and device B Delay. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and protocols in the process of time synchronization. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 2-4 .

it is time-consuming to connect each device to the same time server if the time of each device needs to be synchronized.T1) + (T3 .T4)]/2. On the top of the subnet. Offset between device A and device B: offset = [(T2 . 4. the device at level 0 uses UTC time codes broadcast by the global positioning system (GPS). 2-5 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . In such a case.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. When the NTP message leaves device B. Then.. which is 10:00:03am (T4).T2). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.(T3 . you can infer that fewer clock sources enables more uniform time. the number of levels does not exceed six. It provides the reference clock for time synchronization. After that. If a network has a large scale and is very complex. device B adds its own time stamp again. which provides the synchronization service for lower level servers (Stratum-1). Figure 2-2 NTP layered architecture As shown in Figure 2-2. the time synchronization network can be classified into 16 levels from 0 to 15. the layered architecture is applied to the NTP model. The devices in the subnet can play multiple roles. or more than 16 levels on the basis of accuracy and importance. a device on the second layer may be a client to the first layer and a server for the third layer. device A can calculate the two parameters using the following method: l l Delay of a NTP message delivering circle: delay = (T4 . S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time 3. In practice. device A can set the time according to this previous information so that device A is synchronized with device B. Theoretically. which is 11:00:02am (T3). the following servers are configured in the NTP layered architecture: l Top level NTP server: level 0 NTP server. When device A receives the response message. The device at level 0 is located at the special position of the subnetwork. Rationale of NTP Layered Architecture From the origin and purpose of the time synchronization mechanism. For example.T1) . it adds a new time stamp.

conf on the Solaris operating system.2 Setting the M2000 Time l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The M2000 server uses Solaris 10 and supports the NTP features based on NTPV3 protocol versions. In addition. acquiring the most accurate clock resource after using an algorithm to analyze multiple connected NTP servers. NOTE The upper-level time servers of the M2000 server and the administration console require to use the NTP protocol.. By setting the parameters in the file /etc/inet/ntp. An NTP server can also provide time for multiple hosts. You need to configure an operating system to support the SNTP client and specify the IP address of the NTP server. The M2000 client runs on the Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating system. and thus it cannot function as the upper-level time server of the M2000 server and the administration console. you can set the M2000 server as an NTP client in the mobile network. Time Synchronization Modes of the M2000 The time synchronization of a mobile network is implemented through the NTP/SNTP protocols. The NTP protocol supports a maximum of 15 clients.3 Time Synchronization Modes of Huawei Mobile Network This section describes the modes of time synchronization and how to deploy the time synchronization network for the M2000 and NE devices in Huawei mobile network. Then. the M2000 server can obtain the time synchronization information from the specified NTP server. The server running the Windows operating system uses the SNTP protocol. l A host can acquire time from multiple NTP servers. S10) Medium level NTP server: level 1 and level 2 servers. That is. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 2-6 . NOTE Port 123 is used by NTP during communication through the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Hosts on the same level can exchange time. 2. the NE time synchronization follows the master/slave networking mode. NTP client: acquires time from upper level NTP server but does not provide time service.1. you can configure the M2000 administration console as an intermediate time server. Comparison of SNTP and NTP SNTP is a simplified policy for the NTP server and the NTP client. Time Synchronization Modes of NEs l For an NE with the BAM. Ensure that all the IP links between the nodes are functional. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. that is. the host time synchronizes with the BAM and the BAM synchronizes with the NTP server. which acquires time from the upper level server and provides the time for the lower level servers. Ltd. Specify an IP address for the NTP server that the M2000 server gains access to. the M2000 client can obtain the time synchronization information from the specified NTP server. The difference between SNTP and NTP is that SNTP has disadvantages in the following aspects: l l l Handling errors Filtering of multiple servers Choosing among multiple clock sources.

you can specify the upper-layer NTP server as the active BAM server of device A.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the OM board needs to support the NTP protocol. Therefore. the active BAM can use a new NTP time source to ensure the continuity of the NTP service. an NTP client process automatically starts after the BAM program and always runs on the active BAM server. In the BAM program of device A. Device A has two BAM servers. the active and standby BAM servers. After the active BAM of device A obtains the reference time from the specified NTP server. as shown in Figure 2-3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Rationale of time synchronization for device A Figure 2-3 Schematic diagram of time synchronization for device A The active BAM of device A serves as the NTP client to synchronize the time on each NE node and each module of device A.. This part takes device A as an example. By running MML commands. If an NTP time source does not work properly. A maximum of 16 NTP server addresses can be specified for the active BAM. Then. the NE can synchronize with the NTP server. l The BAM of device A synchronizes time with the upper-layer NTP server. the BAM delivers the time to each module of device A and all device B to realize time synchronization. Ltd. that is. 2-7 . S10) l 2 Setting the M2000 Time For an NE without the BAM. The active BAM of device A can perform the synchronization from the preferred time source. the NTP client process running on the active BAM automatically obtains the time synchronization information from the specified NTP server.

Network of NTP Time Synchronization The NTP time synchronization network determines the reference time for the network and uses the reference time to specify how device nodes communicate with each other. That is. The SNTP server of the active BAM periodically broadcasts time synchronization messages to device B and receives the requests for time synchronization from device B. the NTP client process is automatically switched to the new active BAM to ensure the continuity of the NTP service. During the time synchronization of the active and standby BAMs. 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can configure the SNTP server attributes for the active BAM of device A. S10) When the BAM of device A experiences active and standby switching. The time synchronization of the active and standby BAMs is performed every five minutes. only the active BAM has the SNTP server. the active BAM of device A has an SNTP server module for time synchronization between the internal modules. This part takes device A for example to describe how to choose the reference time for the NTP time synchronization network. For device A. when the active and standby BAMs are operational. In this case. The active BAM of device A serves as the SNTP server of all the modules. Device B runs an SNTP process and sends requests for time synchronization to the active BAM of device A. By running the MML commands. Ltd. the standby BAM adjusts the time of the applications and the system based on the response message. l Time synchronization for the standby BAM of device A If the active and standby BAMs are operational. l Using the NTP server specified by the carrier If the established time synchronization network provides the NTP server that can act as the reference time source. each internal module has an independent process serving as the SNTP client. the time of the active BAM is regarded as the reference time. the SNTP server of the active BAM returns a response message.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l Time synchronization for each internal module of device A In addition to running the NTP client to synchronize with the external time sources. as shown in Figure 2-4. prefer to use the existing NTP server as the time reference source of the RAN network. Then. the M2000 and the BAM server of device A need to directly communicate with the specified NTP server to obtain standard time signals. the SNTP client of the standby BAM requests for time synchronization.. and the SNTP client on the standby BAM is used only to periodically synchronize the time with the active BAM. l Time synchronization between device B and the BAM of device A The SNTP server of the active BAM provides both the time synchronization service and the time comparison service for the host. Manual setting of the period is not required because the active and standby BAMs work as a single entity to provide services. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .

In such a case. the communication between the M2000 and device A may involve the policy of traversing the firewall. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time Figure 2-4 Directly connecting device A and the NTP server The M2000 server and all the devices must directly communicate with the specified time synchronization server. such as device A and the M2000. Therefore..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The NTP server that can serve as the reference time may be deployed in other subnets. you can deploy a dedicated intermediate-layer NTP server in the RAN-OM network to serve as the time reference for the internal RAN devices. In such a case. you need to modify the configuration of the firewall. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Deploying the intermediate-layer NTP server According to the principle of layered NTP. and serves as the NTP server of the RAN network. 2-9 . The intermediate-layer NTP server obtains the reference time from the upper-layer server. synchronizes its own time. the intermediate-layer NTP server can receive the request on time synchronization from the internal NE devices in the RAN. when constructing an RAN network. and provides standard time. as shown in Figure 2-5.

this device can provide two channels of NTP service units and lock multiple upper-layer NTP servers to realize NTP priority. S10) Figure 2-5 Networking of device A and the intermediate-layer NTP server Deploying the intermediate-layer NTP server can effectively simplify the structure of the time synchronization network. 2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The intermediate-layer NTP server provides two channels of NTP service output that are mutually backed up. In addition. the workload on configuring the firewall is reduced. thus reducing the risks to the highest layer NTP server. It can also prevent too many NEs from directly connecting the highest layer NTP server. You can use the dedicated BITS SYNCLOCK V5 as the NTP intermediate-layer server of device A network.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. if a firewall exists between the highest layer NTP server and the RAN network.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Complying with the NTP V3 protocols.

S10) NOTE 2 Setting the M2000 Time l The M2000 server uses the Solaris operating system where you can configure the M2000 server as the intermediate-layer NTP server. the Netra 240 server is integrated as an administration console by default. Ltd. l l Obtaining reference time from the GPS If the upper-layer time synchronization server that can provide the reference time is not available. The highest layer NTP server obtains the reference time from the GPS or other satellite systems and synchronizes time on all the RAN NEs and the M2000. the Netra 240 acts as the intermediate-layer NTP server for the RAN network. Huawei recommends that the M2000 server should not act as the intermediate-layer NTP server for the RAN network. the NTP server providing the reference time in the RAN-OM network to ensure time synchronization. Figure 2-6 shows the networking of device A and the highest layer NTP server. In this case.. With regard to that the time synchronization server for the RAN network plays a special role and requires the independent and stable operating environment.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 2-11 . When a system using the V890 or E4900 server. that is. Figure 2-6 Directly connecting device A to the highest layer NTP server Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you should deploy the highest layer NTP server.

Thus. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. you must set the server time correctly. Impact on the M2000 System l When the DST starts. generally one hour is automatically added to the local time of the operating system. This change does not affect the system clock of the M2000. 2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It also provides two channels of NTP service output that are mutually backed up. Therefore. The M2000 log management and trace management uses the local time. Context If the M2000 server acts as the NTP server of network equipment. the stratum 1 NTP server should provide two channels of satellite interfaces. 10:00 am in US east standard time is 11:00 am in US east DST. NOTE l l l The local time is the time displayed on the computer. time storage and exchange are not affected. The NTP synchronization uses the GMT..4 Introduction to the DST This section describes the daylight saving time (DST) and the DST impact on the M2000 system. during the DST. S10) You can use the dedicated BITS SYNCLOCK V5 as the highest layer NTP server of device A. NOTE To improve the reliability of the NTP service. It varies according to the time zone. it obtains reference time directly from the GPS satellite. When the DST ends. timing task handling. one-hour records are missing in trace files. the network equipment time is updated when you modify the M2000 server time. During the operation of the M2000. Complying with the NTP V3 protocol. The system clock indicates the GMT. This change. files that are generated later overwrite the earlier ones. For example. generally one hour is automatically reduced from the local time of the operating system. affects the time display.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1. ensure that the following methods are applicable: l Choose two or more NTP servers that serve as the upper-layer NTP server to provide time reference. ensure that more than two channels of the NTP service are available. and database information dump. When the DST ends. however. When deploying the upper-layer NTP server for NEs and the M2000.2 Modifying the Date and Time on the M2000 Server The server time is associated with NE data collection. In such a case. The DST does not affect the NTP service. This change does not affect the system clock. 2. If the stratum 1 NTP server is deployed. this device can provide two channels of the satellite access system and two channels of NTP service units. l 2. Ltd. Introduction The DST is one hour earlier than the standard time. Therefore. which does not affect the local time. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . some modules in the M2000 generate some files whose names are identified by time stamps.

3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. Therefore. the M2000 collects the performance data and alarm data through automatic synchronization and then processes the data. To know how to stop the M2000. For example.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. You must first modify the time zone if the time and the time zone must be modified.43 Mon Nov 17 16:30:43 CST 2005 NOTE If GMT time is used. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time CAUTION l Modifying the server time results in the change of time at the Solaris bottom layer. During this process. the data is not lost.dbuser Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. to set system date and time to 2005-11-17 16:30:43. stop the M2000 and the Sybase first. Ltd. perform the following steps: Step 2 Stop the M2000.dbuser To know how to stop the Sybase. MM indicates a minute. # su .2. thus resetting or invalidating all timers that depend on the operating system. To avoid the function failures resulting from invalid timers.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. SS indicates a second. Step 3 Stop the Sybase. refer to 14..00$ exit Step 4 Set the system date and time. run the command date -u mmddHHMMYYYY. the performance data and alarm data of managed NEs are not processed in real time. YYYY indicates a year. HH indicates an hour.SS NOTE l l l l l l mm indicates a month. dd indicates a day. l Procedure Step 1 Check system date and time.2. # date mmddHHMMYYYY. # date If system date and time are incorrect. After the Sybase and M2000 services are restarted. -bash-3. # su . run the following command: # date 111716302005. refer to 7. Step 5 Start the Sybase.SS to change time. 2-13 .

For details on how to start the M2000.2. GMT+08:00 is eight hours earlier than the GMT and GMT-08:00 is eight hours later than the GMT. If the M2000 does not use DST. the time of the region is N hours later than the GMT. the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be handled in time. GMT+N refers to the time zone that is N hours later than the GMT and GMT-N refers to the time zone that is N hours earlier than the GMT. For example. you need to change the time zone of the server by performing the following operations. all the timers depending on the operating system are reset or become invalid.3 Starting the M2000 System Services. Context l On the Solaris operating system. The time zone code format must be used by the countries and regions that use DST. you need to change the time zone of the server by referring to 2. The GMT format can be used by the countries and regions that do not use DST. The change of the server time zone results in the change of time at the Solaris bottom layer. The correct setting of the time zone on the M2000 server is essential to the local time display and NTP service. you need to stop the M2000 and Sybase services before you change the server time zone. To avoid the function failure caused by invalid timers. depending on time zones.2. You need to change the time zone of the M2000 server to ensure that the time zone meets the requirement.3 Changing the Time Zone of the M2000 Server Without Using DST This section describes how to change the time zone of the M2000 server without using DST. Coordinated Universal Time. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. The time zone of the region to the east of the GMT region is represented by GMT+N. and collects and handles the missing performance data and alarm data from the managed NEs. Otherwise. Otherwise. the M2000 starts the automatic synchronization function. ----End 2. That is. The time zone code format stipulates the time offset and the DST rules. the time of the region is N hours earlier than the GMT. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. Ltd. the operating system does not support the automatic DST change. If you need to change both the time and the time zone. The GMT format stipulates only time offset rather than the DST rules. refer to 14.2 How to Start the Sybase. That is. is taken as a reference. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) l l l l l 2-14 . refer to 7.00$ exit Step 6 Start the M2000. which is referred to as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).6 Setting DST for the M2000. The time zone of the region to the west of the GMT region is represented by GMT-N. change the time zone first. two time formats are available for the time zone: GMT and time zone code. -bash-3. S10) For details on how to start the Sybase.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In this case. After the M2000 and Sybase services are restored. When you modify the time zone configuration file /etc/TIMEZONE of the Solaris. During this period.

sync. GMT+N indicates that the local time is N hours later than the GMT.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. sync. NOTE l In this case.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. and Time Zone on the M2000 Client This section describes how to modify the date. export TERM # vi /etc/TIMEZONE For example. Ltd. sync. see 14. set TZ to GMT+8. ensure that the binary time zone file corresponding to the GMT time zone exists in the /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo directory. time.00$ exit Step 3 Run the following command to change the value of TZ in the /etc/TIMEZONE file to the name of the required local time zone: # TERM=vt100. For details about how to stop the M2000 services. time.2. Procedure Step 1 Open the Control Panel. stop it. the change fails.dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase services. Prerequisite The Windows operating system is operational. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -g0 -y -i6 The Sybase and M2000 services automatically start after the operating system is restarted. sync. Before the change. ----End 2. stop it. Step 2 Double-click Date and Time. Step 2 If any Sybase service is running. and time zone on the M2000 client that is based on the Windows operating system.4 Modifying the Date. This takes the Windows XP operating system as an example. Save the file after modification.2. Time. -bash-3. The /etc/TIMEZONE file is read-only. GMT-N indicates that the local time is N hours earlier than the GMT. l Step 4 Restart the server. see 7. Otherwise. time. Modifying the date..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # su . S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time Procedure Step 1 If any M2000 service is running. # sync. and time zone on the M2000 client means modifying the date. 2-15 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and time zone of Windows.

2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.3 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console This section describes how to start the NTP service on the M2000 administration console to synchronize the system.5 Setting the M2000 Server as the NTP Client This section describes how to configure the NTP service to set the M2000 server as the NTP client. Time Zone Click the Time Zone tab. which is synchronized with the upper level server. 2.5. the administration console is configured only for the E4900 server. Set the required minute on the Time tab page.2 Setting the M2000 Administration Console as the Secondary NTP Server This section describes how to set the M2000 administration console as the secondary NTP server. 2.5.1 Checking the Time Settings of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the time settings of the M2000 server. 2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ..7 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the operational status of the NTP service. 2. select the items to be modified. Step 4 Click Apply.5.5. 2.6 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to start the NTP service on the M2000 server to synchronize the system.4 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console This section describes how to check the operational status of the NTP service. Item Hour Minute Second Operation Set the required hour on the Time tab page. Ltd. 2. ----End 2. The secondary NTP server synchronizes time with the upper-level server and provides a standard time source for a lower-level server.5. and time are set correctly on the M2000 server.5.5. choose the local time zone from the drop-down list. 2. date.In the single-server system. On the Time Zone tab page. Before configuring the NTP service. S10) Step 3 In the Date and Time Properties dialog box. you need to ensure that the time zone.5. 2. Set the required second on the Time tab page.8 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client 2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Configuring the NTP Service of the M2000 This section describes how to set the M2000 server as the NTP client and synchronize time with the upper-layer server and how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client and synchronize time with the M2000 server.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.In the single-server system.2 Setting the M2000 Administration Console as the Secondary NTP Server This section describes how to set the M2000 administration console as the secondary NTP server. Otherwise. This task enables you to synchronize the client with the NTP server through the NTP service of the Windows operating system. change the time zone by referring to 2. Step 2 Run the following command to check the date and time of the server: # date If the date is incorrect or the time difference of the server time and the clock source exceeds two minutes. The time zone. date. Before configuring the NTP service. and time of the administration console are set correctly. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time This section describes how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client. The server running the Windows operating system uses the SNTP protocol. change the time zone by referring to 2.2 Modifying the Date and Time on the M2000 Server.5. Context Normally.6 Setting DST for the M2000. use the administration console Netra 240 of the M2000 system as the secondary NTP server.3 Changing the Time Zone of the M2000 Server Without Using DST.. 2-17 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and thus it cannot function as the the upper-level time server of the M2000 administration console. You have logged in to the administration console as user root. The upper-level time server of the M2000 administration console requires to use the NTP protocol. The secondary NTP server synchronizes time with the upper-level server and provides a standard time source for a lower-level server. Ltd.1 Checking the Time Settings of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the time settings of the M2000 server. Prerequisite l l l The top layer NTP server has been configured in the mobile network. If no other server is available to be set as the secondary time server. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to check the time zone of the server: # echo $TZ If the time zone is set incorrectly on the system that does not use DST. the administration console is configured only for the E4900 server.5. ----End 2. the M2000 server is set as the NTP client. and time are set correctly on the M2000 server. date. you need to ensure that the time zone. 2. change the date and time by referring to 2.

0 fudge 127.94. S10) Procedure Step 1 Open the file ntp.127. # cp /etc/inet/ntp.1. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp. Step 6 Save the file ntp.conf # TERM=vt100.1 ttl 4.0.0.127.1.server /etc/inet/ntp.0 #broadcast 224. you must replace the following contents in the file ntp. For example: server IP address of the upper-level NTP server prefer server IP address of the upper-level NTP server Step 3 Change XType in server 127.0.XType. ----End Example To synchronize time with the server whose IP address is 10. If multiple upper-level NTP servers exist. add server IP address of the upper-level NTP server prefer.127.0 stratum 0. see 2.127.3 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console.conf Step 2 In front of server 127.127.127.1. Ensure that each line maps to an NTP server.0 stratum 0 broadcast 224.161.0.XType.XType.conf.XType. Ltd.127..94.5. Step 4 In fudge 127. The value 1 indicates that the local host serves as the standard time source.0 stratum 0 to 1.161.1 ttl 4 Postrequisite After setting the M2000 administration console as the secondary NTP server. Step 5 In front of broadcast 224.212 prefer server 127. write multiple lines. delete stratum 0. 2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.conf: server 127.Xtype.0 and fudge 127.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .212. add # to comment this line out and to prohibit the broadcasting mode. you need to start the NTP service on the administration console.0 fudge 127. NOTE prefer indicates that the IP address of the NTP server is synchronized preferentially.1 ttl 4 with: server 10.127. For details.1.conf and quit vi.1.1.

and then run the commands ntpq -p and ntptrace to view the status of the NTP service. if STATE is online or maintenance. During the system test.5. Ltd. Then. perform Step 2 to restart the NTP service. and time of the administration console are correctly set. If you run the ntptrace command during the system test. if you run the ntpq -p command. date. Prerequisite l l The time zone.3 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console This section describes how to start the NTP service on the M2000 administration console to synchronize the system. # ntpq -p Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system requires five minutes for the system test. if STATE is disabled.4 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console This section describes how to check the operational status of the NTP service. the displayed address of the remote clock source does not contain *. The NTP service is started each time the system restarts. 2-19 .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. perform Step 2 to start the NTP service. # svcadm enable svc:/network/ntp:default NOTE This command has the once-for-all effect. l In the system output. ----End 2.. it indicates that the NTP service is not started. # svcadm disable svc:/network/ntp:default l Step 2 Start the NTP service. you can check whether the NTP service is started. # svcs svc:/network/ntp:default According to the system output. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time 2. Procedure Step 1 View the information about the time source. run the following command to stop the NTP service.5. the system displays Timeout or Not Synchronized. In the system output. Then. You have logged in to the administration console as user root. Wait for five minutes. Context After the NTP server and the NTP client are started. Procedure Step 1 Check whether any NTP service is running.

4 Stopping the M2000 Services.LCL.212: stratum 1. You have logged in to the server as user root. run the command ntptrace -v.94. The server running the Windows operating system uses the SNTP protocol. refid 'LCL' root@osssvr # In the result of the command ntpq -p.5 Setting the M2000 Server as the NTP Client This section describes how to configure the NTP service to set the M2000 server as the NTP client.212 indicates that the IP address of the NTP server that the host is synchronized with is 10.01015.5.406 61. Step 2 Check the information about the clock synchronization path.94.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 2.000 0.161. that the IP address of the upper-level server is 10. For more information.161. and thus it cannot function as the upper-level time server of the M2000 server. To know how to stop the M2000. and that the upper-level server is at stratum 1.000039. date. # ntptrace The ntptrace command traces the NTP synchronization path from the host to the top NTP server.000 0.060665. The value 1 in the column st indicates that the host is located at stratum 1.212.212. refer to 7.07640 10. Ltd. the remote field shows the address and status of the reference clock source.2. 2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. which is synchronized with the upper level server. offset 0. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .161. The result of the command ntptrace shows that the host is located at stratum 2. *10.111 +LOCAL(0) LOCAL(0) 3 1 29 64 377 0.94. and time of the server are correctly set.94. Prerequisite l l The time zone.161.212 . synch distance 0.94. The symbol * indicates that the NTP is running properly.161. ----End Example The administration console serves as the medium-level NTP server root@osssvr # ntpq -p remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset jitter ============================================================================== *10. offset 0.294 0. S10) In the result of the command ntpq -p.000 root@osssvr # root@osssvr # ntptrace localhost: stratum 2. Procedure Step 1 Stop the M2000. synch distance 0. 1 u 165 512 377 0. Context The upper-level time server of the M2000 server requires to use the NTP protocol.

dbuser To know how to stop the Sybase. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp. -bash-3.conf file and then quit vi. # cp /etc/inet/ntp.1.conf file.214 #multicastclient 224. 2-21 . For details on how to start the M2000.. -bash-3.conf file: multicastclient 224.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?.161. NOTE Either the multicast client or the upper-layer NTP server takes effect.2. see 2.00$ exit Step 3 Open the /etc/inet/ntp. refer to 14.3 Starting the M2000 System Services.214 is the upper-layer NTP server of the M2000 server.2.1.client /etc/inet/ntp.dbuser For details on how to start the Sybase.0.1 Postrequisite After setting the M2000 server as the Network Time Protocol (NTP) client. # su . Step 7 Start the Sybase.2.conf Step 4 Add server IP address of the upper level NTP server at the end of the file to specify the IP addresses of the upper-layer NTP servers. refer to 7.0. 2. replace the following contents of the ntp.161.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.0.5.1 with: server 10.1 to comment the line out. Each line maps to an NTP server. ----End Example If the server with the IP address of 10.2 How to Start the Sybase.conf # TERM=vt100.6 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Server. you need to start the NTP service on the server. Ltd. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time Step 2 Stop the Sybase.6 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to start the NTP service on the M2000 server to synchronize the system. refer to 14. Step 6 Save the ntp.94.00$ exit Step 8 Start the M2000. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.94. # su . For details.1.5. Step 5 Add # to the front of multicastclient 224.

The NTP service is started each time the system restarts. Then. the system requires five minutes for the system test. l In the system output. run the following command to stop the NTP service. S10) Prerequisite l l The time zone. 2.. Ltd. if STATE is online or maintenance. # ntpq -p 2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must start the NTP service on the administration console at the same time. Wait for five minutes. date. it indicates that the NTP service is not started. the system displays Timeout or Not Synchronized. You have logged in to the server as user root. Procedure Step 1 Check whether any NTP service is running. During the system test.5. # svcadm disable svc:/network/ntp:default l Step 2 Start the NTP service. In the system output. Then.7 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the operational status of the NTP service. If you run the ntptrace command during the system test. and time of the server are correctly set. if STATE is disabled. if you run the ntpq -p command.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Procedure Step 1 View the information about the time source. perform Step 2 to start the NTP service. # svcs svc:/network/ntp:default According to the system output. ----End Postrequisite If the administration console is configured as the medium-level NTP server. the displayed address of the remote clock source does not contain *. you can check whether the NTP service is started. and then run the commands ntpq -p and ntptrace to view the status of the NTP service. Context After the NTP server and the NTP client are started. perform Step 2 to restart the NTP service. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . # svcadm enable svc:/network/ntp:default NOTE This command has the once-for-all effect.

root@osssvr # ntpq -p remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset disp ============================================================================== *10.05 root@osssvr # root@osssvr # ntptrace localhost: stratum 3.94. ----End Example The M2000 server serves as the NTP client. Step 2 Check the information about the clock synchronization path.161. The configuration procedure is applicable to the Windows 2000 Professional.161. refid 'LCL' root@osssvr # In the result of the command ntpq -p. 2-23 .214 2 u 58 64 377 0. # ntptrace The ntptrace command traces the NTP synchronization path from the host to the top NTP server. The M2000 client and the M2000 server communicate normally.94.214. Ltd. Windows 2008. synch distance 0. synch distance 0.8 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client This section describes how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client.214. offset 0. Prerequisite l You have logged in to the Windows operating system.94.37 0. The clock source of the server is operational.000224.161.94.94.161. Windows 2003.161..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.94. 2. l l Context When the M2000 client is configured as the NTP client.217 0. offset 0.5.94. *10. and that the IP address of the stratum-1 server is 10.214 10. offset 0. synchronize the time of the M2000 client with the time of the M2000 server.214 indicates that the IP address of the NTP server that the host is synchronized with is 10.060569.94.161. Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista Business operating system.212: stratum 1.01036. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time In the result of the command ntpq -p. run the command ntptrace -v. For more information.212.214: stratum 2. that the IP address of the stratum-2 server is 10. synch distance 0. The value 2 in the column st indicates that the host is located at level 2.000035.07860 10. This task enables you to synchronize the client with the NTP server through the NTP service of the Windows operating system. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.161. The symbol * indicates that the NTP is running properly.161. The Windows operating system is running properly.08855 10. the remote field shows the address and status of the reference clock source. The result of the command ntptrace indicates that the host is located at level 3.

In the displayed Run dialog box. To clear the specification. the NTP server time is the local time of the PC. If the M2000 client runs on Windows 2003. Type cmd and press Enter. Step 2 Specify the NTP clock source.. and time cycle of NTP server roll. In the displayed window. Step 7 Run the following command to manually synchronize the time: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm /resync 2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. deviation between the local time and the NTP server time. If the parameter LocalNTP does not exist. Step 6 Run the following command to check the running status of the SNTP: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm -once -v -test The system displays the host name of the connected NTP server. change the value of the parameter LocalNTP to 0. Identify the Windows Time service and restart the service. it indicates that the value can be ignored and the registry need not be modified. The result of the net time command is saved in the Windows registry. In the displayed Run dialog box. 2. This setting of the net time takes effect after Windows restarts. choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services > W32Time > Parameters. which is the default value. perform Step 6. In the registry. Windows 2008.msc to open the Services window. Choose Start > Run. Step 3 Restart the Windows Time service. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . perform Step 7 through Step 8. c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;net time /querysntp NOTE If the host name and IP address of the PC are specified as the host name and IP address of the NTP server by /setsntp. Step 5 Perform operations based on operating systems. Choose Start > Run. run the net time /setsntp command. change the value of Enable under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services > W32Time > TimeProviders > NtpServer to 0. enter regedit to open the Registry Editor window. NOTE For the operating systems of Windows 2003 or Windows 2008. Step 4 Check the NTP server specified by the PC. enter services. Then. S10) Procedure Step 1 Configure the M2000 client as the NTP client. Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system. Choose Start > Run. run the following command: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;net time /setsntp:M2000 IP Address of NTP Server NOTE 1. l l If the M2000 client runs on Windows 2000 operating system.2 Setting the M2000 Time M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In the registry. Ltd.

the M2000 starts the automatic synchronization function.9740897s 10:05:15.15. The GMT format stipulates only time offset rather than the DST rules. all the timers depending on the operating system are reset or invalidated. The current time is 2009-6-22 10:05:09 (local time). ensure that the M2000 can handle the data reported by the NE and that no reported data is missing. The setting of the M2000 DST leads to the change of the time at the Solaris bottom layer. The time zone code format stipulates the time offset and the DST rules. +04. depending on time zones. When the DST rule of a time zone are adjusted. you need to stop the M2000 and Sybase services before you set the M2000 DST. . and the second column displays the deviation between the local time and the server time. If DST change occurs on an NE. During this period. +04. +04. Ltd.9881239s 10:05:11.98]. two time formats are available for the time zone: GMT and time zone code.6 Setting DST for the M2000 This section describes how to set the time zone of the M2000 server to enable the M2000 support DST. The GMT format can be used by the countries and regions that do not use DST. You can install the code patch to obtain the latest time zone code and DST rule. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. including the local time of the client and deviation of the local time from that on the NTP server.indicates that the client time is later than the server time. In the system output. + indicates that the client time is earlier than the server time. The government may adjust the DST rule of a time zone owing to various reasons.98 [10. In this case. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time Step 8 Run the following command to check the running status of the SNTP: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm /stripchart /computer:IP address of the M2000 server /dataonly The system displays the following information.9814570s 10:05:13.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the operating system does not support the automatic DST change. ----End 2. the first column displays the local time of the client.. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. you need to query the DST rule of the corresponding time zone based on the time zone code before setting DST. To avoid the function failure caused by invalid timers. Otherwise.71. +04. After the M2000 and Sybase services are restored.. This ensures that the DST rule defined by the time zone code is consistent with the actual DST rule.71. and collects and handles the missing performance data and alarm data from the managed NEs.9449507s . Context l On the Solaris operating system. The time zone code format must be used by the countries and regions that use DST.. Tracking 10. the Sun may release the code patch of this time zone.9589559s 10:05:17. +04.15. 10:05:09. the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be handled in time. You can press Ctrl+C to exit the browse window. Therefore. 2-25 l l l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . obtain and install the latest code patch of the time zone before setting DST. For details about how to stop the M2000 services. that is. If the DST rule defined by the time zone code is inconsistent with the actual DST rule. only one row of information is displayed. You can run the zdump command to query the DST rules in the three successive years.2 Setting the M2000 Time l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l If the DST rule defined by the time zone code is consistent with the actual DST rule. the system displays the DST rules of the time zone in all years. S10) If you need to set DST and change time. see 7. four rows of information is displayed for describing the DST rule. NOTE l l l Step 3 Select different operations based on the DST rule. this year. If you do not add | grep specified year to the previous command. For example. and month when DST starts and ends in each year. week. For details about how to query the name of a time zone name. If DST is used. proceed with Step 4 through Step 7 to set DST. Ltd. the last year. isdst=0 stands for being not in the DST period. set DST first. Procedure Step 1 Query the local time zone name. Step 2 Run the following command to view the DST rule of the time zone in a specified year: # zdump -v time zone name | grep specified year l If specified year refers to the current year: – If DST is not used. Step 5 If any Sybase service is running. DST in the time zone US/Alaska starts from the second Sunday of March and ends on the first Sunday of November in each year.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. The format of the displayed information is as follows: Time zone name UTC time = local time isdst=0/1 l If specified year does not refer to the current year: – – – – The UTC time is the GMT. see 14. # su .dbuser 2-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.. l Step 4 If any M2000 service is running. stop it. The format of the displayed information is as follows: Time zone name UTC time = local time isdst=0/1 – – – The UTC time is the GMT. If DST is used.10 How to Query the Time Zone Name. isdst=1 stands for being in the DST period. and the next year. isdst=0 stands for being not in the DST period. stop it. If the displayed information does not have four rows. isdst=1 stands for being in the DST period. you can infer the universal change rules of DST. This means that the week when DST starts is fixed and that the date when DST starts is flexible. you can infer that DST is not used. Based on the system output.1. The DST rule of a time zone stipulates the day. five rows of information is displayed for describing the DST rule.

Save the file after modification. ----End Example The query of the DST rules of PRC and US/Alaska in 2007 is taken as an example. sync. The /etc/TIMEZONE file is read-only. sync. NOTE l Query the required time zone in the /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo/src directory. S10) 2 Setting the M2000 Time For details about how to stop the Sybase services. Therefore. # sync. l Step 7 Restart the server. The system displays the following information: US/Alaska isdst=1 US/Alaska isdst=0 US/Alaska isdst=1 US/Alaska isdst=1 US/Alaska isdst=0 Mon Sep 17 06:09:56 2007 UTC = Sun Sep 16 22:09:56 2007 AKDT Sun Mar 11 10:59:59 2007 UTC = Sun Mar 11 01:59:59 2007 AKST Sun Mar 11 11:00:00 2007 UTC = Sun Mar 11 03:00:00 2007 AKDT Sun Nov Sun Nov 4 09:59:59 2007 UTC = Sun Nov 4 10:00:00 2007 UTC = Sun Nov 4 01:59:59 2007 AKDT 4 01:00:00 2007 AKST Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.2. the system displays only one row of the following information: PRC Mon Sep 17 06:03:55 2007 UTC = Mon Sep 17 14:03:55 2007 CST isdst=0 – If the current year is not 2007. set TZ to PRC. sync.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. if you find the local time zone name PRC in the asia file in the /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo/src directory. 2-27 . the system does not display any information. Ensure that the relevant binary time zone file exists in the /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo directory. l Run the following command to view the DST rule of the RPC time zone in 2007: # zdump -v PRC|grep 2007 – If the current year is 2007.. For example.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. export TERM # vi /etc/TIMEZONE For example. you can infer that the PRC time zone does not have DST in 2007. sync. l Run the following command to view the rule of the US/Alaska time zone in 2007: # zdump -v US/Alaska|grep 2007 – If the current year is 2007.00$ exit Step 6 Run the following command to change the value of TZ in the /etc/TIMEZONE file to the name of the required local time zone: # TERM=vt100. you need to check whether the binary time zone file /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo/PRC exists. -bash-3. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -g0 -y -i6 The Sybase and M2000 services automatically start after the operating system is restarted. see 14.

you can infer that DST is used in US/Alaska. S10) Based on isdst=1 contained in the information in the first row.2 Setting the M2000 Time – M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the DST time. you can infer that DST ends after Nov 4 02:00:00 2007 changes to Nov 4 01:00:00. Based on the information in the third row and the fourth row. Based on the information in the fourth row and the fifth row. – 2-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The local time. The UTC time is Sep 17 06:09:56 2007. Based on the information in the second row and the third row.. you can infer that DST starts after Mar 11 02:00:00 2007 changes to Mar 11 03:00:00 2007. is Sep 16 22:09:56 2007. – – – If the current year is not 2007. you can infer that DST starts after Mar 11 02:00:00 2007 changes to Mar 11 03:00:00 2007. Ltd. you can infer that DST ends after Nov 4 02:00:00 2007 changes to Nov 4 01:00:00. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The system displays the following information: US/Alaska isdst=0 US/Alaska isdst=1 US/Alaska isdst=1 US/Alaska isdst=0 – Sun Mar 11 10:59:59 2007 UTC = Sun Mar 11 01:59:59 2007 AKST Sun Mar 11 11:00:00 2007 UTC = Sun Mar 11 03:00:00 2007 AKDT Sun Nov Sun Nov 4 09:59:59 2007 UTC = Sun Nov 4 10:00:00 2007 UTC = Sun Nov 4 01:59:59 2007 AKDT 4 01:00:00 2007 AKST Based on the information in the first row and the second row. that is.

the M2000 implements automatic synchronization to collect and handle the missing performance data and alarm data. you can log in to the M2000 server through the IP address of the SC/RSC/ XSCF to operate and maintain the server. In special situations. 3.4 Modifying the IP Address of the Disk Array This section describes how to modify the IP address of the disk array.1 Changing the Host Name of the M2000 Server This section describes how to change the host name of the M2000.. the maintenance dual-plan is not configured. 3-1 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. During the modification of the host name. according to field requirements. 3. By modifying the IP address of the disk array. After the modification. the M2000 cannot handle the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs. 3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 3.3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC or RSC or XSCF on the M2000 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC/RSC/XSCF on the M2000 server. Ltd. In common mode. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server About This Chapter This chapter describes how to set the host name and the IP address of the M2000 server. you can maintain the disk array easily.2 Modifying the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the M2000 server in common mode and maintenance dual-plane mode.

the function of port nxge0 is similar to that of port bge2 of the Netra 240. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 3-2 . the function of port e1000g0 is similar to that of port bge2 of the Netra 240. The function of port nxge0 is similar to that of port bge0 of the Netra 240. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and port e1000g2 of the T5220.. Ltd. it indicates that the M4000/M5000 server uses the nxge0 and e1000g0 Ethernet ports. During the modification of the host name. l l If the file to be modified is read-only. Change the network adapter type according to actual situations. S10). port ce0 of the V890 or E4900. see the M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (Sun.1 Changing the Host Name of the M2000 Server This section describes how to change the host name of the M2000. the type of the network adapters used by the T5220 servers is e1000g. they can not be automatically cleared. do not proceed with the next step. the M2000 implements automatic synchronization to collect and handle the missing performance data and alarm data. l Procedure Step 1 Log in to the system controller (SC). S10) 3. and port e1000g0 of the T5220. The function of port bge0 is similar to that of port bge0 of the Netra 240. Because those alarms object (hostname) was changed. run the following command: # ifconfig -a | grep e1000g If there is any system output. port ce2 of the V890 or E4900. For details. # hostname l l If the host name is incorrect. run the wq! command to save the file forcibly after the modification. If there is no system output. The network adapter of the Netra 240 is bge. it indicates that the M4000/M5000 server uses the bge0 and nxge0 Ethernet ports. Context CAUTION l Please note if there are any alarms which alarm object is old hostname. The following procedure takes the ce as an example. the M2000 cannot handle the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs. please manully clear those alarms after the hostname changed to the new one.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the network adapter of the V890 or E4900 is ce. port ce2 of the V890 or E4900. The network adapter type varies with the model of the server. remote system controller (RSC) or eXtended System Controller facility (XSCF) of the server. Step 2 Check the host name of the server. port ce0 of the V890 or E4900. When the M4000/M5000 server is used. proceed with the next step. and port e1000g2 of the T5220. If the host name is correct. and port e1000g0 of the T5220. After the modification.

If the Sybase service is running. stop it. # vi /etc/nodename Step 7 Check whether the maintenance dual plane is configured. # vi /etc/hostname.ce0 # vi /etc/hostname. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Step 3 If the M2000 is running. Ltd. the corresponding files are /etc/hostname. Step 4 Check whether the Sybase service is running. refer to 7.2.ce0 NOTE l l l If the /etc/hostname.bge2. -bash-3.ce0 and /etc/hostname. # su . For example. the names of the two files vary with the network adapter type. Thus.2.bge0 and /etc/ hostname. 3-3 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Step 8 Check the correlation between the /etc/inet/ipnodes and /etc/hosts files. stop it.ce2. no space is allowed at the beginning of each line of content.ce0 and /etc/hostname. The network adapter type varies with the model of the server.dbuser For details about how to view and stop the Sybase service.ce2 files record IP addresses. see 14.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # TERM=vt100. determine whether to modify the corresponding file.2. Then. Maintenance dual plane is configured? Step Yes Edit the files /etc/hostname..ce0 and /etc/ hostname.ce0 and /etc/hostname. export TERM # vi /etc/hosts Step 6 Edit the /etc/nodename file to change the existing host name to a new one. # vi /etc/hostname.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase? respectively. when the network adapter type is bge.2.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started? and 14.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. For details about how to stop the M2000. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need not modify the two files. Run the following command to check the correlation between the /etc/inet/ipnodes and / etc/inet/hosts files.ce2 No Modify only the /etc/hostname.ce0 file.00$ exit Step 5 Edit the /etc/hosts file to change the existing host name to a new one. In the files /etc/hostname. For their relation. see 7. For details about how to view the M2000 service. 1. see the background information. For the /etc/hostname. ce in the file names refers to the network adapter type.ce2 files.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services.ce2 to change the existing host names to new ones.

# vi /etc/inet/ipnodes Step 10 Rename the host name directory in the /var/crash directory. Run the following command to restart the server. If the command result does not contain /etc/inet/ipnodes -> . and thus the / etc/hosts and /etc/inet/ipnodes files are not correlated. Ltd.dbuser -bash-3. go to Step 9. CAUTION If the Sybase and M2000 services are exceptional after the server is restarted. go to Step 10./hosts. If the file does not record host names. it indicates that the two files are correlated. 1./inet/hosts. # cd /var/crash # mv old host name new host name Step 11 Switch to user dbuser. go to Step 9. replace the existing host name with a new host name.2. and thus the /etc/hosts and /etc/ inet/ipnodes files are also correlated Then./inet/hosts. it indicates that the /etc/hosts and /etc/inet/hosts files are not correlated. sync. Then. sync. S10) # ls -al /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the command result contains /etc/inet/ipnodes -> . l After the modification. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -g0 -y -i6 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. switch to user root. # sync. If the command result does not contain /etc/hosts -> . sync. and then change the previous host name directory to the new host name directory. sync.. Then. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. go to Step 8. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Open the /opt/sybase/interfaces file. it indicates that the /etc/hosts and /etc/inet/hosts files are correlated. do not modify the file. Then. l 2. Press Esc and run the :q command to exit. -bash-3. l Step 9 Edit /etc/inet/ipnodes to change the previous host name to the new host name. Run the following command to check the correlation between the /etc/hosts and /etc/inet/ hosts files.00$ vi /opt/sybase/interfaces l If the file records the information on host names. Then. # ls -al /etc/hosts l If the command result contains /etc/hosts -> ./hosts. it indicates that the two files are not correlated. # su .3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. press Esc and run the :wq command to save the modification and exit.00$ exit Step 12 Restart the server and view the status of the Sybase and M2000 services.

00$ exit # .1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?. both of the Sybase and M2000 services are automatically restarted.1 Adding or Deleting Routes on the M2000 Server This section describes how to add or delete routes from the current network to several destination networks. 3-5 ..dbuser For details about how to view the status of the Sybase service.2. 2. Ltd. 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In common mode.2 Modifying the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the M2000 server in common mode and maintenance dual-plane mode.2. 3. # su . Context If you set the function of dumping the alarms on the disk array to M2000 server logs. 3. View the status of the Sybase and M2000 services.2.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. 3. see 14. -bash-3.1 Adding or Deleting Routes on the M2000 Server This section describes how to add or delete routes from the current network to several destination networks.2.sh # svc_adm -cmd status ----End 3. you must modify the IP address of the M2000 server in the array configuration file.2 Changing the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the M2000 server based on the actual requirements. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. the maintenance dual-plan is not configured. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server After the server is restarted. Log in to the server as user root.

0/24 10.1/24 10. # route add Destination address/mask gateway For example: # route add 129.2 Changing the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the M2000 server based on the actual requirements.1 route add 129. run the commands listed in Table 3-1.12.8.255. 3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For example.1 Destination address: a network address or a PC address Mask: The number of digit 1 in the subnet mask is binary.8. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .1 l Deleting a route Viewing a route Adding a route automatical ly on system restart # route delete Destination address/ mask gateway # netstat -rv Create the /etc/rc2. # route delete 129. ----End 3.8.0.8.0. S10) Context CAUTION Run the following command to add a route.12. the added route is automatically disabled.0.12. 24 means 255.9.8. Table 3-1 Adding or deleting a route Operation s Adding a route Command # route add Destination address/mask gateway l Example # route add 129.8.8.d/S97route file. Ltd.2.0/24 10.1 route add 129.0.12.8.d/S97route Write one or more route add Destination address/mask gateway commands into the file.0. or automatically add the M2000 server route.1 Procedure Step 1 To add.8.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun..0/24 10. After you restart the server. # vi /etc/rc2. delete.12.0/16 10.255.0.

If the IP address of the M2000 server are recorded in the NE database. operation. In addition. the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be processed. the Solaris operating system dynamically monitors the validity of each network port. 3-7 .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The IP addresses are stored in the relevant configuration files of the operating system. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Context l Maintenance dual plane: After the two network ports are set. Ltd. the communication between the server and external devices is secure and reliable. In this case. the OM network is easily managed and maintained and is more open and flexible. In this case. adjustment or reallocation of IP addresses. Thus. The system continues the monitoring on the port that is currently invalid. you need to change the IP address of the server. NEs. functions such as data transfer. When the active network port is out of service. l l l l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This ensures continuity in the communication between the server and the external network. Allocate physical IP addresses to the Ethernet ports of the server and configure the maintenance dual plane to implement the redundancy backup of Ethernet ports. and network management system (NMS) set up communication with the M2000 server through the IP address of the server. After you change the IP address of the server. When changing the IP address of the M2000 server. and the M2000. see the M2000 Commissioning Guide (Sun. the database. S10). The M2000 client. the scalability and evolution of the network are improved.sh script to modify the IP address information in these configuration files and change the IP address of the server. For details. During the change of the server IP address. and maintenance are implemented. the system switches the IP address and subnet mask to the IP address and subnet mask of the restored port. The M2000 supports both LAN and WAN networking modes. You can run the modify.. the system switches the IP address from the previous active port to the current active port. the M2000 collects performance data and alarm data again through automatic synchronization and then processes the data. Once the invalid port becomes active. You can change the IP address of the server to meet the requirements for network reparenting and adjustment. you need to notify the NE maintenance engineers and ask them to modify the relevant plans and update the IP address of the M2000 server recorded in the NE database. changing the IP address of the M2000 server leads to the disconnection between the M2000 server and NEs. When the OM network requires reparenting.

the maintenance dual plane is similar with that of the V890 except the network adapter type.sh script to change the IP address of the M2000 server. If the system is not configured with the maintenance dual plane. If there is no system output. and port e1000g2 of the T5220.. The network adapter type varies with the model of the server. Ltd. When the M4000/M5000 server is used. you can infer that the M4000/M5000 server uses the nxge0 and e1000g0 Ethernet ports. The function of port nxge0 is similar to that of port bge0 of the Netra 240. and port e1000g2 of the T5220. l For example. the communication between the server and external devices can be secure and reliable. This takes host name osssvr-1 as an example. This assumes that the system is configured with the maintenance dual plane and describes how to change the IP address of the server and the physical IP addresses of two Ethernet ports. port ce0 of the V890 or E4900.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. port ce2 of the V890 or E4900. see the previous information. port ce0 of the V890 or E4900. the model of the server is V890. the network adapter of the V890 or E4900 is ce. the server IP address and the physical IP addresses of network ports must be set in the same network segment. The maintenance dual plane implement backup of network ports. Change the network adapter type according to actual situations. run the following command: # ifconfig -a | grep e1000g If there is any system output. If the maintenance dual plane is configured on the system. Thus. S10) CAUTION l The network adapter type varies with the model of the server. you need to plan and change the M2000 server IP address. you can infer that the M4000/M5000 server uses the bge0 and nxge0 Ethernet ports. the function of port nxge0 is similar to that of port bge2 of the Netra 240. l l l l Procedure Step 1 Log in to the server as user root. and port e1000g0 of the T5220. run the modify. When other servers are adapted. perform operations to change only the IP address of the server in the relevant steps. In this case. modify the IP address information in routing devices. If you need to change only some IP addresses of the system. port ce2 of the V890 or E4900. the type of the network adapters used by the T5220 servers is e1000g. and port e1000g0 of the T5220. For their relation. and the physical IP addresses of network ports at the same time. Step 2 Run the following command to view the host name of the server: # hostname The system displays the host name of the server. 3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The network adapter of the Netra 240 is bge. If the maintenance dual plane is configured on the system. perform operations to change only these IP addresses in the relevant steps. The function of port bge0 is similar to that of port bge0 of the Netra 240. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the function of port e1000g0 is similar to that of port bge2 of the Netra 240. The following procedure takes the ce as an example. If you change the IP addresses on different network segments. the ce0 and ce2 network ports on the server are used to configure the maintenance dual plane. and then restart the M2000 server.

8. The Ethernet adapter type varies with the server type.10.11.2.40 osssvr-1 osssvr-1-ce0 osssvr-1-ce2 ST6140-1 ST6140-1 loghost omc.10. l If the IP address can be successfully pinged. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the IP addresses meet the requirements.8.4 Stopping the M2000 Services.19.18.8. you can infer that this new IP address is already used and you need to use another one.2.10. that of osssvr-1-ce0 is 192.168.11 192.19. When the Ethernet adapter type is bge. For details.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services. see 7.18 192.8.168.19 to 10. l l If the IP addresses do not meet the requirements.8.1 localhost 192. Check whether the IP addresses meet the site requirements.8.10. and that of osssvr-1-ce2 is 192. see 7.168. This section describes how to change the IP address of the server from 192.18 and 10. If the IP address cannot be pinged.10. perform the following steps to change them. Step 5 Check whether the new IP address is already used.10. Step 4 Run the following command to check the IP addresses: # ifconfig -a The system displays the IP addresses obtained in Step 3.39 192.0.168. ping 10.8.168. NOTE In the system output.8.168. 3-9 .10.10. stop the M2000 services. open the DOS command window and then run the ping 10.0.168. Ltd.168.8. ce in osssvr-1-ce0 and osssvr-1-ce2 refers to the Ethernet adapter type and varies with the Ethernet adapter type. Check the operation status of the M2000 services.com According to the system output.18 and 192.8.10.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see the background information. On the client PC whose IP address is on the same network segment as the new IP address. l Step 6 If the M2000 is running.10. ping 10.18. the physical IP addresses of the two Ethernet ports from 192. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Step 3 View the /etc/hosts file to obtain the host name of the server and the IP addresses corresponding to the host names of the two Ethernet ports.10..10. you need not perform the following steps. For their correspondence.19 commands. For details about how to stop the M2000 services.10.168.11 to 10. you can infer that this new IP address is idle and can be used.8.168.19 #6140 192. the corresponding parameter is osssvr-1-bge0 and osssvr-1-bge2. # more /etc/hosts The system displays the following information: # # Internet host table # 127.168.10. the IP address corresponding to osssvr-1 is 192.

S10) Step 7 Check whether the Sybase services are running. 1. This section describes how to change the IP addresses 192. 3. -bash-3.00$ exit Step 8 Run the modify script to change the IP address of the server. enter the new IP address corresponding to the previous IP address in 8.Enter key p/P to return pre-step -. Choose 1--Single system > 1--IP.11]: b.10.sh 2.10. Please input the new ip[default 192.8. When the system output is similar to the following information. If not.8. enter the previous and new IP addresses.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.8./modify. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. enter the old IP address corresponding to osssvr-1-ce0.10.10. see 14.3.10. a. 192.18.. Based on the system prompts. press Enter.10.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started? and 14. Ltd.2.sh # cd /opt/OMC/tools/config # .19 to 10.2 How to Start the Sybase. enter the new IP address corresponding to the previous IP address in 8.11]: 10.dbuser For details about how to check and start the Sybase services. Please input the new ip[default 192.10.168.8.11 to 10.8.Enter key q/Q to exit this tools -----------------------------------------------------------------Please input the old ip[default 192. The default installation directory of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC.3. and 192. Run the modify script.10 c. You can use the modify script only when the IP address takes effect after the restart of the server.18]: 10.18 to 10.10. When the system output is similar to the following information.c. -----------------------------------------------------------------Note: -.19. /opt/OMC/svc_profile.18 d. CAUTION After being used to change the IP address of the server.8.10.168.8.18 e.10. run the following command to start the Sybase services: # su . When the system output is similar to the following information. The default values in the system output are used. When the system output is similar to the following information.168.168.a. Please input the old ip: 192. # .168. enter the old IP address corresponding to osssvr-1-ce2.2.168.168.Enter key f/F to finish ip input old-new ip pairs -. the modify script can not be used immediately to modify parameters. When the system output is similar to the following information.10. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 3-10 .

The system displays all the parameters that you set.19]: 10. Based on the system prompt. The default value in the system output is used as the previous default route. Please input the new router ip address[default 192.10.0]: d. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.255. When the system prompts you to enter the previous IP address.10.. -----------------------------------------------------------------Note: -. enter the new IP address corresponding to the previous IP address in 8. Then. The system displays the function menu of the modify script.19 g.0]: c. press Enter. When the system displays the following information. Please input the new ip[default 192.168.3. if you need to change multiple IP addresses.168.Enter key q/Q to exit this tools -----------------------------------------------------------------Please input the database superuser's password: emsems b.e. enter f or F when Please input the old ip: is displayed in 8. The default values in the system output are used. press Enter. Enter p or P. Enter q or Q to exit the modify script. Please input the old router ip address[default 192. 3-11 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . When the system output is similar to the following information.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Please input the old mask number[default 255. and default route.8.168. a.8.8. When the system output is similar to the following information. enter f or F. If the subnet mask is not changed. press Enter when you are prompted for a new IP address.1 NOTE l l l Enter p or P to return to the previous step.10.c.19 f. When the system output is similar to the following information. enter the new subnet mask. When the system output is similar to the following information. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. the default value is used. Then.10. 4. The default value in the system output is used as the previous subnet mask.168. enter the password of user sa and change the subnet mask. enter Y to apply the changes. you can perform this step again to change the settings of the relevant parameters. Enter q or Q to exit the modify script. Please input the old ip: f NOTE l l l l l l When running the modify script to change the IP address of the server. If you need not change a certain IP address. enter f or Fto finish entering IP address and proceed with the next step. enter all previous addresses to be changed and their new IP addresses here.1]: 10. go to the next step. Press Enter.3.1]: e. go to the next step. After confirmation. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Please input the old ip: 192. Then. 5.Enter key p/P to return pre-step -. Ltd.8.255. Please input the new mask number[default 255. If the maintenance dual-plane is not configured. This takes emsems as the password of user sa.255. When the system output is similar to the following information. Then. press Enter.255. When the system output is similar to the following information. enter the new default route. enter the password of user sa.

the system displays the following information and exits the modify script. Step 10 After restarting the server.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Are you sure to continue? Y--Yes. sync.00$ exit 3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Run the following commands to restart the M2000 server: # sync. S10) l l l l Enter Q to exit the script without performing any operations. you can infer that the change fails. R--Re-input P--Return pre-step Please make a choice[Y/Q/R/P]: Y NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Run the following command to check the status of the Sybase and M2000 services: # su . When the change is successful. sync.. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. Restart the server. sync. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. check the status of the Sybase and M2000 services. -bash-3.2. perform the relevant operations. Q--Quit. -----------------------------------------------------------------Operator complete! If the system output contains failed. see 14. sync. Enter R to return to Step 8. and then log in to the server as user root through the new IP addresses. 1.Contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. 6. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. CAUTION If the login fails or the Sybase and M2000 services are exceptional after the server is restarted.3. You need to wait for about three minutes if you run the modify script to change the IP address of the server. Enter P. Step 9 Based on the application scenario.dbuser For details about how to view the status of the Sybase services. 3. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i6 2. Perform Step 11 through Step 14. You can reconfigure the relevant parameters. Ltd. Whether to Change the Server IP Address on Different Network Segments No Yes Procedure Perform Step 10.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?.

/opt/OMC/svc_profile. Step 12 Log in to the server through the system controller (SC).00$ exit # . # su . sync.18 How to Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array.1. remote system controller (RSC). -bash-3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server # . CAUTION If the login fails or the Sybase and M2000 services are exceptional after the server is restarted.sh # svc_adm -cmd status ----End Postrequisite l (Optional) If the S2600 disk array is configured and the IP address of the server is configured as the Trap IP address of the S2600 disk array. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?.1. or extended system controller facility (XSCF). (Optional) If the S3000 series disk array is configured. see 14.19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays.sh # svc_adm -cmd status Step 11 Modify the gateway address information about the original network segment configured on the route switching device. sync. sync # /usr/sbin/shutdown -y -g0 -i6 Step 14 Use the new IP addresses to log in to the server as user root and check the status of the Sybase and M2000 services. sync. see the M2000 Software Initial Installation Guide (SUN. you need to reconfigure the monitoring function of the disk array after changing the IP address of the server. l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. see 14. Step 13 Run the following commands to restart the M2000 server: # sync. For details. 3-13 . Ltd.dbuser For details about how to check the status of the Sybase services. see 14.2. S10). sync.. For details. you need to reconfigure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array after changing the IP address of the server. /opt/OMC/svc_profile.

l If the IP address does not meet the requirements.10. S10) 3. On the client PC whose IP address is on the same network segment as the new IP address. it indicates that this new IP address is already used.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.3 Changing the IP Address of Ethernet Port nxge3 on the M2000 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 on the M2000 server to meet the site requirement. l Step 2 Check whether the new IP address is used. l l Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to check the IP address: # ifconfig -a The system displays the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 on the server. l Step 3 Perform the following steps on the server to change the existing IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 to a new IP address. Ethernet port nxge3 is used to connect the server and a disk array. If the IP address meets the requirements.241 command.241 as an example. you need not perform the following steps. Thus. open the DOS command window. Changing the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 does not affect the database services and the M2000 services. 3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If the IP address can be successfully pinged.241 to 10.8. If you have changed the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 on a different segment.168. Check whether the IP address meets the site requirements. the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 and the IP address of the disk array must be on the same network segment.10.10. Prerequisite Log in to the server as user root.2. Ltd. In this case. use another IP address. This takes changing the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 from 192. you need to change the IP address of the corresponding disk array to ensure that both changed IP addresses are on the same network segment.. it indicates that this IP address is idle and can be used. you need to perform the following steps to change it.10. If the IP address cannot be pinged. Context CAUTION l If the M4000/M5000 server is used. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and then run the ping 10.

Then. # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes Step 4 Modify the /etc/hostname.4.255.0 up ----End 3. Then. Then. l 3. proceed with Step 3. perform Step 4.3. it indicates that the two files are not linked.255. that is. 3-15 . you can log in to the M2000 server through the IP address of the SC/RSC/ XSCF to operate and maintain the server.10. Ltd.. Step 5 Run the following command for the new IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 to take effect: # ifconfig nxge3 10. Modify the /etc/hosts file to change the existing IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 to a new IP address. # vi /etc/hostname. Run the following command to check the link between the /etc/inet/ipnodes file and the / etc/inet/hosts file: # ls -al /etc/inet/ipnodes l If /etc/inet/ipnodes -> . S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server 1.241 netmask 255. Modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file to change the existing IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 to a new IP address. If /etc/inet/ipnodes -> .nxge3 file./hosts is contained in the system output. Then./hosts is not contained in the system output. it indicates that the files are not linked./inet/hosts is contained in the system output. perform Step 3. Run the following command to check the link between the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ hosts file: # ls -al /etc/hosts l If /etc/hosts -> .10. it indicates that the two files are linked. export=TERM # vi /etc/hosts 2. l 4. the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file are linked. # TERM=vt100.nxge3 file to change the existing IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 to a new IP address.4.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.nxge3 NOTE l l If this file records the information about host names. that is. In special situations. do not modify this file. In the /etc/hostname. it indicates that the two files are linked. If /etc/hosts -> ./inet/hosts is not contained in the system output.3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC or RSC or XSCF on the M2000 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC/RSC/XSCF on the M2000 server. no space is allowed at the beginning of each line of content. perform Step 3. the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ ipnodes file are not linked.

1 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the Netra 240 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC on the Netra 240 server to comply with the specification. Ltd. sc> setsc netsc_ipaddr new IP address of SC sc> setsc netsc_ipnetmask subnet mask of SC sc> setsc netsc_ipgateway gateway address of the SC Step 4 To restart the SC on the server.S10).4 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the T5220 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the SC on the T5220 server to ensure that the IP address meet the requirement. For details. 3.2 Changing the IP Address of the RSC on the V890 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the RSC on the V890 server. Step 2 Log in to the SC as user admin. The new IP address of the SC is planned.3.5 Changing the IP Address of the XSCF on the M4000/M5000 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the XSCF on the M4000/M5000 server to meet the actual requirements. run the following command: sc> resetsc ----End 3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. connect them through a serial port cable.3. The password for user admin of the SC is available.3.3. Step 3 Set the new IP address and the subnet mask for the SC on the server. 3. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command on the PC terminal to establish the connection between the PC and the SC: telnet original IP address of SC NOTE If the PC and SC cannot be connected by running the telnet command. 3.3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the E4900 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC on the E4900 server so that the new IP address complies with the specification.3. S10) 3. The IP address of the SC on the E4900 server can be the IP address of the standby SC1 or the IP address of the active SC0.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the Netra 240 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC on the Netra 240 server to comply with the specification. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 3. 3. Prerequisite l l l The PC terminal and the interface of the SC on the server communicate normally..3. refer to M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (Sun.

X NOTE l l l In ip_addr X.X.. X.X rsc> set ip_gateway X.X.X.X. A new IP address of the SC is planned.X.X. The IP address of the SC on the E4900 server can be the IP address of the standby SC1 or the IP address of the active SC0.X.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Step 3 Restart the RSC for the modification to take effect.X rsc> set ip_netmask X. 3-17 l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . X. rsc> resetrsc When the system prompts the following message. X.X.X.3.X.X.X indicates a new gateway planned for the RSC.3 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the E4900 Server This section describes how to modify the IP address of the SC on the E4900 server so that the new IP address complies with the specification.X. You have obtained the password of the RSC user admin. Are you sure you want to reboot RSC (Yes/No)? ----End 3.X.2 Changing the IP Address of the RSC on the V890 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the RSC on the V890 server.X. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server 3. Prerequisite l l l The network communication between the PC terminal and the RSC server is normal. Prerequisite l The PC terminal communicates normally with the ports of the standby SC1 and the active SC0. In ip_netmask X.X.X. In ip_gateway X.X.3.X indicates a new subnet mask planned for the RSC.X. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command on the PC terminal to establish the connection between the PC and the RSC: telnet original IP address of RSC Step 2 Log in to the RSC and run the following commands to change the IP address of RSC: rsc> set ip_mode config rsc> set ip_addr X. type y for confirmation.X.X indicates a new IP address planned for the RSC. The two new IP addresses of the SC are planned. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.X. Ltd.X.

retain the default settings and press Enter. Ltd. If you need to modify only the IP address of the SC1. When the system displays any parameter that is not listed in Table 3-2. 4. Are you sure you want to reboot the system controller now? [no] NOTE l l When the system prompts other messages. if required yes Hostname IP Address Netmask Gateway Enable SC Failover? [no]: 5. Run the following command on the PC terminal to establish the connection between the PC and the SC1: telnet original IP address of SC1 NOTE If the PC and SC1 cannot be connected by the telnet command. connect them through a serial port cable. Restart the backup SC1. refer to M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (M4000/M5000. :sc> setupplatform NOTE When using the command setupplatform to change the IP address of SC1. you also need to enter parameters such as the host name of SC1. if required Enter the IP address of the actual gateway. 3. 2. For details. You need to wait for a while.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. enter y. S10). Restarting SC1 takes some time. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . press Enter to continue. S10) Procedure Step 1 Change the IP address of the standby SC1.. Set the parameters for the standby controller. Log in to the SC as user admin. 1. Change the IP address of SC1 according to Table 3-2. :sc> reboot When the system prompts the following message. 3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 3-2 Parameters for the standby controller Parameter Use DHCP or static network settings? [DHCP]: Value static Retain the host name of SC1 Enter the new IP address of SC1 Enter the actual subnet mask. and then press Enter. retain the original settings of other parameters.

Are you sure you want to reboot the system controller now? [no] Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The osssvr-1-sc1 is the host name of SC1. 3-19 . If you need to modify only the IP address of the SC0. 1. S10). press Enter to continue. :SC> setupplatform NOTE When using the setupplatform command to change the IP address of SC0. Ltd. 2. telnet original IP address of SC0 NOTE If the PC and SC0 cannot be connected by the telnet command. connect them through a serial port cable. retain the original settings of other parameters. When the system prompts any parameter that is not listed in Table 3-3. Run the following commands on the PC terminal to establish the connection between the PC and the SC0. enter y.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. none) [telnet]: Logical Hostname or IP Address [ ]: 4. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server When the system displays osssvr-1-sc1:sc>. For details. 3. Restart the backup SC0.. and then press Enter. telnet. Table 3-3 Parameters for the standby controller Parameter Use DHCP or static network settings? [DHCP]: Value static Retain the host name of SC0 Enter the new IP address of SC0 Enter the actual subnet mask. Configure the parameters for the active controller. you can infer that the controller is restarted. refer to M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (M4000/M5000. :SC> reboot When the system prompts the following message. if required yes telnet Retain the logical host name of the SC Hostname IP Address Netmask Gateway Enable SC Failover? [no]: Connection type (ssh. if required Enter the IP address of the actual gateway. Change the IP address of SC0 according to Table 3-3. you also need to enter parameters such as the host name of SC0. Step 2 Change the IP address of the active SC0.

Prerequisite l l l The PC terminal and the network port of the SC on the server communicate well. enter IP address of the SC in Host Name (or IP Address). If the PC and SC cannot be connected through the PuTTY. For details. 3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The sc> prompt is displayed. refer to the corresponding Software Initialization Installation Guide.5 Changing the IP Address of the XSCF on the M4000/M5000 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the XSCF on the M4000/M5000 server to meet the actual requirements.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select SSH. you can infer that the controller is restarted. The new IP address of the SC is planned. When the system displays osssvr-1-sc0:SC>.com to download the PuTTY to the PC. S10) l l When the system prompts other messages.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .3. You need to wait for a while. sc> setsc netsc_ipaddr new IP address of the SC sc> setsc netsc_ipnetmask subnet mask of the SC sc> setsc netsc_ipgateway IP address of the SC gateway Step 4 Run the following command to change the IP address and subnet mask of the SC: sc> setsc netsc_commit true ----End 3. Step 2 Enter the user name admin and the password to log in to the SC. ----End 3. In the window of the PuTTY Configuration. keep the default settings and press Enter.4 Modifying the IP Address of the SC on the T5220 Server This section describes how to change the IP address of the SC on the T5220 server to ensure that the IP address meet the requirement. The name osssvr-1-sc0 is the host name of SC0. Procedure Step 1 Start the PuTTY on the PC terminal and set up the connection between the PC and the SC based on the SSH protocol. Restarting SC1 takes some time. and click Open to log in to the SC. Ltd. connect them by using a serial port cable.huawei.3. The password for user admin of the SC is available. Step 3 Set the new IP address and the subnet mask for the SC on the server. NOTE l l Log in to the http://support.

Step 6 When the system displays Do you want to set up the XSCF network interfaces? [y|n]:. you need to use the IP address of port 0 to log in to the XSCF. connect them through a serial port cable.. 3-21 . A new IP address of the XSCF is planned. and gateway IP address of xscf#0-lan#0. xscf#0-lan#0 ip address: X.X. Step 2 Log in to the XSCF as user adminuser. and then press Enter. 1.X Are these settings correct? [y|n]: y Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. subnet mask.X xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway: X. type y. 2. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Prerequisite l l l The communication between the PC and port 0 on the XSCF is normal. and then press Enter. Check the entered information. NOTE l l l l To log in to the XSCF of the M4000/M5000 server.255.X. see M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (T5220&M4000&M5000. Thus. The password of user adminuser is available. type y.X.huawei.0]: xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway? []: 3. type n. XSCF> setupplatform Step 4 When the system displays Do you want to set up an account? [y|n]:. S10) If the PC and XSCF cannot be connected by running the telnet command. Step 5 When the system displays Do you want to set up networking? [y|n]:. For details about how to log in to the XSCF through the PuTTY. Log in to the http://support. subnet mask. type y.X. Procedure Step 1 Start the PuTTY on the PC and log in to the XSCF of the server through the telnet. For details. S10).255. enter the IP address.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see M2000 Software Initialization Installation Guide (T5220&M4000&M5000. Ltd. When the M4000/M5000 server is used as the M2000 server. When the system displays the following prompt. port 0 on the XSCF is used for networking.X xscf#0-lan#0 netmask: X. Context l l Port 0 and port 1 on the XSCF are independent of each other. use the IP address of port 0 on the XSCF. Step 7 Set the IP address. and then press Enter. When the system displays Do you want to configure xscf#0-lan#0? [y| n]:. Step 3 Run the following command to change the IP address of the XSCF.com to download the PuTTY to the PC.X.X. and gateway IP address of port 0 on the XSCF according to the planning: xscf#0-lan#0 ip address? []: xscf#0-lan#0 netmask? [255.

X.X :-n 0.X. Thus.. Then. type n.0 -g X.9.X. Step 8 When the system displays Do you want to configure xscf#0-lan#1? [y| n]: . Step 10 When the system displays Do you want to configure lan#1? [y|n]:.X. you need not configure the SSH protocol.X. the https will not be enabled. Thus.0. In xscf#0-lan#0 netmask: X. X. Step 17 When the system displays Do you want to apply the network changes? [y| n]:.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.0 -m 0.X. the email function will not be enabled.X.0 -m 0. Step 16 When the system displays Do you want to configure email reports? [y| n]:.X.X :xscf#0-lan#1 :up :192. you need not configure the DSCP protocol. Step 18 Check the network configuration information about the XSCF. you need not configure the take over function for network adapter 1. the XSCF automatically restarts.255.X indicates a new subnet mask planned for port 0 on the XSCF. Step 9 When the system displays Do you want to configure lan#0? [y|n]:. type n.0.X. Thus. Step 12 When the system displays Do you want to set up the domain name service? [y|n]:.X.0. Step 11 When the system displays Do you want to set up the DSCP network? [y| n]:. type n.0.X. Step 15 When the system displays Do you want to set up https? [y|n]:. Ltd. Step 13 When the system displays Do you want to set up the network time protocol? [y|n]:.X.X. X. Step 14 When the system displays Do you want to set up ssh? [y|n]:.0.X.X.X.0. you need not configure the take over function for network adapter 0. ----End 3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.X indicates a new gateway IP address planned for port 0 on the XSCF.255.0.254 Step 19 When the system displays Do you want to reboot the XSCF now? [y|n]:.X. type n. Then.0. X.X indicates a new IP address planned for port 0 on the XSCF. The following network settings will be applied: xscf#0 hostname :osssvr-1-xscf0 DNS domain name : interface status IP address netmask route interface status IP address netmask route Continue? [y|n] :y :xscf#0-lan#0 :up :X.X :X. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Thus.0 :-n 0. type y.X. Then.X. type n.9. you need not configure the NTP service.168. In xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway: X. Thus. S10) l l l In xscf#0-lan#0 ip address: X. type y. type n.168.X.141 :255. type n. type n. type n.X.0 -g 192.

change of IP addresses does not affect data read operations on the disk array. 3.4.1 Modifying the IP Address of the 3320 Disk Array This describes how to modify the IP address of the 3320 disk array. change of IP addresses does not affect data read and write operations on the disk array. change the IP address according to the actual situation. In addition. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server 3. you need to log in to the 3320 disk array through PC or administration console. change of IP addresses does not affect data read and write operations on the disk array.. In addition. use the factory default IP address of the disk array. Therefore. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers. changing the IP address of the disk array does not affect data read operations on the disk array. change of IP addresses does not affect data read and write operations on the disk array. 3.4 Changing the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the 6140 disk array. change the IP address according to the actual situation. 3-23 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 3. Normally. use the factory default IP address of the disk array. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.1 Modifying the IP Address of the 3320 Disk Array This describes how to modify the IP address of the 3320 disk array. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. you can maintain the disk array easily. Generally. Normally. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Normally. In addition. you need to log in to the 3320 disk array through PC or administration console. Generally. In addition. Prerequisite l l The SUNWsscs software has been installed on the server. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.4 Modifying the IP Address of the Disk Array This section describes how to modify the IP address of the disk array. If you need to change the IP address of the disk array. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers. 3. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. use the factory default IP address of the disk array. Normally. By modifying the IP address of the disk array. change it according to the actual situation.4.4. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. change the IP address according to the actual situation. use the factory default IP address of the disk array. Ltd.4. All the IO operations related to the disk array have been stopped.3 Changing the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of an S2600 disk array in serial port mode.4. change the IP address according to the actual situation.2 Changing the IP Address of the S3200 Series Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the S3200 series disk array. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers. Generally. You need to configure each S2600 disk array. To perform this task. To perform this task. Generally. 3. It is strongly recommended that you retain the default IP address of the disk array.

255.39 netmask 255. enter y. After the modification. Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/hosts file and to replace the existing IP address of the disk array with a new one.8.. Ltd. If the file records the new IP address of the disk array. Are you sure? Step 4 (Optional) Modify the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. After the modification. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the 3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. press Esc and then run the :wq! command to save the modification and exit.168.2 Changing the IP Address of the S3200 Series Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the S3200 series disk array. NOTE To change the disk array IP address recorded in the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. S10) Procedure Step 1 To modify the IP address of the 3320 disk array. you need not stop the M2000 services and the database services.168. the following message is displayed: sccli changes will not take effect until controller is reset Step 2 To restart the controller. 3. 1.8.255. run the following command: sccli > configure network-interface lan0 ip-address 192.255. Log in to server as user root. 2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .1 Then.1. you need not perform any modification. Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. l ----End 3.255. Supposing the subnet mask is 255. press Esc and then run the :wq command to save the modification and exit.8. # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the file records the existing IP address of the disk array. you need not restart the server either.8. Normally.168. run the following command: # sccli sccli > configure network-interface lan0 ip-address IP address netmask Subnet mask gateway Gateway address Take the setting of the IP address for the 3320 disk array to 192. replace the existing IP address with the new one. Press Esc and then run the :q command to exit.0 gateway 192.168.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # vi /etc/hosts After the modification. run the following command: sccli > reset controller Step 3 When the system displays the following prompt.4.0 while the gateway address is 192.39 as an example.

the communication may fail. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server server directly through optical fibers. Generally. Ethernet port nxge3 is used to connect the server and a disk array. change the IP address according to the actual situation. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. Step 4 Select the PC serial port that is connected to the SC. When changing the IP address of a controller. such as COM1. Step 5 Set the properties of the serial port. Each controller has two Ethernet ports. If you have changed the IP address of the disk array on a different segment. In addition. Step 3 In the Connection Description dialog box. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. enter a name for the new connection. click OK. Ethernet port 2 is reserved for maintenance.) Step 2 Choose Start > Programs (P) > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal. Figure 3-1 shows the disk array. 3-25 . The serial port cable delivered with the disk array is special for the storage device. Context The S3200 disk array has two controllers. A DB-9 connector at one end of the serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the PC. You configure the controller that is connected to the serial port (Controller A is on the left while controller B is on the right. Figure 3-1 Serial ports of the S3X00 NOTE You must use the serial port cable that is delivered with the disk array instead of the serial port cable of other devices. you need to change the IP address of the corresponding Ethernet port nxge3 to ensure that both changed IP addresses are on the same network segment.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. A 6-thread round connector at the other end is connected to the port of the disk array controller. the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 and the IP address of the disk array must be on the same network segment. Ltd. use the factory default IP address of the disk array.. Then. For details about how to set the properties of a serial port. If the M4000/M5000 server is used. If you do not use this serial port. Thus. Procedure Step 1 Use the serial port cable to connect the serial port of the controller of the disk array and that of the PC. see Table 3-4. change of IP addresses does not affect data read and write operations on the disk array. only Ethernet port 1 needs to be modified.

. you need not restart the server either. Press within 5 seconds: <S>for Service Interface . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the modification. -> netCfgShow Step 10 Run the netCfgSet command to set the IP address of the network port.39 after Subnet Mask if0. 3-26 Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. enter 192. NOTE To change the disk array IP address recorded in the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. you need not stop the M2000 services and the database services. To change the subnet mask. 1. Network Configuration successfully written to NVSRAM. S10) Table 3-4 Setting properties of the serial port Property Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Data stream control Value 9600/38400 8 Null 1 Null Step 6 Press Ctrl+Break to activate Shell of the serial port.8.8. 2.168. enter the login password infiniti and press Enter to log in to the disk array and to configure Shell. enter Esc within five seconds. Step 11 Press Enter. press Esc and then run the :wq! command to save the modification and exit. <BREAK>for band rate Step 8 If the following information is displayed. The following information is displayed after the successful modification. Log in to server as user root. 3. # vi /etc/hosts After the modification.39 after IP Address if0. Enter 192. Enter password to access shell: Step 9 Run the following command to check the information about the configuration network port of the controller where the user logs in. The Shell Login interface is displayed. Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/hosts file and to replace the existing IP address of the disk array with a new one.168. Step 13 (Optional) Modify the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. Step 7 If the following information is displayed in the HyperTerminal window.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The settings of port if1 remain unchanged. Step 12 Use the serial port cable to connect the serial port of controller B and that of the PC to change the IP address of the configuration network port of the other controller in the same way. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. NOTE Only port if0 needs to be configured.

Before changing the IP address. For details. 3. In the case of remote operations. Figure 3-2 shows the disk array. you need to reconfigure the monitoring function of the disk array. Therefore. Replace it with the actual IP address. If the file records the new IP address of the disk array. If you need to change the IP address of the disk array. If you change the IP addresses of disk arrays on different network segments. Ltd. You need to configure each S2600 disk array. Then.1. You need to reconfigure the two series disk arrays. see 14. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the file records the existing IP address of the disk array. Each controller has a CLI serial port. change the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port on the corresponding server to ensure that two changed IP addresses are on the same network segment.1. see 14. changing the IP address of the disk array does not affect data read operations on the disk array. The IP address mentioned here is only an example. change it according to the actual situation.13 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Command Mode)?. The serial port mode is preferred because it features high success rate in changing IP addresses. determine whether to re-set the IP address according to the actual situation.4. Press Esc and then run the :q command to exit. It is strongly recommended that you retain the default IP address of the disk array.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you need not perform any modification. Context l Each S2600 disk array has an active controller and a standby controller. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays in the corresponding Administrator Guide.. You can change the IP address in serial port mode or command mode. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must familiarize yourself with the default IP address planning at delivery. For details. replace the existing IP address with the new one. 3-27 . l l l l Procedure Step 1 Use the serial port cable to connect any serial port on the controller of the disk array and that of the PC. After the modification.3 Changing the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of an S2600 disk array in serial port mode. l ----End Postrequisite (Optional) After changing the IP address of the S3200 disk array. press Esc and then run the :wq command to save the modification and exit. use the command mode.

you need to use the HyperTerminal or any other program provided by the Windows operating system to log in to the CLI serial port. 3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. for example. When using the serial port cable to connect a control to the maintenance terminal. S10) Figure 3-2 Serial ports provided by the S2600 disk array NOTE l l You need to use the serial port cable that is delivered with the disk array. Step 3 In the Connection Description dialog box. the disk array may fail to be connected. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . type the name of a new connection. as shown in Figure 3-3. and then click OK. COM1. a dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Specify a serial port of the PC terminal to connect the PC terminal to the disk array. When disconnecting the control from the maintenance terminal.. Table 3-5 Setting the properties of a serial port Property Bits per second Data bits Parity check Stop bits Flow control Property Value 115200 8 None 1 None Step 6 Press Enter. Otherwise. Step 5 Set the properties of the serial port by referring to Table 3-5. If the connection is successful. l l Step 2 Choose Start > Programs (P) > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal on the PC. you must use the serial port cable to connect the maintenance terminal first. After using the serial port cable to connect a controller to the maintenance terminal. Ltd. you must remove the serial port cable from the control first. After using the DB9-RJ45 serial port cable to connect a controller and the maintenance terminal.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. do not enable the control and the maintenance terminal at the same time.

3-29 . CAUTION The initial name and password of the administrator is admin and 123456. Figure 3-4 Successful login dialog box Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Then the successful login success dialog box is displayed. To ensure the system security. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Figure 3-3 Successful connection interface Step 7 In the successful connection interface. as shown in Figure 3-4. type the user name and password. respectively.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you need to change the password after the initial login..

255.20 -s 255.0 -g 10.15. to change the IP address of the Ethernet port that is managed by controller B to 10.0 This operation will change your controller's IP configuration. type y: OceanStor: admin> chgctrlip -c a -a 10.15. to change the IP address of the Ethernet port that is managed by controller A to 10.1 MAC Address ----End Postrequisite During commissioning. run the following command: OceanStor:admin> chgctrlip -c b -a 10. S10) Step 8 Run the following command to set the IP address of the Ethernet port managed by controller A: OceanStor:admin> chgctrlip -c a -a new IP address of controller A -s subnet mask -g gateway For example.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.71. see section "Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array".. if the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array is configured. you need to reconfigure this function after changing the IP address of the server.0 -g 10.71. run the following command: OceanStor:admin> chgctrlip -c a -a 10.255.15.15. Ltd. if you change the IP of the peer controller.15. if you want to ch ange the IP of the controller you logged in.1 When the system displays the following prompt.0 Gateway 10.71.15. you needn't log out.0 Gateway 10.255.1 When the system displays the following prompt. 3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.71. However.15.21 00:18:82:e2:01:57 Controller Subnet Mask 255.71. For details.255. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .255. if you want to ch ange the IP of the controller you logged in.15.15.71.71.255.20 00:18:82:e2:00:fb Subnet Mask 255. you will log out after you set the new IP.20. type y: This operation will change your controller's IP configuration. see section "How to Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array" in the corresponding administrator manual.71.255. you needn't log out. However. For details.255. Do you want to continue? y or n: y Step 11 Run the following command to check whether the IP address is correct: OceanStor:admin> showctrlip -c b IP Address B 10. if you change the IP of the peer controller.21. Do you want to continue? y or n: y Step 9 Run the following command to check whether the IP address is correct: OceanStor:admin> showctrlip -c a Controller IP Address A 10. you will log out after you set the new IP.20 -s 255.21 -s 255.15.71.1 MAC Address Step 10 Run the following command to set the IP address of the Ethernet port managed by controller B: OceanStor:admin> chgctrlip -c b -a new IP address of controller A -s subnet mask -g gateway For example.71. During maintenance.71.15. you need to configure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array after you install and configure the M2000 client application.255.255.

Generally. If the M4000/M5000 server is used. Each controller has two Ethernet ports. Thus. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. Figure 3-5 Serial ports of the 6140 disk array NOTE Two serial port cables are attached to the pallet of each controller. only Ethernet port 1 needs to be modified.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. When changing the IP address of a controller. use the factory default IP address of the disk array. Ethernet port nxge3 is used to connect the server and a disk array. change the IP address according to the actual situation.4 Changing the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Serial Port Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the 6140 disk array. Ethernet port 2 is reserved for maintenance. Procedure Step 1 Connect the 6-pin mini DIN connector of the basic cable to the serial port connector of controller A. 3-31 . the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 and the IP address of the disk array must be on the same network segment. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the other end is the basic cable of the standard 9-pin serial port connector. Normally. Figure 3-5 shows the disk array. l l One end is the 6-pin mini DIN connector. Ltd.4. If you have changed the IP address of the disk array on a different segment. Extended cables of the standard 9-pin serial port connector are attached to both ends. Context The 6140 disk array has two controllers. change of IP addresses does not affect data read operations on the disk array. In addition. you need to change the IP address of the corresponding Ethernet port nxge3 to ensure that both changed IP addresses are on the same network segment. Step 2 Connect the 9-pin serial extended cable from the 9-pin connector of the basic cable to the serial port connector of the PC. you need not change the IP address of the disk array because the disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers..

The system prompts you to enter the password. Step 7 Press Ctrl+Break.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Step 8 Press the spacebar within five seconds. 3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Choose the PC serial port that connects to the connector. COM1. Set the corresponding escape sequence for the terminal configuration. <BREAK> for baud rate Step 10 Press S. Then. and then press Enter. press Ctrl and Break at the same time to generate the Break character on certain terminals. Step 12 If the following information is displayed. and then send the essential Break to the controller of the disk array. Enter Password to access Service Interface (60 sec timeout): . The serial port The serial port check the baud rate set up for the connection. Step 4 In the Connection Description dialog box. The serial port responds with the following information: Press within 5 seconds: <S> for Service Interface..> Step 11 Enter the password kra16wen. Baud rate set to 38400 Step 9 Press Ctrl+Break. Set baud rate: press <space> within 5 seconds NOTE The serial ports on the disk array request that Break be accepted. enter a name for the new connection. Table 3-6 Setting properties of the serial port Property Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Data stream control Value 38400 8 Null 1 Null After the connection is complete. CAUTION S must be in upper case. click OK. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . S10) Step 3 Choose Start > Programs (P) > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal on the PC. a physical connection between the PC and the 6140 disk array is set up. for example. type 2. Step 6 Set the properties of the serial portaccording to Table 3-6. Ltd. For instance. The serial port responses with a request so that the baud rate can be synchronized with that on the PC.

255.. Ltd. Press '-' to return to the previous field. type 1. Select Ethernet Port ============================== 1) Ethernet Port: 0 2) Ethernet Port: 1 Q) Quit Enter Selection: 1 The IP address of the selected Ethernet port is displayed. enter Q to exit. type n. Press <ENTER> and then ^D to quit (Keep Changes) Current Configuration New Configuration IP Address if1 : 192.101 IP-address Subnet Mask if1 : 255. perform operations Step 12 through Step 17 to configure the IP address of the controller again. S10) 3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server Service Interface Main Menu ============================== 1) Display IP Configuration 2) Change IP Configuration 3) Reset Storage Array (SYMbol) Password Q) Quit Menu Enter Selection: Step 13 If the following information is displayed. Configure using DHCP ? (Y/N): n Step 15 If the following information is displayed.168.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. NOTE The subnet mask is optional.0 <ENTER> After the configuration. Service Interface Main Menu ============================== 1) Display IP Configuration 2) Change IP Configuration 3) Reset Storage Array (SYMbol) Password Q) Quit Menu Enter Selection: Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Press '. Check whether the modified IP address is correct again. Select Ethernet Port ============================== 1) Ethernet Port: 0 2) Ethernet Port: 1 Q) Quit Enter Selection: 1 Step 14 If the following information is displayed. type 1.' to clear the field. Step 16 If the following information is displayed. Service Interface Main Menu ============================== 1) Display IP Configuration 2) Change IP Configuration 3) Reset Storage Array (SYMbol) Password Q) Quit Menu Enter Selection: Step 17 If the following information is displayed. type 1. The DHCP function is not used to configure the dynamic IP address for the port. 3-33 . the system displays the information about the specified IP address.128. enter the IP address of controller A and its subnet mask.255. Step 18 If the following information is displayed. If the modified IP address is incorrect.

you need not perform any modification. If the file records the new IP address of the disk array. Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 3. After the modification. replace the existing IP address with the new one. l ----End 3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. press Esc and then run the :wq! command to save the modification and exit. Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/hosts file and to replace the existing IP address of the disk array with a new one. 2. 1. Step 20 (Optional) Modify the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. After the modification. Press Esc and then run the :q command to exit. you need not restart the server either. you need not stop the M2000 services and the database services. S10) Step 19 Perform Step 1 through Step 18 again to change the IP address of control B in the same way. # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the file records the existing IP address of the disk array. NOTE To change the disk array IP address recorded in the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. # vi /etc/hosts After the modification. press Esc and then run the :wq command to save the modification and exit.3 Setting the Host Name and IP Address for the M2000 Server M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Log in to server as user root.

2 Monitoring the Login Status of the M2000 Clients This section describes how to monitor the login status of the M2000 clients (including the LMTs which access NEs through the M2000 proxy).4 Setting the Time Information on the M2000 Client This section describes how to set the time information on the M2000 client.1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 clients. 4. upgrade. l 4. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and uninstall the M2000 client are Windows users. The users who are responsible for the routine maintenance of the M2000 client must belong to the user group Users and have the read and write rights of the M2000 client installation directory. The requirements of the M2000 client for operation rights are as follows: The users who are authorized to install. Ltd. 4.3 Setting the Number of Clients Accessible on a PC This section describes how to edit the configuration file on the M2000 client for setting the number of clients of the same version (excluding the LMTs that gain access to NEs through the M2000 proxy) that can be started on a PC. S10) 4 Managing the M2000 Clients 4 About This Chapter Context l Managing the M2000 Clients This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 clients.. The graphic user interface (GUI) on the M2000 client supports the O&M for the NEs and enables you to monitor the M2000. They belong to the user group Administrators. When the number of login clients exceeds the preset maximum number of M2000 threads. 4. 4-1 .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you must force a user out to establish a new connection. You must manage the M2000 clients to ensure their normal operation.

1. Refers to directory where executable files are located. ensure that the files to be deleted are not required for future operations. The default path is C:\iManagerM2000Client. Refers to the directory for saving client programs.1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System This introduces the M2000 client file system. S refers to the size of mediation files. Table 4-1 describes the parameters specified in the equations. which depends on the actual situation.1.1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System This introduces the M2000 client file system.2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client This section describes how to clear the disk space of an M2000 client. The client software runs on the Windows operating system and is based on the JAVA virtual machine. The installation package of the M2000 client software includes the JAVA virtual machine supported by Windows.4 Managing the M2000 Clients M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. where I refers to the size of the initial version. about 300 MB. T refers to the temporary space for saving patches. NOTE This directory appears only after you run the M2000 diagnosis tool. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Table 4-1 M2000 client software directory Directory client installation path M2000 client installation path\client M2000 client installation path\client\bin M2000 client installation path\client \Data M2000 client installation path\client \diagnosis Description Refers to the M2000 client installation path. Refers to the directory for saving the information that is used for locating problems. Ltd. 4.1. Required client disk space (only for reference): F = I + T + (S x N). Refers to the directory for saving the NE configuration files. Refers to the directory for saving the Dtd files. Before performing this operation. 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 clients. which ranges from 3 MB to 10 MB. S10) 4. 4. 4. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system operation error. N refers to the number of NE versions. that is.. which is less than 20 MB. M2000 client installation path\client \ext_runcfg M2000 client installation path\client\dtd Refers to the directory where the files related to integrated components are located.

4-3 . Refers to the directory for saving the library files. Refers to the directory for saving the uninstaller. Stores the configuration files of the M2000 client. Stores the CBB files of the M2000 client.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Refers to the directory for saving the trace files. Ltd. Refers to the root directory of the iSStar script. Stores the configuration files of the subsystems of the M2000 client as plug-ins. Refers to the directory in which the files for configuring the startup parameters of the client and components are located. Refers to the directory for saving the upgrade files. Refers to the directory for saving the configuration files of client. Refers to the directory for saving the mapping between administrative regions and their IDs.. Refers to the directory for saving the localWS dynamic link libraries. S10) 4 Managing the M2000 Clients Directory M2000 client installation path\client\help M2000 client installation path\client \IDAPI32 M2000 client installation path\client\lib M2000 client installation path\client \localWs M2000 client installation path\client \style M2000 client installation path\client \Templates M2000 client installation path\client\tmp M2000 client installation path\client \tracefile M2000 client installation path\client \update M2000 client installation path\client\cbb M2000 client installation path\client \configuration M2000 client installation path\client \features M2000 client installation path\client \plugins M2000 client installation path\uninstall M2000 client installation path\script M2000 client installation path\client\bin \run Description Refers to the directory for saving the online help files. Refers to the directory for saving temporary files during the upgrade. Stores the feature configuration files of the subsystems of the M2000 client. Refers to the directory for saving LocalShell that is used to start the 2G LMT. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

4 Managing the M2000 Clients M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you need to upgrade the client. If the document abstracts are not consistent. document abstract. back up and clear the following files: l l Trace logs Temporary files after the running of the M2000 log collector Procedure l 4-4 Delete the trace logs. and upgrade. ensure that the files to be deleted are not required for future operations.2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client This section describes how to clear the disk space of an M2000 client. they can be compared with those files grouped and packed by the server. Thus. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . install. script framework tool client and datamanager client. Ltd.1. During the routine O&M. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the server groups and packs all the client documents deployed on the server for the client to download. Based on the group information. l Based on the group information. Before performing this operation. Do not delete the files generated on that day. and group information about the M2000 client are located. S10) Directory M2000 client installation path\cau Description Refers to the installation directory of the cau (Client Auto Upgrade) client software and the directory in which the version.. when these files are being downloaded. NOTE l The cau(Client Auto Upgrade) client software provides an upgrade detection mechanism that is based on the document abstract. Context CAUTION You can delete the files when the client is running. Stores the library files of M2000 client. 4. M2000 client installation path\jre M2000 client installation path\lib Stores the Java virtual machine of the M2000. the client also groups and packs all client files. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system operation error. remote notification client. It also compares the document abstract of the server with that of the client.

Step 2 Choose Security > Monitor User Sessions. The M2000 client is running properly.. you must force a user out to establish a new connection. l Delete the temporary files generated after the running of the M2000 log collector. select the user.3 Setting the Number of Clients Accessible on a PC This section describes how to edit the configuration file on the M2000 client for setting the number of clients of the same version (excluding the LMTs that gain access to NEs through the M2000 proxy) that can be started on a PC. ensure that you are authorized to monitor the users. Prerequisite Before monitoring the M2000 clients. 4-5 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. It is recommended that you preserve the trace logs generated in the latest two weeks. Procedure Step 1 Start the M2000 client and log in to the M2000 server. ----End 4. Step 5 If you need to force a user to exit.2 Monitoring the Login Status of the M2000 Clients This section describes how to monitor the login status of the M2000 clients (including the LMTs which access NEs through the M2000 proxy). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the PC as a user in the user group Users. and then click Force User to Exit. The current user cannot force itself to exit. ----End 4. Step 4 Click Refresh to refresh the session list. Delete the temporary files that are generated after the running of the M2000 log collector and are saved in the directory M2000 client installation path\client\diagnosis. Step 3 Click the Monitor User Sessions tab to monitor all the terminals connected to the M2000 system. When the number of login clients exceeds the preset maximum number of M2000 threads. The Monitor User Sessions dialog box is displayed. Pay special attention to information such as login IP address and login time. The users of the other clients do not exit. Ltd. This step is optional. NOTE The user of the selected client is forced out. S10) 4 Managing the M2000 Clients Delete the history trace logs saved in the directory M2000 client installation path\client \tracefile.

Then. the system displays an Error message. If all the ports are occupied. time. and time zone on the M2000 client means modifying the date.4. Type cmd. The ports may be used by other applications. In the M2000 client installation directory\client\plugins\com. Time..swimap. S10) Context Ideally.cm\style\productstyle\com. Ensure that the ports in the modified range on the firewall are enabled when you modify the port range. You can set the maximum number of clients of the same version started on a PC by modifying the value of corba_portpool.corba\conf\communicate. In the displayed window.4 Setting the Time Information on the M2000 Client This section describes how to set the time information on the M2000 client. Choose Start > Run.xml file. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 4. and Time Zone on the M2000 Client This section describes how to modify the date. 2.swimap.1 Modifying the Date. ----End 4.xml file in the M2000 client installation path\client\plugins \com.cm\style\productstyle \com. a maximum of 31 M2000 clients of the same version can be started on a PC. The client tests the port from the minimum number to the maximum number. Modifying the date. Procedure Step 1 Open the communicate. time. click OK. and then change the range of the ports as required.corba\conf directory. The minimum port number is separated from the maximum number by "-". 3. the value of corba_portpool indicates the port range that the client attempts to occupy. 4. and time zone on the M2000 client that is based on the Windows operating system.2 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client 4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Run dialog box is displayed.4 Managing the M2000 Clients M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Perform the following substeps to check the occupation of the ports.omc. Ltd. <?xml version="1. time. The number of clients of the same version connected to a PC depends on the configuration of the PC and that of the server connected to the PC. and time zone of Windows.omc. 1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?> <!DOCTYPE COMMINIDATA SYSTEM "commini.dtd"> <COMMINIDATA> <AREADESC areaname="communicate"> <DESC descname="communicate"> <PARAS> <PARA name="operation" value="modify"></PARA> <PARA name="corba_portpool" value="30500-30699"/> </PARAS> </DESC> </AREADESC> </COMMINIDATA> NOTE l l l The ports after modification cannot exceed the range from 30500 to 30699.4. Step 2 Find the corba_portpool field. run the netstat -an command to check the occupation of the ports.

S10) 4 Managing the M2000 Clients This section describes how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client. and time zone on the M2000 client means modifying the date. time. select the items to be modified. This task enables you to synchronize the client with the NTP server through the NTP service of the Windows operating system.4. Step 4 Click Apply. 4. Step 2 Double-click Date and Time. This task enables you to synchronize the client with the NTP server through the NTP service of the Windows operating system. Prerequisite l You have logged in to the Windows operating system. The Windows operating system is running properly. time. 4-7 l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Modifying the date.. and time zone on the M2000 client that is based on the Windows operating system. time.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Prerequisite The Windows operating system is operational. The clock source of the server is operational.4. and Time Zone on the M2000 Client This section describes how to modify the date. Step 3 In the Date and Time Properties dialog box. choose the local time zone from the drop-down list. Item Hour Minute Second Operation Set the required hour on the Time tab page.2 Setting the NTP Service on the M2000 Client This section describes how to set the M2000 client as the NTP client. Set the required second on the Time tab page. The M2000 client and the M2000 server communicate normally. This takes the Windows XP operating system as an example. Time Zone Click the Time Zone tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Open the Control Panel.1 Modifying the Date. and time zone of Windows. Time. Set the required minute on the Time tab page. Ltd. ----End 4. On the Time Zone tab page.

Type cmd and press Enter. Identify the Windows Time service and restart the service. In the registry. Step 2 Specify the NTP clock source. Choose Start > Run. l l If the M2000 client runs on Windows 2000 operating system. If the M2000 client runs on Windows 2003. change the value of the parameter LocalNTP to 0. perform Step 7 through Step 8. perform Step 6. Step 4 Check the NTP server specified by the PC. Step 3 Restart the Windows Time service. Step 6 Run the following command to check the running status of the SNTP: 4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which is the default value.. it indicates that the value can be ignored and the registry need not be modified. In the displayed window. Then. Choose Start > Run.msc to open the Services window. Windows 2008. synchronize the time of the M2000 client with the time of the M2000 server. run the net time /setsntp command. The result of the net time command is saved in the Windows registry. choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services > W32Time > Parameters. In the displayed Run dialog box. NOTE For the operating systems of Windows 2003 or Windows 2008. Procedure Step 1 Configure the M2000 client as the NTP client. Windows 2003. The configuration procedure is applicable to the Windows 2000 Professional. S10) Context When the M2000 client is configured as the NTP client. enter services. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system. Windows 2008. change the value of Enable under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services > W32Time > TimeProviders > NtpServer to 0. Step 5 Perform operations based on operating systems. In the displayed Run dialog box. enter regedit to open the Registry Editor window. c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;net time /querysntp NOTE If the host name and IP address of the PC are specified as the host name and IP address of the NTP server by /setsntp. Ltd.4 Managing the M2000 Clients M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. run the following command: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;net time /setsntp:M2000 IP Address of NTP Server NOTE 1. In the registry. the NTP server time is the local time of the PC. Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista Business operating system. Choose Start > Run. To clear the specification. If the parameter LocalNTP does not exist. This setting of the net time takes effect after Windows restarts. 2.

You can press Ctrl+C to exit the browse window. +04.9881239s 10:05:11. The current time is 2009-6-22 10:05:09 (local time). 4-9 .9589559s 10:05:17. 10:05:09. including the local time of the client and deviation of the local time from that on the NTP server. S10) 4 Managing the M2000 Clients c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm -once -v -test The system displays the host name of the connected NTP server.98 [10. ----End Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tracking 10.9814570s 10:05:13.71.9449507s .. +04. + indicates that the client time is earlier than the server time. and the second column displays the deviation between the local time and the server time.98].M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. deviation between the local time and the NTP server time.9740897s 10:05:15. Step 7 Run the following command to manually synchronize the time: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm /resync Step 8 Run the following command to check the running status of the SNTP: c:###BOT_TEXT###gt;w32tm /stripchart /computer:IP address of the M2000 server /dataonly The system displays the following information. In the system output. and time cycle of NTP server roll.15.. +04.71. +04.indicates that the client time is later than the server time.15.. . +04. the first column displays the local time of the client. Ltd.

.

remove a user. The M2000 provides the user management function. 5. it describes the mapping between the network manager user and NE user and the principle for assigning their rights. 5-1 . This helps to prevent unauthorized operations and ensure system security.4 Managing OM Users OM users operate and maintain the entire network or specified NEs through the M2000. Sybase user.2 Managing Solaris Users This section describes how to manage the Solaris users. and NE user.3 Managing Sybase Users This chapter describes how to manage the Sybase user that is required for the operation of the M2000.1 Types of M2000 Users This section describes the four types of users involved in the operation of the M2000 system: Solaris user. 5. In addition. You can also monitor user sessions and operations. and ftpuser. 5. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users 5 About This Chapter Managing the M2000 Users This chapter describes the four types of users involved in the operation of the M2000 system: Solaris user. you can manage user information and user rights.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. dbuser. it describes how to create a user. and modify a password. In addition.. it describes the management and monitoring operations related to the types of users and M2000 user groups. In addition. Ltd. network manager user. Sybase user. The four types of Solaris users involved in running the M2000 server are: root. and NE user. By using this function. 5. network management user. This chapter also describes how to change the password of the Sybase user. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. omcuser.

5.1 Introduction to Solaris Users This introduces the Solaris users involved in the operation of the M2000 server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . it describes the mapping between the network manager user and NE user and the principle for assigning their rights.1 Types of M2000 Users This section describes the four types of users involved in the operation of the M2000 system: Solaris user. that is. user root. 5.1.3 NE Users NE users refer to the users accounts that can log in to and operate and maintain NEs through the LMT or WEB LCT. The M2000 assigns privileges to user groups.5 Principles of NE User Authorization This section describes the principles of NE user authorization. 5.1.1. Sybase user. and ftpuser. 5. in the case that NEs are not connected to or are disconnected from the M2000. Ltd.1. To use the LMT or WEB LCT to operate and maintain NEs (for example. NE users can also perform operations such as troubleshooting at the near ends of NEs. The privileges can also be assigned to users directly. 5.. 5. 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. To access the M2000 server.1 Introduction to Solaris Users This introduces the Solaris users involved in the operation of the M2000 server. S10) 5.4 Principles of NM User Authorization This section describes various privileges of the M2000 NM users and the principles for user authorization.1. you must have the three manually created user accounts: dbuser. Table 5-1 describes the Solaris user accounts.2 Introduction to Sybase Users This introduces the Sybase user accounts used by the M2000 and the mapping authorities. you must have a user account of a Solaris operating system. In addition to the default account of the Solaris operating system. The M2000 supports the authorization of operation privileges provided to NE user accounts. you need to operate and maintain NEs as NE users.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You must also have one manually created user group: omcsysm. network manager user. and NE user. In addition. The privileges assigned to a group are passed on to individual users based on the binding between the user group and the users in the user group. omcuser.

. lp. uucp. and perform all system operations. Ltd.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. nuucp. User root is authorized to install and uninstall M2000 server applications and to start and stop M2000 services. Other. create other user accounts. user dbuser is authorized to use isql to interact with the database.root / dbuser User dbuser is authorized to perform all operations on the database. User dbuser is responsible for the O&M of the database software. For example. assign authorities to other users. /bin/bash bin. User dbuser is the administrator of the database software. mail. adm. and user. tty. 5-3 . Staff and omcsys m /bin/bash /opt/sybase Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. sys. daemon. User root owns the highest authority of the system. User root is authorized to control all resources. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users Table 5-1 Solaris user accounts Account Name Usage Authority Group Shell Resoluti on Program Directory root User root is the default user account of the system. you must manually create user dbuser. Before installing the Sybase.

The default password of user sa is emsems. To operate the database on the M2000 server. which has the highest authority. root. In the M2000 system.3 NE Users NE users refer to the users accounts that can log in to and operate and maintain NEs through the LMT or WEB LCT. system backup. you need to 5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must create user ftpuser. omcsys m /bin/bash /export/home/ sysm 5. 5. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. sa is the only database user. S10) Account Name Usage Authority Group Shell Resoluti on Program /bin/bash Directory omcuser User omcuser is the operator of the M2000. Only Sybase users can operate the Sybase database. the default user account of the Sybase is sa.1.1. After the Sybase is installed. such as system status inquiry. sys. and system restoration.2 Introduction to Sybase Users This introduces the Sybase user accounts used by the M2000 and the mapping authorities.. To use the LMT or WEB LCT to operate and maintain NEs (for example. User omcuser is authorized to access the database and perform the O&M operations. User ftpuser is authorized to perform software management and file transmissions for NEs. you must create user omcuser. Before installing the M2000 applications. Before installing the M2000 applications. in the case that NEs are not connected to or are disconnected from the M2000. Staff (primary group). User omcuser is responsible for the O&M of the M2000 system. you must use a Sybase user account. User omcuser is not allowed to install or uninstall M2000 server applications and to start or stop M2000 services.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and omcsys m (seconda ry group) /export/home/ omc ftpuser User ftpuser is used by the M2000 applications to perform software management and file transmission.

You can log in to the M2000 as a non-local NE user to operate and maintain the mode 1 NEs. 5-5 . You can set whether to enable NE local users to log in to and manage NEs on the M2000. and authority are managed by NEs. In the Main Topology window on the M2000. NEs provide several default local users. CAUTION NodeBs have only default local users because they do not have the BAM and cannot create any local user. For details about mode 1 NEs. For the list of mode 2 NEs. The M2000 manages non-local users. To perform centralized management on mode 2 NEs. see NE Types. NE users can also perform operations such as troubleshooting at the near ends of NEs. The creation and modification of a local NE user are performed on the LMT. The creation and modification of a non-local NE user are performed on the M2000. you can create NE users for the optical transmission NEs.. Types of NE Users NE users consist of local NE users and non-local NE users. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users operate and maintain NEs as NE users. You need to manually synchronize the information about the NE user on the M2000 according to the information about the local NE user. Thus. you can use a created or default Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE The information about the user account on the M2000 and that on the NE is independent from each other. l Local NE users refer to the users whose account.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you can create an NE User account for each local NE user (with the same user name and password) in the NE User Management window on the M2000 and correlate the accounts to the corresponding OM users. You can log in to the M2000 as a non-local OM user that is correlated to a local NE user to operate and maintain the mode 2 NEs. and authority of a non-local NE user are managed by the M2000. see NEs Corresponding to Different Centralized User Management Modes. see NE Types. password. For details about optical transmission NEs. non-local NE users have higher priority than local NE users. Ltd. Management of Mode 1 NE Users Mode 1 NEs of centralized user management support local and non-local NE users. In the NE User Management window on M2000. password. Management of Optical Transmission NE Users Optical transmission NEs support only local NE users. l The account. the OM user becomes a non-local user of this NE. and thus they cannot be automatically synchronized. which consist of OM user accounts and NE user accounts. If an OM user is granted with the MML authority of a mode 1 NE. Management of Mode 2 NE Users Mode 2 NEs of centralized user management support only local NE users.

cannot log in to or operate the M2000. the system locks the user account. The user. 5. M2000 users cannot log in. The privileges assigned to a group are passed on to individual users based on the binding between the user group and the users in the user group. the status of a user account is valid.1. The privileges can also be assigned to users directly.4 Principles of NM User Authorization This section describes various privileges of the M2000 NM users and the principles for user authorization. Table 5-2 describes the M2000 user privileges. Binding IP address The M2000 does not restrict the IP address of the client using which users log in. the system automatically unlocks the user account. Setting the list of bound IP addresses when creating a user account Changing the list of bound IP addresses by modifying the attributes of a user account Related Operations Setting the operation period when creating a user account Changing the operation period by modifying the attributes of a user account If a user account is locked for a period greater than the time set by the system. The system also allows you to manually unlock a user account. Generally. Guests and SMManagers. whose account is invalid. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the IP address of the client using which the user logs in must exist in the list of bound IP addresses. If the current time is not within the period. The M2000 has four default user groups: Administrators. The M2000 assigns privileges to user groups.. the user cannot log in to or operate the M2000. After a M2000 user is bound to an IP address. Operators. Validity of a user account Check the validity of a user account. Table 5-2 Privileges of M2000 users Privileges Operation period Description Period during which M2000 users can log in to and operate the M2000 or NEs. Ltd. If the status of a user account is invalid. S10) NE user as a parameter for creating an optical transmission NE and then log in to the NE to operate and maintain it. A user group is a group of users who share the same privileges. Modifying user validity by modifying the attributes of a user account Locking status 5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the number of login failures of a user account during the specified period reaches the preset value.

customize as few as possible. and modify a password. In addition. If you have to customize command groups.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Use the principles of NE user authorization for assigning the privileges that are commonly used by NE users and certain NE types. Related Operations Private privileges indicate that the privileges for operating the M2000 are allocated to users after their privileges are bound. For details on the authority to manage an NE. 5. dbuser. The principles of NE user authorization are as follows: l It is recommended to use the default command groups provided by NEs.1. omcuser. NOTE l l l l Superuser admin can run NE MML commands on the M2000 even without authorization. The M2000 supports the authorization of operation privileges provided to NE user accounts. After the privileges of users are bound. the recommended privileges are public privileges. it describes how to create a user. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5-7 . Ltd. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users Privileges M2000 operation rights Description A user has the authority to perform relevant operations on the M2000. 5. Each type of NEs provide certain default MML command group. you must assign them by directly setting users and the command groups of these NEs.. With regard to convenience and efficiency.2 Managing Solaris Users This section describes how to manage the Solaris users. For the privileges that are applicable for certain NEs and cannot be assigned by using the principles of NE user authorization.5 Principles of NE User Authorization This section describes the principles of NE user authorization. In addition. remove a user. The four types of Solaris users involved in running the M2000 server are: root. Private privileges refer to the privileges enjoyed by private users. and ftpuser. The public privileges for operating the M2000 can be allocated first to user groups and then to users based on the binding relations between the user groups and the users. private privileges for operating the M2000 can be allocated to users directly. Public privileges are the privileges enjoyed by all the users in a user group. Public privileges indicate that the privileges for operating the M2000 can be allocated first to user groups and then to users based on the binding relations between user groups and users. you can customize new command groups. refer to the M2000 Online Help.

that is. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .7 Deleting a Solaris User This section describes how to delete a Solaris user. S10) 5. 5.1 Introduction to Solaris Users This introduces the Solaris users involved in the operation of the M2000 server.4 Changing the Password of User omcuser This section describes how to change the password of user omcuser when you log in to the system as user root. Ltd.2. 5. You can manually delete the Solaris user that is not required.2.2. omcuser. The Solaris user can operate and maintain the Solaris system.3 Changing the Password of User dbuser This section describes how to change the password of user dbuser when you log in to the system as user root. Table 5-3 describes the Solaris user accounts. 5.2 Changing the Password of User root This section describes how to change the password of user root. you must have a user account of a Solaris operating system.2. 5.1 Introduction to Solaris Users This introduces the Solaris users involved in the operation of the M2000 server. user root..2.6 Creating a Solaris User This section describes how to create a Solaris user. and ftpuser. 5. 5.5 Changing the Password of User ftpuser This section describes how to change the password of user ftpuser when you log in to the system as user root. 5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. In addition to the default account of the Solaris operating system. you must have the three manually created user accounts: dbuser. You must also have one manually created user group: omcsysm.2.2.2. To access the M2000 server.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

nuucp. User root is authorized to install and uninstall M2000 server applications and to start and stop M2000 services. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users Table 5-3 Solaris user accounts Account Name Usage Authority Group Shell Resoluti on Program Directory root User root is the default user account of the system. sys. and user.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. User dbuser is responsible for the O&M of the database software. uucp. create other user accounts. you must manually create user dbuser. daemon. Other. tty. Ltd. User root is authorized to control all resources. mail. Staff and omcsys m /bin/bash /opt/sybase Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.root / dbuser User dbuser is authorized to perform all operations on the database. Before installing the Sybase. and perform all system operations. /bin/bash bin. User dbuser is the administrator of the database software. User root owns the highest authority of the system. 5-9 .. For example. user dbuser is authorized to use isql to interact with the database. adm. lp. assign authorities to other users.

2. The new password of user root is available. and then enter the old password of user root. User omcuser is responsible for the O&M of the M2000 system. such as system status inquiry.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Step 2 Change the password. system backup. you must create user omcuser. Before installing the M2000 applications.2 Changing the Password of User root This section describes how to change the password of user root. User ftpuser is authorized to perform software management and file transmissions for NEs. User omcuser is authorized to access the database and perform the O&M operations. sys.. Ltd. User omcuser is not allowed to install or uninstall M2000 server applications and to start or stop M2000 services. and omcsys m (seconda ry group) /export/home/ omc ftpuser User ftpuser is used by the M2000 applications to perform software management and file transmission. omcsys m /bin/bash /export/home/ sysm 5. 5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Before installing the M2000 applications. you must create user ftpuser. Procedure Step 1 Log in as user root. Prerequisite l l The old password of user root is available. Staff (primary group). Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . S10) Account Name Usage Authority Group Shell Resoluti on Program /bin/bash Directory omcuser User omcuser is the operator of the M2000. root. and system restoration.

the password comprises of at least 6 letters or digits. Prerequisite l l The new password for omcuser is available. You have logged in to the M2000 server as user root. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users # passwd root New password:new password Re-enter new password:new password passwd: password successfully changed for root ----End 5. You have logged in to the M2000 server as user root. Prerequisite l l The new password for dbuser is available.2.. among which one digit or special character is included.2. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to change the password: # passwd omcuser New password:new password Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.3 Changing the Password of User dbuser This section describes how to change the password of user dbuser when you log in to the system as user root.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. That is. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to change the password: # passwd dbuser New password:new password Re-enter new password:new password passwd: password successfully changed for dbuser ----End 5. Context NOTE The provided password must meet the policy of minimum complexity. 5-11 .4 Changing the Password of User omcuser This section describes how to change the password of user omcuser when you log in to the system as user root.

At least one lowercase is contained in the password.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services. you are advised to use the following policies to set the password: l l l l l l The password length ranges from 8 to 30 characters. At least one special character is contained in the password.2. start them first. 5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check the operation status of the M2000 services.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Prerequisite l l The new password of user ftpuser is available.2. At least one digit is contained in the password..2 How to Start the Sybase. Ltd. S10) Re-enter new password:new password passwd: password successfully changed for omcuser ----End 5. You have logged in to the system as root. see 14. The default installation directory of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC. 1. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 services are running. No user name is contained in the password. see 14. If the Sybase services are not started. Step 3 Run the modify script to change the password of user ftpuser.5 Changing the Password of User ftpuser This section describes how to change the password of user ftpuser when you log in to the system as user root.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2. see 7. Run the modify script. perform Step 3.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?. To improve the password security. For details. see 7. For details. For details.2. stop them.2. Context CAUTION The special characters '"$ cannot be contained in the password of user ftpuser. Step 2 Check whether the Sybase services are started. At least one uppercase is contained in the password. If the Sybase services are started. For details about how to stop the M2000 services.

Enter q or Q to exit the modify script. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. see 14. start them first. it indicates that the change fails./modify. 5. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users # . enter the new password of user ftpuser twice.3.2. ----End Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Are you sure to continue? Y--Yes.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?.2 How to Start the Sybase.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Q--Quit. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. Choose 1--Single system > 4--Password of ftpuser. see 14. Ltd. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. -----------------------------------------------------------------Note: -. perform Step 5. For details.3 Starting the M2000 System Services. Contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. If the Sybase services are not started. When the system displays the following information. When the system displays the function menu. For details. 4.sh # cd /opt/OMC/tools/config # .. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. Step 5 Start the M2000 services. see 7.Enter key p/P to return pre-step -.Enter key q/Q to exit this tools -----------------------------------------------------------------Please input the new ftpuser password: Please Re-enter the password: NOTE l l Enter p or P. Based on the system prompt.2. 3. R--Re-input P--Return pre-step Please make a choice[Y/Q/R/P]: Y NOTE l l l l Enter Q to exit the script without performing any operations. Enter R to return to Step 3. When the system displays the following information.2. 6. If the Sybase services are started.sh 2. For details. enter Y to apply the change. You need to wait for about one minute if you run the modify script to change the password of user ftpuser. -----------------------------------------------------------------Operator complete! If the system output contains failed. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. Enter P. it indicates that the change is successful. 5-13 . enter q to exit. You can reconfigure the relevant parameters. Step 4 Check whether the Sybase services are started.

Step 2 Run the following command to create a new user account: # useradd Option new user account For instance. Ltd. Prerequisite Keep the user account and password ready for the new user. The Solaris user can operate and maintain the Solaris system. and ftpuser.7 Deleting a Solaris User This section describes how to delete a Solaris user. create a user account named omc1. The template files ensure a unified operating environment for all the users. The main directory /home1 is automatically created. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the server as user root. After a user account is created. This user account is in Bourne shell. omcuser. For details. refer to M2000 Command Reference.2. The template files are located in the /etc/skel directory with user ID 123. # useradd -d /home1 -g staff -m -k /etc/skel -u 123 -s /bin/bash omc1 NOTE For details of the useradd command. You can manually delete the Solaris user that is not required. see the software installation manual related to each server type.2. the details about this user account are saved in system files of the Solaris.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Prerequisite The account of the user to be deleted is available. You can also create other user accounts if required.. User omc1 belongs to the staff group.6 Creating a Solaris User This section describes how to create a Solaris user. 5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context Before the installation of the Sybase and the M2000 server software. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Step 3 Run the following command to set the password for the new user: # passwd omc1 New password:new password Re-enter new password:new password passwd: password successfully changed for omc1 ----End 5. create three Solaris user accounts: dbuser. S10) 5.

Prerequisite You have logged in to the system as user root. S10) 5 Managing the M2000 Users Procedure Step 1 Log in to the M2000 server as user root. ----End 5. sa is the only database user. 5.1 Introduction to Sybase Users This introduces the Sybase user accounts used by the M2000 and the mapping authorities. Only Sybase users can operate the Sybase database. you must use a Sybase user account. 5-15 . 5.2 Changing the Password of User sa This section describes how to change the password of user sa.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1 Introduction to Sybase Users This introduces the Sybase user accounts used by the M2000 and the mapping authorities.3 Managing Sybase Users This chapter describes how to manage the Sybase user that is required for the operation of the M2000.3. dbuser. Ltd. which has the highest authority. To operate the database on the M2000 server. the default user account of the Sybase is sa. refer to M2000 Command Reference.3.3. 5.3. This chapter also describes how to change the password of the Sybase user. NOTE Do not delete the users required for the OM of the M2000. Step 2 Run the following command to delete a user account and the main directory of the account: # userdel -r user account For details of the userdel command. The default password of user sa is emsems. 5.2 Changing the Password of User sa This section describes how to change the password of user sa. In the M2000 system. and omcuser. such as ftpuser.3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Changing the Name of the Database Server This section describes how to change the name of the database server based on the actual requirements. 5. After the Sybase is installed..

4 Stopping the M2000 Services. If the Sybase services are not started. For details. Step 2 Check whether the Sybase services are started... you are advised to use the following policies to set the password: l l The valid password ranges from 8 to 30 characters. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. see 7. Based on the system prompt. For details. enter the previous and new passwords of user sa. see 14. -----------------------------------------------------------------Note: -. 3.sh 2. Check the operation status of the M2000 services. # . For details about how to stop the M2000 services. The default installation directory of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC.Enter key p/P to return pre-step -.sh # cd /opt/OMC/tools/config # . the password can contain only 0 to 9. perform Step 3.2. stop them. see 14.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?.2 How to Start the Sybase. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . A to Z.5 Managing the M2000 Users M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Step 3 Run the modify script to change the password of user sa. Ltd./modify.2. 1. see 7. S10) Context CAUTION To improve the password security. Instead. Run the modify script. For details. a to z.Enter key q/Q to exit this tools -----------------------------------------------------------------Please input the old database superuser's password: Please input the new database superuser's password: Please Re-enter the password: 5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the Sybase services are started..2. Choose 1--Single system > 3--Database password.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services.2. and special characters ~!@#%^&*()_-+=|\/<>.: []{}. The special characters '"$ cannot be contained in the password. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 services are running. start them first.

When the system displays the following information. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. Enter q or Q to exit the modify script. enter y to apply the change. it indicates that the change fails. 5. enter q to exit.3. The default values in the system output are used. 4.3 Changing the Name of the Database Server This section describes how to change the name of the database server based on the actual requirements. you can change the name of the database server. You can change the database server name of one of the servers for implementing the data transfer. You can reconfigure the relevant parameters. You need to wait for about 12 minutes if you run the modify script to change the password of user sa.3.3 Starting the M2000 System Services. R--Re-input P--Return pre-step Please make a choice[Y/Q/R/P]: Y NOTE l l l l Enter Q to exit the script without performing any operations. You need to enter the new password of user sa twice. When the data is transferred between two M2000 servers. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. Context l The name of the database server is stored in the system configuration files and the M2000 configuration files. 5-17 l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. see 7. Q--Quit. When the function menu is displayed again.. Are you sure to continue? Y--Yes. Contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. Enter P. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. Enter R to return to Step 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. By modifying the relevant configuration files.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2. For details. ----End 5. 6. When the system displays the following information. Step 4 Start the M2000 services. S10) NOTE 5 Managing the M2000 Users l l l l Enter p or P. the database server names of the two servers must be consistent. Press Enter. it indicates that the change is successful. -----------------------------------------------------------------Operator complete! If the system output contains failed.

For details.2. see 14. The format of the database server name is SYB or SYBX where X is a numeral. Are you sure to continue? Y--Yes. Procedure Step 1 If the M2000 services are running.sh 2. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. Enter q or Qto exit the modify script. start them first.2. /opt/OMC/svc_profile.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services. If the Sybase services are not started. Q--Quit. Choose 1--Single system > 2--Database password. Check the operation status of the M2000 services. R--Re-input P--Return pre-step Please make a choice[Y/Q/R/P]: Y 5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SYB2. Press Enter. see 7.2.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?. Step 3 Run the modify script to change the name of the database server. 1. see 14.Enter key q/Q to exit this tools -----------------------------------------------------------------Please input the old database server name[default SYB]: Please input the new database server name[default SYB]: Please input the database superuser's password: NOTE l l l Enter p or P. S10) This takes the change of the database server name from SYB to SYB1 as an example. 3. The default installation directory of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC. When the system displays the following information. For details.2. Run the modify script. see 7..sh # cd /opt/OMC/tools/config # . Based on the system prompts.Enter key p/P to return pre-step -. Ltd. The default values in the system output are used. Step 2 Check whether the Sybase services are started.4 Stopping the M2000 Services.2 How to Start the Sybase. For details about how to stop the M2000 services. enter the previous and new name of the database server and the password of user sa. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ./modify. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. and SYB3 are names of database servers. stop them. If the Sybase services are started. # . perform Step 3. -----------------------------------------------------------------Note: -. For details. SYB.5 Managing the M2000 Users l l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 4. For example. enter Y to apply the change.

----End 5. Contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. 5. see 7. Enter R to return to Step 3. -----------------------------------------------------------------Operator complete! If the system output contains failed. Managing OM users.. you can manage user information and user rights. 5-19 . it indicates that the change is successful. see M2000 User Management User Guide. You can also monitor user sessions and operations. The M2000 provides the user management function.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You need to wait for about 15 minutes if you run the modify script to change the IP address of the server. For details.2. it indicates that the change fails.3. prompting you to perform operations such as changing the IP address or user password. Enter P. 6. Ltd.3 Starting the M2000 System Services. Step 4 Start the M2000 services. enter q to exit. You can reconfigure the relevant parameters. When the system displays the function menu again. When the system displays the following information. The system displays the function menu of the modify script. By using this function.4 Managing OM Users OM users operate and maintain the entire network or specified NEs through the M2000. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This helps to prevent unauthorized operations and ensure system security. S10) NOTE 5 Managing the M2000 Users l l l l Enter Q to exit the script without performing any operations.

.

3 Collecting NM Log Files When the M2000 system fails. check OMC status.5 Managing the M2000 License M2000 licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices. You need to manage the licenses periodically. An NE subarea refers to the M2000 server that manages the NE. collecting NM log files. 6-1 .4 Querying NE Subareas This section describes how to query NE subareas. 6. severe accidents are avoided and proper operation of current devices is ensured. Ltd.html format. The device check enables you to find the hidden problems of devices. On the M2000 client. 6.6 Check OMC status OMC check is used to check the status of the M2000. NEs can be managed by different servers (subareas). 6. monitoring the M2000 server. you can run the diagnostic tool to collect all the related diagnostic information from the M2000 Server and Client through the FTP protocol. modify. managing the M2000 license. 6. 6. 6. System logs record the operation of the M2000 system. and Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. process.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. which can be queried by the M2000 administrator.7 Integrated Task Management The M2000 provides the function of integrated management of scheduled tasks. you can query different NE subareas. You can also create. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6 About This Chapter Managing OSS System The M2000 provides the OSS management function. you can browse information such as the task status and the progress. you can viewing NE partitioning. integrated task management. System logs also record the files and data tables of various types of information. Thus. Thus.. This check also exports check reports in . and the availability duration of the M2000.1 Monitoring the M2000 Server You can monitor the status (including the status of the service. you can collect all the operational information from the M2000 client or server to locate faults. When the M2000 client or server cannot run properly. hard disk and database) and the component information of the M2000 server as well as logs of the operations performed on the system monitor client. 6. By using this function. If the M2000 server adopts the SLS solution.2 Querying the System Logs of the M2000 This section introduces the M2000 system log.

. Ltd. cancel scheduled tasks. This helps you understand the functions of OSS management easily. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 6. In addition. you can suspend.8 Reference of the OSS Management GUI This part describes the OSS management interfaces and related information such as the parameters used in the OSS management. S10) delete user-scheduled tasks. 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and save task result files to the client.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. restore.

2 Checking the CPU and Memory Usage Information About the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the CPU usage. When the CPU and memory status of the server is abnormal. l Database Monitor: Monitors information about the databases in the system.1. and memory usage. 6. The system monitor browser consists of the following items: l Service Monitor: Monitors information about services. such as total capacity.1 Refreshing the Monitoring Information To know the latest running status of the M2000 server. and status. Process Monitor: Monitors information about processes. and number of threads. such as name. 6. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6. version. such as status and start time. used space. memory capacity. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time. free space. 6. and log space. process. usage.4 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the database status through the M2000 client to know the usage of the databases. space. 6.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time.1 Monitoring the M2000 Server You can monitor the status (including the status of the service. memory usage.1. you need to refresh the monitoring information. such as number of used handles. 6. 6. usage.3 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the disk usage information about the M2000 server through the system monitor browser of the M2000 client. When the M2000 services are not running normally. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed.. and description.1. CPU usage. 6-3 . l l Hard Disk Monitor: Monitors information about the disks in the system.1. Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser.5 Checking the M2000 Services This section describes how to check the M2000 services.1. such as status.6 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. memory capacity. and free memory space. l Component Information: Provides information about server components. number of database connections.1. such as status. Ltd. CPU usage. l Server Monitor: Monitors information about the services. operating system. hard disk and database) and the component information of the M2000 server as well as logs of the operations performed on the system monitor client.

and free memory space. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time. 6.7 Viewing the Information about M2000 Server Components This function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the M2000 server that you log in to. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 6-4 . Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. if the value of a parameter exceeds the threshold. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. disk monitoring. memory capacity. Context l When you refresh the current tab page. you need to refresh the monitoring information. On the M2000 client. you can set the alarm thresholds to monitor the server status. The information on other tab pages is not refreshed. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time.1.1 Refreshing the Monitoring Information To know the latest running status of the M2000 server.1. the information is refreshed at the same time.2 Checking the CPU and Memory Usage Information About the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the CPU usage. Step 3 click Refresh.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. The monitoring of system status consists of server monitoring. 6. S10) This section describes how to check the status of the M2000 processes. the information on these tab pages are refreshed immediately. When you switch tab pages. You have the relevant operation rights. click the tab of the monitoring information to be refreshed. When the M2000 processes are not running normally. and service monitoring. when you switch tab pages. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window.8 Saving the Monitoring Information For the convenience of future analysis of the information that is monitored at certain time.9 Setting Alarm Thresholds for the M2000 This section describes how to set the alarm thresholds for the M2000. When the CPU and memory status of the server is abnormal.1. only the information on this tab page is refreshed.1. you can save the required monitoring information to the server.1. the system generates the corresponding alarm. ----End 6. 6. Therefore. l Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser from the main menu. 6. databases monitoring..

You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. ----End 6.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. See Figure 6-1. the red icon indicates that the CPU usage or memory usage of the corresponding server is abnormal. Step 2 Click the Server Monitor tab to check the performance of the M2000 server.1.html. 6-5 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. You have the relevant operation rights. and . the icon corresponding to the item changes from green to red when the value of the item reaches the threshold.xml.txt.csv. Figure 6-1 Server Monitor tab page NOTE In the CPU Usage (%) column and the Memory Usage (%) column. In the case that you have set the performance monitoring threshold for an item. the green icon indicates that the CPU usage or memory usage of the corresponding server is normal.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . .3 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the disk usage information about the M2000 server through the system monitor browser of the M2000 client. Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. Ltd.

S10) Context Checking the disk usage information about the M2000 server requires only a few system resources and does not affect system operation. ----End 6.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. the icon in this column changes from green to red. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. See Figure 6-2.html. Ltd. .txt. the red icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding disk is abnormal. the green icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding disk is normal.4 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the database status through the M2000 client to know the usage of the databases. 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the usage of a disk exceeds the preset threshold. Figure 6-2 Hard Disk Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .xml. .csv. Step 2 Click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to check disk usage information about the M2000 server. and .1. Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser.

Context This operation requires only a few system resources and does not affect system operation. When the M2000 services are not running normally.csv. and .xml. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time.5 Checking the M2000 Services This section describes how to check the M2000 services. Ltd.. If the usage of a database exceeds the preset threshold. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 6. See Figure 6-3. You have the relevant operation rights. . Step 2 Click the Database Monitor tab to check the database status of the M2000 server. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. the green icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding database is normal.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 6-7 .1.txt. the icon in this column changes from green to red. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. Figure 6-3 Database Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . the red icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding database is abnormal.html. .

Figure 6-4 Service Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column.html. Context Checking the M2000 services on the M2000 client requires only a few system resources and does not affect system performance.xml. 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . You have the relevant operation rights. Step 2 Click the Service Monitor tab to check the M2000 services.1. S10) Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. and . ----End 6. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .txt. See Figure 6-4. . the green icon indicates that the corresponding process is normal.6 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes This section describes how to check the status of the M2000 processes. the red icon indicates the corresponding process is abnormal. When the M2000 processes are not running normally.csv. Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser.. . you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed.

. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . The System Monitor Browser window is displayed.txt.1. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser from the main menu. See Figure 6-5. Ltd. and . Step 2 Click the Process Monitor tab to check the monitoring data of the processes running on the M2000 server. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. Figure 6-5 Process Monitor tab page Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. 6-9 .7 Viewing the Information about M2000 Server Components This function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the M2000 server that you log in to.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.csv. . Context Checking the states of the M2000 processes on the M2000 client requires only a few system resources and does not affect system performance. You have the relevant operation rights. ----End 6. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client.xml.html. .

enter the file name. choose Monitor > System Monitor > Configurations. When the value of a parameter exceeds the threshold. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . In addition. ----End 6. Step 3 View the information of all the installed components in Component Information tab. ----End 6. as show in Figure 6-6. The default format is XML. HTML. click the Component Information tab. click the tab of the monitoring information. Procedure Step 1 In the main window. Ltd. and service monitoring. if the value of a parameter exceeds the threshold.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. databases monitoring.9 Setting Alarm Thresholds for the M2000 This section describes how to set the alarm thresholds for the M2000. The System Monitor Settings dialog box is displayed. S10) Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window. 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can save the required monitoring information to the server. or XML. You have the relevant operation rights. select a storage path. the corresponding alarm is generated. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window. you can set the thresholds of certain parameters for the purpose of system monitoring. the relevant record in the System Monitor Browser window is displayed in red. and then click Save As.1. The monitoring of system status consists of server monitoring. NOTE l l The monitoring information can be saved in the format of TXT. Step 3 In the Save dialog box. you can set the alarm thresholds to monitor the server status. disk monitoring. the system generates the corresponding alarm.8 Saving the Monitoring Information For the convenience of future analysis of the information that is monitored at certain time. and click Save. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser from the main menu.. Context On the M2000. On the M2000 client.1. CSV.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. see Table 6-1. 6-11 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Figure 6-6 System Monitor Settings dialog box Step 2 Select a monitoring item to set the thresholds. For details about the parameters for monitoring the server. Ltd.

the M2000 generates an alarm. Default value: 15. the CPU usage is sampled every x seconds. If the CPU usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. prompting that the high CPU usage alarm is cleared. S10) Table 6-1 Server Monitor Name Server Monitor Parameter Settings CPU sustained overload times (times) Description Description: l Settings Value: Value range: 10-400 Default value: 40 If the CPU usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. Default value: 60. l Server status refresh interval (seconds) Description: Refresh interval for server monitoring.. 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the CPU usage alarm and whether to enable the bubble. Value: Value range: 2-60. that is. Offset value range: 1-99. Ltd.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Description: Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation. the M2000 generates a high CPU usage alarm. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Default value: 50. Server Monitor Threshold Settings CPU used rate (%) Value: Value range: 1-99.

6-13 . If the memory usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of Memory used rate. the M2000 generates an alarm. the M2000 generates a high memory usage alarm. When the function of bubble information is enabled. Ltd. Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Default value: 50.. l l Table 6-2 describes the parameters for monitoring the disks of the server. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Name Memory used rate (%) Description Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation and Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the memory usage alarm. if the server is faulty. the system displays a bubble information. prompting that the high memory usage alarm is cleared. Table 6-2 Hard Disk Monitor Name Disk Monitor Parameter Settings Hard disk status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Refresh interval for hard disk monitoring. Default value: 60. If the memory usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of Memory used rate. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Offset value range: 1-99.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 Default value: l l l l Warning: 60 Minor: 70 Major: 80 Critical: 90 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level. When the function of bubble information is enabled. the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. Ltd. l l 6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) Name Disk Monitor Threshold Settings Default value setting (%) Description Description: All default thresholds of hard disk usage on the M2000 server. if the hard disk is faulty.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. the system displays a bubble information.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. the M2000 uses the threshold specified in Default Value Setting.. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level. l If you select Customize Value. if the hard disk is faulty. When the function of bubble information is enabled. the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6-15 . S10) 6 Managing OSS System Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds of all the hard disk usage on the M2000 server. the system displays a bubble information. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. l If you select l l NOTE Default Value. the M2000 uses customized thresholds of alarms.

the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. Settings Value: Value range: 300-3600 Default value: 300 Database Monitor Threshold Settings Default Value Setting (%) Description: All default thresholds of database usage on the M2000 server. Ltd. l 6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l Value: Value range: 1-100 Default value: l l l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level. S10) Table 6-3 describes the parameters for monitoring the database of the server. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level. Table 6-3 Database Monitor Name Database Monitor Parameter Settings Database status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of database refreshing.

Table 6-4 Service Monitor Name Services Monitor Parameter Settings Service status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of service refreshing. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 6-4 describes the parameters for monitoring the server services. Customize Value: customize thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. Value range: 1-100 Default value: – – – – l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 l Disabled Monitoring: Disable the database monitoring. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. Default Value: use default thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. 6-17 . You need to set these thresholds separately for each database on the M2000 server. Ltd. the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level. Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l Settings Setting method: Set the following parameters for each database: l When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level.

is l if a monitored service is stopped. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) – 6-18 . l If all the monitored Settings Setting method: Select a service from the Service Name drop-down list. Ltd. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. System logs record the operation of the M2000 system. S10) Name Service Monitor Screen Tip Settings Default Group Description Description: Set whether to display the service status at the lower right corner of the M2000 system monitor client by or . is displayed. displayed. You have the relevant operation rights. ----End 6. which can be queried by the M2000 administrator. Context l Querying the system logs requires only a few system resources and does not affect the system operation.2 Querying the System Logs of the M2000 This section introduces the M2000 system log.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. System logs also record the files and data tables of various types of information. Step 3 Click OK. Select enable or disable in the corresponding Show Screen Tips dropdown list. System logs are saved in the following path on the M2000 server: – l /export/home/omc/var/fileint/syslogs The save path of the system logs that are periodically exported is as follows: /export/home/omc/var/ThresholdExport/Log Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l You can double- click or to access the Service Monitor tab.. NOTE services are running.

21221. . for example.trace (to store the historical trace files collected before the NM log files) Core files on the server. are identified by the logos of the subsystems in the M2000 system.155817. such as the information about service startup.xls. .20070206. for example.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Time: Identifies the time when a system log is recorded. When the M2000 client or server cannot run properly. you can run the diagnostic tool to collect all the related diagnostic information from the M2000 Server and Client through the FTP protocol. ServiceAdmin. the system exports the log data to a specific path. You can save the system logs in one of the following formats: . The collected information includes: l l Trace files on the client. iMAP. l The contents of the system logs: – Level: Risk.pdf. – – – – Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query System Logs.txt.trace. for example.imapsvcd. Info. ----End 6. In the displayed Log Details dialog box.trace (to store the current trace files) and imap_stacks.stack File of alarm NE synchronization number. you can collect all the operational information from the M2000 client or server to locate faults. 6-19 l l l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .txt Trace files on the server.20070207. and . Step 2 Set the filtering conditions in the Filter dialog box. The Filter dialog box is displayed. Thu May 4 11:28:47 CST 2006.170237. The Query System Logs window is displayed.csv. FMSyncNo The pstack file. Basic information: Provides the basic information on system operation. Details: Provides the details on system operation. System logs can be categorized into three levels in descending order. imap_stacks. and MediationService.3 Collecting NM Log Files When the M2000 system fails.. . and then click OK. Minor.root. the system displays details about a successful operation or a failed operation.1170824184. you can locate faults.html. Client_DebugTrace. such as FaultService. Java virtual machine thread stack and lock state in client. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Client_ThreadStackDump. for example. S10) 6 Managing OSS System If the log data in the database exceeds a preset threshold. Ltd. The date format is "Week/ Month/Day/Time/Timezone/Year". Step 4 Right-click a record and save the specified system logs as a file. Context By using this information. for example. for example. core. for example. Step 3 Double-click a record to view the detailed information.0. Source: Sources.

6. Type taskmgr. 6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.20070206. l Step 5 Set the folder for saving the diagnostic information.zip. trace files on the server. 5. Choose View > Select Columns. The Run dialog box is displayed. you can specify the client from which the diagnostic information is collected. 8. Right-click the M2000 client to be viewed. all the open clients are displayed in a list in the Port Select window. and then click OK. In the Port Select window. or trace files on the LMT. 2. TIP By comparing whether the process IDs in the PID column of the list with the progress ID of the target client. 2. and then choose Go To Process from the shortcut menu. The M2000 diagnostic tool automatically collects diagnostic information from the client and then from the server. Step 3 Configure the FTP server. core files on the server.6 Managing OSS System l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see Parameters for Collecting NM Logs Parameters. l Procedure Step 1 Choose Programs > iManager M2000 Client > M2000 Log Information Collector. You can modify the directory for saving collected files. The Select Columns dialog box is displayed. you can determine the client from which you will collect the diagnostic information. the collected files are saved in M2000 client\client\diagnosis\collected files. The Log Information Collector window is displayed. The Windows Task Manager dialog box is displayed. 1. you need to enter the name of the NE whose alarm localization information needs to be collected in NE Name. 3. Step 2 In the Port Select window. The collected files are saved under M2000 Client Installation Directory\client\diagnosis \collected files. To collect alarm localization information. Enter the IP address of the M2000 server. and SYBLog. Ltd. 1. By default. you need to set Start Time and End Time to collect the information within the specified time range. SybaseVersion. select the M2000 client from which you need to collect information. 4. You can change the save path. Enter the port number. Click the Processes tab. S10) Information about the Sybase. Select the PID (Process Identifiers) check box. l To collect the trace files on the client.zip. For details. and then click OK. l The information collection progress is displayed in the Collection Details area of the Log Information Collector window. select the column where the value of PID is the same as the value displayed in the PID column. for example. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Choose Start > Run. Step 4 Select the information to be collected. and then click OK.171040. Click the Applications tab. If you have opened multiple M2000 clients concurrently. Enter the FTP user name and password for logging in to the target server. 3.. By performing this step. 7.zip. SybaseConfig.

6-21 . On the M2000 client. NE names. IP addresses.1 Querying the M2000 License This topic describes how to query the license file on the M2000 server through the M2000 client. IP addresses. You need to manage the licenses periodically.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the subarea information such as host names. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 client. the NE distributions and NE information such as NE types.4 Querying NE Subareas This section describes how to query NE subareas. If the M2000 server adopts the SLS solution. NE names. the diagnostic information about the server cannot be obtained. and then click Query. you can click Browse to navigate the directory of the collected files. do not stop the progress of collecting information from the client. NEs can be managed by different servers (subareas). For the detailed parameter description. Step 2 Select a query condition. l If you click Stop when collecting the diagnostic information from a client.5. the NE distributions and NE information such as NE types. You can query NE subareas based on NE subareas or NE names. Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Query NE SubArea to open the Query NE Subarea window.3 Parameters for the NE Partitioning Information. you can query different NE subareas. An NE subarea refers to the M2000 server that manages the NE.5. see 6. and database instance names are displayed.5 Managing the M2000 License M2000 licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices. If you click Stop when collecting the diagnostic information from the M2000 server. Ltd. and NE versions on the selected NE subarea are displayed. and database instance names are displayed. l l ----End 6. In the Statistic dialog box. 6.8. To view the collected diagnostic information. Querying NE subareas based on NE names: In the Query Result dialog box.2 Updating the M2000 License Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Statistic dialog box. NOTE l You can click Save to save the query results as a file. the subarea information such as host names. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Step 6 Click Collect to collect the diagnostic information. ----End 6. 6.. l Querying NE subareas based on NE subareas: In the Query Result dialog box. and NE versions on the selected NE subarea are displayed. and the availability duration of the M2000.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > License Information from the main menu. S10) This section describes how to replace the M2000 license file on the M2000 server through the client. view the changes of the licenses.2 Updating the M2000 License This section describes how to replace the M2000 license file on the M2000 server through the client. and then click Open. Before the licenses expire.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. This check also exports check reports in . the value of Expiry(Days) is valid.5. Context l l l The type of the license applied for must be consistent with the version type. If both the fields exist. click Update License. ----End 6. query the license information about resources and functions on the Resource control item and Function control item tabs.1 Querying the M2000 License This topic describes how to query the license file on the M2000 server through the M2000 client. Ltd.html format. the M2000 displays a warning periodically. and then update the license. Prerequisite When updating a license. The valid time for the license that is uniformly used in M2000 contains two fields: Expiry (Days) and End Time.. Step 2 In the License Information dialog box. ----End 6. The device check enables you to find the hidden problems of devices. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . delete the license files that are not in use from the server directories license and licensebak. Step 4 In the License Comparison Results dialog box. Thus. and then click OK. select the new license file.5. Step 3 In the Open dialog box.6 Check OMC status OMC check is used to check the status of the M2000. severe accidents are avoided and proper operation of current devices is ensured. Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > License Information from the main menu. Step 2 In the License Information dialog box. 6. 6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

7 Integrated Task Management The M2000 provides the function of integrated management of scheduled tasks.7. 2. and save task result files to the client. In the Task Name field. You are authorized to perform associated operations. 6-23 .1 Basic Knowledge Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can browse information such as the task status and the progress. 6. . Periodic task In Period and Run Times fields.. set the information about device check. The Task Management window is displayed. Thus. Step 6 Perform different operations based on task types. Task Type Steps One-time task Perform Step 7. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. Step 2 Click New or double-click OMC Check node. The progress bar displays the progress of file upload. ----End 6. Step 4 Click Next.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. set the basic information of the task. modify. enter the associated information. The Start Time must be later than the current system time. the new device check task is displayed on the task list. From the Run Type drop-down list. select Once or Period. In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box. Ltd. Then. Step 3 In the displayed New Task dialog box. Step 8 Click Finish. set the start time of the task. Step 5 Then. you can suspend. cancel scheduled tasks. You can also create. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 successfully. In addition. After the upload is complete. 1. enter the name of the task. enter the start time. restore. To set the start time of the task. and delete user-scheduled tasks. perform the following operations: l l l In the Start Time field. perform Step 7. Then. Click Click NOTE or to adjust the time. set the start time. Step 7 Click Next.

states of timing tasks.8 Downloading Result Files This describes how to download the results of timing tasks.7 Viewing the Task Execution You can view the last execution results of a timing task.7. Parameter setting varies according to different tasks..5 Managing Timing Tasks User timing tasks refer to those timing tasks managed by the user. user name. resume. The user can delete.7. that is. you can browse information about timing tasks such as the task name. 6. The knowledge of integrated task management helps you perform the operations related to the integrated task management. 6. and task features. 6. 6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 6-5 provides the meaning of each task type. Tasks Grouped According to Execution Periods According to the execution periods of tasks. You can save the results of timing tasks on the server to the local client in .txt format. the M2000 divides the managed timing tasks into two types. functions.1 Basic Knowledge The integrated task management integrates the concepts such as types of integrated tasks.7.7. one-time tasks and periodic tasks. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks meeting the condition in the task list. 6. process. terminate. S10) The integrated task management integrates the concepts such as types of integrated tasks.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.7. 6.6 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks In the M2000. The knowledge of integrated task management helps you perform the operations related to the integrated task management.7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and execution result according to your own permissions.3 Creating a User Timing Task This section describes how to create a user timing task.2 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks.7. Types of Integrated Tasks The M2000 divides timing tasks into different types according to execution periods. cancel. and roll back user timing tasks. 6. Ltd. task scheduling parameters.4 Modifying a Timing Task This section describes how to modify the attributes of a user timing task or a system timing task.9 Technical Specifications of Centralized Task Management The technical specifications of centralized task management refer to the limitations on the centralized task management. suspend. 6. 6. 6.7. task scheduling parameters.7. states of timing tasks.

that is. Table 6-6 provides the meaning of each task type.. Network health check tasks are available only after you purchase and install the relevant components. configuration data. NE inventory data. Ltd. By default. and performance database. backup tasks. network management system logs. that is. the M2000 divides the managed timing tasks into nine types. NE operation log database. you can save the data outside the system. Save Days is set to the maximum value.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 6-6 Tasks grouped according to functions Types of Integrated Tasks Database capacity management Description The system periodically deletes the data that reaches the specified Save Days from the database. system log database. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NE license allocation information. network management operation logs. report tasks. and network management security logs. Refers to a task that is performed periodically since a specific time. NE security logs. The exported data consists of performance data. NOTE l l Only BSC6000. NE operation logs. NE security log database. 90. and other tasks. NE Information Collector (NIC) tasks. Tasks Grouped According to Functions According to the functions of tasks. CME tasks. RNCs and NodeBs support CME tasks. Through this function. CME tasks are available only after you install the CME software that maps with the NE version. synchronization tasks. Through database capacity management tasks. the database capability is maintained in a proper range to avoid database faults caused by large amount of data. database capacity management tasks. The exported data is still saved in the database. The custom value cannot exceed 90. alarm database. alarm data. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Table 6-5 Tasks grouped according to execution periods Types of Integrated Tasks Once Period Description Refers to a task that is performed only once at a specific time. file interface tasks. BSC6900GSM. network health check tasks. File interface Various types of data can be periodically exported to a specified directory on the server. BSC6900GU. 6-25 . The databases that can be managed consists of the operation log database. security log management database. BSC6900UMTS.

complaint handling data of CDMA networks and the co-channel neighboring cell optimization data and coverage analysis data of UMTS networks. NE basic information export: provides NE basic information to the Nastar. Uplink frequency scanning: provides uplink frequency data to the Nastar for uplink interference analysis.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) Types of Integrated Tasks NIC Description NIC tasks provide NE data to the Nastar for performance analysis.. RTWP data collection: provides NodeB interference data to the Nastar. GSM MR data collection: provides MR data to the performance analysis tool for network optimization analysis. Ltd. Neighboring cell optimization: Provides neighboring cell optimization data to the Nastar for neighboring cell analysis. NIC configuration export: provides NE configuration data to the Nastar for NE configuration data query and check. l 2G/3G neighboring cells optimization: collecting information about neighboring GSM cells for analyzing the relation between neighboring 3G cells. configuration data query and check. uplink interference analysis. Deamon collection: provides the Nastar with various types of data. CHR data collection: provides CHR data to the Nastar for abnormal calls analysis. and neighboring cell analysis. l l l l l l l l 6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. co-channel neighboring cell optimization data. such as the interference data. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .

the NE configuration data. In this case.. and HSL script tasks . PRS timing task: You can set PRS timing tasks for the performance tables that you require on the M2000. NE license sharing management tasks. NE upgrade log export: Exports NE upgrade logs to the specified directory on the server periodically or on schedule. dual-home management tasks. the M2000 can issue the commands contained in the script in batches. you can ensure that an softswitch can take over some or all data on the other softswitch after dual-home switchover. NE software timing download: enables you to specify an interval or the time to download NE mediation software from the M2000 server to a specified NE. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Types of Integrated Tasks Others Description The other tasks consist of MML script tasks. The performance data is collected periodically to generate performance tables. NE version files can be delivered to the NE on time. PM object synchronization: Maintains the data consistency between the PM objects on the M2000 and the actual NE objects by synchronizing NE objects regularly. l MML script: After an MML script is configured. HSL script: By running the preset HSL scripts. PRS timing tasks. NE software timing download tasks. Alarm timing acknowledgement: Helps you minimize operations by periodically acknowledging the faults or event alarms that meet the user-defined conditions. Through the synchronization function. NE inventory data. Upgrade Checking: After an NE is upgraded. NE logs. The synchronization function enables the M2000 to obtain the latest data from NEs.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. alarm timing acknowledgement tasks. you can use this function to verify whether the NE is successfully upgraded by collecting some KPIs. Ltd. Thus. and alarm timing data can be synchronized. l l l l l l l l Synchronization Certain data may be missing due to reasons such as communication interruption. Dual-home management: The system checks the data of dual-home NE pairs periodically or on schedule so that you can check whether the data is consistent. 6-27 . You need not manually issue the commands one by one. you can perform operations such as modifying NE parameters and obtaining alarm data.

the CME can obtain the latest data of the NEs and configure the data. l l l Network health check The network health check task checks the status of NE devices and the M2000. Currently. In this case. The saved system data and NE data can be used to restore the system and NEs in case of missing data or abnormality of the system and NEs. The system files and operating system cannot be backed up. The data that can be backed up on the M2000 consists of configuration data and log data. see the Help related to network health check. Cell Consistency Check: checks that the data in the Current area complies with the selected check rules. you can detect the hidden problems of devices in time. The reports that can be exported are RAN reports. Backup tasks consist of NE timing backups and server timing backups. Ltd. both unidirectional neighboring cell check rules and cell consistency check rules are provided. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and the alarm information. Through the network health check. Cell Parameters Compare: compares the parameters in the Current area with the default parameters in the CME configuration template and then exports the results to the specified path. The exported data is still saved in the database.html format. The health check report is generated in .6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. By using this function. 6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. you can save the data outside the system. Report The file export function enables you to periodically export various types of data as files to a specified directory of the server.. S10) Types of Integrated Tasks Backup Description The M2000 allows you to save the server data and NE data as backup files to a specified directory on the server. CME CME tasks are divided into the following types: l CME Upload: After you select configuration data of NEs. severe accidents are avoided and proper operation of current devices is ensured. the performance of NE devices. Thus. this task enables you to specify an interval or the time to upload the data to the CME server. Current Area Export: exports the data in the Current area for Northbound to facilitate you manage the Current area.

User timing tasks are the user-defined tasks created to meet the requirements of network maintenance. some NIC tasks. see Table 6-8. that is.8. You can also set the time to suspend or cancel synchronization tasks or backup tasks. User timing tasks consist of MML script tasks. system timing tasks and user timing tasks. 6-29 . Table 6-8 Description of system timing tasks Task Type Database capacity management Task Name Performance data NE operation logs Remarks For details. The M2000 uses NOTE to identify system timing tasks. HSL script tasks. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Tasks Grouped According to Task Features According to different task features. file interface tasks. Database capacity management tasks cannot be suspended or canceled while synchronization tasks and backup tasks can be suspended or canceled. configuration report export tasks. User timing task System Timing Tasks A system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the M2000 system. NIC tasks. dual-home management tasks. The Creator of a system timing task is omc. see System Timing Tasks. cannot be deleted. and backup tasks (excluding NE backup tasks). Table 6-7 Tasks grouped according to task features Types of Integrated Tasks System timing tasks Description System timing tasks are the tasks required for the normal operation of the M2000 system. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.12 Parameters for Modifying Database Capacity. alarm timing acknowledgement tasks. They consist of database capacity management tasks. Ltd. synchronization tasks. NE software timing download tasks. uplink frequency scanning tasks. neighboring cell optimization tasks. however. System timing tasks consist of multiple types of tasks. see User Timing Tasks. For details. file interface tasks. CME tasks. see 6.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. NE upgrade log export tasks. PRS timing tasks. l l l Only users in the administrator group can manage and view system timing tasks. the M2000 divides the managed tasks into two types. For details about system timing tasks. These parameters. Only some parameters of system timing tasks can be modified. and backup tasks (excluding NE backup tasks). synchronization tasks. alarm timing acknowledgement tasks. Table 6-7 provides the meaning of each task type. and network health check tasks. System timing tasks cannot be copied. NE timing backup tasks. For details. System timing tasks consist of database capacity management tasks.

For details.8.8.16 Parameters for Modifying Alarm Timing Acknowledgement. see Modifying a CHR Data Collection Task. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . For details.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see Parameters for Modifying the Export of NIC CMExport Data.13 Parameters for Modifying File interface Task and 6. NIC CHR data collection EAM export For details. S10) Task Type Task Name NE security logs Alarm data NM Operation Log Dump NM System Log Dump NM Security Log Dump Remarks File interface Performance data export Configuration data export NodeB License Data Export NE operation log export NE system log export NE security log export NE inventory data export Alarm data export NM Operation Log Export NM System Log Export NM Security Log Export For details. For details. see 6.8.15 Parameters for Modifying NE Basic Information Export Task. NIC configuration export Others Alarm timing acknowledgement 6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. see 6.11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks. see 6..8.

or restore user timing tasks. see 6. The M2000 uses to identify user timing tasks. uplink frequency scanning tasks. iSStar script tasks. NOTE l l Only BSC6000.8.. BSC6900GSM. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Task Type Task Name Performance object synchronization Remarks For details. suspend. see 6. PRS timing tasks. see Table 6-9. BSC6900GU. CME tasks. User Timing Tasks A user timing task is the custom task created to meet the requirements of network maintenance.11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks. 6-31 .11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks. modify. copy. For details about user timing tasks. l l You can create. see 6. dual-home management tasks.8. RNCs and NodeBs support CME tasks. neighboring cell optimization tasks. Ltd. delete. configuration report export tasks.17 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup Task.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and network health check tasks. NE timing backup tasks. For details.8. NE software timing download tasks. User timing tasks consist of MML script tasks.8. Network health check tasks are available only after you purchase and install the relevant components. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CME tasks are available only after you install the CME software that maps with the NE version.14 Parameters for Modifying Synchronization task and 6. Synchronization NE configuration data synchronization NE log synchronization NE inventory data synchronization Alarm timing synchronization NE upgrade log synchronization Maintance Mode synchronization Backup Server timing backup For details. BSC6900UMTS.

You can set PRS timing tasks for the performance tables that you require on the M2000. NE software timing download For details. or Modifying a Scheduled Report Task. Thus.8. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .8. You can back up all NEs on the entire network. Provides neighboring cell optimization data to the Nastar for neighboring cell analysis.8. Thus. For details. data loss can be avoided.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see 6. you can restore the data of NEs.18 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying MML Command Script.23 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying Software Download.8. Provides uplink frequency data to the Nastar for uplink interference analysis. see Creating a Data Collection Task for Neighbor Cell Optimization. NIC Uplink frequency scanning task Neighboring cell optimization Others MML script PRS timing task For details.. For details.20 Parameters for Creating. After any error occurs on NEs. The performance data is collected periodically to generate performance tables. see 6. You can run an MML script based on the interval or based on the time to issue commands in the script in batches. the NEs of a certain type. see 6. see Parameters for Creating a Task of Collecting the Uplink ARFCN Data. see 6.19 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying RAN Report Task. you can regularly save NE data as backup files to a specified directory on the server. After you set a specified interval or a time to download NE mediation software from the M2000 server to specified NEs. Report RAN report export For details. NE versions can be delivered to NEs in time. 6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Remarks For details. Viewing.17 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup Task. For details. or only some NEs.8. you need not manually issue the commands one by one. S10) Table 6-9 Description of user timing tasks Task Type Backup Task Name NE timing backup Description To store NE data. Ltd. You can set the RAN report export task on the M2000 to export the RAN report of a specified NE to a specified directory on the server. see 6.

27 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying a CME Upload Task.28 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying Cell Parameters Compare Task. Exports NE upgrade logs to the specified directory of the server periodically or on schedule. For details. For details.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Thus. see 6. For details.8. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Task Type Task Name Dual-home management task Description The system checks the data of dual home pair NE periodically or on schedule so that you can determine whether the data is consistent. Checks that the data in the Current area complies with the selected check rules.8.29 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying Cell Consistency Check Task. Cell Parameters Compare For details.8. Ltd.. see 6. Cell Consistency Check Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6-33 . By running the preset HSL scripts. you can ensure that an softswitch can take over some or all data on the other softswitch. iSStar script task For details.25 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying iSStar Script. see 6. Compares the parameters in the Current area with the default parameters in the CME configuration template and then exports the results to the specified path. you can use this function to verify whether the NE is successfully upgraded by collecting some KPIs.26 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying the Export of NE Upgrade Log. see Parameters for Creating an NE Upgrade Verification Task. Remarks For details. see 6.8. For details. both unidirectional neighboring cell check rules and cell consistency check rules are provided.24 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying Dual-Home Management. see 6. see 6. Only RNCs and NodeBs support CME upload tasks.8. Currently. After an NE is upgraded. you can perform operations such as modifying NE parameters and obtaining alarm data. the CME can obtain the latest NE data for data configuration.8. Upgrade Checking File interface NE upgrade log export CME CME Upload After you set a specified interval or a time to upload the selected NE configuration data to the CME server side.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The execution type of the system timing tasks is periodic execution. severe accidents are avoided and proper operation of current devices is ensured. the M2000 divides the execution types of the managed timing tasks into two types: periodic execution and one-time execution. check performance. l Start Time Period Interval between periodic tasks. Second is not supported. For details. hour. The task execution period can be represented by month. Remarks For details. and minute. Network health check The network health check enables you to check the NE device. It has two enlistments: unit and duration. week. check alarms. see the Help related to network health check. task execution period. including date and time. The execution type of user timing tasks can be periodic execution or one-time execution. task start time. and compare result files. 1 to 366x24 for hour and 1 to 366x24x60 for minute. l l 6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 6-10 describes the task scheduling parameters.30 Parameters for Creating/ Modifying/Copying a CME Current Area Export Task. For details. S10) Task Type Task Name Current Area Export Description Exports the data in the Current area for Northbound to help you manage the Current area. Ltd. Table 6-10 Description of the task description parameters Parameter Task Type Description According to different task execution periods. The start time of tasks should be later than the current server time. The network health check enables you to find the hidden problems of devices. and execution times. 1 to 52 for week. Thus.. Task Scheduling Parameters The task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type. see the Help related to network health check.8. see 6. The period interval range is as follows: 1 to 12 for month.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. day. Indicates start time of periodic tasks and one-time tasks set during task creation. 1 to 366 for day.

Ltd. 2006. suspend.. 21. running. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Run Times Description Indicates execution times of a periodic task. archived and finished. The execution times range from 0 to 65535. 6-35 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Figure 6-7. The value 0 indicates no limit.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Figure 6-7 State transition of a scheduled task Start Creating a timing task Idle Suspend a timing task Restore a timing task Scheduling Cancel Finish Yes Running Deleting a timing task Suspend Terminate a CME task Terminate a CME task Another Scheduling? Scheduling No a D tim ele in ting g ta sk ete Del task E M aC Archived Ter a C minate ME task Finished Deleting a timing task End State transition of a scheduled task is as follows: l A scheduled task is in the idle state after it is initially created. States of a Timing Task A timing task has four states: idle. For details. The states of a scheduled task change with different operations. NOTE Assume that the scheduling parameters of the entire network NE backup task are: l l l l Execution type = Periodicity Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28 Execution period = 1 day Period execution times = 0 The preceding information indicates that the system executes the entire network NE backup task at 09:07:28 every day from 09:07:28 on Oct.

Category. suspended. Step 3 Click OK. and Last Run Result as the filtering conditions. refer to 6. The Filter Type dialog box is displayed. Right-click in the navigation tree and choose Filter Type from the shortcut menu. Right-click the task list and select Filter Task.7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 2. 2. it is in the finished state. When a timing task is in the idle. Customize the task list 1. If a CME task is in the finished state and you terminate the task. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 client. For detailed parameter description. Task State.. An idle task is changed to the suspended state after being suspended. If it needs to be scheduled again. the CME task is in the archiving state. ----End 6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. Customized Requirement Operation Customize the navigation tree 1.6 Managing OSS System l l l l l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.8. A running task is changed to the idle state after being cancelled. S10) An idle task is changed to the running state after being scheduled. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks meeting the condition in the task list. Select the timing task type to be displayed. you can delete the timing task. Set the User Name. If a task need not be scheduled after being performed. 6. all the timing task types that the current user is authorized to browse are displayed. A suspended task is changed to the idle state after being resumed. Step 2 In the Task Management window perform different operations according to different customized requirement. Ltd. it returns to the idle state. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu. The Task Filter Setting dialog box is displayed. or finished state and a CME task is in the archiving state. By default.10 Parameters for Setting Task Filter Conditions.

Step 2 In the Task Management window. Ltd. 6-37 . To quickly create a multi-instance user timing task whose parameter settings are similar to those of the specified task.7. If the instance quantity of the existing timing tasks of a type reaches the maximum. l Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu. the task types for which the number of user timing task instances reaches the maximum are not displayed in the Task Type navigation tree. Step 3 In the New Task or Copy Task dialog box. create a user timing task. it indicates that the user timing task does not support multiple instances or the number of instances reaches the maximum. you cannot create or copy a timing task of this type.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. NOTE l l l If the Copy button is gray. click New. select the specified multi-instance user timing task. set the parameters of the created user timing task. Parameter setting varies according to different tasks. double-click a user timing task in the Task Type navigation tree. you can copy a multi-instance user timing task of user and then modify its parameters. You can create a user timing task by using one of the following methods: l l In general. Option Parameter Description Setting Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. When you create a task. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 client successfully. Context l To quickly create a task.3 Creating a User Timing Task This section describes how to create a user timing task. The instance quantity of the timing tasks of a specific type is restricted. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6. and then click Copy. To quickly create a task of the specified type.

you can select Run at Once. Do as follows: l l Start Time: In the Time Setting area.. set Start Time. Run Type: Select Once or Period in the Run Type area. you need to set the parameters in the Period Setting area. Set extended parameters according to the task requirements. Set Start Time and Period Setting. l For a periodic task. Context Timing tasks are classified into System Timing Tasks and User Timing Tasks. The created user timing task is displayed in the task list. set Period and Run Times. 6-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Next. l 2. l For a one-time task. Period Setting: In the Period Setting area. After the task is created. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu.4 Modifying a Timing Task This section describes how to modify the attributes of a user timing task or a system timing task. S10) Option Common Parameters Description 1. Task Type. Ltd. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 client successfully. Task Type: Select the type of the task to be created in the Task Type navigation tree.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. ----End 6. it runs NOTE at once.7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . modify the attributes of a timing task. Step 2 In the Task Management window. NOTE The value of Run Type for part of tasks is fixed to Once or Period because of their task types. You can modify a timing task by using one of the following methods: NOTE Parameter modification varies according to the task type. Set Task Name. Extended Parameters Step 4 Click Finish. and Run Type. 3. Do as follows: l l Task Name: Enter the task name in Task Name.

Suspending Timing Tasks To delay the time for scheduling a task. resume. 6-39 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The user can delete. modify common and extended parameters. After a task is suspended. l Automatic suspending Select a task in the task list. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu.. and roll back user timing tasks. select Task Type in the navigation tree. Step 3 Suspend one or more idle tasks with one of the following methods: l Manual suspending Select one or more tasks in the task list. Ltd. click Yes. Right-click the task and select Timely Suspend/Resume.7. the task becomes idle and is ready to be dispatched by the system. terminate. Double-click a task in the task list. and then click Attribute. In the Attribute dialog box. you can suspend an idle timing task. it is changed to the suspended state.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l Step 3 Click Finish. Step 2 In the Task Management window. Context The M2000 can execute the tasks that are not suspended only through scheduling. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box. In the Confirm dialog box. ----End Resuming Timing Tasks You can resume a suspended task. In the displayed Attribute dialog box. Right-click the task and select Suspend. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. suspend. select Suspend Time and then specify the time.5 Managing Timing Tasks User timing tasks refer to those timing tasks managed by the user. At least one idle timing task exists. S10) l 6 Managing OSS System Select a task from the task list. Click OK. ----End 6. modify common and extended parameters. cancel. After that.

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Right-click the task and select Resume. select a timing task to be suspended. click Yes. the M2000 automatically suspends the task or restores the task. Context l The system suspends an idle task and delay the time for using this task. In the specified time. If the timing task is not in the Idle state at the specified time. l l Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. In this situation. Step 2 In the navigation tree. At least one suspended scheduled task exists. The Task Management window is displayed. Click OK. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu.. If the timing task is not in the Idle state at the specified time. In the Confirm dialog box. S10) Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. At least one suspended or idle timing task exists. ----End Setting Time of Timing Tasks You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time for a scheduled task. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . select Task Type in the navigation tree. l Automatic resuming Select a task in the task list in the right pane. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. the system resume a suspended task and then the task is in the idle status and wait to be dispatched. Step 2 In the Task Management window. Step 3 From the task list in the right part of the window.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Context Only idle tasks can wait to be used. select Resume Time and then specify the time. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box. it fails to be suspended. Step 3 Resume the suspended task with one of the following methods: l Manual resuming Select one or more tasks in the task list in the right pane. select the task type of which you plan to suspend. Right-click the task and select Timely Suspend/ Resume. it fails to be suspended. You are not allowed to set auto-suspend or resume a Running timing task.

select Suspend Time or Resume Time as required. At least one Running timing task exists. Context l Users can delete only the tasks created by themselves.8. A admin can cancel the timing tasks created by all users. For details of setting an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.31 Parameters for Setting Time of Timing Tasks. 6-41 l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Right-click the task and select Cancel. Ltd. Context A user in the common user group can cancel only the tasks created by himself. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. The admin can delete the tasks created by all users. Step 2 In the Task Management window. Step 3 Select one or more running tasks in the task list in the right pane. The task status is changed to idle after being cancelled.. At least one timing task exists. Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu. refer to 6. click Yes. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Step 4 Right-click the task and choose Timing Suspend/Resume. ----End Deleting Timing Tasks You can delete the tasks created by yourself according to the actual requirements to save system resources. Step 5 In the displayed Timing Suspend/Resume dialog box. ----End Cancelling Timing Tasks You can cancel a running task. System tasks cannot be deleted. Step 6 Set the suspend time or resume time. Then the status of the task is changed from running to idle.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select Task Type in the navigation tree.

NOTE l l The task list area on the right displays the information about the tasks that can be viewed by the current user. S10) Running tasks cannot be deleted. Suspend. In the Common Parameter tab and Extended Parameter tab.7 Viewing the Task Execution You can view the last execution results of a timing task. 6-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Yes. user name.. you can browse information about timing tasks such as the task name. Step 3 Select one or more scheduled tasks in the task list in the right pane. ----End 6. If you want to view the common parameters and extended parameters of each task. You can delete only an Archived CME download task. you can modify the task details in the Attribute dialog box. If State of a task is Idle. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu. you can view the task details. Ltd. and execution result according to your own permissions. or Running. Step 4 Click Delete. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client.6 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks In the M2000. At least one timing task exists. go to Step 3 Step 3 Double click a task. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu.6 Managing OSS System l l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select Task Type in the navigation tree.7.7. Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box. you can view the task information only. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Then the task is deleted from the task list. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . NOTE l l If State of a task is Finished. Step 2 In the Task Management window. process. ----End 6. or select a task and click Attribute. select Task Type in the navigation tree. Step 2 In the Task Management window.

Result files of multiple tasks can be downloaded concurrently. Context l During the creation of CME tasks. You can save the results of timing tasks on the server to the local client in . l View the execution conditions in the Prev Execution Result column in the task list in the right pane. Result files of multiple tasks can be downloaded concurrently. The Result Info area displays only the information about the last task execution. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. 6-43 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. The result logs are not displayed. The timing task that is used for downloading the result files exists and it is run for at least once. You can download all the result files to the local client. You can browse the execution progress of subtasks of CME tasks. Context The allowable operations vary depending on the task type.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. You can download the result file of the selected task. Ltd. as shown in Table 6-11. sub-tasks are created. .txt format. MML Script task Network Health Check task Issue 10 (2010-09-06) You can download the latest result file to the local client. Result files of multiple tasks can be downloaded concurrently. At least one timing task exists. l ----End 6. l Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the main menu. select Task Type in the navigation tree. You can check the result details in the Result Info area. Step 2 In the Task Management window. Table 6-11 Allowable operations for different task types Task Type CME and iSStar Script Executor task Allowable Operation The task result are saved on the server in logs. which are executed in different phases.8 Downloading Result Files This describes how to download the results of timing tasks.7.

. If a task is performed at least once. 2. and NE Backup task Allowable Operation You can view the latest consistency check result on line. Ltd. Click OK. select the type of the task that is used to download the result files. Task Type CME or iSStar Script Executor task Procedure To download the result logs of a download task. you can save the messages in the Result Info area to a local path. Select the task whose result logs you plan to download. The result log file is named in the format YYYY-MMDD_HH-MM-SS. 2008-04-18_10-27-53. NOTE The system generates a folder for the log file generated each time and saves the folder to the specified path. S10) Task Type Dual Home Management task Timing task. Step 2 In the navigation tree. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . for example. In the displayed Please select a directory dialog box.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Task Management window is displayed. set the save path 3. perform the following steps: 1. NE Software Download task. Select the specific tasks in the right pane. Step 3 Perform the following operations according to the task type. Click Save Log.

do as follows: 1. you can right-click the Result Info field and choose Save AS on the shortcut menu. 2. do as follows: 1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. 2. and then click Save. In the displayed NHC Report dialog box. Alternatively. 4. Select the task whose result files you plan to download. Right-click a task and choose NHC Report on the shortcut menu. Ltd. Right-click a task and choose Save MML Result on the shortcut menu. Network Health Check task 1. 3. To download the result files of multiple tasks. and then click Save. Set the save path in the displayed Save dialog box. Right-click the tasks and choose Save MML Result on the shortcut menu. Press Ctrl or Shift to select multiple MML script tasks in the task list. Set the save path in the displayed Save dialog box. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Task Type MML Script task Procedure To download the result files of a single task. you need to generate a script to adjust the data difference and synchronize the data. Save the execution results of multiple MML script tasks to the same file. 6-45 . 2. 3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select the check report based on Report Nameand then click Save. 3. Click OK.. NOTE If data inconsistency exists. Set the save path in the displayed Please select a directory dialog box. NOTE You can click Open to view the contents of the check report and decide whether the report needs to be downloaded. Select the MML script task whose result files you plan to download. Dual Home Management task Right-click a task and choose Checked Result from the shortcut menu.

S10) Task Type Timing task.9 Technical Specifications of Centralized Task Management The technical specifications of centralized task management refer to the limitations on the centralized task management. NE Software Download task. ----End 6. Select a task whose result information needs to be downloaded. and NE Backup task Procedure To download the result information about a download task. Ltd.7. perform the following steps: 1.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Maximum size of script files uploaded for MML tasks (MBytes). Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and then click Save. Right-click in the Result Info area can choose Save As from the shortcut menu. User task Maximum number of scheduled NE backup tasks Maximum number of tasks configured with MML scripts (including the dualhome consistency check task) Maximum number of scheduled software download tasks Maximum number of iSStar script tasks Maximum number of CME upload tasks 6-46 Value 2 1 50 50 50 500 50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. Set the save path in the displayed Save dialog box. 2. Function Centralized task interface Specification Maximum size of the execution results of MML tasks can be displayed on the M2000 client (MBytes)..

8.8.8 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Hard Disk Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitor tab.5 Parameters for Setting Monitoring Parameters of the M2000 Server This section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Interface Description: Managing Timing Tasks This section describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters. 6.8.8.8.6 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Service Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab. This helps you understand the functions of OSS management easily.4 Parameters for Querying the M2000 License This section describes the parameters in the License Information dialog box.8. 6-47 . you can collect all related log files through FTP from the M2000 client or server to locate faults.8. 6.7 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Process Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab.8. Ltd. You can refer to these parameters when you view M2000 licenses information. You can refer to the these parameters when you check the NE partitioning information.8 Reference of the OSS Management GUI This part describes the OSS management interfaces and related information such as the parameters used in the OSS management.2 Interface Description: M2000 Log Information Collector When the log information collector on the M2000 client or server is faulty.8. 6. 6.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. which helps you perform the related operations. You can use these parameters when you set the server thresholds. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server database status. 6. 6. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server process status. 6. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Function Specification Maximum number of CME download tasks Maximum number of dual-home management tasks Maximum number of TMO configuration import tasks Value 50 50 100 6.9 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Database Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitor tab.3 Parameters for the NE Partitioning Information This topic describes the related parameters in the Query NE Subarea dialog box. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server service status 6. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server hard disk status. 6..

you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. Ltd. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. 6.8.8.19 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying RAN Report Task This describes the parameters involved in the RAN report task.14 Parameters for Modifying Synchronization task This section describes the parameters of Synchronization task.16 Parameters for Modifying Alarm Timing Acknowledgement This part describes the parameters in the alarm acknowledgement. 6. 6. modifying. When you set filter conditions for a task list.23 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Software Download 6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.17 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup Task This section describes the parameters of data backup tasks. you can refer to this topic. you can set the parameters in the alarm acknowledgement by referring to the information described in this section.8. 6. When modifying alarm acknowledgement.21 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a Task for Testing BTS Cabinet-Top Power This section describes the parameters of a task for testing BTS cabinet-top power.8.8. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying such a task. When you create or copy a user timing task or when you modify a user or system timing task.. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. 6. you can refer to this part.22 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying an RSSI Test Task This section describes the parameters of an RSSI test task.8. 6. query. 6.8.8. When modifying file interface tasks. When creating.15 Parameters for Modifying NE Basic Information Export Task This section describes the parameters involved in the NE basic information export task. When modifying Synchronization task.8.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 6.8. You can refer to this part when you create.8.20 Parameters for Creating.8.13 Parameters for Modifying File interface Task This section describes the parameters of file interface tasks. you can refer to this section. Viewing. S10) 6. 6. 6.8.8. 6.11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks This topic describes the common parameters of all timing tasks except CEM download tasks. When modifying an NE basic information export task. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . or copying a RAN report task. or Modifying a Scheduled Report Task This section describes the parameters for setting a scheduled report task. 6. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations. When creating or modifying MML command script tasks.12 Parameters for Modifying Database Capacity This section describes the parameters of database capacity management tasks. When modifying data backup tasks. When modifying database management tasks. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations.10 Parameters for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. or modify a scheduled task. 6.18 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying MML Command Script This section describes the parameters of MML command script tasks. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying an RSSI test task.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.8. When creating or modifying a CME upload task.8. refer to the information described here for parameter setting.8. 6. 6. When creating or modifying a CME cell consistency check task. When creating or modifying a CME cell algorithm comparison task. When creating or modifying software download task. After you log in to the server. Table 6-12 describes each element displayed in Figure 6-8.8. When creating or modifying iSStar scripts. or copying dual-home management.28 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Parameters Compare Task This describes the parameters involved in the CME cell algorithm comparison task. S10) 6 Managing OSS System This section describes the parameters in the software download task. you can set the parameters in the iSStar tasks by referring to the information described in this section. 6.8. as shown in Figure 6-8. 6.8.8.30 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Current Area Export Task This describes the parameters of CME Current Area Export tasks.1 Interface Description: Managing Timing Tasks This section describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters. You can refer to this part when creating device check tasks.26 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying the Export of NE Upgrade Log This describes the parameters for exporting NE logs and can be taken as reference during the parameter modification.8. which helps you perform the related operations.8..33 Parameters for Collecting NM Logs Parameters This describes the parameters of the M2000 log information collecting tool dialog box. you can refer to the parameter description and perform relevant operations. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. modifying. 6. 6. you can set the parameters for software download task by referring the information described in this section. When creating or modifying a CME Current Area Export task.24 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Dual-Home Management This describes the parameters used in dual-homing management.27 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Upload Task This describes the parameters of a CME upload task.29 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Consistency Check Task This describes the parameters involved in the CME cell consistency check task. the Timing Task Management interface is displayed.25 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying iSStar Script This section describes the parameters in the iSStar script task. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations.8. 6. 6. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations.31 Parameters for Setting Time of Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters of time for automatic suspending and automatic resuming timing tasks 6. You can refer to these parameters when creating. 6.32 Parameters for Selecting Objects for Device Check This part describes the extended parameters for selecting objects for device check. When collecting NMS log files. 6-49 . 6.8. you can refer to the information described in this part. Ltd.

The selected color of the task is darker than the previous color of the task. (1) (2) Name Navigation tree Task result information panel Description You can precisely locate a timing task through the navigation tree. Only the result of the currently selected task is displayed on the task result information panel. you can browse the result of the task last carried out.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Orange: suspended. White: idle. only the result of the firstly selected task is displayed.. In the task list. S10) Figure 6-8 Timing Task Management interface Table 6-12 Description of the Timing Task Management interface No. If multiple tasks are selected in the task list. The buttons used for carrying out central task management are available on the button panel. After a task is carried out. the task result is displayed. different colors are used to indicate different states of tasks: Gray: complete. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . You can browse the timing tasks that exist on the server side and the detailed information. (3) Button panel (4) Task list 6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the task result information panel. Blue: active.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must set Start Time and End Time of a specific time segment. The Log Information Collector interface contains four parts: l Server Information: In this area. Directory: This area shows the path for saving the diagnosis information. Collected Information Details: In this area. you can select the required information. or server core files. To collect the client trace files. You can refer to the these parameters when you check the NE partitioning information. and Password. you can view the information collection process and progress.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.8. 6-51 . Ltd. Figure 6-9 M2000 Log Information Collector interface 6. FTP User Name. Items Selection: In this area. To collect the alarm location information. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6.8. you can collect all related log files through FTP from the M2000 client or server to locate faults. Port. server trace files..2 Interface Description: M2000 Log Information Collector When the log information collector on the M2000 client or server is faulty. You can change the path. l l l Figure 6-9 shows the interface.3 Parameters for the NE Partitioning Information This topic describes the related parameters in the Query NE Subarea dialog box. enter an NE name in NE Name. you can set Server Address.

6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. indicates the NE Name. you can select names of all partitions or the name of a specific partition from the dropdown list. Server ID Description: Local server ID and authorization server ID displayed after you click Server ID 6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You can refer to these parameters when you view M2000 licenses information. indicates the NE Name. S10) Parameter Description Parameter Query Condition NE Subarea Description Host Name of the NE Partitioning When you query the specific partitioning information. indicates the version of the NE. License consumption Description: Capacity of the licenses consumed. Detailed Information Description: View details of authorization items. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. indicates the partitioning information about the NE. NE Name Query Result No. Parameters for Resource Control Item Tab Parameter License name Description Description: Names of authorization items.4 Parameters for Querying the M2000 License This section describes the parameters in the License Information dialog box. indicates the serial number of the NE. License capacity Description: Capacity defined in the license.8. License expiration time Description: Expiry time of each authorization item. including the IP address and the instance name of the database. NE Name NE Version Number of NEs Statistic 6. indicates the number of the NEs that belong to the NE Partitioning. Ltd.

5 Parameters for Setting Monitoring Parameters of the M2000 Server This section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. 6-53 . the M2000 generates a high CPU usage alarm.8. You can use these parameters when you set the server thresholds. the M2000 generates an alarm. prompting that the high CPU usage alarm is cleared.. Parameters Table 6-13 Server Monitor Name Server Monitor Parameter Settings CPU sustained overload times (times) Description Description: l Settings Value: Value range: 10-400 Default value: 40 If the CPU usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. If the CPU usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. License capacity Description: Number of the license of the devices authorized to be managed. Parameters for Function Control Item Parameters Tab Parameter License name Description Description: Names of authorization items. 6. Ltd.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Update License Description Description: Click the button to update license. l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

If the memory usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of Memory used rate. Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Default value: 60. Default value: 15. Server Monitor Threshold Settings CPU used rate (%) Value: Value range: 1-99. the M2000 generates an alarm. Memory used rate (%) If the memory usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of Memory used rate. the M2000 generates a high memory usage alarm. Default value: 60. prompting that the high memory usage alarm is cleared. the system displays a bubble information.. Default value: 50. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation and Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the memory usage alarm. the CPU usage is sampled every x seconds. Offset value range: 1-99. Description: Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation. l l Table 6-14 Hard Disk Monitor Name Disk Monitor Parameter Settings Hard disk status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Refresh interval for hard disk monitoring. l Settings Value: Value range: 2-60. Ltd. Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the CPU usage alarm and whether to enable the bubble. When the function of bubble information is enabled. Default value: 50. Offset value range: 1-99. S10) Name Server status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Refresh interval for server monitoring. if the server is faulty.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. that is. Value: Value range: 1-99.

6-55 . the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. if the hard disk is faulty.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Name Disk Monitor Threshold Settings Default value setting (%) Description Description: All default thresholds of hard disk usage on the M2000 server. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level.. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 Default value: l l l l Warning: 60 Minor: 70 Major: 80 Critical: 90 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. When the function of bubble information is enabled. Ltd. the system displays a bubble information. l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level. S10) Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds of all the hard disk usage on the M2000 server.. the M2000 uses customized thresholds of alarms. if the hard disk is faulty. 6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the M2000 uses the threshold specified in Default Value Setting. l If you select l l NOTE Default Value. When the function of bubble information is enabled. the system displays a bubble information. the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. l If you select Customize Value. the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level.

6-57 . S10) 6 Managing OSS System Table 6-15 Database Monitor Name Database Monitor Parameter Settings Database status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of database refreshing.. the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level. Settings Value: Value range: 300-3600 Default value: 300 Database Monitor Threshold Settings Default Value Setting (%) Description: All default thresholds of database usage on the M2000 server. l Value: Value range: 1-100 Default value: l l l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level. l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level.

the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level. Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. You need to set these thresholds separately for each database on the M2000 server. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Table 6-16 Service Monitor Name Services Monitor Parameter Settings Service status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of service refreshing. l Settings Setting method: Set the following parameters for each database: l When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level.. Customize Value: customize thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. Value range: 1-100 Default value: – – – – l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 l Disabled Monitoring: Disable the database monitoring. Default Value: use default thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. Ltd.

l If all the monitored Settings Setting method: Select a service from the Service Name drop-down list. Status Description: Status of a service. Description Description: Description of functions and interfaces provided by a service. Select enable or disable in the corresponding Show Screen Tips dropdown list. 6-59 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l You can double- click or to access the Service Monitor tab. is displayed. NOTE services are running.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. displayed.6 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Service Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab. is l if a monitored service is stopped.8. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server service status Parameters Name Service Name Description Description: Name of a service. Ltd. 6.. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Name Service Monitor Screen Tip Settings Default Group Description Description: Set whether to display the service status at the lower right corner of the M2000 system monitor client by or . Process Name Description: Name of a process.

8. 6. DB Connection Number Description: Number of database connections used by a process. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server hard disk status. Manual.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. including Automatic..8 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Hard Disk Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitor tab. 6. Handle Number Description: Number of handles used by a process. and Disable. Ltd. CPU Usage(%) Description: CPU usage of a process. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .7 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Process Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab. 6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8. S10) Name Startup Mode Description Description: Service start mode. Thread Number Description: Number of threads generated by a process. Process ID Description: ID of a process. Parameters Name Process Name Description Description: Name of a process. Memory Usage(MB) Description: Sum of the virtual and physical memory usage of a process. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server process status. Server Name Description: Name of the server. The Disable mode is available only for stopped services. Start Time Description: Time that the service is started.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the system displays Abnormal. Total Size(MB) Description: Total space of a specific partition. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameters Name File System Description Description: Hard disk partitions and their paths. Usage(%) Description: Current usage of a specific partition. Total Data Space (MB) Description: Total data space.9 Parameters for Monitoring the M2000 Server Database Status This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitor tab. If the usage is more than or equal to the maximum. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6.8. 6-61 . Status Description: Current status of a specific partition. Free Size(MB) Description: Available space of a specific partition. Free Data Space (MB) Description: Remaining data space. You can use these parameters when you monitor the M2000 server database status. including normal and abnormal. Ltd.. Parameters Name Database Name Description Description: Name of the database on the M2000 server. equals to the sum of Used Size and Free Size. Used Size(MB) Description: Used space of a specific partition.

Free Log Space (MB) Description: It refers to the unused disk space allocated to database logs. The high-water mark increases after data is added. 6. Status Description: Database status.8. Ltd. you can refer to this section. The M2000 calculates the Oracle data usage by monitoring the high-water mark. 6-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system displays Abnormal. but does not decrease after data is deleted. Other Users Description: Indicates other users except the current user. Therefore. the Oracle data usage monitored by the M2000 does not decrease after data deletion. S10) Name Data Space Usage (%) Description Description: Usage rate of the used data space and total data space.10 Parameters for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. Total Log Space (MB) Description: It refers to the space allocated to each database log of the M2000. When you set filter conditions for a task list.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.Free Log Space)/Total Log Space x 100%. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The high-water mark determines the used and unused blocks in a segment. including normal and abnormal. NOTE The Oracle database occupies the table space in a greedy manner.. Catego ry User Task Description: Indicates the task created by users. If the database usage is more than or equal to the threshold. Parameters Parameter User Name Current User Description Description: Indicates the user that operates the client. Log Space Usage (%) Description: It is calculated by the following formula: Log Used Rate = (Total Log Space .

Partly Success Failed Description: Indicates that the task is partly successfully carried out. Description: Indicates that the previous execution result in the server is lost due to improper service or sudden power cut. Description: Indicates that the task fails to carry out. the task can be deleted. Processing Description: Indicates that the task is being processed by the system.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the task may miss the previous execution. Thus. Archived Description: The archived state is supported only by the CME download task.. Running Description: Indicates that the task is being performed by the system. Last Run Result Success Description: Indicates that the task is successfully carried out. Unknown Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Suspend Description: The task is not ready to be scheduled. the previous execution result cannot be determined. 6-63 . Miss Run Time Description: Indicates that the task misses the previous performed time. If the server is not running properly or the task is suspended before the execution. after recovery. Only when the task is in the archived state. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter System Task Description Description: Indicates the task created by OMC during the system installation or upgrade. Ltd. After the CME download task is stopped. the task is archived. State Idle Description: Indicates that the task waits for being performed by the system. Finished Description: Indicates that the task is completed by the system.

6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . if you have selected Run At Once. - 6-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value: The start time should be later than the time displayed on the server. The task is performed immediately after the related settings are complete. you can refer to this topic. Task Type Description: Refers to the type of a timing task..8. Ltd. the Start Time parameter is invalid. Period: If you select this option. Parameters Table 6-17 Common Parameters Parameter Task Name Description Description: Refers to the name of a timing task. Settings Value: l l l A maximum of 60 characters Unique and not null Case sensitive Run Type Description: l Value: l l Once: If you select this option. When you create or copy a user timing task or when you modify a user or system timing task. NOTE For a one-time timing task. the system runs the created task once at the defined time point. S10) 6.11 Parameters for Setting the Common Information About Timing Tasks This topic describes the common parameters of all timing tasks except CEM download tasks. the system runs the created task periodically. Once Period l Start time Description: This parameter sets the time for starting a task.

6. Day (1 . however. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the system can choose whether to compress files after the export. Value: 0 . Week (1 52).366). Ltd. Parameter Description l l l l Parameters of Alarm Database Capacity Management Tasks Parameters of Performance Database Capacity Management Tasks Parameters of NE Log Database Capacity Management Tasks Parameters of M2000 Log Database Capacity Management Tasks Table 6-18 Parameters of alarm database capacity management tasks Parameter Compress File After Export Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description When the data in the database expires.366 x 24 x 60). Settings Value: l The period can be represented in either of the following units: minutes.65535 NOTE l 0 indicates that the number of times for executing periodic tasks is not restricted. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Period Description Description: Interval between periodic tasks. weeks. It has two enlistments: unit and duration.. 6-65 . The value range for period should be as follows: Minute (1 . months.12 Parameters for Modifying Database Capacity This section describes the parameters of database capacity management tasks. cannot be represented in seconds.366 x 24). Hour (1 . You can select either Yes or No in this field.8.12). Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l This parameter is displayed in the Attribute dialog box only after you set it when creating and copying a periodic task. days. l Run Times Description: This parameter indicates the times that a periodic task is executed. When modifying database management tasks. Month (1 . hours. Yes is selected by default. The period.

csv. the system automatically deletes the expired performance data. The save path is specified by the server and cannot be modified.000 Value range: 200-2000 Table 6-19 Parameters of performance database capacity management tasks Parameter Export Data Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description If you select No. and the parameters related to file export become invalid. and . Refers to the storage duration of data in the database.html. The default storage duration is 90 days. File Sum Number of files Default value: 1. 6-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The set upper threshold cannot exceed the size of the partition. The system automatically deletes the files whose storage duration exceeds the preset days. NOTE When setting the upper threshold of dump space. Alarm database capacity management tasks support . When you export files.xml files. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total number of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. the system exports the expired performance data according to the preset file export parameters. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total size of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. Refers to the upper threshold of the files in the file dump space. Ltd. Alarm database capacity management tasks: /export/home/omc/var/ ThresholdExport/FM. If you select Yes.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Refers to the path for saving exported data. .. Save File Path None. . Refers to the upper threshold of the file dump space. S10) Parameter File Format Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description Refers to the format of the file that saves the exported data. When you export files. you need to task the space of the partition to which the save path of files belongs into consideration.txt. Hold Days in the Database File Size Unit: day Value range: 1-90 Unit: MB Default value: 1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .024 Value range: 200-2048 File Hold Days Unit: day Default value: 15 Value range: 3-30 Refers to the storage duration of dumped files.

000 Value range: 200-2000 Hold Days Setting Select Common Mode or Configuration Mode. l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total size of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. Refers to the upper threshold of the files in the file dump space. The set upper threshold cannot exceed the size of the partition. Yes is selected by default. the system can choose whether to compress files after the export. The default value is 30. NOTE When setting the upper threshold of dump space. Refers to the format of the file that saves the exported data. When you export files. 6-67 .. File Format Selected from the drop-down list None. The system automatically deletes the files whose storage duration exceeds the preset days.024 Value range: 200-2048 File Hold Days Unit: day Default value: 15 Value range: 3-30 Refers to the storage duration of dumped files. Refers to the path for saving exported data. Common Mode: You need to manually enter a value in Hold Days in the Database. You can select either Yes or No in this field. The save path is specified by the server and cannot be modified. Refers to the upper threshold of the file dump space.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Refers to the storage duration of data in the database. When you export files. Performance database capacity management tasks: /export/home/omc/var/ ThresholdExport/PM. you need to task the space of the partition to which the save path of files belongs into consideration. The value range is 1-90. Configuration Mode: You need to specify Configuration File. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total number of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. The system uses the storage duration specified in the configuration file. The default storage duration is 30 days.csv files. Ltd. Performance database capacity management tasks support . Save File Path Hold Days in the Database File Size Unit: day Value range: 1-90 Unit: MB Default value: 1. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Compress File After Export Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description When the data in the database expires. l File Sum Number of files Default value: 1.

Refers to the upper threshold of the file dump space. The set upper threshold cannot exceed the size of the partition.txt and . Yes is selected by default. When you export files. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 6-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Refers to the format of the file that saves the exported data. Ltd. NE log database capacity tasks support . When you export files. NE log database capacity management tasks: /export/home/omc/var/ ThresholdExport/NeLog. You can select either Yes or No in this field. Save File Path Hold Days in the Database File Size Unit: day Value range: 1-90 Unit: MB Default value: 1. You can select either Yes or No in this field. The default storage duration is 30 days. Yes is selected by default. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total number of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold.csv files. The save path is specified by the server and cannot be modified. Refers to the upper threshold of the files in the file dump space. . the system can choose whether to compress files after the export. Refers to the path for saving exported data. The system automatically deletes the files whose storage duration exceeds the preset days. File Format Selected from the drop-down list None.024 Value range: 200-2048 File Hold Days Unit: day Default value: 15 Value range: 3-30 Refers to the storage duration of dumped files. NOTE When setting the upper threshold of dump space.. Refers to the storage duration of data in the database. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total size of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. you need to task the space of the partition to which the save path of files belongs into consideration. the system can choose whether to compress files after the export. File Sum Number of files Default value: 1. S10) Table 6-20 Parameters of NE log database capacity management tasks Parameter Compress File After Export Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description When the data in the database expires.000 Value range: 200-2000 Table 6-21 Parameters of M2000 log database capacity management tasks Parameter Compress File After Export Value Range Selected from the drop-down list Description When the data in the database expires.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

6-69 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Refers to the path for saving exported data.000 Value range: 200-2000 File Size Unit: MB Default value: 1. Parameter Description l l l l l Parameters for Modifying an Alarm Data Export Task Parameters for Modifying the Export of Performance Data Parameters for Modifying the Export of Inventory Data Parameters for Modifying the Export of NE Logs Parameters for Modifying the Export of M2000 Logs Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. M2000 log database capacity management tasks support .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The set upper threshold cannot exceed the size of the partition.xml and . you need to task the space of the partition to which the save path of files belongs into consideration. Refers to the upper threshold of the files in the file dump space. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. Description Refers to the format of the file that saves the exported data. Refers to the storage duration of dumped files. The default storage duration is 30 days. Refers to the upper threshold of the file dump space. When modifying file interface tasks..8. When you export files. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total number of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. The system automatically deletes the files whose storage duration exceeds the preset days. When you export files. Save File Path Hold Days in the Database File Hold Days Unit: day Value range: 1-180 Unit: day Default value: 15 Value range: 3-180 File Sum Number of files Default value: 1. NOTE When setting the upper threshold of dump space. The M2000 log database capacity management tasks: /export/home/omc/var/ ThresholdExport/Log. the earliest dumped files are replaced if the total size of the files in the specified path exceeds the preset upper threshold. Refers to the storage duration of data in the database.024 Value range: 200-4096 6.13 Parameters for Modifying File interface Task This section describes the parameters of file interface tasks. The save path is specified by the server and cannot be modified.csv files. Ltd. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter File Format Value Range Selected from the drop-down list None.

6-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it indicates that the . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ..html files are decompressed and then exported. File prefix Description: Prefix of export file names.6 Managing OSS System l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Value Range Value: You can select the following file types: l l l l CSV XML TXT HTML Compression format Description: l Value: You can select one of the following items. For example.xml. . The generated file names are abc-20090928104022 -alarm-log-auto-1. Export files are named in the export path in the format of prefix-export timedata type.zip.txt or .xml file. .csv. The default path is /export/home/omc/var/ fileint/fm/.txt or .csv. assume that the prefix is abc. . If you select Not compress. Ltd. . Not compress zip gzip l Export To Description: The save path of exported alarm data.html is exported. Value: The value contains 0-30 characters.zip and abc-20090928104022 -event-log-auto-1. l l l If you select zip or gzip. Value: The default value is used and cannot be changed. it indicates that the . S10) Parameters for Modifying the Export of Configuration Data Table 6-22 Parameters for Modifying an Alarm Data Export Task Parameter File type Description Description: The format of the exported files.

Alarm categories: current alarm. Alarm types: Power system. Environment system. Category. Communication system. Value: Select Alarm Name tab. l l Alarm Name Description: List the alarms that can be exported currently. Signaling system. minor. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Export Mode of Alarm Logs Description Description: l Value Range Value: - Export all unacknowledged and uncleared alarms indicates that all unacknowledged and uncleared alarms are exported based on the export conditions. QoS. Processing error. history alarm. 6-71 . l Alarm Severity. Internal. Operational violation. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Software system. event alarm. all alarms that meet the current conditions are exported.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. Hardware system. Integrity violation. Running system. and type of the alarm to be exported. Trunk system. category. Security service or mechanism violation. major. Export incremental alarms indicates that only the alarms that are generated from the time of last export to now are exported based on the same export conditions. and Type Description: Select the severity. If the current export conditions are different from the previous export conditions. and warning. and shielded alarm. Physical violation. Value: You can select the following values: l Alarm severities: critical. Ltd. Time domain violation. and then click to select the alarm name.

The parameter specifies the delay time for running a task. Hold Days Enter as required. The default value is 90. Ltd. The default value cannot be changed.csv or . NOTE The export period and measurement period of performance data must be consistent. The available values of this parameter depend on the selected NE type. The data of a task is deleted from the server after the storage duration expires. the exported data is saved in the /export/home/omc/ var/fileint/pm/ path. XML. The default path is /export/ home/omc/var/fileint/pm/. Delay Time The value must be multiples of 5 minutes.xml file. This parameter is used to set the execution period of an export task. CSV. Export Period Options in the drop-down list. 6-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The value must be an integral multiple of 5 minutes and should not be null.. Period You can click different measurement period tabs. File Path Default value. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) Table 6-23 Parameters for Modifying the Export of Performance Data Parameter File Format Value Range You can choose: l l l Description Performance measurement results are exported as a . The unit is minute. By default. TXT. You can set the measurement period for an export task by clicking different measurement period tabs. No change. Value range: 5 to 1440.

and if the performance measurement results are to be exported by template name according to the setting in the configuration file of the tool for exporting performance measurement results collected by the M2000. After a result query template is selected. To avoid file replacement. only one displayed. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Function Subsets Value Range You can select function subsets from the navigation tree. query results are periodically exported according to the settings of the template. l If the result query templates having the same template ID exist on one measurement period tab page. Ltd.. Description You can control the function subset navigation tree in the left pane by selecting Show Been Set Measuring Function Subsets and Show All Function Subsets. CAUTION l If the result query templates having the same name exist on one measurement period tab page. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the result files that are exported on the basis of the templates sharing the same name will replace each other when you select a template sharing the same name with other templates. 6-73 . In the navigation tree in the left pane. you can select the function subset whose performance measurement results are to be exported and then click or to add the function subset to the area on the right so that the performance measurement results of the selected function subset can be periodically exported according to the task settings. you need to change the names of the result query templates or modify the setting in the configuration file so that performance measurement results are exported by template ID.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Template You can select templates from the navigation tree.

NOTE When setting the threshold of dump space.. Saves NE logs.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.txt file. File Size Unit: MB Default value: 1024 Refers to the threshold of the space for dumping log files. The threshold cannot exceed the size of the partition. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The default path is: /export/ home/omc/var/fileint/nelogs/. 6-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You can select the specific NEs in Please Select NE only after you deselect All NE. Multiple NEs are supported. the size of the partition that the path for saving log files belongs to must be taken into account. if the size of the files existing in the specified path exceeds the preset threshold.txt file. Table 6-25 Parameters for Modifying the Export of NE Logs Parameter File Format File Path Value Range You can select . In addition. whereas the wildcard search is not supported.txt file or . Default value: No change. the system exports the inventory data of all NEs on the network. The searching condition is case insensitive. Default value: /export/home/omc/var/fileint/cm/ InvtTimerExport. the fuzzy search is supported. Ltd. csv file or .csv file. Table 6-24 Parameters for Modifying the Export of Inventory Data Parameter File Format File Path Description Exports the operation logs to a . Indicates all the NEs in the entire network. the earliest files are replaced. All NE Please Select NE If you select this option.txt or . S10) Parameter Filter Search Value Range None Description The system searches for results by the name of a function subset.csv. Indicates the path to save the exported inventory data. During the export of log files. Description Exports the operation logs to a . This option is selected by default.

During the export of log files. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter File Hold Days Value Range Unit: day Default value: 15 Description Refers to the number of the days within which the dump files can be saved. the earliest files are replaced. No change. If you select No.xml files are directly exported. the files are automatically deleted.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the size of the partition that the path for saving log files belongs to must be taken into account.. File Sum Number of files Default value: 1000 Table 6-26 Parameters for Modifying the Export of M2000 Logs Parameter Compress Exported File Value Range l l Description l Yes.csv file or . the . During the export of log files.csv files or . Refers to the maximum number of files in the dump space. 6-75 .xml. Ltd. where *** stands for the log type.xml file. NOTE When setting the threshold of dump space. Exports operation logs to a . If you select Yes. The threshold cannot exceeds the size of the partition. The default path is:/export/ home/omc/var/fileint/ ***logs/. File Size Unit: MB Default value: 1024 Refers to the threshold of the space for dumping log files. After these days.csv files or . the .xml files are compressed to a packet and exported. l Exported File Format Save File Path You can select . No. the earliest files are replaced. Default value. if the number of the files existing in the specified path exceeds the preset threshold. Saves the exported logs. if the size of the files existing in the specified path exceeds the preset threshold.csv or .

that is. . That is.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. File Sum Number of files Default value: 1000 Table 6-27 Extension parameters of Configuration Data Export tasks Parameter File Format Value Range Two formats are available. to collapse all the sub nodes. During the export of log files. Click Click to expand all the sub nodes. by selecting a parent node. Default value. the files are automatically deleted.csv. the earliest files are replaced. Then the M2000 exports the configuration data of all NEs. No change.xml and . You can select from the dropdown list. refers to cascading select. l l l Description Refers to the format in which the exported data files are saved.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . File Path Refers to the path to save the exported configuration data. After these days. all the subnodes under it are selected. if the number of the files existing in the specified path exceeds the preset threshold. Please Select NE You can select the required NEs in Physical Topology Tree. Refers to the maximum number of files in the dump space. the Physical Topology Tree becomes unavailable. S10) Parameter File Hold Days Value Range Unit: day Default value: 15 Description Refers to the number of the days within which the dump files can be saved. If All NE Configuration Data is selected. The default path is: /export/home/ omc/var/fileint/ cm/autoExport. Ltd. 6-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6. When modifying Synchronization task. Select existing NEs in the entire network.. You can select the specific NEs in Please Select NE only after you clear All NE. 6.15 Parameters for Modifying NE Basic Information Export Task This section describes the parameters involved in the NE basic information export task.8.xml path on the M2000 server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 6-29 Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of Inventory Data Parameter All NE Please Select NE Description If you select this option. You can modify the common parameters and extended parameters of the task according to the actual requirement. Indicates all the NEs in the entire network. Multiple NEs are supported. Multiple NEs are supported.14 Parameters for Modifying Synchronization task This section describes the parameters of Synchronization task.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Parameter description l l Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of NE Configuration Data Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of Inventory Data Table 6-28 Parameters for Modifying the Synchronization of NE Configuration Data Parameter All NE Configuration Data Please Select NE Description If All NE Configuration Data is selected. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations. the system synchronizes the inventory data of all NEs on the network.8. Parameter Exported File Description Export the file containing NE basic information to the /export/home/omc/var/fileint/network/ EAMInfo. When modifying an NE basic information export task. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. Ltd. the system synchronizes the configuration data of all existing NEs in the network. it can provide data to the Nastar for performance analysis. 6-77 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Parameter description The M2000 provides the function of exporting NE basic information. Thus.

8.17 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup Task This section describes the parameters of data backup tasks. S10) Parameter Export All NE Description The NE navigation tree is unavailable.16 Parameters for Modifying Alarm Timing Acknowledgement This part describes the parameters in the alarm acknowledgement. Parameter Description l l parameters for Modifying Data Backup in the M2000 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying NE Backup 6-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Parameter Description Parameter Alarm Level Value Range l l l l Description Indicates the level of alarms. the M2000 exports the information about all selected NEs. Critical Major Minor Warning Unacknowledge and unclear Fault Unacknowledge and clear Fault Alarm State l Indicates the alarm states. you can set the parameters by referring to the information described in this section. Ltd. The M2000 exports the information about all NEs. When modifying alarm acknowledgement. You need not specify the NEs to be exported. the M2000 exports the information about all NEs of this type. Export By NE Type Export By NE 6. After you select a certain NE type from the NE navigation tree. you can set the parameters in the alarm acknowledgement by referring to the information described in this section..8. l 6. Multiple choices are supported. Multiple choices are supported. After you select some NEs from the NE navigation tree. When modifying data backup tasks.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

6-79 . 2. Click side. 5. It is specified by the system. the full backup is performed each Monday. the system backs up the data of all NEs available in the current network. The default path is: /export/ home/backup/omc. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Table 6-30 Parameters for Modifying Data Backup in the M2000 Parameter Server Full Backup Day File Path Value Range Form Monday to Sunday Description The full backup is executed each week. Default value. If you select this parameter. No change.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 1. 4. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l Click to add the selected NE types to the valid domain at the right to delete the selected NE types from the valid domain at the right side. and then click navigation tree. l Click and to collapse and expand nodes in the navigation tree. The path to save the backup M2000 system data. If you set to Monday. By default. In the navigation tree in the left pane. Select By NE Type. 3. you should specify the NE type in the NE Type navigation tree.. to filter nodes in the l Enter filtering conditions in Name. The By NE Type dialog box is displayed. select one or multiple NE types. Click proceeded by By NE Type. If this option is selected. Click Apply. the system backs up the data of all NEs in the entire network. Table 6-31 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying NE Backup Parameter File Path Backup All NE By NE Type Description Refers to the path to save NE data backup files. Ltd.

S10) Parameter By NE Description If this option is selected. you can refer to this part. to delete the selected NEs from the valid domain at the right side. you should specify the NE in the NE navigation tree. 1. You can enter the path of an MML script file in the text box. 4..18 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying MML Command Script This section describes the parameters of MML command script tasks. Click proceeded by By NE. select one or multiple NEs. Select By NE. Click NOTE l Click l Click to add the selected NEs to the valid domain at the right side. select the MML script file. and to collapse and expand nodes in the navigation tree. 5. Parameter Description Parameter Script file Value Range The script file is in . In the displayed Open dialog box. Ltd. The maximum size is 1 MB. 2. to filter nodes in the l Enter filtering conditions in Name.txt format. Click Apply. 3. 6. and then click navigation tree. When creating or modifying MML command script tasks. 6-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The By NE dialog box is displayed.8. or click . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In the navigation tree in the left pane. Description The MML script file is a text file that records MML commands for one NE or multiple NEs of the same type.

you must select Select NE to choose NE objects if certain command lines in the script file does not contain object information. Two modes for issuing MML commands are available: l Parallel: indicates that the MML commands are issued to the NE concurrently. Refers to the mode of handling the errors that occur when you run the MML commands in the MML script file. You can click this button to switch to the Single Select mode. : You can click this button to use the Single Select mode. If the specified redirection file does not exist. you can change the NE of a script command by selecting the NE in the NE tree instead of modifying the script file. l Error-Execute Mode Ignore or Stop. If you have set task result redirection. you can select Save As and specify the path for adding the execution result of the task to a certain redirection file. After the NE is selected. and all the commands are issued to the newly selected NE. If the specified redirection file exists. you can create the file. Stop: stops running other MML commands. The NE tree displays all the NEs in a physical topology tree. S10) 6 Managing OSS System Parameter Select NE Value Range None. That is. the subnodes are not selected. if you select a node. l Execution Result None. Serial: indicates that the MML commands are issued to the NE in sequence. : to use the Recursive Select mode. The function buttons for selecting NEs are described as follows: l l l : You can click this button to expand the NE tree. Description After you select this option. l NOTE When creating MML script tasks. You can click this button to switch to the Recursive Select mode. 6-81 . If the type of a created task is Once. if you select a node. l Ignore: ignores the MML commands where errors occur and continues running other MML commands. the original NE information in the script file is invalid.. Execution Mode Parallel or Serial. : You can click this button to collapse the NE tree. the new information written into the file does not overwrite the original information. That is. the subnodes are also selected. Ltd. the path specified in Save As cannot be changed after a task is created. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

6 Managing OSS System

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6.8.19 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying RAN Report Task
This describes the parameters involved in the RAN report task. When creating, modifying, or copying a RAN report task, you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations.

Parameter description
You can set the RAN report export task on the M2000 to export the RAN report of a specified NE to a specified directory on the server. You can set a report task to export the MBTS, WCDMA, CDMA, or GSM reports. Parameter File Path Ne Type Description Refers to the default path for saving the file. The path cannot be changed. You can select MBTS, WCDMA, CDMA,or GSM. After you select the NE type, you also need to select the NEs whose reports are to be exported from the NE navigation tree. You can select Selected to specify Report Type.

Selected Report Type

6.8.20 Parameters for Creating, Viewing, or Modifying a Scheduled Report Task
This section describes the parameters for setting a scheduled report task. You can refer to this part when you create, query, or modify a scheduled task.

Common Parameters
Parameter Basic Informatio n Task Name Description Indicates the name of a scheduled report task. The value range is as follows:
l l

A maximum of 64 characters The following characters except ' are allowed: English characters, numbers, and other special characters. Unique and not null

l

Start Time

Indicates the time when a task starts to be executed. You can click and set the related parameters in the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box. The start time must be later than the current time of the server.

6-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6 Managing OSS System

Parameter Execution Type

Description Indicates the execution type of a scheduled report task. The value range is as follows:
l

Periodic: indicates that the system performs a created task periodically. Once: indicates that the system performs a created task once at a specific time. If you select this option, the parameters in Execution Period become unavailable.

l

Execution Period

Indicates the interval between periodic tasks. Setting this parameter involves setting the unit and duration. The unit can be hour, day, week, or month.

Execution Times

Indicates the execution time of a periodic task. The value range is as follows:
l

Unlimited: indicates that the system runs this task unlimited times. Limited: indicates that the system runs this task N times. N represents a specific number.

l

Extended Parameters
Parameter Extended Parameter Report Name Save Path Description Indicates the name of a scheduled report task. Indicates the path for saving the generated reports. For example, /report/$ReportOwner$/$TaskName$$Date $. For the description of each field in the path, see Table 6-32. File Name Indicates the name of a generated report. For example, $reportname$-$date$. For the description of each field in the file name, see Table 6-32. File Format Indicates the format of the file where a report is saved. The value range is as follows:
l l l

Excel HTML CSV

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-83

6 Managing OSS System

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Parameter Compress

Description Indicates whether to compress the report files that are generated periodically. The value range is as follows:
l l

Selected Not selected

The system selects Compress by default. In this case, files are compressed in .zip format. Maximum File Number Indicates that the report files of a scheduled task that are generated in the latest N times are saved. N represents a specific number. The value range is as follows:
l

Unlimited: indicates that the system saves all the report files of the task. Limited: indicates that the system saves the report files of the latest generated tasks.

l

Table 6-32 lists the predefined macros that the save path and file name support. Table 6-32 Predefined Macros Predefined Macro $ReportOwner$ $TaskType$ Meaning Indicates the creator of a report. Indicates the type of a periodic task. The values are once, hour, daily, weekly, and monthly. $Time$ $DateTime$ $Format$ $TaskOwner$ $ReportName$ $TaskName$ $Date$ $Index$ Indicates the generation time of a periodic report. Indicates the generation date and time of a periodic report. Indicates the format of a periodic report. Indicates the creator of a scheduled report task. Indicates the name of a report. Indicates the name of a scheduled task. Indicates the generation date. Indicates the times of performing a scheduled task.

6-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6 Managing OSS System

Predefined Macro $yy$

Meaning Indicates a year. It supports simple expressions. For example, $yy-1$ indicates the year before the current year; $yy+1$ indicates the year after the current year.

$mm$

Indicates a month. It supports simple expressions. For example, $mm-1$ indicates the month before the current month; $mm+1$ indicates the month after the current month.

$dd$

Indicates a day. It supports simple expressions. For example, $dd-1$ indicates the day before the current day; $dd+1$ indicates the day after the current day.

$hh$

Indicates an hour. It supports simple expressions. For example, $hh-1$ indicates the hour before the current hour; $dd+1$ indicates the hour after the current hour.

$Moh$

Indicates a minute. It can be represented in a simple format. For example, $Moh-1$ indicates the minute before the current minute; $Moh+1$ indicates the minute after the current minute.

NOTE

The naming convention for scheduled task files is as follows:
l l

The name of the performance report file in Excel format is specified by File Name. The name of the performance report file in HTML or CSV format is specified as File Name +Subreport Name. For example, in task_120080523151900report_1, task_120080523151900 is the user-defined report name, and report_1 is the subreport name.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-85

6 Managing OSS System

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Distribution Parameters
Parameter Email Distributio n To Description Indicates the recipient of emails. Use semicolons to separate recipient names. Click Email Boxes. The Select the distributing email box dialog box is displayed. Select one or multiple mailboxes, and then click OK.
TIP You can also right-click any row and choose Select All or Clear All from the shortcut menu.

The system can send scheduled report files to a maximum of 64 mailboxes simultaneously. Email Subject Indicates the subject of an email. If you have set To, you need to set the subject. Email Contents FTP Distributio n FTP Server Indicates the contents of an email. Indicates the IP address of the FTP server. Click FTP Server. The Select the distributing FTP server dialog box is displayed. Select one or multiple servers, and then click OK.
TIP You can also right-click any row and choose Select All or Clear All from the shortcut menu.

The system can send scheduled report files to a maximum of eight FTP servers simultaneously.

NOTE

The system adopts a redistribution mechanism. That is, in the case of an email or FTP distribution failure, the system redistributes the email or the FTP service three times immediately. In addition, you can manually perform a scheduled report task to generate a report file at a specific time and distribute the report file to an email or FTP server.

6.8.21 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a Task for Testing BTS Cabinet-Top Power
This section describes the parameters of a task for testing BTS cabinet-top power. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying such a task.

Parameter Description
Parameter Execution Duration Value Range 3-120 minutes Description Maximum execution duration of a task

6-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6 Managing OSS System

Parameter NE

Value Range None

Description Existing NE that supports cabinet-top power test.

6.8.22 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying an RSSI Test Task
This section describes the parameters of an RSSI test task. You can refer to this section when creating or modifying an RSSI test task.

Parameter Description
Parameter Execution Duration NE Frequency Value Range 3-120 minutes None 0-2047 The default value is null, which indicates that all frequencies are tested. Description Maximum execution duration of a task Existing NE that supports RSSI test. Frequency to be tested in an RSSI task.

6.8.23 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Software Download
This section describes the parameters in the software download task. When creating or modifying software download task, you can set the parameters for software download task by referring the information described in this section.

Parameter Description
Parameter NE Type Edition List Value Range Select the value from the drop-down list. None. Description Indicates all of the NE types available in the current network. Indicates the editions of all NEs that can be downloaded from the server. These NEs are of the same type. Multiple choices are not allowed. Indicates all of the NEs of an NE type available in the current network. Multiple choices are supported.

NE List

None.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-87

6 Managing OSS System

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6.8.24 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Dual-Home Management
This describes the parameters used in dual-homing management. You can refer to these parameters when creating, modifying, or copying dual-home management.

Parameter Description
Parameter Dual Homing Pairs Description Indicates the dual-homing pairs. For detailed information about dual homing, refer to LN Domain Management. Indicates the data resource type of the dual homing pairs to be checked. Data resource types vary depending on the version of dual-homing pair NE. Setting Select from the drop-down list.

Resource Type

l

Select the item in the Resource Type navigation tree. Enter the data resource type or key word in the Search box. Then the related resource types are listed under the Search box. You can doubleclick resource type to be checked.

l

Search

Use to search for the type of the data resource to be checked. The search conditions support case insensitive fuzzy search. Wildcard search is not supported.

Enter the data resource type of key word in the Search box.

6.8.25 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying iSStar Script
This section describes the parameters in the iSStar script task. When creating or modifying iSStar scripts, you can set the parameters in the iSStar tasks by referring to the information described in this section.

Parameter Description
Parameter Main File Value Range The main file is in .hsl format. The main file has a maximum size of 1 MB. Description The main file is the entry file for the execution of script files.

6-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

6 Managing OSS System

Parameter Assistant File

Value Range The assistant file has a maximum size of 1 MB. None.

Description When the script files are being executed, the main file selects from assistant files if the main file need to invoke other script files. You need to select NEs when script files contain operations on several NEs. Multiple choices are supported.

NE Selection

6.8.26 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying the Export of NE Upgrade Log
This describes the parameters for exporting NE logs and can be taken as reference during the parameter modification. Table 6-33 lists the extended parameters. Table 6-33 Description of extended parameters Parameter NE Start Time Value Range None. The start time must meet the requirement of time format. Description Refers to all the NEs on the entire network. All NE upgrade logs within the time range specified by the start time and end time are to be queried. All NE upgrade logs within the time range specified by the start time and end time are to be queried. Operation logs are exported to .xml files. Refers to the path for saving NE logs.

End Time

The end time must meet the requirement of time format.

File Format File Path

The default file format must be retained. The default file path must be retained. The default path is /export/ home/omc/var/field/ UpgradeHistory/.

6.8.27 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Upload Task
This describes the parameters of a CME upload task. When creating or modifying a CME upload task, you can refer to the parameter description and perform relevant operations.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-89

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Parameter Cell Input Mode Select the NE of a Cell Description After you select this mode. After you select this mode. Select the name of the controller managing the cell.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Import Cell Select the NE of a Cell and the Template NE Template 6-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can select Default 2G Cell Template. the system uploads the configuration data of all the NodeBs under the selected RNCs. For example. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations. Select the template to be compared. The M2000 automatically compares the cell parameters with the default configuration parameters of the selected template. S10) Parameter Description Parameter All NE All NodeBs Under RNC Description After you select this option. A CME cell algorithm comparison task can be performed to compare the parameters in the Current area with the default parameters in the CME configuration template and then export the comparison results to the specified path. you can specify the NEs of a cell whose parameters are to be compared. After you select this option. The M2000 automatically compares the parameters of all the cells managed by the selected controller. 6.28 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Parameters Compare Task This describes the parameters involved in the CME cell algorithm comparison task. the system uploads the configuration data of all the existing RNCs and NodeBs on the network. Ltd. When creating or modifying a CME cell algorithm comparison task.. you can import the list of cells whose parameters are to be compared.8.

8.30 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying a CME Current Area Export Task This describes the parameters of CME Current Area Export tasks. you can refer to this part and perform relevant operations.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.29 Parameters for Creating/Modifying/Copying Cell Consistency Check Task This describes the parameters involved in the CME cell consistency check task. Ltd. The M2000 automatically compares the parameters of all the cells managed by the selected controller. Parameter description A cell consistency check task can be performed to check that the data in the Current area complies with the selected check rules. Select check rules. The parameter values are as follows: l XML format: – – – radio parameter transmission parameter radio and transmission parameter radio parameter transmission parameter radio and transmission paramete l CSV format: – – – Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8. 6-91 . Rule 6. When creating or modifying a CME Current Area Export task. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6. Parameter NE Description Select the name of the controller managing the cell.. you can refer to the information described in this part. Parameter Select Export Type Description Select the data to be exported and its file format. you can perform a CME data export task to export the data from the current data area for Northbound. Parameter Description To manage the current data area. When creating or modifying a CME cell consistency check task.

SS stands for the second. The time format is DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS. HH stands for the hour. you can click l l l l l l and select the time from the time select panel.31 Parameters for Setting Time of Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters of time for automatic suspending and automatic resuming timing tasks Table 6-34 lists the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks. it fails to be suspended.6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. DD stands for the date. Alternatively. MM stands for the month. If the timing task is not in the Idle state at the specified time. If the timing task is not in the Idle state at the specified time. the system resume a suspended task and then the task is in the idle state and wait to be dispatched. YYYY stands for the year. You can set the value manually. S10) Parameter Select NE Description Select one or multiple controllers of the cell to which the data to be exported belongs. you can click l l l l l l and select the time from the time select panel. Alternatively.. MM stands for the month. Resume Time In the specified time. the data in the current data areas under all the controllers is to be exported. DD stands for the date. 6-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The time format is DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . HH stands for the hour. 6. You can set the value manually. MM stands for the minute. MM stands for the minute. SS stands for the second. Table 6-34 Descriptions of parameters for setting timing task time Parameter Suspend Time Description The system suspends an idle task and delay the time for using this task. YYYY stands for the year. If you select All NEs. it fails to be suspended.8.

Parameter Description Parameter Server informatio n Server address Description Complies with the principles of IP address rules. password Indicates the password that is used to log in to the target server..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Cannot be null. Grouped by topology or type. For detailed meaning of each check item. BSC6000. refer to the information described here for parameter setting. eNodeB. Displays the specific NE. FTP User name Indicates a valid name that the user already registered to the M2000. such as RNC.33 Parameters for Collecting NM Logs Parameters This describes the parameters of the M2000 log information collecting tool dialog box. You can refer to this part when creating device check tasks. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and OMC. Collects the trace files from the M2000 server. S10) 6 Managing OSS System 6.8. Cannot be null.32 Parameters for Selecting Objects for Device Check This part describes the extended parameters for selecting objects for device check. refer to NE Reference Information. When collecting NMS log files. the device check enables you to perform update check to ensure that the check items related to device update are normal. 6.536 The default value is 10119. CAUTION l Check items vary according to NE versions. Displays the device check items supported by NEs. l For the BSC6000. Cannot be null. Cannot be null.8. NodeB. Parameter Description Parameter Device Check NE Device Check Item Description Displays the type of the NE that supports device check. Value range: 1-65. Items selection Trace files in Local Host Trace files in server Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Collects the trace files from the M2000 client. Port Number Indicates the port of the server. 6-93 .

6 Managing OSS System M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Collects the alarm synchronization signals of NEs. Indicates the start time for collecting trace files and core files. Indicates the end time for collecting trace files and core files. Collects the NEs involved in alarm diagnostic data. Ltd. S10) Parameter Core files in server LMT trace files in server Start Time End Time Alarm diagnostic data NE Name Save Positions Save Positions Description Collects the core files from the server. 6-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Collects the trace files from the local maintenance terminal (LMT).. Indicates the directory for the collected diagnostic data.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7. the M2000 server automatically starts the processes related to the M2000 system.1 Introduction to M2000 Processes and Services When the M2000 is running. and stop M2000 system services. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 processes and services. Each process provides different services and functions. 7-1 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 7. start.2 Managing M2000 Services This section describes how to view. Ltd.

13 cpm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cpm_agent process.9 cmexp_agent Process This section describes the service and functions provided by the cmexp_agent process.1. 7.17 fars_agent Process This section describes the service and function provided by the fars_agent process.1. 7.1. 7.15 dsXXXX agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the dsXXXX_agent process. 7.1.3 adss_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the adss_agent process. 7.1.1. the M2000 server automatically starts the processes related to the M2000 system.1. S10) 7.11 cnnhc_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cnnhc_agent process. 7.1 Introduction to M2000 Processes and Services When the M2000 is running.6 cmdc_agent Process This section describes the CmDcService service and dependent services.12 corba_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the corba_agent process. Each process provides different services and functions. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 7.1.1.18 fmnotify_agent Process 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7..1. 7.8 cmeserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cmeserver_agent process. 7.1.4 antenna_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the antenna_agent process.16 eam_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the eam_agent process.7 cmengine_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cmengine_agent process. 7.1.5 ce_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ce_agent process.2 adn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the adn_agent process.1.10 cmserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process cmserver_agent. 7.1 3rdTool_agent Process This section describes the 3rdToolService service and dependent services.1. 7.1.14 devdoc_agent Process This section describes the DevDocService service provided by the devdoc_agent process.1.1. 7.1. 7. 7. CmDcService is provided by the cmdc_agent process. Ltd. 7.

36 ngnffs_agent Process This section describes the NGNFullFillService service and dependent services. 7.1.. 7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services This section describes the services and functions provided by the fmnotify_agent process.34 nelicense_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nelicense_agent process.29 log_agent Process This section describes the LogService service and dependent services. 7. 7. NeUserService is provided by the neuser_agent process.1.20 fnlicense_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the fnlicense_agent process. LogService is provided by the log_agent process. 7.1.1. 7. 7.1.28 lic_agent Process This chapter describes the services and functions provided by the process lic_agent.1.1.1.1. Ltd. 7.1.21 glmssyn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the glmssyn_agent process. 7-3 .1. 7. 7.22 ifms_agent Process This section describes the service and functions provided by the ifms_agent process.25 irp_agent Process This section describes the functions provided by the irp_agent process. 7.24 ipm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ipm_agent process.23 ipqdt_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ipqdt_agent process.35 neuser_agent Process This section describes the NeUserService service.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7.31 maintain_agent Process This topic describes the function of the MaintenanceService service.1.1.1.32 manager_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the manager_agent process. 7.1. 7.19 FMPreServiceXXXX_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the FMPreServiceXXXX_agent process.1.30 lte_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the lte_agent process.1.27 lcsserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the lcsserver_agent process. 7.26 itm_agent Process This section describes the ItmService service and the dependent services by the itm_agent process.1. which is provided by the maintain_agent process. 7. 7. 7.33 medXXXX_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the medXXXX_agent process.

54 prsreport_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsreport_agent process.1.1.41 nicservice_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nicservice_agent process.1. 7.44 partition_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the partition_agent process.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.40 nhcservice_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nhcservice_agent process.1. 7. 7. 7. Ltd. 7.38 ngnni112_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ngnni112_agent process.45 pm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pm_agent. 7.43 nms_mml_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process nms_mml_agent.1. 7. 7.39 ngntestmanage_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ngntestmanage_agent process.48 pmncdXX01_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the pmncdXX01_agent process.1..37 ngnnis_agent Process This section describes the NGNNIService service and dependent services. 7.1.1. 7. 7.52 prsdc_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsdc_agent process.46 pmexp_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pmexp_agent. 7.1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 7.1.1. 7. 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1.1. 7. 7.51 PRSAssistantService_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the PRSAssistantService_agent process.49 porttrunk_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the porttrunk_agent process.1. NIMServer is provided by the nimserver_agent process.1.42 nimserver_agent Process This section describes the NIMServer service and the dependent service.1.1.53 prsfs_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsfs_agent process. 7. 7.56 rn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the rn_agent process.47 pmmon_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pmmon_agent. 7.50 proxy_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the proxy_agent process. S10) 7.55 prssum_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prssum_agent process.1.1.1.

7.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.62 swm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the swm_agent process. 7.1.1. 7.58 scriptserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process scriptserver_agent. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.64 uap_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the uap_agent process.61 son_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the son_agent process. 7. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services 7.1.1.1.63 threshold_agent Process This topic describes the function of the ThresholdService service provided by the threshold_agent process and the service that the threshold_agent process depends on.60 snmp_agent Process This section describes the SnmpAgent service and the dependent services. 7.1 3rdTool_agent Process This section describes the 3rdToolService service and dependent services.65 udpdispatch_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the udpdispatch_agent process. 7.1. 7. 7..57 ScriptModuleService_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ScriptModuleService_agent process.1. The 3rdToolService service provides an interface for the third-party tools to access the data center.1. 7.69 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes This section describes how to check the status of the M2000 processes. 7.1.1. 7. When the M2000 processes are not running normally. Ltd.59 sm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process sm_agent. The SnmpAgent service is provided by the snmp_agent process. The adn_agent process provides the ADNService service.2 adn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the adn_agent process.1.1.1. 7.1.1. The 3rdTool_agent process provides the 3rdToolService service. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time. Required services: none 7.67 xftpXX01_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the xftpXX01_agent process. 7-5 .66 umgupdsvr_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the umgupdsvr_agent process. 7.68 Processes and Services Related to Each Northbound Interface This section describes the processes and services related to each northbound interface.

5 ce_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ce_agent process.6 cmdc_agent Process This section describes the CmDcService service and dependent services. If this function is required.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7.1. 7. such as remote automatic activation and automatic fault detection. synchronization management. Required services: FaultService and PMService.. 7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and deepen the security level hiberarchy. ensure that this service is running properly. The CmDcService service provides the functions such as data access interface.1. The cmdc_agent process provides the CmDcService service. The ce_agent process provides the ConfigExport service. S10) The ADNService service supports the NodeB plug-and-play function.1.1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . you must ensure that the service runs normally. You can disable the service when it is not required. Required services: CMServer. Required services: TopoAdapterService. CmDcService.1. and session management. The AdvancedSwitchService service authenticates the MOI resources to enhance the security of the operations on the NEs. 7. The antenna_agent process provides the AntennaTune service. This helps engineers quickly deploy NodeBs. 7. During the operation of the M2000. Ltd. Required services: none. and MediationServiceXXXX.3 adss_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the adss_agent process. Required service: EAMService. It provides various functions for newly constructed NodeBs.7 cmengine_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cmengine_agent process. The AntennaTune service provides the functions of managing NodeB antennas and locating the faults related to GBSS antennas. CmDcService is provided by the cmdc_agent process. The adss_agent process provides the AdvancedSwitchService service.4 antenna_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the antenna_agent process. 7. The ConfigExport service provides a transparent channel which enables the northbound NMS to directly obtain configuration data and set NE configurations from the GBSS.

CMserver configures the managed objects of the network manager. When the M2000 is running.1. The CMServer provides channels for issuing MML commands and helps to receive the supplementary messages reported automatically by NEs.8 cmeserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cmeserver_agent process. Through the CMExport service. When the M2000 is running. The CMExport service provides the functions of exporting configuration files and exporting the configuration database. The CMServer provides the function of managing object groups and enables the M2000 to automatically and remotely commission the NodeB upgrade. Dependent service: LicenseService. Required service: none. you can set the NE whose configuration data is to be exported. You can disable the service when it is not required. 7. The cmexp_agent process provides the CMExport service..1. The cmeserver_agent service provides the function of quickly configuring NEs. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services The cmserver_agent process provides the CMEngine service. and export the NE configuration data by using the Management Information Tree (MIT).10 cmserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process cmserver_agent. The cmeserver_agent process provides the CmeServer service. The cmserver_agent process provides the CMServer service. Configuration management is independent of NEs or managed objects. To enable the functions of exporting configuration files and exporting the northbound database.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Configuration management is independent of NEs or managed objects. ensure that this service functions properly. set the save path and file format of the exported data. 7-7 .1. Ltd. Required services: TopoService.9 cmexp_agent Process This section describes the service and functions provided by the cmexp_agent process. 7. you need to ensure that this service is running normally. ensure that this service functions properly. Required services: TopoService. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. CMEngine manages the configuration of the network manager.

1.12 corba_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the corba_agent process.11 cnnhc_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cnnhc_agent process. The DevDocService service enables you to manage device files. Ltd. The CorbaService provides the NBI on which the TMF 814 CORBA protocol runs. Required services: none 7. The dsXXXX_agent process provides the DesktopServiceXXXX service. that is.1. SecurityService.1.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. LogService. S10) 7. The corba_agent process provides the CorbaService service. 7.15 dsXXXX agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the dsXXXX_agent process. Required service: none. The Pool configuration management service provides users with the following functions: l l l l l l l l Creating a pool Checking pool alarms Measuring the performance of a pool Monitoring the load of a pool in real time Displaying the pool topology Setting pool parameters Checking the NE data in a pool Checking the MSC Server or MSCe of a specific user Required services: none 7.13 cpm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the cpm_agent process.. 7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The cnnhc_agent process provides the CNNHCService service. The devdoc_agent process provides the DevDocService service.1.1. 7. Required services: LicenseService. The cpm_agent process provides the CPMService service. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . CNNHCService provides the functions of information collection and health check. the pool configuration management service.14 devdoc_agent Process This section describes the DevDocService service provided by the devdoc_agent process.

7. Required service: LicenseService. data analysis. create and delete subnets. During the operation of the M2000. and LicenseService services. The DesktopServiceXXXX service presents and operates data on several types of clients such as the Java GUI client and the Web client. The EAMService service provides the function of NE access management and maintains a globally complete NE list. The TopoService service depends on the EAMService services. LogService. and data collection management.1. Ltd. and XXXX refers to the instance number.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The fmnotify_agent process provides the FMNotify service. The TopoService service can maintain the relation between the devices in the subnet. The fars_agent process provides the FarsService. and topology node. The eam_agent process provides the EAMService.1.16 eam_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the eam_agent process.17 fars_agent Process This section describes the service and function provided by the fars_agent process. nodes. dsXXXX_agent is a multi-instance process and XXXX refers to the process number. 7. The FarsService provides the function of tracing data collection. The TopoAdapterService service provides the mediation for earlier versions so that the users who use the earlier versions can use the topology function. SecurityService. Disable FMNotify when the real-time alarm forwarding function is not required. To enable the tracing function. 7. you need to ensure that the FarsService is running normally during the operation of the M2000. The corresponding service names are DesktopService0101 and DesktopService0102. FMNotify forwards the alarm data from FaultManager to the network management system (NMS) by Alarm Streaming Interface. You can log in to the client only when the DesktopServiceXXXX service is running properly. and TopoService services.18 fmnotify_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the fmnotify_agent process. The TopoAdapterService service depends on the EAMService. ensure that this service is running properly. The EAMService service does not depend on any other services. 7-9 . Required service: LicenseService Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Some typical process names are ds0101_agent and ds0102_agent.1.. TopoAdapterService. Dependent service: MediationServiceXXXX. TopoService. and move nodes among subnets.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and FMPreService0203_agent processes on a slave node for providing the FMPreService0201.. The glmssyn_agent process provides the GLMSSynService service. Required services: CMServer 7. and FMPreService0103_agent processes on the master node for providing the FMPreService0101. FMPreService0102_agent. dumping.22 ifms_agent Process This section describes the service and functions provided by the ifms_agent process.1. Required service: FaultService. The fnlicense_agent process provides the FNLicenseService service. and FMPreService0103 services separately. The number of purchased licenses determines the number of available resources and whether the user can use a specific functional component. you can deploy the FMPreServiceXXXX_agent process on the master node and several slave nodes. The GLMSSynService periodically obtains the information about QChat cluster communication changes from the Group and List Management Server (GLMS) and then applies the information to CBSCs.20 fnlicense_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the fnlicense_agent process. The FaultService collects alarm data from NEs and saves the data. S10) 7. The FMPreServiceXXXX service provides the function of prehandling faults.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You can also deploy the FMPreService0201_agent. In an SLS system.1. The ifms_agent process provides the FaultService.1. The FMPreServiceXXXX_agent process is a multi-instance process. You can also deploy multiple FMPreServiceXXXX_agent processes on one node.1. For example. XXXX refers to the process number. and FMPreService0203 services separately. FMPreService0202. Ltd. The FMPreServiceXXXX_agent process provides the FMPreServiceXXXX service. FMPreService0102. 7. you can deploy the FMPreService0101_agent. FMPreService0202_agent. You can disable the service when fault management is not required. Required services: LicenseService. 7. The FNLicenseService provides the fix network management function of managing the license authorization information about EMS. You can stop this process if the QChat cluster communication is not required.19 FMPreServiceXXXX_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the FMPreServiceXXXX_agent process. thus providing the functions of querying. and analyzing the fault data.21 glmssyn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the glmssyn_agent process. 7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

disable the NotificationIRP.1. from the stored file.. for example. If the function of subscription through the interface of northbound network management is not required. CSIRP CSIRP provides an interface for link monitoring. 7. the potential exceptions can be detected at the first time. In this way. Ltd. and the Manager obtains the reference of this entry point object in some way. disable the EPIRP. The link monitoring enables you to supervise the status of links between the Manager and the Agent. Required services: none. The ipqdt_agent process provides the IPQosDailingTest service.1. NotificationIRP NotificationIRP is used for subscribing to notifications and encapsulating notification subscription.1. EPIRP The EPIRP is subject to the entry point object. The IPMService service enables you to manage an IP network. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Required service: none. The entry point object is the first object that the NMS (Manager) accesses when the NMS interacts with the M2000 (Agent).24 ipm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ipm_agent process. To use the IP network management function. The ipm_agent process provides the IPMService service.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Required services: CMServer and CmDcService 7. The process can be stopped if the QoS dialing test on the IP network is not required. IPQosDailingTest tests the IP bearer network to obtain the QoS of the network so as to build a high performance network.25 irp_agent Process This section describes the functions provided by the irp_agent process. If the interface for northbound network management is not required.23 ipqdt_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ipqdt_agent process. Basic IRP: EPIRP. ensure that the IPMService service is running correctly during the operation of the M2000. If the function of Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7-11 . The Agent provides a reference of an entry point object to the Manager. 7. Basic IRP: None.

removing and modifying notifications. disable the AlarmIRP. BasicCMIRP is used for querying. NotificationIRP.1. The itm_agent process provides the ItmService service. disable the kernelCMIRP. If the function of fault data management through the interface of northbound network management is not required.. Ltd. BasicCMIRP BasicCMIRP controls the configuration management. KernelCMIRP KernelCMIRP provides an interface for public configuration management. Required services: LicenseService 7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and NotificationIRP. If the function of public configuration management through the interface of northbound network management is not required. adding. maintain. Basic IRP: EPIRP. If the function of configuration management through the interface of northband network management is not enabled.26 itm_agent Process This section describes the ItmService service and the dependent services by the itm_agent process. KernelCMIRP. Through LCSServer. FileTransferIRP. and BasicCMIRP. modifying. The lcsserver_agent process provides the LCSServer service. import. 7. verify.27 lcsserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the lcsserver_agent process. NotificationIRP. disable the BasicCMIRP. and export LTE configuration data. Basic IRP: EPIRP. This process can be stopped if the LTE configuration function is not required. S10) monitoring through the interface of northbound network management is not required. LCSServer provides the function of handling the configuration of LTEs. and NotificationIRP. users can edit. disable the CSIRP. Basic IRP: EPIRP. 7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. AlarmIRP AlarmIRP is used for managing fault data. such as sending configuration objects. The ItmService service provides the function of integrated task management.1. Basic IRP: EPIRP. The public configuration management uses KernelCMIRP to carry out some common tasks during the configuration. or removing network resource objects. or adding. Required Services The required service is the LicenseService. FileTransferIRP. and KernelCMIRP.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1.29 log_agent Process This section describes the LogService service and dependent services. Required services: none. During the M2000 operation. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation. The CommonLicService service manages the information about NE license files. It also enables the client to query log records of the operating system and to set and query the parameters for dumping system logs. The maintain_agent process provides the MaintenanceService service.1.. The log_agent process provides the LogService service. ensure that this service is running properly. ensure that the maintain_agent process is operational. and real-time data of MOs. database data.28 lic_agent Process This chapter describes the services and functions provided by the process lic_agent. The lic_agent process provides the LicenseService service.31 maintain_agent Process This topic describes the function of the MaintenanceService service.1. The lte_agent process provides the CommonLicService service and SSLManageService service. The MaintenanceService service enables the periodic backup of the important system configuration files.1. The SSLManageService service manages the SSL connections between the M2000 and NEs. which is provided by the maintain_agent process. Required services: none 7. 7-13 . LicenseService provides a service interface to validate the license of the current version. Required services: none 7. such as invalidity. Ltd. During the operation of the M2000. and adjustment information. The LogService service enables other services to save the system-related operation information to files. It also manages the SSL certificates used by the SSL connections. 7.32 manager_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the manager_agent process. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Required services: none 7.30 lte_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the lte_agent process. export. LogService is provided by the log_agent process.1. 7. Required service: none.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

and MediationService0103. and obtains the NE engines mirrored to the network devices from the M2000 system and also manages the related event interceptors. ensure that this service is running properly. The medXXXX_agent process provides the MediationServiceXXXX service. In addition. Some typical process names are med0101_agent. the system dynamically generates new processes and services based on NE types and NE quantity. Required services: CMEngine.33 medXXXX_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the medXXXX_agent process. and med0103_agent. UdpDispatchService. During the operation of the M2000. Dependent services: PartitionService.1. deliver command rights and command group rights. NeUserService is provided by the neuser_agent process. NEs of different types communicate with the M2000 system by using the corresponding NE engines through various network management protocols. Required services: none 7.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you can manage NE users through the M2000. and client upgrade information. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . deletes. and PartitionService 7. The MediationServiceXXXX service creates. client software version matching the server software. and XXXX refers to the instance number. software version of the client.1. you can authenticate the login of NE users. S10) The manager_agent process provides the SystemService service.1. software version of the server. SystemService enables you to query the M2000 version information such as the version of the operating system. MediationService0102. When the M2000 is running. The medXXXX_agent is a multi-instance process. the MediationServiceXXXX service can export performance result files on the basis of NEs. The neuser_agent process provides the NeUserService service. and the names of the corresponding services are MediationService0101.35 neuser_agent Process This section describes the NeUserService service. and customize command groups. When the M2000 and NEs are connected properly. The NeLicenseService service manages NodeB licenses and implements the sharing of a license between the NEs of the same type.34 nelicense_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nelicense_agent process. For example.. med0102_agent. The NeUserService service enables you to manage NE users. Ltd. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation. Required services: none 7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The nelicense_agent process provides the NeLicenseService service. 7.

1. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services 7.37 ngnnis_agent Process This section describes the NGNNIService service and dependent services. The ngnffs_agent process provides the NGNFullFillService.1.1. you must ensure this service is running properly. The NGNFullFillService service provides functions of the management domain and the subscriber number management. Ltd. 7. The NGNNIService service provides functions of the north interface operation management. The NGNTestManageService provides the fix access network test management function.1. 7. Required services: none 7. The nhcservice_agent process is available only after you have installed the network health check components.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.36 ngnffs_agent Process This section describes the NGNFullFillService service and dependent services.1. If you plan to perform a heath check task. The nicservice_agent process provides the NICService service.1.. The ngnni112_agent process provides the NGNNI112Service service. Required services: none 7. 7. The NHCService service provides the network health check function.38 ngnni112_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ngnni112_agent process. The ngntestmanage_agent process provides the NGNTestManageService service. Required service: ITMService and EAMService. Required services: NGNTestManageService.40 nhcservice_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nhcservice_agent process.39 ngntestmanage_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ngntestmanage_agent process. The NGNNI112Service provides the NBI for the subscriber line test system.41 nicservice_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the nicservice_agent process. The ngnnis_agent process provides the NGNNIService. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Required services: none. 7-15 . The nhcservice_agent process provides the NHCService service.

1.45 pm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pm_agent. and PMMonService. you must ensure this service is running properly. performance.42 nimserver_agent Process This section describes the NIMServer service and the dependent service.1. It also only provides the functions to some WRAN configuration objectssuch as alarm statistics. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Required service: LogService. 7.43 nms_mml_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process nms_mml_agent. the NMSMMLServer is not disruptive to other services. In the presence of a large quantity of objects. query of configuration link constitution and basic configuration information. If you plan to perform a network information collecting task. S10) The NICService service provides the network information collecting function. The nms_mml_agent process provides the NMSMMLServer service. 7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Required services: none. query of basic configuration information.44 partition_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the partition_agent process.1. If the northbound MML transmission interface is used when the M2000 is running. The NIMServer service only enables you to centralize the real-time monitoring of alarms. ensure that the NMSMMLServer is running correctly. and configuration status of some WRAN configuration objects.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the partitions are managed by various processes on different servers to balance the load. 7. Each partition is managed by its own process. That is. and query of adjacent cells and channel assignment. The nicservice_agent process is available only after you have installed the network information collecting components. The nimserver_agent process provides the NIMServer service. Required service: ITMService and EAMService. 7. The partition_agent process provides the PartitionService service.1.. The PartitionService service divides managed objects into various partitions. FaultService. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation. The pm_agent process provides the PMService service. Ltd. 7. When the northbound MML transmission interface is not used. NIMServer is provided by the nimserver_agent process. the NMS issues MML commands through the northbound MML transmission interface to managed NEs. Required services: CmDcService.

you need to import the data from the files to the database and then query the results. Required services: LicenseService.1. Required services: none. The performance management is independent of NEs or objects.1. You need not configure multiple ports on the firewall for communication. The pmncdXX01_agent process provides the PMNCDServiceXX01 service. 7. Required services: PMService. The porttrunk_agent process provides the PortTrunkingService service. 7. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The PMNCDServiceXX01 service imports the performance data of the neighboring cells from the files to the database. To view the data of the neighboring cells. The database does not hold the data.47 pmmon_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pmmon_agent.. Ltd. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services PMService monitors performance management on all NEs. PMMonService monitors key NE counters and displays the value about these counters in figures and tables. 7-17 .49 porttrunk_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the porttrunk_agent process. Stop PMExport when the function of exporting performance results is not required. Required services: PMService 7. The pmncdXX01_agent is a multi-instance process and XX01 refers to the instance number. PMExport is independent of NEs or managed objects. The pmmon_agent process provides the PMMonService service.1. Stop PMService if the performance management function is not required.46 pmexp_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process pmexp_agent. 7. the M2000 server can communicate with the M2000 client through a specified port. By using the PortTrunkingService service. the process name is pmncd0101_agent and the name of the corresponding service is PMNCDService0101. the system saves the performance data of the neighboring cells of the RNC and BSC in files. Generally. ensure that this service functions properly.48 pmncdXX01_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the pmncdXX01_agent process. PMExport exports performance data of a measurement unit from the database. The pmexp_agent process provides the PMExport service. By default.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1. When the M2000 is running.

The PRSAssistantService_agent process provides the PRSAssistantService service. the PRSReportService service cannot be stopped.52 prsdc_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsdc_agent process.html. The prsdc_agent process provides the PRSDcService service.1. It also provides the function of transferring result files by email or through the FTP.1.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Keep the service running during the operation of the PRS module. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 7. it provides the service for importing report data. If you need to run the PRS module. Proxyserver enables the M2000 client to connect to NEs through the proxy server and to run applications of the NEs on the LMT .. The proxy_agent process provides the Proxyserver service.1. 7.xls format. Required services: none. After restarting the PRSAssistantService service. S10) Required services: none 7.51 PRSAssistantService_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the PRSAssistantService_agent process. Required services: none 7. That is. Required service: none. Stop Proxyserver when the proxy function is not required. The prsfs_agent process provides the PRSFsService service. The PRSFsService service provides the function of parsing configuration data files and performance data files on schedule. Required service: none.1. The PRSDcService service provides the function of obtaining configuration data files and performance data files on schedule. Keep the service running during the operation of the PRS module. Ltd. you need to restart the PRSReportService service.53 prsfs_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsfs_agent process.50 proxy_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the proxy_agent process.csv or . The PRSAssistantService service provides the function of generating reports in . .

The ScriptModuleService_agent process provides the ScriptModuleService service. If you need to run the PRS module.1..57 ScriptModuleService_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the ScriptModuleService_agent process. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services 7. Required services: none 7. The rn_agent process provides the RNService service. Required services: ItmService and LicenseService.1. If you need to run the PRS module. The PRSSumService service provides the function of summarizing the data of the PRS (Performance Report Suite) module.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Required services: ItmService Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The ScriptModuleService service provides the function of managing applications.1.1. 7. The PRSReportService service provides the function of querying the reports of the PRS module. The prssum_agent process provides the PRSSumService service. The prsreport_agent process provides the PRSReportService service. Ltd.55 prssum_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prssum_agent process.58 scriptserver_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process scriptserver_agent. 7-19 .1. The RNService service provides the user with the function of sending notifications by email or short message. It is responsible for retrieving data in a specified order and scheduling the data. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation.54 prsreport_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the prsreport_agent process. ScriptService provide script timing and NEs access from script. The scriptserver_agent process provides the ScriptService service. 7. the PRSReportService service cannot be stopped. Required services: CMServer. 7.56 rn_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the rn_agent process. the PRSSumService service cannot be stopped. Required service: LicenseService.

1. configurating. GSM Pico. and rollback functions. The sm_agent process provides the SecurityService service. S10) 7. The SONService service provides a series functions for automatically managing networks. and optimizing NEs. The Auto Neighbor Relation (ANR) module provides the functions of automatically detecting the neighboring cells of the LTE. pBTS3701. Ltd. Only authorized users can gain access to sensitive resources. NE logs. through the SNMP protocol. The SWMService manages the versions. It also provides the download. upload. activation. and other files of some NEs. Required service: PMService 7. SecurityService controls the access of all sensitive resources in the M2000. NodeB. Required services: EAMService and LicenseService 7. If the functions for automatically managing networks are not required. The son_agent process provides the SONService service. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. such as automatically detecting. The swm_agent process provides the SWMService service. The snmp_agent process provides the SnmpAgent service.1.60 snmp_agent Process This section describes the SnmpAgent service and the dependent services. that is. BWA. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation. The SnmpAgent service enables the upper-level NMS to obtain the information on the M2000 such as alarm data. The SnmpAgent service is provided by the snmp_agent process. 7. Required services: none 7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.62 swm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the swm_agent process. configuration data. and TGW. this service can be stopped.61 son_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the son_agent process. and modifying neighboring cell parameters.59 sm_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the process sm_agent.1. The DHCP module provides the function of automatically detecting the eNodeB.. Ensure that this service works properly during the M2000 operation. The Easy Deployment System (EDS) module provides the function of automatically creating an LTE site.1. querying neighboring cell parameters across cells. PICO BTS. the northbound interface service complying with the SNMP protocol. Required services: LogService and LicenseService.

The umgupdsvr_agent process provides the UMGUpgradeService service. 7. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services 7. this service can generate threshold alarms. SecurityService. ensure that the udpdispatch_agent process works properly. In addition. For example.66 umgupdsvr_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the umgupdsvr_agent process. when users cannot access the BAM server (make sure that the M2000 server normally connects to the BAM).1. The uap_agent process also provides the function of authenticating user operations to meet the requirement of authority and domain based management on the M2000. Required services: PMService. Thus. the M2000 client can be started through the agent.1. The UdpDispatchService service forwards the Snmp Trap messages that are reported to port 162 by each NE to the Mediation service of each NE.1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The ThresholdService service provides the threshold management function.63 threshold_agent Process This topic describes the function of the ThresholdService service provided by the threshold_agent process and the service that the threshold_agent process depends on.. During the M2000 operation. The uap_agent process provides the UAPService service. and change a threshold. Required service: none. 7. When the M2000 is running. 7. Required services: PartitionService 7. Required service: none. ensure that the threshold_agent process is operational. The udpdispatch_agent process provides the UdpDispatchService service.67 xftpXX01_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the xftpXX01_agent process. The threshold_agent process provides the ThresholdService service. 7-21 .65 udpdispatch_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the udpdispatch_agent process. this service allows you to add.1.1. The UAPService service provides the Sock5 agent function on the M2000 server. generate. and FaultService. Ltd. The UdpDispatchService service controls the forwarding of the Snmp Trap messages that are reported by NEs monitored by the M2000.64 uap_agent Process This section describes the services and functions provided by the uap_agent process. UMGUpgradeService provides the UMG upgrade function.

Required services: none 7. The files that can be exported by the XFTPServiceXX01 are as follows: l l l l l l Northbound alarm file Northbound configuration file Northbound inventory file Northbound performance file CME northbound configuration file NodeB license file Through the M2000 client. When the M2000 is running. ensure that the xftpXX01_agent process works properly. Table 7-1 describes the relations between northbound interfaces and their corresponding processes and services. performance files to the specified FTP server. the M2000 actively uploads exported files through the northbound interface to the FTP server on the NMS side. Table 7-1 Relations between northbound interfaces and their corresponding processes and services Process irp_agent Service IRPService Northbound Interface l CORBA configuration interface CORBA alarm interface CORBA security interface Configuration database Performance database l l l l ifms_agent pmexp_agent FaultService PMExport Northbound alarm file interface Northbound performance file interface (measurement unitbased) Northbound performance file interface (NE-based) Issue 10 (2010-09-06) medXXXX_agent MediationServiceXXXX 7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.68 Processes and Services Related to Each Northbound Interface This section describes the processes and services related to each northbound interface. Through the XFTPServiceXX01 service. you can set the FTP server on the NMS side.1. The XFTPServiceXX01 service actively checks the alarms.. configurations. . configuration files. Ltd. Based on the settings of the FTP server on the NMS side.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. performance files generated by the PMExport service or the pmexp_agent process. S10) The xftpXX01_agent process provides the XFTPServiceXX01 service. the XFTPService service uploads the northbound alarm files.

Ltd. Step 2 Click the Process Monitor tab to check the monitoring data of the processes running on the M2000 server.1. 7-23 . See Figure 7-1. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. When the M2000 processes are not running normally. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. Context Checking the states of the M2000 processes on the M2000 client requires only a few system resources and does not affect system performance. You have the relevant operation rights. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed..69 Checking the Status of the M2000 Processes This section describes how to check the status of the M2000 processes. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Process snmp_agent fmnotify_agent nms_mml_agent cmserver_agent cmexp_agent Service SnmpAgent FMNotify NMSMMLServer CMServer CMExport Northbound Interface Northbound SNMP interface Northbound alarm streaming interface Northbound MML interface Northbound inventory file interface Northbound configuration file interface 7.

You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: .7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. After the M2000 services are resumed. the M2000 updates the data with the NEs and processes the data. S10) Figure 7-1 Process Monitor tab page Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. and stop M2000 system services. ----End 7. The system ignores the service that is already started and starts only the inactive services. 7. 7. 7. . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 7.2. all the M2000 services are started. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services This section describes how to view the states of M2000 services on the M2000 server.4 Stopping the M2000 Services After the M2000 system services are stopped.html. . 7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Checking the M2000 Services This section describes how to check the M2000 services.1 Checking the M2000 Services This section describes how to check the M2000 services.2.2. After you run the start_svc command. and ..2.3 Starting the M2000 System Services This section describes how to start the M2000 system services.2. start. 7. Ltd.xml.csv.2 Managing M2000 Services This section describes how to view. When the M2000 services are not running normally. When the M2000 services are not running normally. This operation consumes a few system resources and does not affect system performance.txt. you need to locate faults and log in to the server to rectify the faults in time. the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be processed.

Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file. ----End 7. Figure 7-2 Service Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column. 7-25 .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. See Figure 7-2. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. This operation consumes a few system resources and does not affect system performance. and . the red icon indicates the corresponding process is abnormal. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: .2.csv. the green icon indicates that the corresponding process is normal. .2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services This section describes how to view the states of M2000 services on the M2000 server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.html.xml. Ltd. You have the relevant operation rights.. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. Context Checking the M2000 services on the M2000 client requires only a few system resources and does not affect system performance. Step 2 Click the Service Monitor tab to check the M2000 services.txt. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. .

Accordingly./svc_profile. it takes about 20 minutes. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root..2. Ltd. if the state of the service is not running..00$ cd /opt/OMC By default. Generally. Service Agent: 3rdTool_agent [1 service(s)] pid: 15490 3rdToolService [running ] . .. In the displayed information. Step 2 Run the following commands to view the state of the M2000 services: -bash-3. you can infer that all the M2000 services operate properly. if the value of Not Running : is 0. The system ignores the service that is already started and starts only the inactive services. -bash-3. [All Services: 51 ] [Running: 51 ] [Not Running: 0 ] NOTE l Host: 10. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. you can infer that the service operate properly. you can infer that the service is abnormal. if the state of the service is running.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The M2000 system generates processes and services dynamically during operation. the number of processes and services changes dynamically.3 Starting the M2000 System Services This section describes how to start the M2000 system services. S10) Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 server as user omcuser. After you run the start_svc command. all the M2000 services are started. Procedure Step 1 Change to the installation directory of the M2000.242 At the end of the displayed information. If another value is displayed.00$ svc_adm -cmd status l In the displayed information.00$ . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .71. ----End 7.121.sh -bash-3. the installation directory is /opt/OMC. Context NOTE The time required for starting M2000 system services is related to the actual environment.

the status of each service is displayed.troubleshooting. you can locate the fault by viewing the iMAP.trace ----End 7./svc_profile.2. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. When you start M2000 system services. # svc_ps Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd./svc_profile.2 How to Start the Sybase. After the M2000 services are resumed.sh # stop_svc Step 3 Run the following command to check whether there is any output. # more /export/home/omc/var/logs/iMAP. # cd /opt/OMC Step 2 Run the following commands: # . the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be processed. Procedure Step 1 Go to the installation directory of the M2000 server.4 Stopping the M2000 Services After the M2000 system services are stopped. ensure that the Sybase service is started. 7-27 . In this case. If the status of a service is failed. it indicates that the service fails to be started. .trace log. Context NOTE The time required for stopping M2000 system services is related to the actual environment. The default installation directory of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC. Generally. see 14.troubleshooting. The default installation path of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC. .sh # start_svc NOTE l l Before starting the M2000 server. For details about how to start the Sybase service.. it takes about 20 minutes. the M2000 updates the data with the NEs and processes the data. # cd /opt/OMC Step 2 Run the following commands to stop the M2000 services: # .2. S10) 7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services Procedure Step 1 Navigate to the installation directory of the M2000 server.

Perform Step 5 directly. proceed with Step 7.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . l l If no output exists. it indicates that the M2000 daemon process is stopped. it indicates that the M2000 service processes are stopped. Perform Step 8 directly. ----End 7-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If any output exists. l Step 7 If the daemon process continues running.7 Managing M2000 Processes and Services l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. If any output exists. it indicates that the M2000 services are stopped. l Step 4 If some services continue running. run the stop_tao_services command to stop the TAO process. # stop_daem Step 6 Run the following command to check whether there is any output. run the following command to forcibly stop them: # kill_svc Step 5 Run the following command to terminate the M2000 daemon process. proceed with Step 4. run the following command to forcibly stop it: # kill_daem Step 8 Run the ps -ef |grep 9999 |grep -v grep command to check whether there is any output. Ltd. S10) If no output exists. If any output exists. # daem_ps l If no output exists.

itfndb. 8. The M2000 databases are categorized into omcdb. omcsmdb. 8. omclogdb. sumdb.4 Backing Up M2000 Databases This section describes how to back up the M2000 databases. This chapter describes only the M2000 server database. omctmdb. You can use Sybase commands to operate the M2000 server database.. 8. you can view the database states using the system monitor browser. NE security logs. The data includes the performance data. pmcomdb. Ltd. NM operation logs.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Databases This section describes how to view the states of M2000 databases. 8. After the installation of the M2000 server application software.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. farsdb and omceamdb. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Clearing M2000 Databases This section describes how to dump the data in the M2000 databases. swmdb. You can configure an integrated task for dumping the data in the M2000 databases. You can run Sybase commands on the server to view the states of M2000 databases. the size of the M2000 server database is fixed. Alternatively. pmdb. NE operation logs. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases 8 Managing the M2000 Databases About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage the M2000 databases. alarm data. fmdb. and NM security logs. NM system logs. 8-1 .1 M2000 Database The M2000 databases consist of the Sybase database and the M2000 server database. NE system logs.

If the M2000 system is not configured with the PRS. If the M2000 system is not configured with the tracing function.1.. which stores the northbound configuration data. and performance threshold data.1. the size of the M2000 server database is fixed. subnets. omclogdb: stores log management data. The omclogdb database must exist in the M2000 system. 8. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . l l l l l l l l l l l l 8. omctempdb: stores the buffer data required for internal implementation of the DesktopServiceXXXX service. pmdb: stores the performance structure tables and performance measurement results of NEs. farsdb: stores the signaling data of all the NEs managed by the M2000. The omctmdb database must exist in the M2000 system. fmdb: stores the alarm data of the M2000 and NEs. such as NEs. and links.1 M2000 Database The M2000 databases consist of the Sybase database and the M2000 server database.4 omcdb Database 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This chapter describes only the M2000 server database. You can use Sybase commands to operate the M2000 server database.3 itfndb Database This section describes the itfndb database. sumdb: stores the summary data of NEs. pmcomdb: stores the static performance measurement data of NEs. The function of each M2000 server database is as follows: l omcdb: stores the configuration data of the M2000 and the data related to internal feature implementation. swmdb: stores the files managed by the software management module and the configuration data related to NE versions. which stores the alarm data of the M2000 and the managed NEs. The omcdb database must exist in the M2000 system. omctmdb: stores topology management data. the sumdb database does not exist. The omceamdb database must exist in the M2000 system. The omctempdb database must exist in the M2000 system. you must create the itfndb database for storing the northbound configuration data. 8. Ltd.2 fmdb Database This section describes the fmdb database.1. The omcsmdb database must exist in the M2000 system. The fmdb database must exist in the M2000 system. The itfndb database must exist in the M2000 system.1 farsdb Database The farsdb database stores the signaling data of all the NEs managed by the M2000. The swmdb database must exist in the M2000 system. performance tasks. The pmcomdb database must exist in the M2000 system. performance tasks. S10) 8. and performance threshold data. After the installation of the M2000 server application software. The pmdb database must exist in the M2000 system. the farsdb database does not exist.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. omceamdb: stores the data of network management objects. itfndb: When installing northbound components. omcsmdb: stores security management data.1. 8.

9 omctmdb Database This section describes the omctmdb database. which stores the file information about the software management module and the configuration data of NE versions.1.10 pmcomdb Database The pmcomdb database is used for storing the static performance measurement data of NEs.1.5 omceamdb Database This section describes the omceamdb database. .1. The omcdb database stores the M2000 configuration data. the farsdb database is not available.1.7 omcsmdb Database This section describes the omcsmdb database. 8. 8.1. 8. The omceamdb database is used to store the data of network management objects.1. security data.1 farsdb Database The farsdb database stores the signaling data of all the NEs managed by the M2000. The farsdb database consists of the following types of tables: l l l Static configuration data table Task table Task data table Table 8-1 describes the name and function of each table in the farsdb database. The omctempdb database is used to store the buffer data required for internal implementation of the DesktopServiceXXXX service.13 swmdb Database This section describes the swmdb database.1.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The farsdb database requires at least 10 GB data space and 3 GB log space. 8.8 omctempdb Database This section describes the omctempdb database.1. which stores the security management data. which stores the M2000 log management data. 8. Table 8-1 Tables of the farsdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_ProcessorInfo Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Function Static service configuration table 8-3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and links.1. 8.11 pmdb Database This section describes the pmdb database. subnets. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases This section describes the omcdb database.1. Ltd.. such as NEs. 8. 8. and internal data.6 omclogdb Database This section describes the omclogdb database. which stores the topology management data. If the M2000 system is not configured with the tracing function. 8. 8.12 sumdb Database The sumdb database stores the summarized performance data of NEs for performance reports. which stores the performance structure tables and performance measurement results of NEs.

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Table Name tbl_Field tbl_TaskInfo tbl_TaskNE Message type name_task ID

Function Static field configuration table Dynamic task record table Table recording the tasks reported to NEs Task data table created dynamically, which records the signaling data of the message type corresponding to a task

8.1.2 fmdb Database
This section describes the fmdb database, which stores the alarm data of the M2000 and the managed NEs. The space of the fmdb database must be greater than 3,700 MB. Table 8-2 lists the names and functions of tables in the fmdb database. Table 8-2 Tables of the fmdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_alm_log tbl_event_log Other tables Function Records alarm logs. Records event logs. Record the internal processing data of alarms.

NOTE

The system automatically divides the tbl_alm_log and tbl_event_log tables according to the size of alarms and events. For example, the fmdb database may contain multiple alarm log tables such as tbl_alm_log_1 and tbl_alm_log_2.

8.1.3 itfndb Database
This section describes the itfndb database, which stores the northbound configuration data, performance tasks, and performance threshold data. The itfndb database is optional. It requires a disk space of at least 200 MB. Table 8-3 lists the name and function of each table. Table 8-3 Tables of the itfndb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_JGeneralInfo tbl_JMoInstance tbl_JStatusRecord
8-4

Function Records the general information about tasks. Records the instances of tasks. Records the Status of tasks.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

Table Name tbl_JMeasurementCategory tbl_JSchedule tbl_MGeneralInfo tbl_MMoInstance tbl_MMeasurementCategory tbl_MThresholdPackElemen tbl_MAlarmRecord tbl_MStatusRecord Other tables

Function Records the measurement categories of tasks. Records the task scheduling. Records the general information about thresholds. Records the instances of thresholds. Records the measurement categories of thresholds. Records the details of thresholds. Records the alarm records of thresholds. Records the status of thresholds. Records the information about northbound implementation.

8.1.4 omcdb Database
This section describes the omcdb database. The omcdb database stores the M2000 configuration data, security data, and internal data. The omcdb database requires at least 1,000 MB data space. Table 8-4 lists the names and functions of the tables in the omcdb database. Table 8-4 Names and functions of tables in the omcdb database Table Name Tables with moi_ as the prefix Tables with mos_ver_ as the prefix Tables with nbmmlNe_ as the prefix Tables with ne2_ as the prefix Tables with omc_ as the prefix Tables with rel_ as the prefix tbl_ADAllNeList tbl_ADNeStatus Function Records the information about MO examples. Records the information about versions. Records the information about the format of messages transferred between the and the NEs. Records the information about NE models. Records the data about network management. Records the associations between MOs. Records the information about the NodeBs to be commissioned. Records the information about the statuses of the NodeBs to be commissioned.
8-5

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Table Name tbl_AllNeInfo tbl_IPExg tbl_OmcSslOption tbl_nelicBaseInfo tbl_nelicTask tbl_nelicTaskEnv tbl_test_task_property tbl_test_local_path tbl_test_other_path tbl_test_log_result tbl_test_ping_report tbl_test_audit_result tbl_test_nblink_result tbl_test_ping_address tbl_SubareaInfo tbl_SubareaRes session_SessionEntity session_SessionMoc session_SessionOpInfo Other tables

Function Records the network management data. It is created to ensure that the M2000 is compatible with earlier versions. Records the IP configuration information about the NAT translation table. Records the SSL connection policy of the OMC for NEs. Records the basic information about NEs. Records the information about operation tasks. Records the information flow interacted between the M2000 server and client. Records the properties of the IPQoS test task. Records the intra-office test path. Records the inter-office test path. Records the test task logs. Records the signaling parameters on the bearer network. Records the audit results of calling and called parties on the bearer network. Records the audit result of the call completion rate on the bearer network. Records the information about address pairs sent by the host. Refers to the partition information table, which records the information about each node. Refers to the partition resource table, which records the resources of each node. Records the information about the operated NEs during a session. Records the information about the operated MOCs during a session. Records the information about the user operations during a session. Records other configuration data of the M2000.

8.1.5 omceamdb Database
This section describes the omceamdb database. The omceamdb database is used to store the data of network management objects, such as NEs, subnets, and links. The omceamdb database requires more than 500 MB disk space.
8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

Table 8-5 lists the name and function of each table in the omceamdb database. Table 8-5 Name and function of each table in the omceamdb database Table Name tbl_sn tbl_ne tbl_nefeature tbl_link tbl_idresource tbl_sntype tbl_netype tbl_linktype tbl_sync tbl_nerelation tbl_maintenanceinfo tbl_locationinfo tbl_negroup tbl_negroupclass tbl_negroup2ne tbl_negrouptype tbl_devsnmppara tbl_dftsnmppara tbl_autodiscfilter tbl_autodischistory tbl_eamschedule tbl_autodiscresult Function Subnet information table NE information table NE feature table Link information table NMS object identification management table Subnet type table NE type table Link type table Data synchronization table NE relation table Maintenance personnel information table Device maintenance information table NE group information table NE group mode table NE group and NE relation table NE group type table SNMP device parameter table Default SNMP parameter table Auto-search IP filter table Auto-search history record table Scheduled-search parameter table Auto-search result table

8.1.6 omclogdb Database
This section describes the omclogdb database, which stores the M2000 log management data. The omclogdb database requires more than 500 MB disk space. Table 8-6 lists the names and functions of the tables in the omclogdb database.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-7

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Table 8-6 Names and functions of the tables in the omclogdb database Table Name tbl_Audit tbl_SysLog tbl_SysLogResultDef tbl_SysLogStaticInfo Other tables Function Records the logs of user operations. Records the logs of system operations. Records the result information about system logs. Records the static information about system logs. Records the information about other logs.

8.1.7 omcsmdb Database
This section describes the omcsmdb database, which stores the security management data. Table 8-7 lists the names and functions of the tables in the omcsmdb database. Table 8-7 Tables of the omcsmdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_AccessTable tbl_AccessViewNodeRelTable tbl_AccessViewNodeTable tbl_IDTable tbl_SMAccessPolicyItem tbl_SMGroup tbl_SMGroupUserMap tbl_SMLoginRec tbl_SMNEUser tbl_SMPrivateGroupUserMap tbl_SMSecurityPolicy tbl_SMTerm tbl_SMUser tbl_SMUserHistoryRec Function Records the binding relations between user groups and privileges. Records the relations between the privilege display nodes. Records the privilege display nodes. Records the reclaimed IDs. Records the privilege statistics for binding user groups. Records the basic information about user groups. Records the binding relations between user groups and users. Stores the history records on user login. Records the basic information about NE users. Records the binding relations between private groups and users. Records the security policy. Records the basic information about terminals. Records the basic information about users. Records history user passwords.

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

Table Name tbl_SMUserNEUserMap tbl_SMUserTerminalMap tbl_SecurityObjectTable tbl_SessionIDTable tbl_StaticTypeRelationTable tbl_StaticTypeTable tbl_StaticTypeViewTable

Function Records the binding relations between users and NE users. Records the binding relations between users and terminals. Records security objects. Records session IDs. Records the relations between privileges. Records the static security information about object types, privileges, and operations. Records the static security information.

8.1.8 omctempdb Database
This section describes the omctempdb database. The omctempdb database is used to store the buffer data required for internal implementation of the DesktopServiceXXXX service. The omctempdb database requires more than 500 MB disk space. Table 8-8 lists the name and function of each table in the omctempdb database. Table 8-8 Name and function of each table in the omctempdb database Table Name tbl_instance name_subsystem name_function name Function Stores the buffer data required for internal implementation of the DesktopServiceXXXX service.

8.1.9 omctmdb Database
This section describes the omctmdb database, which stores the topology management data. The omctmdb database requires a disk space of more than 550 MB. Table 8-9 lists the names and functions of the tables in the omctmdb database. Table 8-9 Names and functions of the tables in the omctmdb database Table Name MOTSConfig MOTSDomain
Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Function Records the topology configuration values, including the initial value and the maximum value assigned by ObjID. Records the information on topology domains.
8-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Table Name MOTSLink MOTSNode MOTSSubnet MOTSSubtree MOTSVSubnet MOTSView MOTSViewObj TSTempLoc TSTempPos

Function Records the information on topology links. Records the information on topology NEs. Records the information on topology subnets. Records the information on the topology tree. Records the information on topology logical subnets. Records the information on topology views. Records the information on topology view objects. Records the temporary table that stores the longitude and latitude coordinates of the e-map. Records the temporary table that stores the x-axis and y-axis coordinates of common physical topology.

8.1.10 pmcomdb Database
The pmcomdb database is used for storing the static performance measurement data of NEs. The space of the pmcomdb database must be greater than 400 MB. If the remaining space of the pmcomdb database is insufficient, the system generates an alarm. The pmcomdb database consists of the following types of tables:
l l l

Counter tables Template Tables Function Subsets and Period Tables

Counter tables
Compared with the data in other types of tables, the data in these tables is stable. Table 8-10 lists the name and function of each table. Table 8-10 Counter information tables in the pmcomdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name systbl_NeType systbl_FunctionSet systbl_FunctionSubSet systbl_Counters
8-10

Function Records all possible NE types in M2000. Records the function sets of all NEs. Records the measurement units of all function sets. Records all measurement counters.
Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

8 Managing the M2000 Databases

Table Name systbl_Counter_Unit systbl_AllCounterCategory systbl_ComputeCounters

Function Records the units of all counters. Records the service features of each version. Records only the counters involved in calculation.

Template Tables
Template tables contain several tables that record measurement information. Table 8-11 lists the name and function of each table. Table 8-11 Template information tables in the pmcomdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_ObjectInstance tbl_MeasurementPeriod tbl_MeasurementCounter tbl_MeasurementSuspendInfo tbl_CounterCategory tbl_CounterLevel tbl_FeatureStatus Function Records measurement objects. Records measurement periods. Records measurement counters. Records the information on suspended tasks. Records the status of each service feature. Records the status of each service counter. Records the status of all the service features on the M2000 operating environment.

Function Subsets and Period Tables
The measurement results are saved according to the function subset and period. Table 8-12 lists the name and function of each subset and table.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

perform the following steps: 1. After the storage period of the performance measurement data expires. If the pmdb database is fully occupied. the pmdb database is suspended and it cannot process any performance data from the NEs.1.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . A disk space of more than 13. you must change the number of days till when the data can be stored. Table 8-13 lists the name and function of the table. Calculate the space of the pmdb database used a day. a message is recorded in the list. which stores the performance structure tables and performance measurement results of NEs. S10) Table 8-12 Function subsets and period tables in the pmcomdb database and their functions Table Name tbl_MeasObject_XXX_Y Function In the table name. 3. you can check the loss status and integrity of the results. To calculate the number of days till when the data can be stored. By comparing the tbl_MeasObject_XXX_Y with the result table named tbl_Result_XXX_Y. Ltd. Calculate the number of days that the pmdb database lasts. The pmdb database consists of the following types of tables: l l Template Tables Function Subsets and Period Tables Template Tables Template tables record measurement information.000 MB is required for the storage.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the most recent data overwrites the earlier data on a daily basis. Each time when the measured object changes. Observe the usage of the pmdb database when the M2000 runs for half a month. the M2000 raises an alarm. 8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Otherwise. If the data is saved for less than 30 days old but the pmdb database is fully occupied.11 pmdb Database This section describes the pmdb database. XXX refers to the function subset ID and Y refers to the period index that ranges from 0 to 4. 2. The pmdb database stores the NE performance measurement data. 8. Change the number of saving days when the remaining space of the pmdb database is insufficient.

S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases Table 8-13 Template tables in the pmdb database and their functions Table Name tbl_SyncInfo Function Records the supplementary collection queues of performance results.12 sumdb Database The sumdb database stores the summarized performance data of NEs for performance reports. the sumdb database is not available. Table 8-15 lists the name and function of each table. 8-13 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .500 MB database space is required. The sumdb database consists of the following types of tables: l l l l Object type information table System setting information table Report information table Performance result table Object Type Information Table The object type information table consists of 12 tables.. 8. The size of the sumdb database equals to one thirds of the size of the pmdb database. That is.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 8-15 Name and function of each object type information table in the sumdb database Table Name t_NeType Function Records the NE type and manages the relevant information. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. XXX is the ID of the function subset and Y is the period index between 0 and 4. at least 4. Table 8-14 lists the name and function of the table.1. Table 8-14 Function subset tables and period tables in the pmdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_Result_XXX_Y Function Records periodic results. which save a group of relatively stable information. In the table name. Function Subsets and Period Tables The pmdb database stores the tables of measurement results categorized by function subsets and periods. If the M2000 system is not configured with the PRS. Ltd.

Ltd. . Records the attribute information about the configuration object type. Records the rule information about the combination table. Table 8-16 lists the name and function of each table. Table 8-16 Name and function of each system setting information table in the sumdb database Table Name t_Week t_SpecialDate t_BusyRule t_BusyTime t_BusyTimeArith Function Records the start date of a week. Records the information about busy-hour planning. Records the relation between the PRS object type and the performance object type. Records the information about object types of configuration classes. Records the information about busy hours. Records the information about the statistics on monthly busy hours. Records the information about object types of attribute classes. S10) Table Name t_PRSObjectType t_GroupObjType t_AttrObjType t_ConfigObjType t_ConfigObjTypeAttr t_CombObjType t_PmObjType t_CombTable t_FSS t_Item t_ObjTypeAggrRelation Function Records the information about object types of each class. System Setting Information Table The system setting information consists of 15 tables that record information related to system setting.. Records counter information. Records the information about object types of combination classes. Records the definition information about special dates. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Records the summarization relation between objects. Records the information about object types of object groups. Records the information about the extracted function subsets.

Records the information about the sheets. Records the IDs of maximum available counters of NEs. Ltd. Records the information about busy-hour summarization result tables. Records the default storage duration of results. Report Information Table The report information table consists of eight tables that record the information about the queried tables. Records filtering information. Records the counters of sheets.. Records the information about the extraction period of original results. Records the relation between reports. 8-15 .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 8-17 Name and function of each report information table in the sumdb database Table Name t_Report t_Sheet t_SheetItem t_SheetFilter t_ItemFormat t_RelateReport t_TemplateInfo Function Records the information about reports. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases Table Name t_DefaultPeriod t_RawPeriod t_DefaultStorage t_CustomStorag t_LoadFlag t_MaxItemId t_RawHistoryInf t_RawResultNo t_SumHistoryInfo t_BusyHistoryInfo Function Records the information about default periods. Records the counter format information. Records the storage duration of results. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Records the history of extracting summarization result tables. Table 8-17 lists the name and function of each table. Records the result numbers of original result tables. Records the basic information about the templates. Records the information about the summarization and extraction. Records the history of extracting original result tables.

In Table 8-18. The hourly summarization is based on the original results.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 8-18 Name and function of each performance result table in the sumdb database Table Name f_fssName_Raw Function Indicates original result serial tables which record the original results. l l l fssName refers to the name of a function subset. The monthly summarization is based on weekly summarization. Indicates the weekly busy-hour serial tables which record the weekly busy-hour results. which records the performance measurement results based on the function subset and the measurement period. Performance Result Table The performance result table consists of multiple tables. The hourly summarization is based on hourly summarization. If the function subset is not extracted internally. Indicates daily serial tables which record the result information at week dimension. In the tables whose names begin with d_. S10) Table Name t_TemplateObjInfo Function Records the basic information about the templates and the objects. Indicates monthly serial tables which record the result information at month dimension. Ltd. fssName. Table 8-18 lists the name and function of each table. ObjLevel. XXX refers to the ID of an object type. and XXX in the tables whose names begin with d_ can be configured in the configuration file.. f_fssName_ObjLevel_H Indicates hourly serial tables which records the result information at hour dimension. the administration tool (AT) automatically names the function subset in the following format: F _ ID of the function subset. ObjLevel refers to the dimension of an object. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) f_fssName_ObjLevel_D f_fssName_ObjLevel_W f_fssName_ObjLevel_M f_fssName_ObjLevel_WH 8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . Indicates daily serial tables which record the result information at day dimension. The weekly summarization is based on daily summarization.

000 MB is required for storage.1 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the database status through the M2000 client to know the usage of the databases. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect system operation. You can run Sybase commands on the server to view the states of M2000 databases. Records the information about the type of object groups. you can view the database states using the system monitor browser. Records the information about the objects to be configured.2. Records the NE operation logs.2 Viewing the Database Usage of the M2000 Server Using Sybase Commands This section describes how to view the database status of the M2000 server by using Sybase commands.. 8. Table 8-19 Tables of the swmdb database and the corresponding functions Table Name tbl_FTPFileSet tbl_VersionRelation tbl_NELogTable Function Records the files managed by the software management module. Records the information about version relations. Records the information about object instances of object groups. Ltd. 8.13 swmdb Database This section describes the swmdb database.1. which stores the file information about the software management module and the configuration data of NE versions.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Table 8-19 lists the name and function of each table. 8. 8-17 . The swmdb database stores the files managed by the software management module and the NE version configuration data.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Databases This section describes how to view the states of M2000 databases. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases Table Name f_fssName_ObjLevel_MH d_XXX d_XXXGrp d_XXXGrpObject Function Indicates the monthly busy-hour serial tables which record the monthly busy-hour results. Alternatively. A disk of more than 3. 8.2.

2..8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . If the usage of a database exceeds the preset threshold. the icon in this column changes from green to red. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .html. Step 2 Click the Database Monitor tab to check the database status of the M2000 server. . Figure 8-1 Database Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column. See Figure 8-1. Ltd. You have the relevant operation rights.1 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the database status through the M2000 client to know the usage of the databases. and . Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file.csv. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. . S10) 8.txt.xml. the green icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding database is normal. Context This operation requires only a few system resources and does not affect system operation. ----End 8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the red icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding database is abnormal. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------pmdb 13000.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result.1 Checking the Database Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3.2. 2007 select into/bulkcopy/pllsort. -bash-3. The Sybase service is running.2 Viewing the Database Usage of the M2000 Server Using Sybase Commands This section describes how to view the database status of the M2000 server by using Sybase commands. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server./RUN_SYB_back Step 2 View the database usage and the event log space usage./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . you can use the Sybase commands to view the disk usage of the M2000 server.. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases 8.-----. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect system operation. Context In addition to the method described in 8.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 8-19 . Procedure Step 1 Check all the databases of the M2000 server.------------. As shown in the following command result. 1> sp_helpdb M2000 database name 2> go To view the usage of the pmdb database. Ltd.-----.0 MB sa 9 Mar 13. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh .2. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 server as user dbuser. run the following command: 1> sp_helpdb pmdb 2> go name db_size status owner dbid created -----------.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_helpdb 2> go NOTE After the Sybase server is started. trunc log on chkpt Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

where 10. the free space is 3. and NM security logs. Run the following command to exit: 1>exit ----End 8.------------------------------------------. NE system logs.---------------data001_dev 10000.000 MB is used for storing performance data and 3. the usage is 0.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. NM system logs. and security logs in the omclogdb database 8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Clearing M2000 Databases This section describes how to dump the data in the M2000 databases. the occupied space of the pmdb database is 13.46%.------------. You can configure an integrated task for dumping the data in the M2000 databases. NE security logs.000 MB.0 MB data only Mar 13 2007 6:37PM 10193312 log001_dev 3000.. In the 3.059. NE system logs.000 MB log space. you can determine whether the database status is normal. and file saving format. Therefore.992 KB.312 KB. In the 10. execution time. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. the free space is 10. alarm data. You are authorized to clear the M2000 databases.000 MB is used for storing the performance log data.0 MB log only Mar 13 2007 6:37PM not applicable -------------------------------------------------------------------------------log only free kbytes = 3059992 (return status = 0) As shown in the previous command result.000 MB data space. Ltd. Context l Dump conditions can be set according to the following aspects: execution type. The data includes the performance data. Based on the database usage and the preset threshold. After the data is dumped.193. and the NE security logs in the swmdb database The alarm data in the fmdb database The operation logs. NM operation logs. system logs. NE operation logs. the following data is saved in the default directory of the M2000 server and removed from the databases: – – – – l The performance data in the pmdb database The NE operation logs. S10) (1 row affected) device_fragments size usage created free kbytes -----------------------------. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .

8-21 Step 2 Dump the NE operation logs in the swmdb database. In the Attribute dialog box. and then click Attribute. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. On the GUI of the M2000 client. 4.. Step 4 Dump the NE system logs in the swmdb database. In the left part of the Task Management window. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Then. Ltd. On the GUI of the M2000 client. 1. 3. choose Maintenance > Task Management. 1. select Performance Data under the Database Capacity Management node from the Task Type navigation tree. and then click Attribute. On the GUI of the M2000 client. choose Maintenance > Task Management. select Alarm Data under the node Database Capacity Management from the navigation tree Task Type. 4. In the left part of the Task Management window. 2. The Task Management window is displayed. click OK. select NE Security Log under the node Database Capacity Management from the Task Type navigation tree. 1. In the Attribute dialog box. Then. On the GUI of the M2000 client. The Task Management window is displayed. 2. and then click Attribute. Then. set the dump parameters. In the left part of the Task Management window. click OK. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 5 Dump the alarm data in the fmdb database. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. 2. set the dump parameters. click OK. set the dump parameters. select NE Operation Log under the node Database Capacity Management from the Task Type navigation tree. In the Attribute dialog box. choose Maintenance > Task Management. 3. The Task Management window is displayed. set the dump parameters. The Task Management window is displayed. and then click Attribute. 2. 1. and then click Attribute. In the left part of the Task Management window. In the left part of the Task Management window. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. 4. click OK. 1. Then. 3. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases Procedure Step 1 Dump the performance data in the pmdb database. In the Attribute dialog box. 4. select NE System Log under the node Database Capacity Management from the Task Type navigation tree. 2. On the GUI of the M2000 client. Step 3 Dump the NE security logs in the swmdb database. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Maintenance > Task Management. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. choose Maintenance > Task Management. 3. 3.

set the dump parameters. Then. Then. itfndb. choose Maintenance > Task Management. On the GUI of the M2000 client. In the Attribute dialog box. set the dump parameters. and then click Attribute. swmdb.4 Backing Up M2000 Databases This section describes how to back up the M2000 databases. In the Attribute dialog box. Step 7 Dump the NM system logs in the omclogdb database. Ltd. omctmdb. S10) 4. 4. select NM Operation Log Dump under the Database Capacity Management node from the Task Type navigation tree. Then.. On the GUI of the M2000 client. The Task Management window is displayed. 3. 3.8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. farsdb and omceamdb. 2. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. The Task Management window is displayed. 4. and then click Attribute. pmdb. click OK. 1. In the left part of the Task Management window. 2. In the left part of the Task Management window. choose Maintenance > Task Management. set the dump parameters. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. and then click Attribute. select NM System Log Dump under the Database Capacity Management node from the Task Type navigation tree. On the GUI of the M2000 client. Step 8 Dump the NM security logs in the omclogdb database. 2. The M2000 databases are categorized into omcdb. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . pmcomdb. In the Attribute dialog box. omcsmdb. In the Attribute dialog box. Select a task in the right part of the Task Management window. ----End 8. fmdb. omclogdb. Then. The Task Management window is displayed. click OK. 1. Step 6 Dump the NM operation logs in the omclogdb database. 4. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. 8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. click OK. sumdb. In the left part of the Task Management window. click OK. You are authorized to back up the M2000 system. select NM Security Log Dump under the Database Capacity Management node from the Task Type navigation tree. 3. set the dump parameters. choose Maintenance > Task Management.

and then double-click the Server Backup node. Procedure Step 1 On the main window. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Do not suspend a periodic backup task. Step 4 Click the Extended Parameters tab. and then set Task Name and Start Time. S10) 8 Managing the M2000 Databases Context NOTE The time required for backing up data is related to the actual environment. the power-off of the server. The database logs dumped by the Sybase database are not cleared in time. which causes /export/ home to be used up. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Task Management dialog box is displayed. as shown in Figure 8-2. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Backup > Server Backup from the navigation tree. The reasons are as follows: l l The latest data fails to be restored after data lost caused by an accident. for example. 8-23 . and then set Server Full Backup Date. as shown in Figure 8-3. Figure 8-2 Periodic backup Step 3 Click the Common Parameters tab. Ltd..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Generally. it takes about five hours. choose Maintenance > Task Management.

After you insert a new tape. As shown in Figure 10-5 of 10. Please resume the backup operation. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The tape has been placed in the tape drive. The system periodically backs up data. Ltd.2. perform following operations to replace the tape with a new one. Step 6 If data is backed up on a tape and the tape is fully written during the backup. Insert a new tape into the tape drive.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data. 8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. The system automatically ejects the fully written tape and waits for you to replace the tape with a new one. Please replace it with another tape as soon as possible. S10) Figure 8-3 Periodic backup Step 5 Click OK. 2. the system continues to back up the M2000 dynamic data. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The current tape is fully written..8 Managing the M2000 Databases M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

Ltd. you need to insert another tape for backup. 8-25 . S10) NOTE 8 Managing the M2000 Databases l If you do not replace the fully written tape within the wait time preset in the configuration file. change tapes until all the data is backed up. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: Tape replacement times out.. In such a case. you need to insert a tape into the tape drive and perform a new full backup. The data backup fails. In this way. you can run the following command to view the contents of the tape: # gtar tf /dev/rmt/0 ----End Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After backing up the dynamic data on the tape.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l l If the newly inserted tape is fully written again.

.

. 9-1 .1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 clients. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 server and client. 9.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9. Ltd.2 Managing Files and Disks on the M2000 Server This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 server.

Table 9-1 M2000 client software directory Directory client installation path M2000 client installation path\client M2000 client installation path\client\bin M2000 client installation path\client \Data M2000 client installation path\client \diagnosis Description Refers to the M2000 client installation path. which is less than 20 MB.1. Required client disk space (only for reference): F = I + T + (S x N). NOTE This directory appears only after you run the M2000 diagnosis tool. The client software runs on the Windows operating system and is based on the JAVA virtual machine. Refers to the directory for saving client programs. Before performing this operation. Refers to directory where executable files are located. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 9.2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client This section describes how to clear the disk space of an M2000 client. where I refers to the size of the initial version. 9. The default path is C:\iManagerM2000Client. Refers to the directory for saving the information that is used for locating problems. S10) 9. S refers to the size of mediation files. N refers to the number of NE versions. The installation package of the M2000 client software includes the JAVA virtual machine supported by Windows.1. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system operation error. about 300 MB.1.1 Managing Files and Disks on M2000 Clients This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 clients. that is. ensure that the files to be deleted are not required for future operations. Ltd.1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System This introduces the M2000 client file system. 9. which depends on the actual situation.. Refers to the directory for saving the Dtd files.1 Introduction to the M2000 Client File System This introduces the M2000 client file system. Table 9-1 describes the parameters specified in the equations. which ranges from 3 MB to 10 MB.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. T refers to the temporary space for saving patches. M2000 client installation path\client \ext_runcfg M2000 client installation path\client\dtd Refers to the directory where the files related to integrated components are located. Refers to the directory for saving the NE configuration files. 9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Refers to the directory for saving the library files. Refers to the directory for saving the configuration files of client. Refers to the directory for saving the mapping between administrative regions and their IDs. Refers to the directory for saving the upgrade files. Ltd. Refers to the directory for saving the localWS dynamic link libraries. Stores the CBB files of the M2000 client. Refers to the directory for saving temporary files during the upgrade. Refers to the directory for saving LocalShell that is used to start the 2G LMT. Stores the feature configuration files of the subsystems of the M2000 client. Refers to the root directory of the iSStar script. Refers to the directory for saving the uninstaller. Refers to the directory for saving the trace files. Stores the configuration files of the subsystems of the M2000 client as plug-ins. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Refers to the directory in which the files for configuring the startup parameters of the client and components are located. Stores the configuration files of the M2000 client. 9-3 . S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Directory M2000 client installation path\client\help M2000 client installation path\client \IDAPI32 M2000 client installation path\client\lib M2000 client installation path\client \localWs M2000 client installation path\client \style M2000 client installation path\client \Templates M2000 client installation path\client\tmp M2000 client installation path\client \tracefile M2000 client installation path\client \update M2000 client installation path\client\cbb M2000 client installation path\client \configuration M2000 client installation path\client \features M2000 client installation path\client \plugins M2000 client installation path\uninstall M2000 client installation path\script M2000 client installation path\client\bin \run Description Refers to the directory for saving the online help files.

you need to upgrade the client. and group information about the M2000 client are located. S10) Directory M2000 client installation path\cau Description Refers to the installation directory of the cau (Client Auto Upgrade) client software and the directory in which the version. NOTE l The cau(Client Auto Upgrade) client software provides an upgrade detection mechanism that is based on the document abstract. they can be compared with those files grouped and packed by the server. Based on the group information. If the document abstracts are not consistent. Do not delete the files generated on that day. install. Context CAUTION You can delete the files when the client is running. ensure that the files to be deleted are not required for future operations. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. l Based on the group information. document abstract. back up and clear the following files: l l Trace logs Temporary files after the running of the M2000 log collector Procedure l 9-4 Delete the trace logs. when these files are being downloaded. Thus. remote notification client. the client also groups and packs all client files.. Stores the library files of M2000 client. 9.2 Clearing the Disk Space of an M2000 Client This section describes how to clear the disk space of an M2000 client. the server groups and packs all the client documents deployed on the server for the client to download. and upgrade. script framework tool client and datamanager client. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system operation error. Before performing this operation. It also compares the document abstract of the server with that of the client. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. During the routine O&M. M2000 client installation path\jre M2000 client installation path\lib Stores the Java virtual machine of the M2000.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

2.2.. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system failure.1 Introduction to the M2000 Server File System This introduces the structure of the M2000 server files and the planning of disk partition for various server types. Ltd. 9. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Delete the history trace logs saved in the directory M2000 client installation path\client \tracefile.2 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the disk usage information about the M2000 server through the system monitor browser of the M2000 client. The M2000 server runs on the Solaris platform. Delete the temporary files that are generated after the running of the M2000 log collector and are saved in the directory M2000 client installation path\client\diagnosis. It is recommended that you preserve the trace logs generated in the latest two weeks.2. Before clearing disk space.4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server This section describes how to clear the disk space of the M2000 server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Delete the temporary files generated after the running of the M2000 log collector. The server communicates with the NEs. and provides an interface to the NMS.2 Managing Files and Disks on the M2000 Server This section describes how to manage the file systems and disks on the M2000 server.1 Introduction to the M2000 Server File System This introduces the structure of the M2000 server files and the planning of disk partition for various server types. 9. Table 9-2 lists the directories related to the M2000 server software. The server communicates with the NEs.2. stores the operation and maintenance data of the NEs. stores the operation and maintenance data of the NEs.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 9. 9. This task uses very few system resources and does not affect the system operation. The M2000 system operation requires the following software: l l l Sybase database CORBA supporting software FTP supporting software The installation package of the M2000 server software includes the software providing the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) functions. ensure that the files to be deleted are useless. 9-5 . ----End 9. 9.2. and provides an interface to the NMS.3 Viewing the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server Using Solaris Commands This section describes how to use Solaris commands for viewing the disk usage of the M2000 server.

S10) Table 9-2 Directories related to the M2000 server software Directory M2000 server installation directory Description M2000 server installation directory is the installation directory of the M2000 server software. Refers to the directory for saving the webpage service files. Refers to the directory where the initialization script file that should be executed during the M2000 installation is located. Refers to the directory where the script files used for installing the M2000 are located. Refers to the directory for saving the configuration data of the webpage server. Refers to the directory where the compressed component files are located.. Refers to directory where executable files are located. and the files recording exported alarms are located. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. By default. Refers to the directory for saving the mediation files generated during the operation. Refers to the directory where the log files. Ltd. M2000 server installation directory/ bin M2000 server installation directory/etc M2000 server installation directory/lib M2000 server installation directory/ lbin M2000 server installation directory/ 3rdTools M2000 server installation directory/ var M2000 server installation directory/ data M2000 server installation directory/ init M2000 server installation directory/ uninstall M2000 server installation directory/ install M2000 server installation directory/ webapps M2000 server installation directory/ med M2000 server installation directory/ resourcemonitor M2000 server installation directory/ tomcat M2000 server installation directory/ components 9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Refers to the directory where the system configuration files and structured query language (SQL) scripts are located. Refers to the directory where the script file used for uninstalling the M2000 is located. the performance files. Refers to the directory where the system administration commands are located. Refers to the directory where third-party software is located. Refers to the PRS control directory. Refers to the directory for saving resource monitoring files. Refers to the directory where library files are located. the installation directory is / opt/OMC.

Refers to the directory where the exported performance result files are located. Refers to the directory where the northbound CORBA interface performance files are located. which is reported as files. Refers to the directory for saving the platform script files. Refers to directory where the M2000 operation data is located. Refers to the directory for saving the dynamic library files and configuration files related to plugin. M2000 server installation path/var/ itf_n/FileTransferIRP/PM /export/home/omc/var/fileint/cm /export/home/omc/var/fileint/pm /export/home/sysm/ftproot/NE name/ Software Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Refers to the directory where system logs are located. 9-7 . Ltd. Refers to the directory where resource files are located. is located. Refers to the directory where backup files are located. Refers to the directory for saving the upgrade scripts. Refers to the directory for saving the files related to the DesktopService service. Refers to the directory where the script tools often used by the M2000 are located. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Directory M2000 server installation directory/ medshare M2000 server installation directory/ sacscript M2000 server installation directory/ds M2000 server installation directory/ plugin M2000 server installation path/ upgrade M2000 server installation directory/res M2000 server installation directory/ hascript M2000 server installation directory/ tools /export/home/omc/var /export/home/omc/var/syslog /export/home/backup /export/home/sysm/ftproot/pm Description Refers to the directory for saving the mediation files. Refers to the directory where the NE version package is located. Refers to the directory where the configuration data files that are periodically exported are located. Refers to the directory for saving the script files provided by the NIC module.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Refers to the directory where the traffic measurement data of each NE.

Refers to the directory where Sybase log files are located.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 1 Partiti on No. Ltd. Application database partition Application database partition M2000 operation data partition 9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Retain the default size. Table 9-3 Planning of the server disk partitions (Netra 240) Hard Disk No. /export/home/omc/var/logs /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install /var/adm /export/home/backup/omc /export/home/omc/var/etc/conf/ license Refers to the directory where M2000 log files are located. The data generated for automatic backup is located in the AUTOBAKDATA****** directory.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . S10) Directory /export/home/sysm/ftproot/NE name/ Data/NE fdn Description Refers to the directory where the NE data backup is located. NOTE l The NE fdn is a code representing an NE sample in the program. Refers to the directory where the backup files of dynamic data are located. Refers to the directory where Solaris log files are located. Refers to the directory where the license file of the M2000 is located. 0 1 2 3 4 5 Partition Name / swap overlap /data /log /export/home Size (MB) 25000 8192 39000 14000 50000 Description Root partition Data exchange partition Disk mapping. l The data generated for manual backup is located in the BAKDATA****** directory. Sun Netra 240 Disk Partition A standard disk on the Netra 240 server in the M2000 system should be configured with two 146 GB hard disks and partitioned according to Table 9-3.

2 Used as the mirrored disk for the first hard disk Sun Fire V890 Disk Partition and Disk Array Partition A standard disk on the V890 in the M2000 system should be configured with six 146GB hard disks and one 6140 disk array. Hot spares are used to replace the Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The system assigns the partition size automatically. Reserved Used for disk mirroring. and the remaining 14 disks are used for RAID5.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You need not set the partition name and size. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Hard Disk No. Two disks on the disk array are used for hot spares. Retain the default size. Partiti on No. The system assigns the partition size automatically. 6 7 Partition Name /globaldevices - Size (MB) 1024 10 to 260 Description Reserved Used for disk mirroring. Ltd. 0 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 Partition Name / swap overlap /globaldevices Size (MB) 110000 20000 1024 10 to 260 Description Root partition Data exchange partition Disk mapping. Partitio n No. The other four disks are idle. 2 Used as the mirrored disk for the first hard disk The disk array consists of sixteen 146 GB hard disks. Two of the local disks are partitioned according to Table 9-4. Table 9-4 Planning for disk partitioning on the server (V890) Hard Disk No. You need not set the partition name and size.. 9-9 .

Two disks on the disk array are used for hot spares. and their size are the same. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Partition Name Size (MB) Description / swap overlap /globaldevices - 110000 20000 1024 10 to 260 Root partition Data exchange partition Disk mapping.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 Partiti on No. 2 Used as the mirrored disk for the first hard disk The 6140 disk array consists of sixteen 146 GB hard disks. Reserved Used for disk mirroring. see Table 9-7. Table 9-6 lists the partitions of local disks. You need not set the partition name and size. and the remaining 14 disks are used for RAID5. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Table 9-5 Planning for the 6140 disk array Disk Array No. Two volumes are created on the 6140 disk array. For details on how to plan volumes on the disk array. Table 9-6 Planning for disk partitioning on the server (E4900) Hard Disk No. Ltd. Hot spares are used to replace the faulty disks in the disk array. see Table 9-5. For details on how to plan volumes on the disk array. S10) faulty disks in the disk array. Retain the default size. The system assigns the partition size automatically. Two volumes are created on the 6140 disk array.. 1 Volume Name oss_v0 oss_v1 Size (GB) 810 810 Sun Fire E4900 Disk Partition and Disk Array Partition A standard disk on E4900 server in the M2000 system is configured with two 146 GB hard disks and one 6140 disk array. and their size are the same.

Keep the default size. Ltd. Reserved Used for disk mirroring. 1 Volume Name oss_v0 oss_v1 Size (GB) 810 810 Sun T5220 Disk Partition The Sun T5220 server is configured with four 146 GB disks. Sybase data 9-11 3 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) - 102400 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . No partition name is needed.. 0 1 2 Partition Name / swap overlap Size (MB) 25600 16384 Description Root partition Data exchange partition Disk mapping. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Table 9-7 Planning for the 6140 disk array Disk Array No. Table 9-8 Planning of the Sun T5220 server disk partitions Hard Disk No. 3 4 5 - 96256 6 7 /globaldevices - 1024 10 to 260 2 3 Used as the mirroring disk for the first hard disk 0 1 2 overlap Disk mapping. M2000 operation data partition. 1 Partition No.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you can see Table 9-8 for the planning of the disk partitions. Keep the default size. You need not set the partition name.

Table 9-9 Partitioning of the local server disks (M4000/M5000) Hard Disk No. 4 5 6 7 Partition Name - Size (MB) 35840 10 to 260 Description Sybase log Used for disk mirroring.. S10) Hard Disk No. Reserved Used for disk mirroring. Sun M4000/M5000 Disk Partition and Disk Array Partition A standard disk in the M4000/M5000 system should be configured with two 146 GB hard disks and one S3200 or S2600 disk array. 3 4 1 5 6 7 /globaldevices - 1024 10 to 260 9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You need not set the partition name. Partition No. 0 1 2 Partition Name / swap overlap Size (MB) 110000 20000 Description Root partition Swapping partition Used for disk mapping. The S3200 disk array consists of 16 x 146 GB hard disks and the S2600 disk array consists of 12 x 450 GB hard disks. The partition size is allocated automatically by the system. Fixed to the default size. The two local hard disks are partitioned according to Table 9-9. Partitio n No. Ltd. You need not set the name or size of the partition. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 4 The third and the fourth hard disks serve as hardware RAID1 for the M2000 operation data.

. You have the relevant operation rights. Partition Name Size (MB) Description Used as the mirroring disk for hard disk 1. Table 9-10 Disk partitions of the S3200 disk array Hard Disk Seven hard disks act as RAID 5. 9-13 . S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks Hard Disk No.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2. Partition the disks of the disk array according to Table 9-10 or Table 9-11. Context Checking the disk usage information about the M2000 server requires only a few system resources and does not affect system operation.2 Checking the Disk Usage Information About the M2000 Server Through the M2000 Client This section describes how to check the disk usage information about the M2000 server through the system monitor browser of the M2000 client. 2 Partitio n No. Seven hard disks act as RAID 5. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Two disks Size (GB) 800 800 Act as the hotspare disk Description Volume name oss_v0 Volume name oss_v1 Table 9-11 Disk partitions of the S2600 disk array Hard Disk Ten hard disks act as RAID 10. Size (GB) 671 671 671 Two disks Act as the hotspare disk Description Volume name oss_app0 Volume name oss_app1 Volume name oss_app2 9.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .html.3 Viewing the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server Using Solaris Commands This section describes how to use Solaris commands for viewing the disk usage of the M2000 server. the red icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding disk is abnormal.2. This task uses very few system resources and does not affect the system operation. S10) Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user omcuser. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to viewing the disk usage of the M2000 server. 9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.csv. Figure 9-1 Hard Disk Monitor tab page NOTE In the Status column. Step 2 Click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to check disk usage information about the M2000 server. If the usage of a disk exceeds the preset threshold. the green icon indicates that the usage of the corresponding disk is normal. ----End 9. Ltd.xml. and . the icon in this column changes from green to red. See Figure 9-1. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. .txt.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. .. You can save the monitoring data in one of the following formats: . Step 3 (Optional) Click Save AS to save the monitoring data as a file.

Ltd. Before deleting files.4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server This section describes how to clear the disk space of the M2000 server.. back up and clear the following files: l l l l l Files storing information about NEs and the M2000 server Software upgrade package and decompressed files Trace logs Backup files Temporary files created during the system operation CAUTION You can delete files when the server is running. run the command ls -l to check the files generated on that day. Context During the routine O&M. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system failure. Procedure l Export the files that save the information about NEs and the M2000 server. ----End 9. Do not delete the files generated on the very day. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks -bash-3. Before clearing disk space. the disk usage is smaller than 90%. ensure that the files to be deleted are useless. 9-15 .2. The files are divided into the following types: Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.00$ df -k The system displays the following information: Filesystem /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0 /proc fd /dev/dsk/c0t1d0s7 swap kbytes used avail capacity 2053605 997684 994313 51% 0 0 0 0% 0 0 0 0% 35009161 2562019 32097051 8% 3431792 6664 3425128 1% Mounted on / /proc /dev/fd /export/home /tmp The command result contains the following information: l l l l l l File system name File size (unit: KB) Used space Free space Disk usage Capacity percentage of the filled file system and the mounting point Normally.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Back up the files on a tape. which means the value of capacity is smaller than 90% in the output.

The actual saving path may be different. For a process. S10) Files generated during alarm auto-dump Alarm dump files are stored in the /export/home/omc/var/ThresholdExport/FM directory. 9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. In tracebackupnum. delete the original upgrade package and the decompressed files. the system automatically deletes the oldest trace files in sequence. l Delete trace Logs.CCB-ITEM checktracetime indicates that how long trace file will be checked! Min value is 300 seconds! --> <param name="checktracetime">300</param> <!-.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?> <tracemonitor name="tracemonitor" mount="/imap/common/tracemonitor"> <strategy name="imap"> <!-.xml file are as follows: <?xml version="1. CAUTION Generally. Modify the value of tracebackupnum in the tracemonitor_svc_ex. The folder name of the upgrade files is created according to the upgrade patch name. you can set the number of backup trace files for each process in the /opt/OMC/var/logs/tracebak directory. The contents of the tracemonitor_svc_ex. – User log files User log dump files are stored in the /opt/OMC/var/userlogs directory. The system checks the trace file at the regular interval of 300s. and number of backup files. Trace history files Trace history files are stored in the /export/home/omc/var/logs/tracebak/ directory. you can set the trace log monitor period. /opt/OMC is the default installation path of the M2000 server software.xml file to reduce the number of trace backup files. the decompressed upgrade files are saved in the /export/home directory.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks – M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun..trace"> <param name="filesize">200</param> <param name="tracebackupnum">20</param> </filename> </strategy> </tracemonitor> In checktracetime. After the upgrade. the saving folder may be in the /export/home/ bak directory. For example. The upgrade package and decompressed files are stored in the folder named after the upgrade patch in the path /export/home. if the number of trace file backups in the tracebak folder exceeds the preset value. – – l Delete the software upgrade package and the decompressed files. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Edit the tracemonitor_svc_ex.xml file in the /opt/OMC/etc/conf/ directory to set the trace log monitor period. System generated core files Core files refer to the files in the /export/home/omc/var/logs/ directory.CCB-ITEM tracebackupnum indicates the max number of reserved trace file! --> <param name="tracebackupnum">50</param> </strategy> <strategy name="other"> <filename name="tao. size limit.

Stop the M2000 server. the core files also include other information. 1.00$ cd /opt/sybase Clear up disks regularly. Back up all the files in the /export/home/backup/omc directory to tapes. 3. before deleting the core files. the installation directory is /opt/sybase. confirm the deletion with Huawei technical support engineers. By default. delete the backup files for the upgrade or copy them to tapes.profile 4. Therefore. C:\iManagerM2000Client is the default installation path of the M2000 client software. l 4. Deleting a useful file by mistake may lead to a system failure. 1.. 9-17 . Save the collected core files to the path C:\iManagerM2000Client\client\diagnosis \collected files. . -bash-3.00$ . In addition to the stack information. In the displayed Log Information Collector dialog box. you must compress the core files before sending them. ensure that the files to be deleted are no longer required.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select Core files in server. 5. 2. Choose Start > Program > iManager M2000 Client > M2000 Log Information Collector. l After sending all the core files and the stack files to Huawei for confirmation. 3. Change to the Sybase installation directory.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> use omcdb 2> go 1> select fdn. Ltd. delete the core files and stack files that are no longer required. Delete other files that are no longer in use. Delete the files in the /var/tmp directory. -bash-3. Click Collect. Before clearing disk space. Run the environment variable. Because the size of the core files is large. – – After the upgrade. l Delete the files that are no longer in use. S10) 9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks l Clear the backup files. 2. CAUTION l The M2000 log information collector collects the stack information from the core files. Access the Sybase database and run the following commands: -bash-3. Log in to the M2000 server as user dbuser.neName from tbl_AllNeInfo 2> go Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

S10) After the Sybase server is started. As shown in the following command result. # rm -r /opt/OMC/var/med/neNE fdn ----End 9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. -bash-3.omcuser Password: Password of omcuser 6. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. Change to the directories /export/home/sysm/ftproot/CmSync/ and /export/home/ sysm/ftproot/pm/ to delete the folders of associated FDNs that are not listed in the database.9 Managing the M2000 Files and Disks NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.00$ su .00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. 1> exit -bash-3. -bash-3. Switch to log in as user root..00$ su . Ltd.00$ rm -r /export/home/sysm/ftproot/pm/neNE fdn 7.00$ rm -r /export/home/sysm/ftproot/CmSync/neNE fdn -bash-3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .root Password: Password of root 8. Switch to log in as user omcuser. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . Change to the /opt/OMC/var/med directory to delete the folders of associated FDNs that are not listed in the database./RUN_SYB_back 5. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh .

System data backup: backs up the system data of the M2000 server. 10-1 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Static data backup: backs up the M2000 server application software. database device files. and restore scenarios of M2000 dynamic data. Dynamic data backup: backs up the dynamic service data of the M2000 system. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 10 Context Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 About This Chapter This chapter describes how to back up and restore M2000 data. Ltd.1 M2000 Backup and Restore Solutions This section describes the backup scheme. such as operating system data. Depending on the data to be backed up. database application software.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and M2000 configuration files on the hard disks of the M2000 server. M2000 server application data. Static data backup and system data backup are implemented by the Backup & Restore Tools (BRT). Sun). 10..2 Backing Up and Restoring M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to back up and restore M2000 dynamic data. backup strategy. For details. database application data. three data backup solutions are provided for the M2000. 10. see M2000 Backup and Restore Guide (BRT-Based.

and restore scenarios of M2000 dynamic data. On the other six days..1 Backup of M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes the backup of the M2000 dynamic data. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . S10) 10. M2000 system files: files under the /export/home/omc/var. this describes how to back up the M2000 system. backup strategy. Backup modes Periodic backup After the periodic backup is activated.3 Scenarios of M2000 Data Restoration This section describes the dynamic data restore for typical scenarios. omcsmdb. l If the PRS is not configured on the M2000 system. do not delete the directory and the files in the directory. all the backup files of the previous round are deleted automatically. see Table 10-1. Thus. the sumdb database does not exist. l When backing up the M2000 system files. omctmdb. 10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the time set for backup should be at night when the system traffic is light. farsdb and omceamdb. For details about the backup contents. pmdb. After a new round of periodic backup is performed. swmdb. omclogdb. the system does not back up the log files and Trace files in the previous directories. backup modes.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 10. sumdb. rules for naming backup files. Thus. Perform the full backup on the specified day of each week. Ltd. and rules for naming backup tapes. and /export/home/sysm/ftproot directories. 10.1. NOTE Backing up dynamic data consumes system resources. l The configuration files related to the static data are stored in the /export/home/ l CAUTION omc/var directory. /export/ home/sysm/devdoc. It is used to restore the history data when the M2000 is running properly or the static data restoration is complete. 10. pmcomdb. Dynamic data backup refers to the backup of the M2000 dynamic service data.1. Table 10-1 Introduction to dynamic data backup Item Backup Contents Contents l Database data: omcdb. automatically perform incremental backup at the same time.1 M2000 Backup and Restore Solutions This section describes the backup scheme. fmdb. perform the periodic backup once every day.1. and storage media of the dynamic data backup. itfndb.2 Policies of M2000 Data Backup Based on the backup scenarios.

rules for naming backup files. the backup contents are automatically packaged as a backup file. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 Item Contents Manual backup l Full backup: backs up all the dynamic data. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Storage device l l l l Tape Hard disk Tape and hard disk Storage device of the NetBackup server When storage media is the hard disk in the M2000 server. CAUTION Dynamic data of the M2000 is backed up to the directory:/export/home/ backup/omc. see Rules for Naming Backup Files of Dynamic Data. this describes how to back up the M2000 system. The incremental backup is saved in another file.1. Incremental backup: backs up the dynamic data that has changed since the last full backup.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the directory of the backup files is the same as that of the tape drive. NOTE When the M2000 system performs the dynamic data backup. without overwriting the file of full backup. the directory of the backup files is: /export/home/backup/omc. do not perform operations such as modifying the configuration database. For details about how to name a backup file. When storage media is the tapes in the M2000. which is specified when backing up dynamic data on a tape. all the backup files in the backup directory are deleted automatically.. After the backup is performed. When a new full backup is performed. and rules for naming backup tapes. Typical Scenarios for M2000 Data Backup Dynamic data backup is applicable to routine maintenance. 10-3 . Then the system automatically packs the backup data and moves the backup data to the storage media on the NetBackup server. The directory of backup files l l l When storage media is the hard disk in the NetBackup server. Ltd. the directory of backup files is:/dev/rmt/0. Perform full backup according to your requirements.2 Policies of M2000 Data Backup Based on the backup scenarios. Perform incremental backup according to your requirements. 10. CAUTION If a system has more than one tape drives. the directory of the backup files is: /export/home/backup/omc.

where. S10) Rules for Naming Backup Files of Dynamic Data When backing up the static data.1.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.3 Scenarios of M2000 Data Restoration This section describes the dynamic data restore for typical scenarios.2 Backing Up and Restoring M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to back up and restore M2000 dynamic data. 10. 2007.tar file. If the current tape is fully written.tar refers to a full backup file generated on 2004-06-01 04:20:02. 10. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. 10. NOTE l l l The latest backup information is recorded in the /export/home/backup/omc/backup. the system automatically ejects the tape and waits for you to replace it. By modifying the configuration file. 10. The character * stands for the following data: l l l Dynamic data Static data Data of the operating system For example.tar refers to an incremental backup file generated on 2004-06-02 04:20:01. During the backup process. 10. name the backup files in the following format: /export/home/ backup/omc/*-YYYYMMDDhhmmss.tar. Ltd.2 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Through the Client You can set the storage device for backup data through the client. The M2000 system runs normally or the static data restoration is complete. 10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.log file.1 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Using Solaris Commands This section describes how to set the storage device of backup data.2. you can set the wait time. Rules for Naming the Tapes That Store the Backup Data The rule for naming a backup tape is as follows: *backup tape (backup date).tar or allYYYYMMDDhhmmss. For example: l The file name all-20040601042002. if a tape is labeled "static data backup tape (2007-11-28)". The file name inc-20040602042001.2. * indicates all for full backup or inc for incremental backup. the inc-YYYYMMDDhhmmss or all-YYYYMMDDhhmmss folder is generated in the /export/home/backup/omc path for storing backup files. it indicates that the static data backup is performed on November 28. the folder is packed as the inc-YYYYMMDDhhmmss. When the backup is complete. and the inc-YYYYMMDDhhmmss or all-YYYYMMDDhhmmss folder is automatically deleted.3 Setting the Wait Time for Replacing a Tape You can store the dynamic data on multiple tapes. It needs to roll back to the historical operational status such as the operational status of the last week.

6 Restoring the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to restore the M2000 dynamic data.2. 10.2. from a disk to a tape. After you change the current storage device.xml and /opt/OMC/tools/Backup/config/generalbus. 10-5 . use the dynamic data backup files stored on the tape to recover the latest service data. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. 10. You can set the storage device for backup data when the M2000 is running. for example. back up the dynamic data to a tape. the backup files for the dynamic data backup are stored on hard disks. When recovering the static data and restoring the system. Do not replace the storage device when the backup is in process. To store the backup files on a tape. l l l l l Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the M2000 daemon is started. Otherwise. dynamic data may fail to be restored owing to the loss of certain backup data. If you set the backupMedia parameter to tape or all.4 Periodically Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to periodically back up the M2000 dynamic data. When you perform a full backup. Run the following commands to check whether the M2000 daemon is started: # . For data security. 10. Prerequisite You have logged in to the system as user root. Ltd. CAUTION l l Do not modify the configuration files of storage devices when the backup is in process. you need to modify the relevant settings in the /export/home/omc/var/ etc/conf/maintainsvc. the new backup files replace the backup files that already exist on the disk. label the tapes after the backup is complete.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. you must perform a full backup again.2.cfg files.. Context By default.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to manually back up the M2000 dynamic data.sh # daem_ps Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.1 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Using Solaris Commands This section describes how to set the storage device of backup data. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 10.

and then run the vi command to view the maintainsvc. The storage media of both full and incremental backup must be identical. go to Step 6. a tape library. l Step 4 Save the file and quit. S10) If . the incremental backup fails. There is any output after you run the daem_ps command There is no output after you run the daem_ps command Then . the M2000 server does not hold the backup data that is moved to the storage device. The M2000 daemon is started. After the operation. The M2000 daemon is not started. The storage device of the NetBackup server is determined by the Veritas backup and restore solution. The storage device is a tape drive. Otherwise.xml Step 3 Find the line <param name="backupMedia">. Step 5 To back up dynamic data on a tape. the system automatically packs the backup data and moves the backup data to the storage device of the NetBackup server.. Proceed with the next step. specify the path of the tape drive.xml file. Table 10-2 Values of backup media Storage Media Hard disks on the M2000 server Tapes Hard disks and tapes Storage device of the NetBackup server Value disk tape all veritas NOTE l If backupMedia is set to veritas. Ltd. # cd /export/home/omc/var/etc/conf # vi maintainsvc. Otherwise.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and change the disk for the full and incremental backups to the actual storage device.. or a disk. Run the following command to start the daemon: # start_daem Step 2 Navigate to the /export/home/omc/var/etc/conf directory.. <module name="all"> …… <param name="backupMedia">disk</param> and <module name="inc"> …… <param name="backupMedia">disk</param> Table 10-2 lists the values of the backupMedia parameter. 10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

Navigate to the /opt/OMC/tools/Backup/config directory and open the generalbus. [STEP_TRANSFERTOMEDIA] .2.. # cd /opt/OMC/tools/Backup/config # vi generalbus.xml ----End 10. NOTE l l This section takes /dev/rmt/0 as an example.4 How Do I Select the Tape Drive?.cfg file by running the vi command. The connection between the M2000 client and server is normal.. Context You can set the storage device for backup data when the M2000 is running. Save the file and quit.. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 1. tapepath_sun=/dev/rmt/0 . Step 6 Load the configuration files of all the processes again... # SettingTool -cmd reload maintainsvc... and then set the value of tapepath_sun to the directory of the tape drive... Prerequisite l l The M2000 server is running properly. Ltd.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Search for the [STEP_TRANSFERTOMEDIA] area. If multiple tape drives are installed on the server. 10-7 . Replace /dev/rmt/0 with actual directory of the tape drive during actual operations. 3. select a tape drive by referring to 14.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Through the Client You can set the storage device for backup data through the client.cfg 2.1.

For data security. remove and label the tape when the backup is complete.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Otherwise. The Backup Management interface is displayed. S10) CAUTION l l Do not modify the configuration files of storage devices when the backup is in process. back up the dynamic data to a tape. Set the storage device to Tape or Disk and Tape. use the dynamic data backup files stored on the tape to recover the latest service data. as shown in Figure 10-2. Figure 10-1 Setting the storage device (I) Step 3 Click Reset. and then click OK. When recovering the static data and restoring the system. Do not replace the storage device when the backup is in process. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the dynamic data may fail to be recovered due to the loss of some backup data. The Medium Type Setting dialog box is displayed. When you perform a full backup. you need to perform a full backup again. 10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the new backup files replace the backup files that already exist on the disk. After you change the current storage device.. l l l l l Procedure Step 1 Start the M2000 client and log in to the M2000 server. from Disk to Tape. as shown in Figure 10-1. Ltd. Step 2 Click Maintenance > Backup Management. Set the storage device in the dialog box. for example.

a tape library. Click OK. Step 6 Perform a full backup. the wait time is set to 120 minutes. l Step 4 The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. you can set the wait time. By default. the system automatically ejects the tape and waits for you to replace it. you can modify the relevant contents in the /opt/ OMC/tools/Backup/config/generalbus. Ltd. By modifying the configuration file. If the current tape is fully written.2. the system automatically packs the backup data and moves the backup data to the storage device of the NetBackup server.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 Figure 10-2 Setting the storage device (II) NOTE l l The parameter Veritas refers to the storage device of the NetBackup server.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the M2000 server does not hold the backup data that is moved to the storage device. If the storage device is set to Veritas. the Message dialog box is displayed. Context If multiple tapes are required for data backup. Prerequisite You have logged in to the system as user root. or a disk.cfg file to set the wait time for replacing a tape. After the operation. For details. Step 5 When the change of storage device is complete. The storage device of the NetBackup server is determined by the Veritas backup and restore solution. 10-9 .2. You can configure the wait time for replacing a tape when the M2000 is running. see 10. ----End 10. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The storage device is a tape drive.3 Setting the Wait Time for Replacing a Tape You can store the dynamic data on multiple tapes.. prompting you for a full backup after you modify the storage device.

[STEP_TRANSFERTOMEDIA] . Run the following commands to check whether the M2000 daemon is started: # ... # SettingTool -cmd reload maintainsvc.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.xml ----End 10. Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the M2000 daemon is started.2.. NOTE l l The value of the changetape_timeout parameter indicates the wait time.. The M2000 daemon is started. The default wait time is 120 minutes... which is represented in minutes.sh # daem_ps If . There is any output after you run the daem_ps command There is no output after you run the daem_ps command Then . Proceed with the next step. The M2000 daemon is not started..cfg file by running the vi command.. 10-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. changetape_timeout=120 ... Step 4 Save the file and quit... Run the following command to start the daemon: # start_daem Step 2 Navigate to the /opt/OMC/tools/Backup/config directory and open the generalbus. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. S10) CAUTION Do not set the wait time for replacing a tape when the backup is in progress. and then set the value of changetape_timeout to the wait time for replacing a tape.cfg Step 3 Search for the [STEP_TRANSFERTOMEDIA] area. Step 5 Load the configuration files of all the processes again.. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. Ltd. # cd /opt/OMC/tools/Backup/config # vi generalbus..4 Periodically Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to periodically back up the M2000 dynamic data.

and it holds a tape if you plan to back up data on the tape. 10-11 . as shown in Figure 10-3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Backup > Server Backup from the navigation tree. l Context l Generally. it takes about five hours. You are authorized to perform relevant operations. the M2000 dynamic data is backed up periodically.. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 Prerequisite l l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. choose Maintenance > Task Management. Ltd. A hard disk has sufficient free space if you plan to back up data on the hard disk. The database logs dumped by the Sybase database are not cleared in time. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. for example. The Task Management dialog box is displayed. Do not suspend a periodic backup task. the power-off of the server. NOTE The time required for backing up M2000 dynamic data is related to the actual environment. The reasons are as follows: l l The latest data fails to be restored after data lost caused by an accident. The tape drive is connected properly. The periodic backup of the dynamic data is performed in full backup mode. and then double-click the Server Backup node. Generally. which causes /export/ home to be used up. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 On the main window.

10-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Step 4 Click the Extended Parameters tab. as shown in Figure 10-4. and then set Task Name and Start Time. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. S10) Figure 10-3 Periodic backup Step 3 Click the Common Parameters tab. and then set Server Full Backup Date.

S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 Figure 10-4 Periodic backup Step 5 Click OK.2. The system periodically backs up data. the system continues to back up the M2000 dynamic data. Ltd. The system automatically ejects the fully written tape and waits for you to replace the tape with a new one. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The current tape is fully written.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data. perform following operations to replace the tape with a new one. Step 6 If data is backed up on a tape and the tape is fully written during the backup. 2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Insert a new tape into the tape drive. 1.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. After you insert a new tape. 10-13 . The Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The tape has been placed in the tape drive. Please replace it with another tape as soon as possible. Please resume the backup operation.. As shown in Figure 10-5 of 10.

the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: Tape replacement times out.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You are authorized with the relevant operation rights. Generally. In this way. S10) l If you do not replace the fully written tape within the wait time preset in the configuration file. you can run the following command to view the contents of the tape: # gtar tf /dev/rmt/0 ----End 10. The data backup fails. The tape drive is connected properly. The Backup Management dialog box is displayed. change tapes until all the data is backed up. A hard disk has sufficient free space if you plan to back up data on the hard disk. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Procedure Step 1 In the main window. you need to insert another tape for backup.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to manually back up the M2000 dynamic data. Prerequisite l l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. it takes about five hours. l l If the newly inserted tape is fully written again. Ltd. you need to insert a tape into the tape drive and perform a new full backup. and it holds a tape if you plan to back up data on the tape..2. In such a case. choose Maintenance > Backup Management. After backing up the dynamic data on the tape. Manual backup can be full backup or incremental backup. 10-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l The time required for backing up M2000 dynamic data is related to the actual environment. l Context l Manual backup is required in special or emergency situations such as the loss of backup tapes and the failure of the M2000 system.

After you insert a new tape. 10-15 . For details. Click Incremental Backup to perform incremental backup. The Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The tape has been placed in the tape drive.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The system automatically ejects the fully written tape and waits for you to replace the tape with a new one. 1. the system continues to back up the M2000 dynamic data. Please replace it with another tape as soon as possible. S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 Figure 10-5 Manual backup If Backup Medium in Figure 10-5 does not meet the actual requirement. As shown in Figure 10-5.2. NOTE Full backup must be performed before incremental backup.. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Step 3 If data is backed up on a tape and the tape is fully written during the backup.2 Setting the Storage Device of Backup Data Through the Client. click Full Backup to perform full backup. Insert a new tape into the tape drive. Please resume the backup operation. see 10. you can click Reset to change the backup medium before data backup. Incremental backup must be performed based on full backup. perform following operations to replace the tape with a new one. 2. Step 2 On the Server Backup List tab page shown in Figure 10-5. If the Status displays Succeeded. you can infer that the backup is successful. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The current tape is fully written.

Generally. the M2000 enables the automatic synchronization function to obtain data from NEs and process the data. Context You can restore the M2000 based on the latest full backup and incremental backup files. After backing up the dynamic data on the tape. Ltd. l l If the newly inserted tape is fully written again. it takes about six hours. perform the following steps to decompress the contents on the tape to a hard disk. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: Tape replacement times out. If certain data generated after the backup start time. and thus the performance data and alarm data of the managed NEs cannot be processed. Otherwise. After you restore the M2000. you need to insert a tape into the tape drive and perform a new full backup.. In such a case.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The Sybase database service is running properly. During the restoration of the dynamic data. You have obtained the backup files for restoring the dynamic data. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . all the contents in the backup file package are restored. The data backup fails.6 Restoring the M2000 Dynamic Data This section describes how to restore the M2000 dynamic data. you can run the following command to view the contents of the tape: # gtar tf /dev/rmt/0 ----End 10. go to Step 3. S10) l If you do not replace the fully written tape within the wait time preset in the configuration file. In this way. is not compressed in the backup file package. such as the NE performance data or alarm data.2. you need to insert another tape for backup. Prerequisite l l l You have logged in to the system as user root. Procedure Step 1 If the backup files are stored on tapes of the tape drives connected to the M2000 server. NOTE The time required for restoring M2000 dynamic data is related to the actual environment. Insert the first tape that stores the dynamic data and run the following command: # /usr/sfw/bin/gtar xvPfM /dev/rmt/0 10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. change tapes until all the data is backed up. the M2000 services are stopped.

S10) 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 CAUTION l If multiple tape drives are available in the system. Insert other tapes in this way as prompted. decompress the relevant package. the system prompts you to insert the third tape. # chmod -R 770 /export/home/backup # chown -R omcuser:omcsysm /export/home/backup Step 4 Restore the M2000 dynamic data. CAUTION Press Ctrl+C to exit if the following message is displayed: gtar:'export/home/backup/omc/all-20080130180622. Press the button on the tape drive to remove the tape when the following message is displayed. It is not related to the path where you perform the decompression. Step 3 Change the right and owner of the /export/home/backup directory. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Step 2 If all the data is stored on one tape. For details. Decompress the backup file that stores the to-be-restored dynamic data. 10-17 . Otherwise.. decompress the data on other tapes to a hard disk. you need to type the name of the tape drive that is used for backing up the dynamic data. After replacing the first tape with the second tape. 1. perform Step 3 after the previous command is executed. # cd /export/home/backup/omc # tar xf backup file that stores dynamic data For example.tar' is not continued on this volume Then. run the following command to decompress data again: # /usr/sfw/bin/gtar xvPfM /dev/rmt/0 If you need to restore data from the third tape. The decompressed file is stored in the same path as the compressed file. perform Step 3. Prepare volume #2 for '/dev/rmt/0' and hit return: NOTE You can also remove the tape by opening a new remote login window and then running the following command: # mt -f /dev/rmt/0 offline 2. see the manual delivered with the tape drive. if you need to restore the full backup file generated on 18:06:22 2008-01-30. Ltd. 1. Prepare volume #3 for '/dev/rmt/0' and hit return: After all data on the tapes is decompressed to a hard disk.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. press Enter to decompress the data on the second tape to a hard disk.

proceed with Step 6. Run the following script to restore the dynamic data: # ./restore. it indicates that the M2000 service is started.. Note: Enter q/Q to exit this tool. # cd all-20080130180622 3. In such a case.tar. S10) # tar xf all-20080130180622.tar. you need to set the parameters of the user database by referring to the BRT backup and restore guide and then start the M2000 services.sh # cd /opt/OMC/tools/common # . Ltd. Operation succeeds 10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. decompress all-20080130180622.10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. type the password of user sa of the database. You need not decompress all-20080130180622. The reason of the previous operation is that the direct startup of the M2000 services may fail because the parameters of the rebuilt M2000 database are not set. Step 5 Run the following commands to restart the M2000 services: # . Please input the supperuser's password of database[default:emsems]: NOTE You can type q or Q to quit the script. Wait with patience. Please make a choice[1-2]: NOTE Restoring data takes a long time.tar NOTE You need to decompress the relevant package regardless of the full backup file or the incremental backup file that is to be restored. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .tar. 2. 5. When the system displays the following prompt. CAUTION If you have rebuilt the user database by using the BRT before restoring the dynamic data. type 1 to start restoring the dynamic data./commonop. If you need to restore the system to the running state on 18:06:22 2008-01-31. the system displays Operation succeeds.sh -ostartsvc l If the system displays the following information. For example. there are two decompressed files: all-20080130180622. If you need to restore the system to the running state on 18:06:22 2008-01-30.sh 4.tar and inc-20080131180622. # cd name of the backup file that stores dynamic data For example. After the restoration is complete.tar. When the system displays the following prompt. Navigate to the path after the decompression. decompress inc-20080131180622.

it indicates that the M2000 service fails to be started. Wait with patience.. Instead. Ltd. S10) l 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000 If the system displays the following information. Performing Start OMC services failed NOTE Starting the M2000 service takes a long time.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 10-19 . Step 6 Run the following commands to delete the decompressed backup files: # cd /export/home/backup/omc # rm -rf directory for storing the decompressed backup files For example: # rm -rf all-20080130180622 ----End Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In such a case. do not proceed with Step 6. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance.

.

Ltd. 11. 11. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance 11 About This Chapter M2000 Routine Maintenance This chapter describes the maintenance items and the procedures required to conduct the M2000 routine maintenance.. only for reference. These items are. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11.4 Monthly Maintenance Operations This section describes the monthly maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000. Specific maintenance items are required in real applications.1 M2000 Routine Maintenance Items This section describes the recommended maintenance items of the M2000. however.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 11.2 Daily Maintenance Operations This section describes the daily maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000.3 Weekly Maintenance Operations This section describes the weekly maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000. 11-1 .

8 9 10 11 12 13 Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily 11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. No core file exists in the /export/home/ omc/var/logs directory. and no service is in not running state. Check the status of the M2000 database. No abnormal or malicious operations are performed. Check the status of alarm reception. Ltd. Table 11-1 List of maintenance items No.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. No performance result is lost. The alarm box can report the M2000 alarms in real time. Check the hard disk usage of the M2000 server. Check the status of the alarm box. Check the core file of the server. Check the status of the NMS connection.. The NMS can collect the alarms and performance data reported by the M2000. Check the loss of performance results. Check the M2000 logs. All measurement counters and measurement objects are being measured. S10) 11. The connection between the M2000 and NEs is normal. Check the connection between the M2000 and NEs. The alarms reported by NEs are received in real time. All the services run properly. Check the status of the M2000 services. Table 11-1 lists the recommended maintenance items of the M2000.1 M2000 Routine Maintenance Items This section describes the recommended maintenance items of the M2000. You can add or delete maintenance items according to the actual requirement. The database runs properly and its usage is less than 80%. No error log is generated. The usage of each disk is less than 90%. Check OMC alarms or events. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The system runs properly. Check the error logs of the Solaris operating system. Item Mai nten ance Peri od Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Reference 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Check the status of performance measurement. No OMC alarm or event is generated.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

No.

Item

Mai nten ance Peri od Daily Daily Wee kly

Reference

14 15 16

Check the hardware of the M2000 server. Check the results collected by the SMC. Check the configuration of alarm timing tasks.

The hardware of the M2000 server is not damaged. The operating environment of the M2000 server is normal. The time of alarm timing tasks is set properly. This prevents the time conflict with background tasks. The conflict may result in heavy CPU load. The time of automatic log dump is set properly. This prevents the time conflict with background tasks. The conflict may result in heavy CPU load. The time of NE log synchronization is set properly. This prevents the time conflict with background tasks. The conflict may result in heavy CPU load. The file server is configured properly. The time for automatically and periodically backing up the M2000 server and NEs is set properly. Backup files are generated in disks. The threshold of system monitoring is set properly. The time of NE configuration synchronization is set properly. The number of equivalent NEs managed by the M2000 does not exceed the management capability of the M2000. The M2000 routes are configured correctly. Back up the M2000 database and system files. View the backup files on disks and tapes. The time of the M2000 server is correct.

17

Check the configuration of automatic log dump.

Wee kly

18

Check the configuration of NE log synchronization time. Check the configuration of the file server. Check the configuration of the system backup.

Wee kly

19 20

Wee kly Wee kly

21 22

Check the configuration of system monitoring. Check the configuration of NE configuration synchronization time. Check the management capability of the M2000. Check the status of the M2000 routes. Back up the M2000.

Wee kly Wee kly Wee kly Wee kly Wee kly Wee kly

23

24 25

26

Check the time of the M2000 server.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

No.

Item

Mai nten ance Peri od Wee kly

Reference

27

Check the disk status of the M2000.

All the disks that are in use are online, the KSTATE columns of pl, sd, and v are ENABLED, and the STATE columns are ACTIVE. The usage of each partition is less than 80%. The power supply is normal. For details about how to check whether the CD-ROMs and tape drives run properly, see the related operating system administrator manuals. The disk array is not damaged.

28 29

Check the power supply of the M2000 server. Check the peripherals of the M2000 server.

Mont hly Mont hly

30

Check the front panel of a disk array.

Mont hly

For details about how to operate and maintain NEs, see the M2000 Online Help.

11.2 Daily Maintenance Operations
This section describes the daily maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000. 11.2.1 Checking the Status of Performance Measurement This section describes how to check the performance measurement state. You must ensure that all the required measurement counters and measurement objects are in proper status. 11.2.2 Checking the Missing Performance Result To ensure that no result is lost, you must check that the missing performance result exists. 11.2.3 Checking the Alarm Reception Check the alarm reception and ensure that the M2000 can receive alarms from NEs in real time. 11.2.4 Checking the NMS Connection This section describes how to check the NMS connection and to ensure that the NMS connection is normal. 11.2.5 Checking the Functionality of Alarm Box Check the function of generating visual and audible alarms for the alarm box and ensure that the alarm box can indicate the alarms on the M2000 in real time. 11.2.6 Check OMC Alarms/Events This section describes how to check whether the M2000 system is normal. This section also describes how to check whether the alarms and events of the M2000 are generated. 11.2.7 Checking Connections Between the M2000 and NEs
11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

This section describes how to check the connections between the M2000 and NEs. 11.2.8 Checking M2000 Logs M2000 user logs record the details about user operations, such as user name, start time, end time, and log type. The M2000 system administrators and operators can query user logs. 11.2.9 Checking the Error Log of the Solaris This section describes how to check the error logs of the Solaris operating system. 11.2.10 Checking the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the disk usage and clean up the expired log files, temporary files, and other files that are no longer in use. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect the system operation. 11.2.11 Checking the States of M2000 Databases This section describes how to check the states of the M2000 database services, database states, and database usage. This operation requires only a few system resources and does not affect the system operation. 11.2.12 Checking the States of M2000 Services This section describes how to check the states of M2000 services. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect system operation. 11.2.13 Checking the Core Files on the Server This section describes how to check the /export/home/omc/var/logs directory and to ensure that core files do not exist. 11.2.14 Checking the Hardware of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the M2000 server hardware. 11.2.15 Checking the SMC Collection Results This section describes how to check the SMC collection results and to ensure that the M2000 server environment is normal.

11.2.1 Checking the Status of Performance Measurement
This section describes how to check the performance measurement state. You must ensure that all the required measurement counters and measurement objects are in proper status.

Prerequisite
l l

You have logged in to the M2000 client. You are authorized to perform performance management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Measure Management > Status Browser. The Measure Management window is displayed. Step 2 Ensure that all the required measurement counters and the measurement objects are in proper status. If there is any exception, contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. ----End

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

11.2.2 Checking the Missing Performance Result
To ensure that no result is lost, you must check that the missing performance result exists.

Prerequisite
l l

You have logged in to the M2000. You are authorized to perform performance management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Measure Management > Status Browser. Step 2 From the navigation tree of the Measure Management window, right-click a node and then choose Missing Result from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the displayed Query Missing Result dialog box, set the related parameters. Default end time = Current time. Default start time = Current time - Time range of the missing results in the preference settings. Step 4 Click OK. Any measurement result that is missing within the time range is listed in a table in the displayed dialog box. The first column of the table displays the object information. The second column displays the corresponding time range. ----End

Postrequisite
If missing measurement results exist, synchronize the results. 1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click a node in the navigation tree, and then choose Missing Result from the shortcut menu. In the Query Missing Result window, select an NE and a function subset whose missing results you want to query, and then click OK. In the dialog box of missing results, click Synchronize Result. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK. After the synchronization command is issued to the NE, it takes some time for the NE to report the performance measurement data. You can check whether the data is successfully reported by viewing whether the missing results disappear.

11.2.3 Checking the Alarm Reception
Check the alarm reception and ensure that the M2000 can receive alarms from NEs in real time.

Prerequisite
l l

You have logged in to the M2000 . You are authorized to perform fault management.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

11-6

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Monitor > Browse Alarm List. The Filter window is displayed. Step 2 Set filter condition, then click OK. Step 3 Ensure that the M2000 can receive the alarms reported by NEs in real time. ----End

11.2.4 Checking the NMS Connection
This section describes how to check the NMS connection and to ensure that the NMS connection is normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the NMS can collect the alarms and performance data reported from the M2000 . ----End

11.2.5 Checking the Functionality of Alarm Box
Check the function of generating visual and audible alarms for the alarm box and ensure that the alarm box can indicate the alarms on the M2000 in real time.

Prerequisite
l l

You have logged in to the M2000 . You are authorized to perform fault management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > Options. The Alarm Option window is displayed. Step 2 View the settings. Ensure that alarms generated from the NEs, which satisfy the conditions, can be indicated on the alarm box in real time. ----End

11.2.6 Check OMC Alarms/Events
This section describes how to check whether the M2000 system is normal. This section also describes how to check whether the alarms and events of the M2000 are generated.

Prerequisite
l l

You have logged in to the M2000 client. You are authorized to query alarms and events.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-7

Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the Local NM icon is colored or an alarm is displayed on it in the topology view. If the system is operational, no alarm is generated. That is, the Local NM icon is not colored or no alarm balloon is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the Local NM icon, and then choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List. The Browse Alarm List window is displayed.
l

If the alarms listed in Table 11-2 are generated, handle the alarms immediately. Table 11-2 Alarms that need to be handled immediately Alarm Name The OMC Service Is Terminated Abnormally The Disk Usage Is Too High (Critical) Power Failure Fan Failure CPU Temperature Is Abnormal Hard Disk Failure Disk Array Failure Power or Fan Failure To the Disk Array Cabinet Failure To the Devices in the Disk Array Cabinet A Disk on the Array Is Faulty Memory Failure CPU Failure Alarm ID 4 37 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 110 112

l

If the alarms listed in Table 11-3 are generated, you need to clear them within one day. Table 11-3 Alarms that need to be handled within one day Alarm Name NE Mediation Layer Version Unmatched Insufficient Free Space of the Performance Database License Invalid License Expired License On Trail Server Backup Unsuccessful Alarm ID 303 405 501 505 506 512
Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

11-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

l

During network expansion, multiple alarms listed in Table 11-4 are generated. In such a case, you can export the alarm statistical files every day and check the information in the Location Information column in the exported files. If the alarms are generated on the required NEs, you need to clear the alarms. Table 11-4 Alarms to be focused on during network expansion Alarm Name NE Is Disconnected Alarm ID 301

l

If the alarms listed in Table 11-5 are generated many times, you need to locate the user who has not obtained the M2000 login password and tries to log in to the M2000 to prevent malicious operations. Table 11-5 Alarms about malicious operations Alarm Name The Number of Login Attempts Reaches the Maximum Alarm ID 11

Step 3 Right-click the Local NM icon, and then choose Query Alarm/Event > Event Logs from the shortcut menu. The Query Event Logs window is displayed.
l

If the events listed in Table 11-6 occur, you need to handle them within one day. Table 11-6 Events that need to be handled within one day Event Name SMC Alarm Event ID 1099

l

During network expansion, multiple events listed in Table 11-7 occur. In such a case, you can export the event statistical files every day and check the information in the Location Information column in the exported files. If the events occur on the required NEs, you need to handle them. Table 11-7 Events that need to be focused on during network expansion Event Name Performance Result Loss Event ID 407

----End

Postrequisite
To handle alarms and events, perform the following steps:
Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-9

11 M2000 Routine Maintenance

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun, S10)

1. 2.

In the Browse Alarm List or Query Event Logs window, select a specific alarm or event. In the Process Advice area, click Click here to show detail Information. Then, you can obtain the detailed information and troubleshooting suggestions from the displayed alarm or event online help. (Optional) When handling alarms, you also need to acknowledge uncleared alarms, and analyze and acknowledge the alarms that are automatically cleared. The acknowledged and cleared alarms do not exist in the window any longer. The cleared but not acknowledged alarms are displayed in a different color.

3.

4. 5. 6.

Double-click an alarm or event. The Detail Information dialog box is displayed. In the Experience area, click Modify. The Experience dialog box is displayed. In the Experience dialog box, type the information such as the symptom, cause, and recommended handling advice. The typed information is saved in the Experience area. Repeat 1 to 6 to handle each alarm or event. Ensure that the M2000 system is operational. No alarms or events occur if the M2000 system is operational.

7. 8.

11.2.7 Checking Connections Between the M2000 and NEs
This section describes how to check the connections between the M2000 and NEs.

Prerequisite
Before checking connections between the M2000 and NEs, ensure that:
l l

You have logged in to the M2000 . You are authorized to query the status of NE connections.
NOTE

The connection status of virtual NEs and the OMC (M2000 ) is NA (not applicable).

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > NE Monitor. The NE Monitor dialog box is displayed. You can check the connection status of NEs. There are three connection statuses: Connected, Break, and NA. Step 2 Handle exceptions. For the Break status, you must obtain and analyze system information in time and solve the problem. The NA status is caused by an unmatched NE version. Check the NE version and then install the adaptation layer. For details, refer to the M2000 Commissioning Guide. Step 3 Check whether the NEs are connected correctly. The status of all NEs is Connected. ----End
11-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06)

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs. The /var/log/syslog file records the messages exported to the system console and the messaged generated by the syslog system service. 11-11 . or objects. You are authorized to check M2000 logs. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 . ensure that you have logged in to the M2000 server as user omcuser. The record format of the /var/adm/messages file and the /var/log/syslog file is as follows: date and time-hostname-description NOTE l The /var/adm/messages file is the core system log file.2. Step 4 Confirm that no error information exists in M2000 logs. The M2000 system administrators and operators can query user logs.2. No abnormal or unfriendly operations are performed. terminals. Step 2 Set query conditions in the Filter window and click OK. such as user name. end time. The queried results are displayed. Context l Viewing the Solaris error logs occupies few system resources and does not affect system operation. The system works properly. Handle the abnormal or unfriendly operations. Prerequisite Before checking error logs of the Solaris. the system opens the Filter window automatically.. By default. start time. perform the validity check for the user. User logs can be queried based on users. if a user fails to log in to the client for several times. results. For example. operations. ----End 11. and log type. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance 11. It contains the boot information about system startup and other status information about system operation. time ranges.8 Checking M2000 Logs M2000 user logs record the details about user operations. Ltd. Step 3 Handle abnormal operations.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The Query Operation Logs window is displayed. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Checking the Error Log of the Solaris This section describes how to check the error logs of the Solaris operating system.

l l The disk usage is smaller than 90%. The disk usage of the M2000 server is displayed.2. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. Step 4 Check whether the disk usage of the M2000 server is within the normal range.00$ more syslog Step 4 Check the file for error information.10 Checking the Disk Usage of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the disk usage and clean up the expired log files. the messages such as err or failed are not displayed. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. View the partition with the largest remaining space. Step 3 Handle exceptional situations.00$ cd /var/adm -bash-3. The remaining space must be sufficient to back up the M2000. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. refer to 9. Clear the disk space if the disk space is insufficient. and other files that are no longer in use. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect the system operation. Procedure Step 1 Open the /var/adm/messages file.4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server. Step 3 Open the /var/log/syslog file. -bash-3. You have the relevant operation privileges.00$ more messages Step 2 Check the file for error information. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 system. -bash-3. ----End 11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.00$ cd /var/log -bash-3. temporary files.2. If such messages are displayed. For details. Ltd. Step 2 Click the Hard Disk Monitor tab. S10) Generally.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . ----End 11..

12 Checking the States of M2000 Services This section describes how to check the states of M2000 services. database states. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. The start_svc command is used to start all the M2000 services.2. Step 2 Click the Service Monitor or Process Monitor tab to monitor the processes running on the M2000 server. and database usage. This operation requires only a few system resources and does not affect the system operation.. log in to the M2000 server as user root. In case a process is running improperly or a process is terminated exceptionally. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. If the database usage is greater than 90%. This operation requires very few system resources and does not affect system operation. Ltd. The clearing operation does not affect the system operation. For details on how to clear a database. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 client. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Monitor Browser. ----End 11. You have the relevant operation privileges. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance 11. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed.2. clear some data space by dumping alarm data and user logs. Step 3 Handle exceptional situations. Step 3 Handle exceptional situations. If Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Click the Database Monitor tab.3 Clearing M2000 Databases. 11-13 . You have the relevant operation privileges. The database usage is smaller than 90%. The System Monitor Browser window is displayed. refer to 8. The information about the database of the M2000 server is displayed.. Step 4 Ensure that the database works properly.11 Checking the States of M2000 Databases This section describes how to check the states of the M2000 database services. where pid indicates the process No. Run the command kill -9 pid to forcibly kill the process.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

The M2000 server is switched on. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 11-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Contact Huawei technical support engineers to deal with the core files generated within the week.14 Checking the Hardware of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the M2000 server hardware. The file at the top is the earliest one. Step 2 Check the server hardware based on the server model according to the delivery-attached manual of the server. -bash-3. ----End 11. The server works properly.00$ cd /export/home/omc/var/logs Step 2 Check the /export/home/omc/var/logs directory and ensure that core files do not exist.13 Checking the Core Files on the Server This section describes how to check the /export/home/omc/var/logs directory and to ensure that core files do not exist. check the disk array model. S10) some sessions are not started. Step 4 Handle exceptional situations.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. run the command start_svc again. Step 3 If a disk array is used. Procedure Step 1 Go to the /export/home/omc/var/logs directory. If a certain process is still inactive. Step 4 Check whether the M2000 works properly. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. The Status of all M2000 services is Running. The indicators are displayed properly. Delete the core files generated one week earlier. ----End 11. NOTE You can also run the prtdiag command to view the server type. Prerequisite The cables are connected correctly.00$ ls -ltr core* The core files are sorted by time.2. which is contained in the system output. Ltd.. check the hardware according to the manual mapping to the model of disk array. -bash-3.2. Procedure Step 1 Check the server model. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user omcuser. Then.

11. Step 5 Ensure that the hardware of the M2000 server and disk array is functional.2. contact the engineers at Sun Microsystems..3. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance If the hardware incurs a fault.3. log in to the server as user root. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11.3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 11-15 . 11. The purpose is to avoid the server overload owing to the conflict of time when you perform tasks on the server. Prerequisite l l l The SMC server software runs properly. see the relevant manual of the SMC.15 Checking the SMC Collection Results This section describes how to check the SMC collection results and to ensure that the M2000 server environment is normal.3.5 Checking the Configuration of System Backup This section describes how to check whether the periodic backup of the M2000 server and NEs are started and whether the start time is correct. You can obtain the relevant SMC manual at the Sun website. locate the fault by referring to related manuals of the disk array and the server.3 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Log This section describes how to check whether the configuration of synchronization time of the NE log is correct. 11. For a fault difficult to locate. The SMC client software runs properly.1 Checking the Configuration of Alarm Timing This section describes how to check whether the policy on automatic dumping alarm data from the alarm database is reasonable.2 Checking the Configuration of Automatic Log Dump This section describes how to check whether the system of automatic dumping alarm data from the alarm database is satisfactory. ----End 11. The purpose is to avoid the server overload owing to the conflict of time when you perform tasks on the server.3 Weekly Maintenance Operations This section describes the weekly maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000.4 Checking the Configuration of the File Server This section describes how to check whether the configuration of the file server is appropriate. This section also describes how to check whether backup files are generated in the disk. ----End 11. Ltd. For detailed operations. Procedure Step 1 On the SMC client. Step 2 Enter Sun Management Center and check the SMC collection results. 11. You have the password of user root to log in to the M2000 server.3.

omcsmdb.10 Backing Up the M2000 This section describes how to back up the M2000 .6 Checking the Configuration of System Monitoring This section describes how to check the configuration of system monitoring.3.1 Checking the Configuration of Alarm Timing This section describes how to check whether the policy on automatic dumping alarm data from the alarm database is reasonable.12 Checking the States of M2000 Disks This section describes how to check all the disks in the Vxvm. The M2000 databases consists of omcdb. ----End 11-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Checking the Status of the M2000 Routes This section describes how to check the configuration of the M2000 routes. select the Alarm Data node. Step 3 Select the task in the right pane and click Attribute. 11.. the logical volumes of the local disk in the Vxvm. The purpose is to avoid the server overload. and the logical volumes of the disk array in the Vxvm. 11. Ensure that the number of equivalent NEs managed by the M2000 does not exceed the capability limit. pmcomdb. 11. You are authorized to check the configuration of M2000 integrated task management. 11. You can also double-click the Alarm Data node to open the Attributes window.3. 11.3. check the configuration of automatic alarm data dumping.3. Step 4 In the Attribute window. The M2000 backup refers to the backup of M2000 databases and system files.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. fmdb. itfndb. omclogdb. omctmdb. Step 2 Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. The M2000 system files refer to those files in the directories /export/home/omc/var and / export/home/sysm. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. Step 5 Ensure that the configuration of automatic alarm data dumping is proper. pmdb.8 Checking the Threshold of Network Management Capability This section describes how to check whether the M2000 management capability exceeds the threshold. 11. 11. swmdb. Ltd. The server overload may occur when the synchronization is performed simultaneously with other tasks on the server. farsdb and omceamdb. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .3. S10) 11.3. The Task Management window is displayed.7 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Configuration This section describes how to check whether the time for synchronizing NE configuration data is appropriate. sumdb.3.3.11 Checking the Time of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the time of the M2000 server.

S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance 11. Step 3 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NE security logs.3. Choose the task in the right pane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select NM Operation Log Dump. Click Attribute. 1. Click Attribute. Choose the task in the right pane. Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. 4. Click Attribute. select NM System Log Dump. 1. Click Attribute. Choose the task in the right pane. Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. 4. You are authorized to check the configuration of M2000 integrated task management. Choose the task in the right pane. Ltd. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable. Check the configuration of auto NE system log dump in the Attribute window. select NE Security Log. Check the configuration of auto NM operation log dump in the Attribute window. 1. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. 2. The Task Management window is displayed. select NE Operation Log. Check the configuration of auto NE operation log dump in the Attribute window. 1. Click Attribute. 4. 2. Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 . Step 2 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NE operation logs. 11-17 . Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. Check the configuration of auto NE security log dump in the Attribute window. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable. Choose the task in the right pane. 4. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable.2 Checking the Configuration of Automatic Log Dump This section describes how to check whether the system of automatic dumping alarm data from the alarm database is satisfactory. 2. 3. Step 4 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NE system logs. 2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. 3. Step 6 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NM system logs. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable. select NE System Log. 1. 3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 3.. 2. Step 5 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NM operation logs.

select NE Log Synchronization. Step 3 Select the task in the right pane. Context You need to run the operation only if the NE supporting this function exists. Step 4 View the configuration of synchronization time of NE log in the Attribute dialog box. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. select NM Security Log Dump. Step 5 Ensure that the configuration is correct. 1. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable. 4. ----End 11. The Task Management window is displayed. S10) 3.3. Step 2 Under the Synchronization node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. ----End 11. 4. Check the configuration of auto NM security log dump in the Attribute window. Choose the task in the right pane. You are authorized to check the configuration of the M2000 file server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ensure that the configuration is reasonable. Click Attribute. this operation is performed at night when no other tasks are performed. Check the configuration of auto NM system log dump in the Attribute window. You are authorized to check the configuration of the M2000 integrated task management.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 2. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The purpose is to avoid the server overload owing to the conflict of time when you perform tasks on the server.3 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Log This section describes how to check whether the configuration of synchronization time of the NE log is correct. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 11-18 . You are advised to synchronize NE logs when the traffic is not heavy. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. Generally. 3. Ltd.3.. Under the Database Capacity Management node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. Step 7 Check the configuration of automatic log dump of NM security logs.4 Checking the Configuration of the File Server This section describes how to check whether the configuration of the file server is appropriate. Click Attribute.

The Task Management window is displayed. ----End 11. Ensure that the task is running in the execution time. Step 3 Check whether the periodic backup of the NE is started and whether the start time is appropriate. select the NE Backup node. 1. View the configuration of periodic backup time for the M2000 server in the Attribute dialog box. Ensure that the configuration is correct. 3. This section also describes how to check whether backup files are generated in the disk. Ensure that the task is running in the execution time. 11-19 . You are authorized to check the configuration of the M2000 integration task. Select the task in the right pane. 4. View Last Run Time and State in the right pane. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. View the configuration of periodic backup time for NEs in the Attribute dialog box. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. The File Server Setting window is displayed. Click Attribute. 2. Step 4 Ensure that the configuration of the file server is appropriate. 2. Select the task in the right pane. Step 4 Log in to the M2000 server as user omcuser.5 Checking the Configuration of System Backup This section describes how to check whether the periodic backup of the M2000 server and NEs are started and whether the start time is correct. Under the Backup node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. Step 2 Select the NE type in the ROOT navigation tree in the left pane. 1. 4. Step 2 Check whether the periodic backup of the M2000 server is started and whether the start time is correct. Under the Backup node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. 3. Ltd. Ensure that the configuration is correct.. Check whether backup files exist in the backup directory of both the M2000 server and NEs. 5. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Attribute. The purpose is to avoid the server overload owing to the conflict of time when you perform tasks on the server. select the Server Backup node.3. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Procedure Step 1 Choose Software > File Server Setting. Step 3 Check the name and IP address of the file server in the right pane. View Last Run Time and State in the right pane.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

6 Checking the Configuration of System Monitoring This section describes how to check the configuration of system monitoring. The System Monitor Settings dialog box is displayed. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .3. Context The recommended thresholds of the CPU usage.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. see Table 11-8. Step 5 Click the Service Monitor tab to check whether the settings of the service status refresh interval thresholds are appropriate. memory usage. and database usage are 80%.. Step 3 Click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to check whether the settings of the disk usage thresholds are appropriate. Procedure Step 1 Choose Monitor > System Monitor > Configurations. ----End 11. ----End Example For details about the parameters for monitoring the server. Step 2 Click the Server Monitor tab to check whether the settings of the CPU usage and memory usage thresholds are appropriate. S10) You can specify the backup directory for the M2000 server and NEs based on the attribute information. 11-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Step 4 Click the Database Monitor tab to check whether the settings of the database usage thresholds are appropriate.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the M2000 generates an alarm. Offset value range: 1-99. the M2000 generates a high CPU usage alarm. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Server Monitor Threshold Settings CPU used rate (%) Value: Value range: 1-99. If the CPU usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. l Server status refresh interval (seconds) Description: Refresh interval for server monitoring. the CPU usage is sampled every x seconds. prompting that the high CPU usage alarm is cleared. Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the CPU usage alarm and whether to enable the bubble. Value: Value range: 2-60. Default value: 50. 11-21 . Default value: 15. Ltd.. that is. Description: Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Table 11-8 Server Monitor Name Server Monitor Parameter Settings CPU sustained overload times (times) Description Description: l Settings Value: Value range: 10-400 Default value: 40 If the CPU usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of CPU used rate for consecutive x times. Default value: 60.

Offset value range: 1-99. S10) Name Memory used rate (%) Description Used to set Threshold for Alarm Generation and Threshold for Alarm Clearance for the memory usage alarm.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 11-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. prompting that the high memory usage alarm is cleared. Default value: 60. If the memory usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of Memory used rate. the M2000 generates an alarm. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . If the memory usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of Memory used rate. if the server is faulty. Ltd. l l Table 11-9 describes the parameters for monitoring the disks of the server.. the M2000 generates a high memory usage alarm. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99. Default value: 50. When the function of bubble information is enabled. the system displays a bubble information. Table 11-9 Hard Disk Monitor Name Disk Monitor Parameter Settings Hard disk status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Refresh interval for hard disk monitoring.

l l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system displays a bubble information. Ltd. When the function of bubble information is enabled. the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level.. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 Default value: l l l l Warning: 60 Minor: 70 Major: 80 Critical: 90 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level. if the hard disk is faulty. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Name Disk Monitor Threshold Settings Default value setting (%) Description Description: All default thresholds of hard disk usage on the M2000 server. 11-23 . the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

the M2000 uses customized thresholds of alarms. the M2000 generates a high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. the M2000 clears the high hard disk usage alarm of this severity level. if the hard disk is faulty. S10) Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds of all the hard disk usage on the M2000 server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .. l If you select Customize Value.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. the M2000 uses the threshold specified in Default Value Setting. 11-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the function of bubble information is enabled. When the hard disk usage is smaller than Threshold for Alarm Clearance of an alarm severity level. l Settings Value: Value range: 1-99 When the hard disk usage is larger than Threshold for Alarm Generation of an alarm severity level. the system displays a bubble information. l If you select l l NOTE Default Value.

11-25 . l Value: Value range: 1-100 Default value: l l l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level. Table 11-10 Database Monitor Name Database Monitor Parameter Settings Database status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of database refreshing. l Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level..M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Table 11-10 describes the parameters for monitoring the database of the server. Settings Value: Value range: 300-3600 Default value: 300 Database Monitor Threshold Settings Default Value Setting (%) Description: All default thresholds of database usage on the M2000 server.

Settings Value: Value range: 60-3600 Default value: 60 11-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the M2000 clears the high database usage alarm of this severity level. Default Value: use default thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. When the database usage is smaller than Threshold of an alarm severity level. S10) Name Advanced Setting (%) Description Description: Thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities..11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. l Settings Setting method: Set the following parameters for each database: l When the database usage is larger than Threshold of an alarm severity level. the M2000 generates a high database usage alarm of this severity level. You need to set these thresholds separately for each database on the M2000 server. Table 11-11 Service Monitor Name Services Monitor Parameter Settings Service status refresh interval (seconds) Description Description: Interval of service refreshing. Value range: 1-100 Default value: – – – – l l Warning: 85 Minor: 90 Major: 95 Critical: 98 l Disabled Monitoring: Disable the database monitoring. Table 11-11 describes the parameters for monitoring the server services. Ltd. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Customize Value: customize thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities.

l If all the monitored Settings Setting method: Select a service from the Service Name drop-down list. Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000. Select enable or disable in the corresponding Show Screen Tips dropdown list. Ltd. Click Attribute. NOTE services are running. The Task Management window is displayed.3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The purpose is to avoid the server overload. displayed.. 11. select the NE Configuration Data Synchronization node. is displayed. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Name Service Monitor Screen Tip Settings Default Group Description Description: Set whether to display the service status at the lower right corner of the M2000 system monitor client by or . The server overload may occur when the synchronization is performed simultaneously with other tasks on the server. is l if a monitored service is stopped. 11-27 . Context You need to run the operation only if the NE supporting this function exists.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. Step 2 Under the Synchronization node in the Task Type navigation tree in the left pane. Step 3 Select the task in the right pane. l You can double- click or to access the Service Monitor tab.7 Checking the Synchronization Time of NE Configuration This section describes how to check whether the time for synchronizing NE configuration data is appropriate. You are authorized to check the configuration of the M2000 integrated task management.

Prerequisite l l You have logged in to the M2000 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The M2000 system files refer to those files in the directories /export/home/omc/var and / export/home/sysm. omcsmdb. Ltd. omclogdb.10 Backing Up the M2000 This section describes how to back up the M2000 .3. Procedure Step 1 Check the configuration of the current route. itfndb. farsdb and omceamdb. # netstat -rnv ----End 11. swmdb.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.9 Checking the Status of the M2000 Routes This section describes how to check the configuration of the M2000 routes. pmcomdb. sumdb.. Procedure Step 1 Check whether the M2000 management capability exceeds the threshold. You are authorized to back up the M2000 system.3. The M2000 backup refers to the backup of M2000 databases and system files. Ensure that the number of equivalent NEs managed by the M2000 does not exceed the capability limit. omctmdb. S10) Step 4 View the setting of the time for synchronizing NE configuration data in the Attribute dialog box. 11-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. fmdb. ----End 11. ----End 11. Prerequisite You have logged in the M2000 server as user root. For details on how to calculate equivalent NEs and for the description of the M2000 management capability. Step 5 Ensure that the configuration is correct. The M2000 databases consists of omcdb.3. Ensure that the number of equivalent NEs managed by the M2000 is not beyond the capacity. pmdb.8 Checking the Threshold of Network Management Capability This section describes how to check whether the M2000 management capability exceeds the threshold. refer to the M2000 Product Description.

and then double-click the Server Backup node. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Maintenance > Task Management.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 11-29 . as shown in Figure 11-1. The database logs dumped by the Sybase database are not cleared in time. The Task Management dialog box is displayed. the power-off of the server. Generally. for example. Procedure Step 1 On the main window. and then set Task Name and Start Time. Ltd. which causes /export/ home to be used up. it takes about five hours. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance Context NOTE The time required for backing up data is related to the actual environment. Figure 11-1 Periodic backup Step 3 Click the Common Parameters tab. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Backup > Server Backup from the navigation tree. The reasons are as follows: l l The latest data fails to be restored after data lost caused by an accident. Step 4 Click the Extended Parameters tab.. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. as shown in Figure 11-2. Do not suspend a periodic backup task. and then set Server Full Backup Date.

the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The current tape is fully written. Please replace it with another tape as soon as possible. 2. 11-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After you insert a new tape.5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data. The system periodically backs up data. As shown in Figure 10-5 of 10. perform following operations to replace the tape with a new one. The system automatically ejects the fully written tape and waits for you to replace the tape with a new one. Insert a new tape into the tape drive. Ltd.2.. S10) Figure 11-2 Periodic backup Step 5 Click OK.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 1. Step 6 If data is backed up on a tape and the tape is fully written during the backup. Please resume the backup operation. the system continues to back up the M2000 dynamic data. The Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: The tape has been placed in the tape drive.

Procedure Step 1 Check the time of the M2000 server. you need to insert another tape for backup. Ltd.12 Checking the States of M2000 Disks This section describes how to check all the disks in the Vxvm. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to insert a tape into the tape drive and perform a new full backup. Step 3 Handle exceptional situations. the Message field in the Backup Management dialog box displays the following message: Tape replacement times out.5 Configuring the NTP Service of the M2000.5. For details on how to handle the problem. In such a case. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 as user root. ----End 11.3. In this way.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. for example: Tue Mar 29 00:35:24 MEST 2005 Step 2 If the M2000 server is configured with the NTP service. and the logical volumes of the disk array in the Vxvm. # date The server time is displayed. you can run the following command to view the contents of the tape: # gtar tf /dev/rmt/0 ----End 11. l Step 4 Check whether the M2000 works properly. change tapes until all the data is backed up. run the command ps -ef | grep ntp | grep -v grep to check whether the NTP service is started. Ensure that the server time is correct. handle the problem according to 2.7 Checking the Running Status of the NTP Service on the M2000 Server. Ensure that the NTP service is started and check the service status according to 2. S10) NOTE 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance l If you do not replace the fully written tape within the wait time preset in the configuration file. 11-31 . the logical volumes of the local disk in the Vxvm. After backing up the dynamic data on the tape. refer to 2 Setting the M2000 Time. l Change the server time if it is incorrectly set or it is not synchronized with the external clock source through NTP. l l If the newly inserted tape is fully written again.11 Checking the Time of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the time of the M2000 server. The data backup fails. If the M2000 is configured with the NTP service and the NTP service is not running properly..3.

.4 Monthly Maintenance Operations This section describes the monthly maintenance operations that need to be performed on the M2000.4. # vxdisk -g name of the disk group list Assume that the name of the disk array is ossdg.3 Checking the Front Panel of a Disk Array This section describes how to check the front panel of each disk array to determine whether a disk array is damaged. and v in the KSTATE column are ENABLED and all the values of pl and v in the STATE column are ACTIVE.4.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 11-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server. sd.2. Run the following command: # vxdisk -g ossdg list The following information is an example of the command result: DEVICE c4t2d1s2 TYPE auto:cdsdisk DISK ossdisk-1 GROUP ossdg STATUS online Generally. such as the CD-ROM drive and the tape drive.2 Checking the Peripherals of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the peripherals of the M2000 server. ----End 11. If the usage ratio of a partition is greater than 90%. Procedure Step 1 Check all the disks in the Vxvm. # df -k Ensure that the usage ratio of each partition is smaller than 90%.1 Checking the Power Supply of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the power supply of the M2000 server. 11. 11. 11. refer to 9. Context The following operation applies only for the M2000 server configured with disk array. you must clean the disk immediately. all the values in the STATUS column in the command result are online. S10) Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 server as user root. Step 2 Check the logical volumes of the disk array in the Vxvm: # vxprint -g ossdg NOTE In the command result.4. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Step 3 Ensure that the M2000 disks are functioning properly. all the values of pl. Ltd. For details on how to clean a disk.

Step 3 Check the latest power supply fault records in system logs of the Solaris. Procedure Step 1 Check the CD-ROM drive. The external power supply is functional. The system logs do not contain any fault related records.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Prerequisite The M2000 server is switched on. Green indicators are on or blinking.4. Step 2 Check the power supply indicators of the disk array and the storage device. All fault indicators are dim. Ltd. All power indicators must be green and all fault indicators must be dim. Step 5 Handle exceptional situations.4.2 Checking the Peripherals of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the peripherals of the M2000 server. the power supply outside the Sun cabinet. All power indicators are green. The CD-ROM drive works properly. The Solaris system log records the faults of the power supply housed in the Sun cabinet. contact the engineers at Sun Microsystems.. ----End 11.4 Querying the M2000 License This topic describes how to query the license file on the M2000 server through the M2000 client. Procedure Step 1 Check power supply indicators. 11-33 . Step 4 Check the external power supply. Step 2 Check the tape drive. Prerequisite The M2000 system is switched on. that is. 11. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Checking the Power Supply of the M2000 Server This section describes how to check the power supply of the M2000 server. such as the CD-ROM drive and the tape drive. check the power supply and circuits according to the delivery-attached manual of the server. Step 6 Ensure that the power of the M2000 works normally. S10) 11 M2000 Routine Maintenance 11. If the fault is complex.4. For the external power supply.

Ltd. check whether the StorEdge D240 is functional. Procedure Step 1 Check whether the LED indicator of the front panel of a disk array is yellow. the blue service indicator is on. Step 2 In the License Information dialog box. controller. For the two power modules in the rear panel. For details on how to handle the faults of the CD-ROM and the tape drive. Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > License Information from the main menu. refer to the Solaris Administrator Guide. refer to the Solaris Administrator Guide. or disk array. For details on how to handle the faults of the CD-ROM drive and the tape drive. the fault indicator is off. and the green indicator of AC power input is on. Step 3 If the server uses the StorEdge D240. ----End 11-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. query the license information about resources and functions on the Resource control item and Function control item tabs.. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. ----End 11. Step 5 Check whether the peripherals of the server works normally. l The green light of the power indicator on the right of the front panel is on. and the indicator of system faults is off.4 Querying the M2000 License This topic describes how to query the license file on the M2000 server through the M2000 client.4. there is one hard disk indicator available in both upper line and lower line. ----End 11. The green light of the hard disk indicators are on or blinking. you can infer that a configuration or hardware fault occurs on the power supply. In this case. S10) The tape drive works properly. In the middle of the front panel. If the LED indicator is yellow. l Step 4 Handle exceptional situations.3 Checking the Front Panel of a Disk Array This section describes how to check the front panel of each disk array to determine whether a disk array is damaged.4.11 M2000 Routine Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. the green indicator of DC power output is on. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .

thereby causing severe faults in the Solaris. and emergency maintenance for the server power-off. The abnormal power-off of the M2000 server forces the Solaris and the M2000 application to exit. client emergency maintenance.2 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Client This section provides guidance for emergency maintenance of the M2000 client. Ltd. In the case of abnormal poweroff.3 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server in Case of Power Failure This section describes the guide to emergency maintenance of the M2000 server in the case of power failure. you need to reset the M2000 server and take measures to restore the system based on the symptoms. S10) 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance About This Chapter This chapter describes the emergency maintenance in the case of a critical fault in the M2000 server or client. 12.1 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server This section describes the guide to emergency maintenance of the M2000 server. 12. 12-1 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 12.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. This chapter covers the server emergency maintenance..

12.3 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server in Case of Power Failure This section describes the guide to emergency maintenance of the M2000 server in the case of power failure. 12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. all the user data will be lost if the system crashes owing to a fatal error.12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In the case of abnormal poweroff.2 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Client This section provides guidance for emergency maintenance of the M2000 client. and then restore the system data by using the script in the BRT tool. you can restore the client in the following ways: l l Reinstall the operating system on the M2000 client. S10) 12. Ltd. thereby causing severe faults in the Solaris.3 Troubleshooting: Loss of Database Device Files After the Restoration of the File System This section describes how to handle the loss of database device files after the file system is restored.1 Guide to Emergency Maintenance of the M2000 Server This section describes the guide to emergency maintenance of the M2000 server. If the server breaks down or a fault occurs in the server. If the M2000 client breaks down or a fault occurs in the client. Reinstall the M2000 system. you need to boot the server by using the installation CD-ROM of the operating system.3.2 Troubleshooting: System Switched into the Maintenance Mode and Prompting You to Run fsck Manually This section describes how to manually run the fsck command in maintenance mode. 12. The emergency maintenance of the M2000 server is based on the backup mode. restore the BRT tool from the tape. l By reinstalling the Solaris If the system is not backed up. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . restore the server in the following ways: l Through the BRT tool You can use the BRT tool to back up operating system data on a tape.3. 12. The abnormal power-off of the M2000 server forces the Solaris and the M2000 application to exit.1 Troubleshooting: Failure to Start the Solaris Due to Loss of System Files This section describes how to handle the failure to start the Solaris operating system owing to the loss of system files.3. you need to reset the M2000 server and take measures to restore the system based on the symptoms. To restore system data. 12. l Through the backup server Restore the Solaris from the backup server if a full system backup is created through the Veritas software. 12.

3. Press Stop+a or Ctrl+Break to exit the startup and switch to the ok status. After resetting the server. you are not allowed to log in to the server through the telnet or to ping the server. sync Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. sync. As a result.. therefore. Symptom The server cannot be started. Only the keyboard delivered with the server has the stop key. sync. 12. restore it using the path_to_inst-INSTALL template stored in the /etc folder. S10) 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance 12. Assume that the name of the basic device corresponding to the root folder is c0t0d0s0. into the CD-ROM.1 Troubleshooting: Failure to Start the Solaris Due to Loss of System Files This section describes how to handle the failure to start the Solaris operating system owing to the loss of system files. sync.3. Run the following commands: # cd /mnt/etc # cp path_to_inst-INSTALL path_to_inst 5. Ltd. Use the serial port or the SC/RSC/XSCF port to view the following information: Cannot open `/etc/path_to_inst` Program terminated The system stops functioning and is switched to the ok status. the first of the two installation disks.4 Troubleshooting: Failure to Restore the Database Though the File System Is Intact This section describes how to handle the failure to restore the database though the file system is intact. Run the following command in the ok status: ok boot cdrom -s 3. the system file path_to_inst is lost. 12-3 . Insert the boot disk of the Solaris operating system. that is. Run the following commands to search for the name of the basic device corresponding to the system root folder: # cd /dev/dsk # ls 4. The system displays the message Cannot open `/etc/ path_to_inst` . Run the following commands to reset the Solaris operating system: # sync.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Mount this basic device to the /mnt mount point. 2. Run the mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0 /mnt command to switch to /mnt to restore the Solaris operating system. Fault Handling Unexpected power-off of the server damages the Solaris operating system. sync. The Solaris operating system. fails to start. 1. CAUTION If the /etc/path_to_inst file is lost.

12. Ensure that the SYB.dat sysproce. run the fsck -y command to restore the system file. Modify the file system. Ensure that the file systems of all partitions are correct. The database device files are as follows: master.Unable to repair the / filesystem.3. When the server powers off abnormally. The file disables the startup of the Sybase. You must restore the Solaris manually.3.krg file is deleted. If any database device files are lost. # fsck -y Check the restored information. Therefore. switch to the /export/home/sybdev folder and check whether the database device files are complete. that the file system of the damaged partition is restored. After resetting the server.krg file is not deleted.12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .dat 4. and that the database device files are complete. refer to 12.. where filesystem may refer to other partitions. Fault Handling The exceptional server power-off damages the Solaris.3 Troubleshooting: Loss of Database Device Files After the Restoration of the File System This section describes how to handle the loss of database device files after the file system is restored. Exit the shell when done to continue the boot process. 12-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the file system is restored. (or give root password for system maintenance): NOTE The warning shows Unable to repair the / filesystem.2 Troubleshooting: System Switched into the Maintenance Mode and Prompting You to Run fsck Manually This section describes how to manually run the fsck command in maintenance mode. 3.3. you are not allowed to log in to the server through the telnet. S10) # /usr/sbin/shutdown -g0 -y -i6 After the system starts. 12. delete the file if it still exists after you reset the Solaris.dat tmp_dev. Use a serial port or the SC/RSC/XSCF port to view the following information: WARNING .3 Troubleshooting: Loss of Database Device Files After the Restoration of the File System. Log in to the server as user root. 5. Run fsck manually (fsck -F ufs /dev/rdsk/c*t*d*s*). Symptom The server cannot be started and can be switched only to the maintenance mode. the Sybase also exits abnormally and the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. The system displays the message Run fsck manually (fsck -F ufs /dev/rdsk/ c*t*d*s*). Ltd. 2. Start the Sybase and M2000 application manually. Type control-d to proceed with normal startup. 1.

and then reinstall the Sybase database: l l l /opt/sybase/interfaces /export/home/sybdev/master.dat.log records the following error information: 00:00000:00001:2005/07/24 18:56:29. The file system can work normally. some database device files in /export/ home/sybdev are lost.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.3.dat /export/home/sybdev/sysprocs. State: 1 00:00000:00001:2005/07/24 18:56:29.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_helpdb 2> go The database log file /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/database server name. After checking the application database. however. is lost. To check whether a database is in the offline status. Perform the full backup and the incremental backup to restore the data in the database and the M2000 configuration files. the database fails to start. run the following commands: -bash-3. Delete the following three files.dat 2. are in the suspect status and cannot be started. Part of databases. For details on the installation of the Sybase and M2000. the operating system can be restarted normally. see the software installation manual related to each server type. Check the SQL Server errorlog for information as to the cause. select reinstall to re-establish the application databases of M2000. Fault Handling The abnormal power-off leads to the loss of the database device file dependent on the file system. refer to 10 Backing Up and Restoring the M2000. When installing the database. Severity: 14. If the device file related to certain application database is lost.4 Troubleshooting: Failure to Restore the Database Though the File System Is Intact This section describes how to handle the failure to restore the database though the file system is intact. such as master.. and the database service can be started. Symptom After the server is shut down exceptionally. 12-5 . S10) 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance Symptom After the server is reset and the file system is restored. For details. 3. 1. An earlier attempt at recovery marked it 'suspect'.dat or sysprocs.08 server Error: 926. Ltd. find that the application database is in the offline status. If the device file related to the system database. 12. the corresponding application database and the services related to this database fail to start.08 server Database 'swmdb' cannot be opened. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

S10) After the Sybase server is started. The abnormal exit leads to an exception in the database.004 SYB./RUN_SYB_back Fault Handling The database is processing transactions when the server is switched off abnormally. 1 2> go 1> update master. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3. As shown in the following command result. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server.. .00$ exit CAUTION The parameter database_name indicates the name of the faulty database. The default M2000 installation directory is /opt/OMC. -bash-3./svc_profile. Then.2.* The command result is similar with the following information: -rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r-1 1 1 1 1 dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser staff staff staff staff staff 9620 9690 9696 9690 9696 Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun 24 24 24 24 24 16:26 16:26 16:26 16:26 16:27 SYB. run the following commands: # su .002 SYB. 3.003 SYB. Ltd.dbuser -bash-3. perform the following steps: 1.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_configure "allow updates"..3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Log in to the M2000 installation directory as user root and run the environment variable script. Log in as user root and check whether all the values in /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/database server name. To handle the fault. restore the database by using the history file.005 12-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.001 SYB.sh 2. # cd M2000 installation path # . see 14. Switch to user dbuser and log in to the database as user sa.sysdatabases set status =-32768 2> where name="database_name" 3> go For details on how to stop the database service./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . (1) Run the following commands to query the last history file: # cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0 # ls -l database server name. If all the values are changed to the default values.12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.cfg are changed to the default values.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result.

010 SYB. which are the database server name and the last history file respectively. Ltd.018 SYB. 12-7 .021 SYB. # su .024 SYB.028 SYB. This takes SYB and SYB. # cp SYB.007 SYB.038 is the last history file.032 SYB.015 SYB. SYB. .031 SYB.023 SYB.cfg 4.020 SYB.dbuser For details about how to start the Sybase.bak SYB.034 SYB.025 SYB. -bash-3.038 SYB.017 SYB.019 SYB.cfg.037 SYB.008 SYB.035 SYB. Start the Sybase.022 SYB.016 SYB. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Switch to user dbuser and log in as user sa.027 SYB.033 SYB.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.036 SYB. as an example.sh CAUTION /opt/OMC is the default installation path of the M2000 server software..006 SYB. Then.cfg SYB.011 SYB.012 SYB.2 How to Start the Sybase. (2) Run the following command to use the last history file to restore /opt/sybase/ ASE-15_0/Database server name.cfg # chown dbuser:staff SYB.026 SYB.038.038 SYB. # cd M2000 installation path # .009 SYB. S10) -rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rwxrwxrwx -rw------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser dbuser staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff staff 9690 9696 9690 9696 9690 9696 9690 9696 9690 9696 9690 9696 9690 9696 9695 9694 9693 9801 9797 9794 9792 9790 9785 9780 9779 9778 9772 9770 9764 9758 9756 9753 9752 9753 9752 59 12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jul Aug Jul Aug 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 9 6 9 6 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:27 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 09:51 11:25 09:51 11:25 SYB.029 SYB.2. 6. Replace the M2000 installation directory with the actual installation directory. run the following commands: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 14.013 SYB.krg As indicated in the command result.00$ exit 5. Run the environment variable script as user root./svc_profile.030 SYB.014 SYB.

Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . see 14.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?.dbuser -bash-3.12 M2000 Emergency Maintenance M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2 How to Start the Sybase.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> update master. For details about how to start the Sybase. S10) # su . Restart the Sybase.2. For details on how to stop the database service. Ltd.sysdatabases set status =0 2> where name="database_name" 3> go 1>exit 7.2. see 14.. 12-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

. S10) 13 Troubleshooting the M2000 13 About This Chapter Troubleshooting the M2000 This chapter describes the procedures for troubleshooting the M2000.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting the M2000 This section describes the procedure for troubleshooting the M2000.3 Collecting Fault Data Using the Log Information Collector This section describes how to collect fault data by using the M2000 log information collector. 13-1 . Ltd. and handling faults. The procedure usually consists of three phases: collecting data. locating faults. 13.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 13. 13. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Collecting M2000 Site and Software Information This section describes how to collect the M2000 site and software information.

client.13 Troubleshooting the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . The M2000 system faults are categorized into hardware faults and software faults.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting the M2000 This section describes the procedure for troubleshooting the M2000. collect the following data: l l l l l l l l l Time when the fault has occurred Place where the fault has occurred Measures taken and the results Version information IP addresses Alarm information Logs Internal fault locating information Database deadlock information NOTE l l Logs are categorized into user logs. refer to the associated server type in the software installation manual related to each server type. locating faults. For details on faults of software installation. Software faults For details on alarms. and Sybase. and handling faults.2. refer to the M2000 Online Help.6 How to View Database Deadlock Information. and trace files. For details on viewing database deadlock information. The appearance of the hardware and indicators indicate the hardware faults clearly. Handling Faults This section describes how to handle faults based on different fault causes: l Hardware faults Refer to the manuals delivered with the associated hardware. l Software faults Software faults are the faults that occur in the M2000 software. Ltd. The procedure usually consists of three phases: collecting data. For details on the client faults.. l Hardware faults Hardware faults are the faults that occur in the M2000 server. Solaris. or other network devices. refer to the Help of the M2000 Mobile Element Management System. refer to 14. S10) 13. system logs. Collecting Data When a fault occurs. The collection and analysis of faults help you know the causes of the faults. Locating Faults This section describes the procedure for locating faults. l 13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

l Uncleared faults For the uncleared faults. The Sybase System Administrator Guide can be obtained from the CD delivered with the server. Collect the following site information: l l l l Site name Customer contact details Hardware model Date and time when a fault occurs Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.6 Collecting the M2000 Version This section describes how to obtain the version information about the M2000.2.4 Collecting the Solaris Version This section describes how to obtain the version information about the Solaris.2. 13. 13. 13. S10) 13 Troubleshooting the M2000 For details on the server faults. 13. 13.2.2.. You can download the Solaris System Administrator Guide at the website of the Sun corporation. Ltd.2 Collecting M2000 Site and Software Information This section describes how to collect the M2000 site and software information. l Sybase faults Refer to the Sybase System Administrator Guide.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.3 Collecting the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to obtain the IP address of the M2000 server. Procedure Step 1 Collect the M2000 site information.2. l Faults of the Solaris operating system Refer to the Solaris System Administrator Guide.4 About Server Software. collect all the information related to the faults by referring to Collecting Data and contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance.2.1 Collecting the M2000 Site Information This section describes how to collect the M2000 site information. 13. 13.2 Collecting the Time of M2000 Fault Occurrence This section describes how to find out the time when M2000 faults occur.1 Collecting the M2000 Site Information This section describes how to collect the M2000 site information. 13. 13-3 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . refer to the 14.5 Collecting Sybase Version Information This section describes how to collect the version information about the Sybase.

255 ether 0:3:ba:12:bb:93 13.4 Collecting the Solaris Version This section describes how to obtain the version information about the Solaris.2.0.161. Procedure Step 1 Run the date command to check the time. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .0. ----End Example # uname -aX 13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) Fault description ----End 13.161.RUNNING.MULTICAST.94.IPv4> mtu 1500 index 2 inet 10.254 netmask ffffff00 broadcast 10.1 netmask ff000000 eri0: flags=1000843<UP.3 Collecting the IP Address of the M2000 Server This section describes how to obtain the IP address of the M2000 server. and MAC address of the M2000 server.MULTICAST. Procedure Step 1 Run the uname -aX command to find out the version information about the Solaris operating system.13 Troubleshooting the M2000 l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.IPv4> mtu 8232 index 1 inet 127.BROADCAST.2 Collecting the Time of M2000 Fault Occurrence This section describes how to find out the time when M2000 faults occur. ----End Example # ifconfig -a lo0: flags=1000849<UP. subnet mask. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Run the ifconfig -a command to obtain the IP address.94.LOOPBACK.RUNNING. ----End Example # date Thu Jul 28 09:56:39 EDT 2005 13.2..2.

Netra-240System = SunO S Node = BackupServer Release = 5. Generic_127111-09. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh .00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1>select @@version 2>go The system output is similar to the following information: Adaptive Server Enterprise/15.. Generic_141414-07 or a value indicating a later version.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1>select @@version 2>go NOTE After the Sybase server is started. Ltd.2/EBF 15162 ESD#1 ONE-OFF/P/Sun_svr4/OS 5. As shown in the following command result. 15. 13-5 ./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . KernelID specifies version ID of the kernel and its value is Generic_118833-36. 13.10.2 is the current version number of the Sybase and 15162 is the version number of the patch that is installed.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.10 KernelID = Generic_138888-07 Machine = sun4u BusType = <unknown> Serial = <unknown> Users = <unknown> OEM# = 0 Origin# = 1 NumCPU = 2 In the system output. Release specifies the version of the operating system and its value is 5.10 Generic_138888-07 sun4u sparc SUNW.0. Procedure Step 1 Run the following commands: -bash-3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co./RUN_SYB_back ----End Example -bash-3. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. Generic_138888-07 .5 Collecting Sybase Version Information This section describes how to collect the version information about the Sybase.8/ ase1502/2493/64-bit/FBO/Mon Oct 15 16:15:21 2007 In the system output.0. S10) 13 Troubleshooting the M2000 A message similar to the following message is displayed: SunOS BackupServer 5. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result.2.

Procedure Step 1 Run the displayVersion command to obtain the version information about the M2000. run the /opt/OMC/bin/stop_collector command and the /opt/OMC/ bin/stop_collector_agent command. 13.0. .2.13 Troubleshooting the M2000 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun./svc_profile. When the version number of the Sybase is 15.6 Collecting the M2000 Version This section describes how to obtain the version information about the M2000.0. Context l The start_collector process and the start_collector_agent process provide the service of the log collector. the version number of the patch must be 15162 or 15679. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .sh # displayVersion ------------------------OMC Version-------------------------Product Name: iManagerM2000 Version: iManagerM2000V200R009ENGC00SPC805 Release Date: 06/09/09 .3.3 Collecting Fault Data Using the Log Information Collector This section describes how to collect fault data by using the M2000 log information collector.. To stop the service.2. run the /opt/OMC/bin/start_collector command and the /opt/OMC/ bin/start_collector_agent command. the version number of the patch must be 16548. Run the following commands: # cd /opt/OMC # .. S10) When the version number of the Sybase is 15. 13. ----End Example Change to /opt/OMC. which is the default installation path of the M2000 server software. Ltd. l l l Procedure Step 1 On the client. The service of the log collector is started upon the startup of the operating system. choose Start > Program > iManager M2000 Client > M2000 Log Information Collector . You can manually stop or start the service after the service is started.. To start the service. 13-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

The default port number is 10119. The default setting is iManager M2000 Client. select time and the information to be collected. Run the stop_collector -port old port number command to shut down the original port. as shown in Figure 13-1. log in to the server as user root. enter the following information: l l Server Address: IP address of the server. such as ftpuser. Ltd.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Port: FTP server port number. If you change this number. To change the server settings. l l Step 3 In Items Selection. FTP User Name: ftpuser. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 13 Troubleshooting the M2000 The Log Information Collector dialog box is displayed. you must also change the server settings. 13-7 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Figure 13-1 Log Information Collector dialog box NOTE The shortcut menu M2000 Log Information Collector can be displayed when you choose Start > Program if you configure the shortcut menu during the installation of client. run the start_collector -port new port number command.. Step 2 In the Server Information area. Trace files in server: collects the trace files of the login server. l l Trace files in Local Host: collects the trace files of the local client. Then. Password: password of the Solaris user.

In the M2000 single-server system. you need to decompress the package to a path with fewer sub-layers. NOTE l l Run the M2000 log information collector to collect fault information.. Step 4 In the Directory area. Check whether the start_collector process and the start_collector_agent process are running on the corresponding nodes. To check whether the log information collector is running. ----End Result By default. LMT trace file in server: collects the trace files of the LMT. S10) Core files in server: collects the core files of the login server. the collected information is saved as a package in the path M2000 client installation directory\client\diagnosis. select the save directory of the collected log information. Ltd. do not select Standby Collection. Ensure that both the start_collector process and the start_collector_agent process are running on the server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . you can run the ps -ef | grep start_collector | grep -v grep command. Step 5 Click Collect to start the collection. If an error is displayed during the decompression of the package. If the processes are not started. run the /opt/OMC/bin/start_collector command to start the start_collector process and run the /opt/ OMC/bin/start_collector_agent command to start the start_collector_agent process. Standby Collection: collects the logs of the active node and the standby node at the same time. 13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.13 Troubleshooting the M2000 l l l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1 About Solaris This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the Solaris. FAQs (Sun) 14. 14.2 About Sybase This section describes the FAQs and solutions related to the Sybase. 14. 14. 14-1 . S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 14 About This Chapter This chapter describes FAQs and solutions related to the M2000. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 About Server Software This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the M2000 server software.3 About TCP/IP Network This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the TCP/IP network.. Ltd.

By default.7 How to Check the Device Status of the M2000 Server This section describes the common commands used to check the device status of the M2000 server. 14. are equipped with an external tape drive. you can query the corresponding DST rules.6 How to View the Hardware Settings of the M2000 Server This section describes how to view the hardware settings of the M2000 server. Therefore. you are advised to use the factory-delivered default IP address of the disk array. Based on the time zone name. By default. you must know the name of the time zone. the internal tape drive of these server types is also /dev/rmt/0. M5000 and E4900. the external tape drive of these server types is /dev/rmt/0.8 Why Unable to Enter the Domain Console of Fire E4900 This section describes the solutions to the failure to enter the domain console of the Sun Fire E4900.1.d Folder of Solaris This section describes the definition of the files in the /etc/rc2.1. change the IP address according to the actual situation.1.1. 14. 14.1.10 How to Query the Time Zone Name This section describes how to query a time zone name. M4000.1.13 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Command Mode)? 14-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Changing IP addresses does not affect data read operations on the disk array.9 How to Modify the Port Number of the FTP Server? By default. such as Netra 240 and T5220.1. are equipped with an external tape drive. M4000. 14.1. Before querying the DST rules of a time zone. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 14. If the servers with an internal tape drive. 14.1. are equipped with an internal tape drive. Ltd. The types of servers without an external tape drive.1 About Solaris This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the Solaris. 14. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed.1.1.3 How to Check the Status of the Tape Drive This section describes how to check the status of the tape drive. 14. You need to change the port number of the FTP server according to the actual requirement. which tape drive should the backup data be save on? 14.d folder of the Solaris.11 How Do I Stop the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to stop the NTP service on the M2000 server.2 How to Log In the M2000 Server as the root User Through FTP This section describes how to log in as user root through the FTP.1. 14. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.4 How Do I Select the Tape Drive? The types of servers that are not equipped with an internal tape drive. such as V890. 14. the port number of the FTP server is 21. such as V890.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.1. M5000 and E4900.12 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S3200 Disk Array (Command Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the S3200 disk array in command mode.5 What are the files in the etc/rc2. 14. S10) 14.1 How Do I Log In to the M2000 Server as User root Through Telnet? This section describes how to log in as user root through Telnet. 14.

19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays This section describes how to configure the monitoring function for the S3000 series disk arrays.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.16 How to Handle the corrupt label . 14. To modify the IP address of the 6140 disk array. 14. 14. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.15 What Should I Do When the CD-ROM Drive Cannot Read the CD-ROM? This section describes why the CD-ROM drive cannot read the CD-ROM and provides the solution to this problem. change it according to the actual situation.wrong magic number Message? This section describes how to handle the corrupt label . 14.1 How Do I Log In to the M2000 Server as User root Through Telnet? This section describes how to log in as user root through Telnet.1. Question How do I log in as user root through Telnet? Answer If you fail to log in to the M2000 server as user root through Telnet. you can use the following method to obtain the rights.1. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.1. 14-3 .24 How Should I Start the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to start the SFTP service on the M2000 server.1.1.1.1.18 How to Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array This section describes how to configure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array. such as S3100 and S3200. You are advised to retain the factory default IP address of the disk array. 14..20 How Should I Uninstall the OceanStor Monitoring Software This section describes how to uninstall the OceanStor monitoring software. 14.wrong magic number message.17 What Should I Do When the Server Disk Space Is Insufficient? This section describes what to do when the server disk space is insufficient. Ltd. 14. the change of the IP address of the disk array does not affect data read operations on the disk array. If the IP address of the disk array needs to be changed. 14.22 How Should I Start the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to start the FTP service on the M2000 server. 14. Therefore.1.1. 14.21 How Should I Check the Running Status of the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to check the running status of the FTP service on the M2000 server.1.1. 14.14 How Do I Change the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Command Mode) This section describes how to modify the IP address of the 6140 disk array in command mode. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) This section describes how to change the IP address of the S2600 disk array in command mode. 14. the server must be installed with the 6140 management host software.1.23 How Should I Check the Running Status of the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to check the running status of the SFTP on the M2000 server.

Open /etc/ftpd/ftpusers. Check whether the Telnet service is started. Save the changes and then exit the file. remote system controller (RSC). the server identifies the tape drive upon startup.1. you can infer that the Telnet service is started successfully. export TERM # vi /etc/ftpd/ftpusers 3. you can infer that the Telnet service is not started. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and then exit the file.. Open /etc/default/login. Comment this line off by adding # at the beginning of the line. # svcadm enable telnet 14. such as Ultra 60.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. For an external tape drive. Log in to the server through the system controller (SC). Save. 4. 5. export TERM # vi /etc/default/login 3.3 How to Check the Status of the Tape Drive This section describes how to check the status of the tape drive. Comment this line off by adding # at the beginning of the line. Question How do I check the server tape drive status? Answer If a built-in tape drive is installed. Start the Telnet service. Log in as user root. l 6. 14. To install an external Sun tape drive. you must install it. 1. 4. # TERM=vt100. use the following method to obtain the permission. 2. or extended system controller facility (XSCF) as user root. Ltd. S10) 1.1. Perform 6 again. Find CONSOLE=/dev/console. Question How to log in as the root user through FTP? Answer If you fail to use the FTP service as user root.2 How to Log In the M2000 Server as the root User Through FTP This section describes how to log in as user root through the FTP. If the system output contains enabled. Find root. # TERM=vt100. perform the following steps: 14-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. # svcs -l telnet l If the system output contains disable.

such as V890. By default. If the servers with an internal tape drive. M4000. Load a tape and then check the status of the tape drive. # mt -f /dev/rmt/0n status The commands mentioned earlier can be briefly written as mt status. /dev/rmt/0. Power off the server and all the peripherals. 2. 4. for example. A tape is loaded and rewound. are equipped with an external tape drive. Configure the tape drive. 6. which tape drive should be used for storing the backup data? Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as Netra 240 and T5220. Table 14-1 Tape drive status No. M4000. 1 Output Certance Ultrium 3 tape drive: sense key(0x6)= Unit Attention residual= 0 retries= 0 file no= 0 block no= 0 2 /dev/rmt/0n: no tape loaded or drive offline /dev/rmt/0n: No such file or directory The tape is not inserted or not identified correctly.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. M5000 and E4900. 3 7. # drvconfig # tapes 8. Switch on the server and all the peripherals and start the system.4 How Do I Select the Tape Drive? The types of servers that are not equipped with an internal tape drive. The previous message indicates that the operating system does not detect the tape drive. or the inserted tape is a cleaning tape. The types of servers without an external tape drive. are equipped with an external tape drive. are equipped with an internal tape drive. # mt status 14. 3. If you use SCSI interface. which tape drive should the backup data be save on? Question If the system has multiple tape drives. Ltd. By default. Tape Drive Status The tape drive works normally. Run the following command to check the status of the tape drive: This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. connect the SCSI cable to the IN port on the tape drive. Set the ID switch on the tape drive to 4 or 5. Table 14-1 lists the output. that is. Log in as user root. the internal tape drive of these server types is also /dev/rmt/0. 14-5 . 5.1. M5000 and E4900. such as V890. the external tape drive of these server types is /dev/rmt/0. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 1..

S10) Answer 1. Question What do the files in the /etc/rc2.120. This tape drive matches the logical device /dev/rmt/1.2100. This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive.36000. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . # mt -f /dev/rmt/0 config "HP C7438A".3600. 3600.0. the type of the first tape drive is HP DAT-72G. # ls /dev/rmt 0 0b l 0bn 0c 0cb 0cbn 0cn 0h 0hb 0hbn 0hn 0l 0lb 0lbn 0ln 0m 0mb 0mbn 0mn 0n 0u 0ub 0ubn 0un If the command result shows only the logical device files that are preceded by 0.3600.4.5 What are the files in the etc/rc2.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. /dev/rmt/0.420. it indicates that only one tape drive is connected. # mt -f /dev/rmt/0 status If the command results are similar to the following information.3. 3. "CFGCERTANCEULTRIUM3".0x40. Determine the type of the second tape drive. If the command result also shows the logical device files that are preceded by 1. Check the status of the tape drive. This type of tape drive supports the 400 or 800 GB tape.2100. that is. the system displays the following information: /dev/rmt/0n: no tape loaded or drive offline 14.3. determine the type of each tape drive.. 3600. Identify the type of a tape drive. CFGHPDAT72 = 2.17400. Insert a tape into the tape drive and check whether the tape drive is operational. As indicated by the command result.0x44.0x18619.0x47.0x18659.120. it indicates that the tape drive is functioning well: HP DAT-72 tape drive: sense key(0x6)= Unit Attention file no= 0 block no= 0 residual= 0 retries= 0 If a tape is not inserted or not identified correctly. for example.0x42. it indicates that two tape drives are connected.0. Check for the number of tape drives in the system. # mt -f /dev/rmt/1 config "CERTANCEULTRIUM 3".1.d Folder of Solaris This section describes the definition of the files in the /etc/rc2.0x34.d folder of the Solaris mean? 14-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This type of tape drive supports the 36 or 72 GB tape.10800.0x44.0x3B.3600.2100. or the inserted tape is a cleaning tape. the type of the second tape drive is Certance Ultrium 3.d folder of the Solaris. Based on the number of tape drives obtain from 1.0x47. Ltd.0x47. CFGCERTANCEULTRIUM3 = 2. "HP DAT-72".0x47. This tape drive matches the logical device / dev/rmt/0. "Certance Ultrium 3". As indicated by the command result.4. "CFGHPDAT72". l 2. # mt -f Name of the logical device config Determine the type of the first tape drive.

d. and runs the user-defined auto-run scripts in phase 2. phase 1. When the Solaris stops. 14. Log in as user root. and rcS. Check different items by running the commands listed in Table 14-2.d: files starting with S and files starting with K. phase 2. the Solaris checks the memory in phase 0. For example. l The M2000 server installer creates three start files in the folder /etc/rc2. rc2.d map to phase 0. The Solaris completes different tasks in different phases. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Answer There are two types of files in /etc/rc2. 2. l When the Solaris starts. perform the following steps on the server: 1. and single user phase in the start process respectively.6 How to View the Hardware Settings of the M2000 Server This section describes how to view the hardware settings of the M2000 server.. Table 14-2 Checking the server configuration No.d/: l l l l S98sybase: for starting the Sybase S98TAO: for starting the TAO service S99IMAP: for starting the M2000 service program S99Collector: for starting the M2000 Diagnosis NOTE l l In the /etc directory. 14-7 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. phase 3. checks the hardware in phase 1. 1 2 3 4 Command # uname -aX # prtconf|grep Memory # psrinfo -v # prtdiag Output Server model and number of CPUs Memory size CPU status Check the status of the hardware. Question How to check the Sun server hardware configuration and memory size? Answer To view settings about the server hardware. the Solaris runs the files starting with K in the folder /etc/rc2. the rc0.d in alphabetical order.d in alphabetical order.d.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. rc3.1. rc1.d. the Solaris runs the files starting with S in the folder /etc/rc2. Ltd.d.

Check network port speed. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . # iostat -E # psrinfo -v # prtconf -D # prtdiag -v # ifconfig -a # kstat -p ce:0:ce0:ifspeed The network port name varies according to the configuration. Ltd.1. 1 Hard ware Confi gurati on Description Hardware configuration Check the disk status. Table 14-3 Commands for checking the device status N Item o . Check the device tree. Question Which commands are often used to check the device status? Answer Table 14-3 lists the commands often used for checking the device status. # more /etc/vfstab 14-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 How to Check the Device Status of the M2000 Server This section describes the common commands used to check the device status of the M2000 server. Locate faults and check network port messages.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Check the CPU status. S10) 14. 2 Netw ork conn ectio n and confi gurati on Check network configuration. Check the power supply. # eeprom local-mac-address? 3 File syste m and disk Check the file system. # netstat -r # snoop -d ce0 The network port name varies according to the configuration. Check route information. Check MAC settings for the IPMP technology..

run the raidctl command to view the mirroring status. Ltd. # vxdisk list All hard disks are online. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.notice /var/adm/messages. sd.SC /var/adm/messages.conf on the Blade 150: local7. and v is displayed ENABLED. Redirect logs from T3/SC/ Domain to Blade 150. # format Specify disk (enter its number): number of the disk partition to be checked format> p partition> p Check system error logs.DomainA Check messages in /var/adm. 14-9 .. and the STATE column is displayed ACTIVE. Check system error log settings. Check all Solaris patches. Check for the Solaris version and patch. Check the mirror status. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) N Item o .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # cd /etc/vx/bin # vxlicrep Check the license of Volume Manager. # vxprint -th -g ossdg The KSTATE column of pl. This step is applicable for only the server with a disk array. partit ionin g Description Hardware configuration Check disk partitioning.notice local0. This step is applicable for only the server with a disk array. # more /var/adm/messages | grep err Add the contents below to /etc/syslog. Check volume information. l When the M2000 uses the T5220 server. 4 Volu me and mirro r Check volume information.t3 /var/adm/messages. # metastat NOTE l This command is applicable for only the servers that use SUN DiskSuite (SDS) or Solaris Volume Manager (SVM) for encapsulating root disks. Check volume information. # uname -a # showrev -p # vxdg list This step is applicable for only the server with a disk array.notice local1.

# gtar cvf /dev/rmt/0n file name Restore files from the tape to the disk. that is. This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. Configure the tape drive. # mt stat # mt rewind # mt fsr # mt fsr 2 # mt bsr 2 This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. that is. / dev/rmt/0. for example. / dev/rmt/0.. / dev/rmt/0. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. for example. # ufsdump 0ucf /dev/rmt/0n backup folder For example: # ufsdump 0ucf /dev/rmt/0n backuprestore # ufsdump 0ucf /dev/rmt/0n /dev/vx/rdsk/rootvol Restore operating system from tape. # gtar tf /dev/rmt/0 Copy files to the tape.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. Check the tape content. S10) N Item o . Back up the Solaris to the tape. # gtar xvPfM /dev/rmt/0 This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. 6 CD drive r Configure the CD-ROM. that is. Rewind the tape. / dev/rmt/0. that is. Forward two steps. Check the Solaris system backup. that is. / dev/rmt/0. # ufsrestore -t /dev/rmt/0n This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. for example. for example. / dev/rmt/0. that is. Backward two steps. This part takes the the logical device of the tape drive. # ufsdump rvf /dev/rmt/0n # drvconfig # tapes # mount -F hsfs -o ro /dev/rdsk/c0t6d0s0 /cdrom 14-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5 Tape drive Description Hardware configuration Check the tape drive status. Forward one step. for example. for example.

# volcheck # mount -F pcfs /dev/diskette/floppy # /opt/SUNWexplo/bin/explorer Obtain the output log in the following path: /opt/SUNWexplo/output For example: explorer. Run the connections command to view the connection results.15.tar.08. To enter the domain console. Locate the fault and export the log.83bbbcad. the system displays the message that the system is busy.-------------1 Localhost 00:01 Aug 26 17:13 Platform Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.osssvr-2005.119.15. 14-11 .150 Idle Time --------00:01 00:01 Connected On -------------Aug 26 17:13 Aug 30 13:51 Aug 30 15:10 Connected To -------------Platform Domain A Platform osssvr-1-sc0:SC> disconnect 8 osssvr-1-sc0:SC> connections ID Hostname Idle Time Connected On Connected To --.83bbbcad. Enter the console. 2.1. 4. Question When you attempt to enter the domain console. the system displays the message that the system is busy. Run the disconnect id command to disconnect the console. Enter the platform shell. Answer The domain console allows for only one connection.0.gz 8 14.08. Ltd. 3.osssvr-2005.05 explorer. If a user is already connected to the domain console.02.02. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) N Item o .-------------.--------. perform the following steps: 1.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.. 7 Flopp y disk Ether net port log Description Hardware configuration Configure the floppy disk.----------------------------. Example osssvr-1-sc0:SC> connections ID --1 8 11 Hostname ----------------------------Localhost Localhost 10.05.8 Why Unable to Enter the Domain Console of Fire E4900 This section describes the solutions to the failure to enter the domain console of the Sun Fire E4900.

2. Log in to the Solaris server as user root. To change the port number of the FTP server. On the PC. Run the following command to modify the /etc/services file: # vi /etc/services Identify the following line. Obtain the information on the country code of the time zone. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Ltd. # svcadm disable /omc/ftp:default # svcadm enable /omc/ftp:default 5. Run the following command to connect to the server through FTP.1. S10) Aug 30 15:10 Platform osssvr-1-sc0:SC> 14. 6.10 How to Query the Time Zone Name This section describes how to query a time zone name.119. you must know the name of the time zone. Based on the time zone name.14 FAQs (Sun) 11 10. you can query the corresponding DST rules.150 - M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 2.0. Question How to Change the Port Number of the FTP Server? Answer This part takes the change of the port number from 21 to 1234 as an example. change 21 to 1234. perform the following steps: 1.9 How to Modify the Port Number of the FTP Server? By default. perform the following steps: 1. You need to change the port number of the FTP server according to the actual requirement.tab A part of the content to be obtained from the file is as follows: 14-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. and then run the wq! command to save and exit the vi editor: ftp 21/tcp 4. Log in to the server as user root. Run the following command to make the modification to take effect. the port number of the FTP server is 21. Question How to query the name of a time zone? Answer To query the name of a time zone. # more /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo/tab/country. ftp> open IP address of the server 1234 Type the user name and password of user root to log in to the server. 14. Before querying the DST rules of a time zone.1. switch to the command mode and run the ftp command..

The north latitude and the east longitude are considered to be positive. and CN respectively. SC. RN.. DF. 14 FAQs (Sun) Brazil Chile China Based on the previous information. # more /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo/tab/zone_sun.. RS) BR -2027-05437 America/Campo_Grande Mato Grosso do Sul BR -1535-05605 America/Cuiaba Mato Grosso BR -0846-06354 America/Porto_Velho W Para. Based on country codes. Rondonia BR +0249-06040 America/Boa_Vista Roraima BR -0308-06001 America/Manaus Brazil/West E Amazonas BR -0640-06952 America/Eirunepe W Amazonas BR -0958-06748 America/Rio_Branco Brazil/Acre Acre CL -3327-07040 America/Santiago Chile/Continental most locations CL -2709-10926 Pacific/Easter Chile/EasterIsland Easter Island & Sala y Gomez CN +3114+12128 Asia/Shanghai PRC ... Chile. Chile. .tab l The format of the zone_sun. E Para BR -0343-03830 America/Fortaleza NE Brazil (MA. l A part of the content to be obtained from the file is as follows: .. you can confirm that the country codes of Brazil. and China are listed in Table 14-4. BR CL CN . The south latitude and the west longitude are considered to be negative. MG. The time zone names of Brazil. Table 14-4 Example of the matching table between countries and time zone names Coun try Time Zone Name America/ Noronha America/Belem America/ Fortaleza America/Recife America/ Araguaina America/Maceio Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Remarks Brazil/ DeNoronha Atlantic islands Amapa.tab file is country code + longitude and latitude + time zone name + comments. Ltd. RN.. PI.. PR. SP. PI. obtain the information on time zone names. E Para NE Brazil (MA.. CE. PB) BR -0803-03454 America/Recife Pernambuco BR -0712-04812 America/Araguaina Tocantins BR -0940-03543 America/Maceio Alagoas. 3. and China are BR.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. CE. S10) . Sergipe 14-13 Brazil Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PB) Pernambuco Tocantins Alagoas. CL. #country#code coordinates TZ comments BR -0351-03225 America/Noronha Brazil/DeNoronha Atlantic islands BR -0127-04829 America/Belem Amapa. Sergipe BR -1259-03831 America/Bahia Bahia BR -2332-04637 America/Sao_Paulo Brazil/East S & SE Brazil (GO. ES.. RJ.

MET. MG..11 How Do I Stop the NTP Service on the M2000 Server This section describes how to stop the NTP service on the M2000 server. All the European countries are geographically located in the east Europe. 14. Rondonia Roraima E Amazonas W Amazonas Acre Most locations Easter Island & Sala y Gomez - Chile China PRC NOTE The time zone names of Europe are special. and west Europe. SP. middle Europe. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . and WET respectively. Procedure Step 1 Run the following command to check whether the NTP service is running: # svcs svc:/network/ntp:default STATE online STIME FMRI 16:41:28 svc:/network/ntp:default 14-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SC.1. The corresponding time zone names of the east Europe. S10) Coun try Time Zone Name America/Bahia America/ Sao_Paulo America/ Campo_Grande America/Cuiaba America/ Porto_Velho America/ Boa_Vista America/Manaus America/ Eirunepe America/ Rio_Branco America/ Santiago Pacific/Easter Brazil/East Brazil/West Brazil/Acre Chile/ Continental Chile/ EasterIsland - Remarks Bahia S & SE Brazil (GO.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. RJ. PR. Ltd. middle Europe. and west Europe are EET. Prerequisite You have logged in to the server as user root. RS) Mato Grosso do Sul Mato Grosso W Para. ES. DF.

Ltd.12 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S3200 Disk Array (Command Mode) This section describes how to change the IP address of the S3200 disk array in command mode. If the IP address of a disk array needs to be changed. ----End 14. Ethernet port nxge3 is used to connect the server and a disk array. run the following command to stop it: # svcadm disable svc:/network/ntp:default NOTE You need to run this command only once. After you run this command. Then. NOTE Stopping the NTP service takes about one minute. change the IP address according to the actual situation. Step 3 Run the following command to check whether the NTP service is stopped: # svcs svc:/network/ntp:default STATE disabled STIME FMRI 16:41:28 svc:/network/ntp:default In the system output. Background l Before changing IP addresses. you need to change the IP address of the corresponding Ethernet port nxge3 to ensure that both changed IP addresses are on the same network segment. Thus. Prerequisites l l You have logged in to the server as user root. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. If you have changed the IP address of the disk array on a different segment. 14-15 . the NTP service does not automatically start whenever the system is restarted. if STATE is disabled. If the M4000/M5000 server is used. Replace it with the actual IP address. you can infer that the NTP service is running. if STATE is online. Changing IP addresses does not affect data read operations on the disk array. Therefore. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) In the system output.. Step 2 If the NTP service is running. you can infer that the NTP service is stopped. The IP address mentioned here is only an example. the IP address of Ethernet port nxge3 and the IP address of the disk array must be on the same network segment. l l l Procedure This takes the following change as an example to describe how to change the IP address of the disk array. determine whether to reconfigure IP addresses based on the actual situation. you must familiarize yourself with the default IP address planning at delivery.1. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers. The server communicates properly with the S3200 disk array. you are advised to use the factory-delivered default IP address of the disk array.

40 If the system displays the following information. Check whether the temporary subnet is configured properly.40) 56(84) bytes of data.255.10.8.10.168.168.0.8. # ifconfig bge0:1 plumb # ifconfig bge0:1 192. New gateway for controller A is 0.10.168.326 ms 3.10. Change the IP address of controller B. New IP address of controller A is 10.39. run the following command: # ping 10.10.10. then the temporary subnet is configured properly: PING 10.8. 4.10. Change the IP address of controller A.0 up 2." In this case.39 -c "set controller [b] ethernetPort [1] ipAddress= 10. Check whether the new IP address of controller B is set successfully.10.8.255.255.40 (192. New gateway for controller B is 0.8.10.40 l After the change: IP address of controller A: 10. Set the temporary subnet of the server again to enable the server to access the controllers.0.168. IP address of controller A is 192.10.0.0. then the temporary subnet is configured properly: PING 192." After the command is successfully executed.100 netmask 255.255.10.255. IP address of controller B is 10.10.8.40 1.40.10.10. # ping New IP address of controller B In this case.10.10.40 (10.100 netmask 255.0. # ifconfig bge0:1 plumb # ifconfig bge0:1 192.168.168.0.8.168.168.255.39. S10) Before the change: IP address of controller A: 192.10. Run the following command: 14-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.255.255.326 ms 6. Ltd.40: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0." In this case.0.10.40: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0. Run the following command: # SMcli 192. and New subnet mask of Controller B is 255. New IP address of controller B is 10.10. # ping 192.8.40 If the system displays the following information.40) 56(84) bytes of data.0 up 5.0.168. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .39 IP address of controller B: 192.0. 64 bytes from 192. # SMcli IP address of controller A -c "set controller [b] ethernetPort [1] ipAddress= New IP address of controller B gatewayIPAddress=New gateway of controller B subnetMask=New subnet mask of controller B.40.10.40 gatewayIPAddress=0. # SMcli IP address of controller B -c "set controller [a] ethernetPort [1] ipAddress= New IP address of controller A gatewayIPAddress=New gateway of controller A subnetMask=New subnet mask of controller A.0 subnetMask=255.10.40.0.255. and New subnet mask of Controller B is 255.8..255.168. Set the temporary subnet of the server to enable the server to access the controllers.8.39 IP address of controller B: 10. 64 bytes from 10.14 FAQs (Sun) l M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.0.10. the IP address of controller B is 10.

10.10.10. The communication between the server and the two management Ethernet ports on the S2600 disk array is normal. The disk array is connected to the server directly through optical fibers.39: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0. NOTE To change the disk array IP address recorded in the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file.255.10. you need not stop the M2000 services and the database services.10. # vi /etc/hosts After the modification.10. 14-17 .10.10.1.. After the modification.13 How Do I Change the IP Address of the S2600 Disk Array (Command Mode)? This section describes how to change the IP address of the S2600 disk array in command mode. you need not perform any modification.39) 56(84) bytes of data. the IP address of controller A is 10. the change of the IP address of the disk array does not affect data read operations on the disk array.10. l 14. you need not restart the server either.39 gatewayIPAddress=0. # ping New IP address of controller A In this case.326 ms 8. (Optional) Modify the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file.10. Therefore. (1) Log in to server as user root. 64 bytes from 10. Press Esc and then run the :q command to exit. replace the existing IP address with the new one. press Esc and then run the :wq! command to save the modification and exit.10.0. If the file records the new IP address of the disk array.255. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) # SMcli 10.0 subnetMask=255. then the temporary subnet is configured properly: PING 10. Prerequisites l l You have logged in to the server as user root.0. (3) Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. You are advised to retain the factory default IP address of the disk array.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. change it according to the actual situation.0.39 If the system displays the following information. run the following command: # ping 10. 7.39 (10.10.10." After the command is successfully executed.39.40 -c "set controller [a] ethernetPort [1] ipAddress= 10. Check whether the new IP address of controller A is set successfully. (2) Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/hosts file and to replace the existing IP address of the disk array with a new one. After the modification. # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the file records the existing IP address of the disk array. press Esc and then run the :wq command to save the modification and exit.10. Ltd. If the IP address of the disk array needs to be changed. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

This operation will change your controller's IP configuration.21 -s 255. Replace it with the actual IP address. you must familiarize yourself with the default IP address planning at delivery. if you change the IP of the peer controller.0 255.15. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . If you change the IP address of the disk array on different network segments. S10) Contexts l Each S2600 disk array has an active controller and a standby controller.15. determine whether to reset the IP address according to the actual situation. However. Run the following command to log in to controller A of the S2600 disk array in ssh mode: # ssh admin@IP address of controller A CAUTION The initial user name and password of the administrator are admin and 123456.255.15.1 MAC Address 4. Ltd.1 When the system displays the following prompt. you will log out after you set the new IP.39 00:18:82:e2:01:57 B 10.0 Gateway 192. To ensure the system security. Run the following command to change the IP address of controller B: OceanStor: admin> chgctrlip -c b -a new IP address of controller B -s subnet mask -g gateway For example. Each controller has one management Ethernet port. Do you want to continue? y or n: y 3. type y. if you want to ch ange the IP of the controller you logged in.1 10. you needn't log out.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.255.71. continue to change the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port on the corresponding server to ensure that the two changed IP addresses are on the same network segment. Then. The IP address mentioned here is only an example.71.0 -g 10.255.71. run the following command: OceanStor: admin> chgctrlip -c b -a 10. to change the IP address of the management Ethernet port on controller B to 10.8.168.168. Before changing the IP address of the disk array.255. 5. Run the following command to exit from controller A: OceanStor: admin> exit Run the following command to log in to controller B of the S2600 disk array in ssh mode: # ssh admin@new IP address of controller B 14-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.15. you need to change the password after the initial login.21 00:18:82:e2:00:fb Controller Subnet Mask 255.15.21. Run the following command to check whether the changed IP address is correct: OceanStor: admin> showctrlip IP Address A 192.71.255.255.71. respectively.8.. l l l Procedure 1.

71.1 MAC Address 8.255. you need to change the password after the initial login. if you change the IP of the peer controller.15. Perform the following steps on the server to set the temporary subnet. respectively.255.71.71.20 -s 255.255. telnet IP address of the M2000 server Enter the user name and password of user root to log in to the server. (2) Check whether the server can communicate with controller A of the 6140 disk array.71.255.0 255. Do you want to continue? y or n: y 7. Run the following command to exit from controller B: OceanStor: admin> exit 14. to change the IP address of the management Ethernet port on controller A to 10. run the following command: OceanStor: admin> chgctrlip -c a -a 10.15.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.255. type y. To ensure the system security. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 14-19 . This operation will change your controller's IP configuration.0 Gateway 10.14 How Do I Change the IP Address of the 6140 Disk Array (Command Mode) This section describes how to modify the IP address of the 6140 disk array in command mode.20 00:18:82:e2:01:57 B 10.71.15.255.1. Prerequisite You have ensure that the network connection between the server and the 6140 disk array is normal. (1) Log in to the server as user root.71. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) CAUTION The initial user name and password of the administrator are admin and 123456.71. Ltd. Run the following command to check whether the changed IP address is correct: OceanStor: admin> showctrlip IP Address A 10. you will log out after you set the new IP. However.21 00:18:82:e2:00:fb Controller Subnet Mask 255.15. you needn't log out. Procedure 1.15.1 When the system displays the following prompt. To modify the IP address of the 6140 disk array. the server must be installed with the 6140 management host software.. if you want to ch ange the IP of the controller you logged in.15. 6.15.0 -g 10. Run the following command to change the IP address of controller A: OceanStor: admin> chgctrlip -c a -a IP address of controller A -s subnet mask -g gateway For example.20.1 10.

0 netmask ffffff00 broadcast 0.255.39 is alive after you run the above command. use bge0:1 as the name of the network port. X is a number starting from 1.LOOPBACK.0. Ltd.LOOPBACK.8. (4) When setting the temporary subnet. the default IP address 192.8. (3) Determine the name of the network port used to set the temporary subnet. you can use bge0:1 as the name of the network port to set the temporary subnet. then the IP address of the server is on the same network segment as the IP address of controller A. # ifconfig bge0:1 plumb # ifconfig bge0:1 192. the default IP address 192.8. # ifconfig -a lo0: flags=2001000849<UP.IPv4> mtu 1500 index 5 inet 0.168. Otherwise.0. S10) If the server requires to communicate with the 6140 disk array.39 If the system output contains 192.8.8.RUNNING.LOOPBACK. choose bge0 as the communication network port.8.8.5 to set the temporary subnet to ensure that the two IP addresses are on the same network segment. When the X following bge0: is null.0.3 through 1.168.168.RUNNING. you need to perform 1.IPv4> mtu 1500 index 3 inet 0. ensure that the IP address of the server is on the same network segment as the IP address of controller A.MULTICAST.100 netmask 255.IPv4. Proceed with 3. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A.0.0. When setting the temporary subnet.IPv4> mtu 1500 index 2 inet 192.MULTICAST. The displayed network port name cannot be used for setting the temporary subnet.IPv4> mtu 1500 index 4 inet 0.0 up 14-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.39 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example.RUNNING.0 netmask 0 ether 0:3:ba:bb:bc:b0 When two or multiple IP addresses are bound to the network port.0.MULTICAST. In the following commands.0 netmask 0 ether 0:3:ba:bb:bc:ae nxge0: flags=1000842<UP. In the following commands.RUNNING. Run the following command to check the name of the network port corresponding to the last IP address bound to this network port. the name of the network port is displayed as bge0:X after you run the previous command.0. # ping 192.RUNNING.255 ether 0:3:ba:bb:bc:ad bge0: flags=1000842<UP.0. the X following bge0: is null.0. In this example. Otherwise.168. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the server cannot have access to the disk array..0.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.11 netmask ffffff00 broadcast 192.168. you need to ensure that the IP address of the network port is on the same network segment as the IP address of controller A on the disk array.0 ether 0:3:ba:bb:bc:af nxge3: flags=1000842<UP.LOOPBACK. CAUTION The IP address of the server must be on the same network segment as the IP address of controller A.MULTICAST.1 netmask ff000000 bge0: flags=1000843<UP.255.VIRTUAL> mtu 8232 index 1 inet 127.168.MULTICAST. Thus.LOOPBACK.39 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example.168. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A.

Ltd. For details about how to set properties of a serial port. click OK.8. (5) Choose the PC serial port that connects to the connector. If you fail to set a temporary subnet. a physical connection between the PC and the 6140 disk array is set up. (1) Connect the six-pinned mini DIN connector of the basic cable to the serial port connector of the controller. perform the following steps to check whether the IP address of the controller A on the 6140 disk array is correct: NOTE Perform the same procedure to check the IP address of controller B on the 6140 disk array.8. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) (5) Check the setting of the temporary subnet. Extended cables of the standard 9-pinned serial port connector are attached to both ends. (2) Connect the nine-pinned serial extended cable from the nine-pinned connector of the basic cable to the serial port connector of the PC. Then.39 If the system output contains 192. (4) In the Connection Description dialog box. 14-21 . enter the name of the new connection. (3) Choose Start > Programs (P) > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal on the PC..39 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example. Set baud rate: press <space> within 5 seconds Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Two serial port cables are attached to the pallet of each controller. COM1. l l One end is the six-pinned mini DIN connector. The serial port responds the request to synchronize the baud rate with the terminal. and the other end is the basic cable of the standard 9-pinned serial port connector. In the following commands. refer to Table 14-5. for example. 2. (7) Press Break.168.168. # ping 192.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Otherwise.8. then the setting is correct. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A. (6) Set the properties of the serial port. Table 14-5 Setting the properties of the serial port Attribute Bit rate Data bit Parity check Stop bit Streaming control Attribute Value 38400 8 none 1 none Thus.39 is alive. perform 2 to check whether the IP address of the controller A on the 6140 disk array is correct and to set the temporary subnet again. the default IP address 192.168.

Enter Password to access Service Interface (60 sec timeout): . enter Q to exit. 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .no.no. and then press Enter. the 6140 disk array is not registered. press Ctrl and Break at the same time to generate the Break character on certain terminal. and then send the essential Break character to the controller. Service Interface Main Menu ============================== 1) Display IP Configuration 2) Change IP Configuration 3) Reset Storage Array (SYMbol) Password Q) Quit Menu Enter Selection: (15) Perform 1.> (11) Enter the password kra16wen. Perform the following steps on the server to modify the IP address of the 6140 disk array. The serial port defines the baud rate for setup. If the system returns the similar message. Service Interface Main Menu ============================== 1) Display IP Configuration 2) Change IP Configuration 3) Reset Storage Array (SYMbol) Password Q) Quit Menu Enter Selection: (13) If the following message is displayed. 4. (8) Press the spacebar within five seconds. For instance.name is the default name of the registered 6140 disk array. (14) If the following message is displayed. then the 6140 disk is registered. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs login -h host name of the server -u root When the system displays Type your password:.name In the system output.14 FAQs (Sun) NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs list storage-system Array: array. enter the password of user root. The serial port prompts you to enter the password. (12) If the following message is displayed. Ltd. Baud rate set to 38400 (9) Press Break. (1) Run the following command to check whether the 6140 disk array is registered. S10) The serial ports on the disk array request that the Break character be accepted. The serial port responds with the following messages: Press within 5 seconds: <S> for Service Interface. Otherwise.5 by using the IP address of controller A to reset a temporary subnet.. Run the following command on the server to log in to the management host software as user root. enter 1. <BREAK> for baud rate (10) Press S.4 and 1. array. enter 1. 14-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set the corresponding escape sequence for the terminal. Select Ethernet Port ============================== 1) Ethernet Port: 0 2) Ethernet Port: 1 Q) Quit Enter Selection: 1 The configuration of the IP address for the selected Ethernet port is displayed.

In this part.39 registeredarray (3) Modify the IP address of controller A on the 6140 disk array. the server cannot have access to the disk array.70. Otherwise. 10. then the setting is correct.39 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example.12. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs modify -a Name of the 6140 disk array (ST6140-1) -g IP address of the gateway -i IP address of controller A on the 6140 disk array -m subnet mask controller A (4) Set the temporary subnet again to make the IP address of the server be on the same network segment as the IP address of controller A.12 is alive.12 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example. 14-23 .4 to set the temporary subnet again.12. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A.70.0 up (5) Check the setting of the temporary subnet.12 registeredarray NOTE In the following commands.3.70. (6) Log in to the management host software as user root. Ltd. perform 4. CAUTION The IP address of the server must be on the same network segment as the modified IP address of controller A. the operation on the 6140 disk array whose disk array name is ST6140-1 is taken as an example. # ping 10. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) (2) If the 6140 disk array is not registered..100 netmask 255.12. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs add -i 192. In the following commands. the default IP address 192.12. Replace the parameters in the commands with the actual parameters when modifying the IP addresses of other 6140 disk arrays. # ifconfig ce0:1 plumb # ifconfig ce0:1 10.70.168. run the following command to register the disk array to the management host software through controller A. enter the password of user root.0.8. Otherwise.8. Replace the parameters in the commands with the actual parameters when modifying the IP addresses of other 6140 disk arrays.12 of the 6140 disk array is taken as an example. In this part. (8) Modify the IP address of controller B. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs login -h host name of the server -u root When the system displays Type your password:.12 is the IP address of controller A. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the operation on the 6140 disk array whose disk array name is ST6140-1 is taken as an example. In the following commands.12.255. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A.70.70. This address must be the same as that set in 4.168.12.12 If the system output contains 10. the modified IP address 10. In the following commands. # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs add -i 10.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.12. the modified IP address 10. Replace it with the actual IP address of controller A.70. (7) Register the disk array to the management host software through controller A.

(1) Log in to server as user root. (3) Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. l 14. After the command df -k is executed. Cause The system cannot identify the partitioning of the CD-ROM drive.. press Esc and then run the :wq command to save the modification and exit. Log in to the server as user root.1.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.d/volmgt start 3. # vi /etc/inet/ipnodes l If the file records the existing IP address of the disk array. you need not stop the M2000 services and the database services. If the file records the new IP address of the disk array. no contents exist in the /cdrom directory. Run the following command to check whether the CD-ROM drive can read the CD-ROM.15 What Should I Do When the CD-ROM Drive Cannot Read the CD-ROM? This section describes why the CD-ROM drive cannot read the CD-ROM and provides the solution to this problem. Question After the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive. you need not perform any modification. # df -k 14-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. # vi /etc/hosts After the modification. the value of the capacity column corresponding to the /cdrom directory is not 100%. Solution To rectify the fault. replace the existing IP address with the new one. (Optional) Modify the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file.d/volmgt stop # /etc/init. S10) # /opt/SUNWsesscs/cli/bin/sscs modify -a Name of the 6140 disk array (ST6140-1) -g IP address of the gateway -i IP address of controller B on the 6140 disk array -m subnet mask controller B 5. In the system output. After the modification. (2) Perform the following operations on the server to modify the /etc/hosts file and to replace the existing IP address of the disk array with a new one. Press Esc and then run the :q command to exit. you need not restart the server either. 2. After the modification. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . it fails to be read. perform the following steps: 1. press Esc and then run the :wq! command to save the modification and exit. NOTE To change the disk array IP address recorded in the /etc/hosts file and the /etc/inet/ipnodes file. Ltd. Run the following commands to identify the partitioning of the CD-ROM drive again: # /etc/init.

2 to label the other logical partitions. the system displays the format> prompt. Question When the format command is executed.1 and 4. Solution Label the disks. Run the following command to refresh the system hardware. Enter the sequence number corresponding to the logical partition on the disk array. continue? (3) After running the following command.1. if the value of the capacity column corresponding to the /cdrom directory is 100%. format> disk 5. 1. 2. enter y at the following prompt: Ready to label disk. Perform the following operations to label logic disk partitions: (1) After you run the format command. 3.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Disk not labeled. 4. After you run the label command. the system output contains the corrupt label . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This problem occurs in newly mounted disk arrays.16 How to Handle the corrupt label . The cause is lack of disk labels. Label it now? l If the logical partitions are already labeled. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. 14-25 . you can infer that the CD-ROM drive can read the CD-ROM now.1. repeat 4.wrong magic number message. Enter y. # devfsadm -C Run the following command to check the disk information.wrong magic number message. # format The system output contains the corrupt label . Ltd. l If the logical partitions are not labeled.wrong magic number message.. Exit format. the system displays the following information. Specify disk (enter its number):2 (2) Label the logical disk partitions. 14. Log in to the server as user root. format> q 14. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) In the system output. the system displays the following information. Otherwise. In this example.17 What Should I Do When the Server Disk Space Is Insufficient? This section describes what to do when the server disk space is insufficient.wrong magic number Message? This section describes how to handle the corrupt label . the sequence number is 2.

perform as follows: 1. Therefore. S10) Question You can use any of the following methods to check the server disk space: l View the message output area at the bottom of the M2000 client.2.. 14-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Run the df -k command to check the disk partition usage. Ltd. View the disk partition usage in the Hard Disk Monitoring window on the M2000 client. ftp> get du. If the system notifies you of the high disk space usage of the root partition / or /opt. In this case. 3. (6) Quit the ftp> state. the system switches to the ftp> state. do not delete or transfer any files. the system fails to identify this filepath. 2. If the system notifies you of the high disk space usage of the /export/home partition. do not save files on the desktop. The filepath on the Windows desktop contains space characters. l l How do I do when the server disk space is insufficient? Solution l If the system notifies you of the high disk space usage of the partition where the /data directory is located.4 Clearing the Disk Space of the M2000 Server to troubleshoot. ftp> asc (5) Transfer the collection results. Run the following command to collect related information: # du -akd / | sort -nr > /tmp/du. ftp> lcd save path of the collected information on the PC ftp> cd /tmp (4) Set the transfer mode to ASCII. ftp IP address of the server (2) Enter the user name and password of user root. (3) Run the following commands to set the file paths on both the PC and the server: l l CAUTION If the filepath contains a space. you need to use the DBC quotation marks to enclose the filepath. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Otherwise.out Transfer the information from the server to the client. If the disk partition usage reaches the threshold. the file cannot be uploaded or downloaded. and accordingly. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. (1) Switch to the command mode on the PC and run the ftp command. see 9.out After the uploading is complete. you need to clear the disk space immediately. Log in to the server as user root.

8. For security considerations. 14.241. you can infer that no Trap IP address is set. Run the following command to check whether the disk array is set with a Trap IP address: OceanStor: admin> showtrapip Index S26000 l IP Address 192.10. perform 3 to set a Trap IP address. Question How should I configure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array? Answer Perform the following operations to configure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array: 1. check whether the configurations in the system output are correct. you are advised to change the password after you log in to the system for the first time.. l 3. If the system output is similar to the previous information. you need to set only one Trap IP address.10. respectively. 14-27 . Run the following command to set a Trap IP address of the disk array: For example. OceanStor:admin> addtrapip -a 192.241 -v 2 -p 162 NOTE In the single-server system.1. Repeat 3 if another Trap IP addresses need to set.168.10. perform 4 to modify the configurations. Run the following command to change the Trap IP address of the disk array: For example. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) ftp> bye 4. change the Trap IP address of the disk array to 10. # ssh admin@IP address of controller A CAUTION The initial name and password of the administrator user is admin and 123456. Send the collection results to Huawei technical support engineers.168.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 4. OceanStor:admin> chgtrapip -i S26000 -a 10.241 Port ID 162 Version 2 If there is no system output.10.8. In this case.8. If they are incorrect. Ltd.18 How to Configuring the Monitoring Function of the S2600 Disk Array This section describes how to configure the monitoring function of the S2600 disk array.10 Run the following command to check whether the Trap IP address is successfully changed: OceanStor:admin> showtrapip Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set the Trap IP address of the disk array to 192.168. 2.10. Log in to controller A of the S2600 disk array in SSH mode.

The time ranges from 1970-01-01 00:00:00 to 2069-12-31 23:59:00.xml"/> <instance name = "vcs" run = "true" filepath = "vcs_config.xml file: # vi user.10. press Esc and run the :wq command to save the modification and quit. Then. 11. change the status of san to true.10. do not modify the file. Ltd. 9. Add the IP address of the disk array controller to the SANtricty_config. OceanStor: admin> chgsystime -t 2008-12-17/11:05:00 NOTE l l The system time of the disk array must be the same as that of the connected M2000 server.xml <config> <src name iorstring <src name iorstring </config> = = = = "trapsender" ip = "IP address of controller A" port = "23001" ""/> "trapsender" ip = "IP address of controller B" port = "23001" ""/> If the IP address of the controller is incorrect in the file. Run the following command to log out of controller A: OceanStor: admin> exit Log in to the M2000 server as user root.xml"/> <loginfo name = "debug" run = "false" filepath = "HDMonitor.sh 14-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. # .14 FAQs (Sun) Index S26000 IP Address 10.71. 7.xml file. Run the following commands to restart the UdpDispatchService service: NOTE You need to restart the UdpDispatchService service on only active server. Then. Run the following command to change the system time of the disk array: For example. 6. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Press Esc and run the :q command to quit.15. press Esc and run the :wq command to save the modification and quit.. # cd /opt/OMC/resourcemonitor # vi SANtricty_config.31 >/dev/null 2>&1 root 20762 26443 0 16:54:48 pts/4 0:00 grep ResourceMonitor # kill -9 10256 NOTE In the previous command. Run the following commands to restart the ResourceMonitor process: # ps -ef | grep "ResourceMonitor" root 10256 884 0 10:57:58 ? 0:55 /opt/OMC/bin/ResourceMonitor cmd start -ipaddr 10. S10) 5.10 Port ID 162 Version 2 M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Otherwise. Run the following command to view the user. The command chgsystime is used to change the system time.xml <snmp name = "trap"> <instance name = "san" run = "true" filepath = "SANtricty_config. 8. replace the existing IP address with a new IP address. replace the ResourceMonitor process ID 10256 with the actual value.debug"/> </snmp> l If the status of san in the file is true. change the system time to 2008-12-17/11:05:00. l 10.

07. Question How should I configure the monitoring function for the S3000 series disk arrays? Answer 1.1. # cd /opt/SMIADIR Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.zip (6) Decompress the OceanStor installation package.07.19.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.huawei. (3) Upload the decompressed file to the /opt directory in binary mode. The path for downloading the OceanStor is Software Download > Version Software > Outsourcing Product Line > IT Integrated Product > OceanStor. Log in to the server that is to be installed with the OceanStor as user root by using the WinaXe software.19 How Should I Configure the Monitoring Function for the S3000 Series Disk Arrays This section describes how to configure the monitoring function for the S3000 series disk arrays.04. 2. the OceanStor is installed on the M2000 server.bin. (1) Log in to http://support.07. such as S3100 and S3200. ftp server IP address ftp> lcd path of the file on the PC ftp> cd /opt ftp> bin ftp> put /opt/SMIA-SOL-09.bin ftp> bye (4) Create a directory for saving the OceanStor installation package. # cd /opt # mkdir SMIADIR (5) Move the OceanStor installation package to the /opt/SMIADIR directory. # mv /opt/SMIA-SOL-09. Ltd. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) # svc_adm -cmd restartsvc UdpDispatchService 14. NOTE l l The version of the OceanStor is OceanStor S3100 S3200 S6800 Storage Manager for Solaris V200R002C01B024.19.04.19.19.bin /opt/SMIADIR/SMIASOL-09. If the M2000 is not configured with the management console and port 162 on the M2000 server is not occupied.07. the OceanStor is installed on the management console.com to download the OceanStor to the PC..04.bin file in the OceanStor installation package.04. 14-29 . Install the OceanStor. (2) Decompress the SMIA-SOL-09. NOTE l l If the M2000 is configured with the management console.

type y: Do you want to continue with the installation of <SMclient> [y.pkg SMutil 3.zip (7) Change the folder name. (7) Choose Edit > Configure Alerts.19. S10) # unzip SMIA-SOL-09. SMclient.04.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. select Manual. Type the IP addresses of the two controllers of the disk array in First Controller and Second Controller./SMclient (2) In the Select Addition Method dialog box.bin. Ltd. and SMutil software in sequence.n?] y # pkgadd -d /opt/SMIADIR/BASE_DIR/Resources/Platforms/SOL/SMutilSOL. # mv \$BASE_DIR\$/ BASE_DIR (8) Install the SMruntime. Add the disk array to be monitored to the OceanStor. 14-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.07.pkg SMclient When the system displays the following prompt. (4) In the Add Storage Array dialog box. (8) Click the SNMP tab. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . (6) After the disk array is added. (3) Click OK.pkg SMruntime # pkgadd -d /opt/SMIADIR/BASE_DIR/Resources/Platforms/SOL/SMclientSOL. select Out-of-band management. respectively. as shown in Figure 14-1. # cd BASE_DIR/Resources/Platforms/SOL # pkgadd -d /opt/SMIADIR/BASE_DIR/Resources/Platforms/SOL/ SMruntime-SOL. click Out-of-band Storage Arrays.. (5) Click Add to add the disk array. (1) Run the following commands to start the OceanStor management program: # cd /opt/SM9/client # .

M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. (11) Wait until the typed IP address is added to the Configured SNMP addresses area in Figure 14-1. Ltd. 4. 14-31 . and then click OK. (12) If the Configure Mail Server dialog box is displayed. click Yes. /opt/OMC/svc_profile.sh (3) Run the following commands to run the monitoring script: # cd /opt/OMC/bin # . (2) Run the following command to run the environment variables of the M2000: # ./deployHDMonitor. Modify the M2000 configuration file to set the monitoring parameters of the OceanStor. (10) Click Add. (1) Log in to the M2000 server as user root..sh Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Figure 14-1 SNMP tab page (9) Type the IP address of the M2000 server in Trap destination.

it indicates that the monitoring parameters of the disk array are set. (2) Run the following commands to start the OceanStor management program: # cd /opt/SM9/client # . Please set the flag to start VCS service [default:false]: false When the system displays Finish to deploy Sun ST6140/OceanStor S3000 Monitor. Switch to the fault alarm page of the M2000 client to view the alarm list. and then click Validate.0. you can check whether the monitoring of the disk array is enabled in the following way: 1. Check whether the monitoring of the disk array is enabled./SMclient (3) In the displayed dialog box. (7) Switch to the fault alarm page of the M2000 client to view the alarm list. 5. 14-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 14-1.1. (6) In the Configured SNMP addresses area. click Out-of-band Storage Arrays. Remove the power supply cable from any disk array to be monitored. it indicates that the monitoring of the disk array is enabled. If the information about the alarm whose ID is 1042 or the location information whose Description is Alert Test Message is available in the alarm list. NOTE Alternatively. Please set the flag to start SANtricty service [default:false]: true (6) When the system displays the following prompt. (4) Choose Edit > Configure Alerts. S10) When the system displays the following prompt. 14. (9) Choose Monitor > Browse Alarm List to view the alarm list.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Ltd. select the configured IP address.1. and then press Enter. type 2. NOTE The configuration takes effect after about 15 minutes. ============================================================= Please Select the Monitor Type: 1)--Sun Management Center(SMC) Monitor 2)--Sun ST6140/OceanStor S3000 Monitor Q|q)--Exit ============================================================= Please make a choice : 2 (4) When the system displays the following prompt. 2. type false. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .1]: 192. type the IP address of the server installed with the OceanStor. (1) Log in to the server installed with the OceanStor as user root by using the WinaXe software. Please input the IP of SANtricty server [default:127..20 How Should I Uninstall the OceanStor Monitoring Software This section describes how to uninstall the OceanStor monitoring software. (5) Click the SNMP tab.168.1 (5) When the system displays the following prompt. If the information about the alarm whose ID is 1042 or the location information whose Description is Controller tray component failed is available in the alarm list. (8) Log in to the M2000 client.0. it indicates that the monitoring of the disk array is enabled. type true.

Run the following command to uninstall the OceanStor: # pkgrm SMutil When the system displays the following prompt. firewall ports 0 to 500 must be open.n. Do you want to remove this package? [y.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.q] y 14.21 How Should I Check the Running Status of the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to check the running status of the FTP service on the M2000 server.?. It can determine whether to use the FTPS mode or the FTP mode based on the encryption mode adopted by the FTP client. As an FTP application based on the SSL protocol. Do you want to remove this package? [y. type y. 14-33 . The FTP service on the M2000 server adopts the self-adaptive mode.q] y # pkgrm SMruntime When the system displays the following prompt.. FTPS can be used between the M2000 and NEs. it indicates that the FTP service on the M2000 server is started. type y. start the FTP service by referring to 14. Run the following command to check the running status of the FTP service: # ps -ef | grep ftpd | grep -v grep If the following information is displayed. root 26510 22906 0 19:53:39 pts/1 0:00 /usr/sbin/ftpd In the system output.1.?.q] y # pkgrm SMclient When the system displays the following prompt. the FTPS protocol encrypts data during FTP login connection and data transmission. If there is no system output. Ltd. Do you want to remove this package? [y.?. type y.n. 2. Prerequisites You have logged in to the server as user root. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Question How should I uninstall the OceanStor monitoring software? Answer 1.1.?.22 How Should I Start the FTP Service on the M2000 Server?. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context l l You can use the traditional plain text mode or FTPS as the FTP transfer policy. the value in the second line refers to the process ID of the FTP service on the M2000 server. Log in to the server installed with the OceanStor as user root. l l Procedure 1.n.n.q] y Do you want to continue with the removal of this package [y. When FTPS is used.

This value must be the same as the process ID displayed in step 1. firewall ports 0 to 500 must be open.1. 2. the value in the second line is the process ID of the FTP service on the M2000 server. FTPS can be used between the M2000 and NEs. is an FTP transfer mode based on the SSH protocol. the FTPS protocol encrypts data during FTP login connection and data transmission. Ltd. Run the following command to check the running status of the FTP service: # ps -ef | grep ftpd | grep -v grep The system displays the following information: root 26510 22906 0 19:53:39 pts/1 0:00 /usr/sbin/ftpd In the system output.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Context l SSH FTP (SFTP). The FTP service on the M2000 server adopts the self-adaptive mode.22 How Should I Start the FTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to start the FTP service on the M2000 server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites You have logged in to the server as user root. l l Procedure 1. This ensures that the data communication between two ends can be performed in an encrypted channel. SFTP is supported between the M2000 server and the M2000 client. As an FTP application based on the SSL protocol..23 How Should I Check the Running Status of the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to check the running status of the SFTP on the M2000 server. When FTPS is used. Context l l You can use the traditional plain text mode or FTPS as the FTP transfer policy. Prerequisites You have logged in to the server as user root. It can determine whether to use the FTPS mode or the FTP mode based on the encryption mode adopted by the FTP client. and also between the M2000 and an NMS.1. 14. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) l 14-34 . SFTP uses a mature public key mechanism or private key mechanism to encrypt the data in the network. S10) 14. Run the following command to start the FTP service: # /usr/sbin/ftpd & The system displays the process ID of the FTP service.

This ensures that the data communication between two ends can be performed in an encrypted channel..3 How Do I Stop the Sybase? This section describes how to stop the Sybase. 2.1. That is.2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 How to Start the Sybase This section describes how to start the Sybase service.2.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Run the following command to start the SFTP service on the M2000 server: # svcadm enable svc:/network/ssh:default Run the following command to check the running status of the SFTP service: # svcs -a | grep ssh online is displayed in the system output. l Procedure 1. SFTP uses a mature public key mechanism or private key mechanism to encrypt the data in the network. Context l SFTP is an FTP transfer mode based on the SSH protocol.2 About Sybase This section describes the FAQs and solutions related to the Sybase. and also between the M2000 and an NMS. 14.24 How Should I Start the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server? This section describes how to start the SFTP service on the M2000 server.4 How to View the Name of the Sybase Server This section describes how to view the name of the Sybase server when the Sybase database is running. 14-35 . it indicates that the SFTP service on the M2000 server is started.2. If disabled is displayed in the system output.2.24 How Should I Start the SFTP Service on the M2000 Server?.1. 14. the SFTP service on the M2000 server is started. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Procedure 1.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started? This section describes how to check whether the Sybase is started. SFTP is supported between the M2000 server and the M2000 client. 14. Run the following command to check the running status of the SFTP service: # svcs -a | grep ssh The system displays the following information: online 18:46:13 svc:/network/ssh:default If online is displayed in the system output. see 14. 14. For details about how to start the SFTP service. 14. 14. Prerequisites You have logged in to the server as user root. it indicates that the SFTP service on the M2000 server is not started. Ltd.

8 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After Run svc_profile.dbuser command as user root. Ltd..2.14 How to Handle the '/export/home/sybdev/master.2.5 How to Handle Database Alarms This section describes why database alarms are generated and how to handle these database alarms.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install 14-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Question How do I check the startup status of the Sybase? Answer Perform the following steps to check the status of Sybase: 1.2.dat' already in use message. 14. Run the following commands: -bash-3.2. 14.2. 2. 14.2.15 What Should I Do to Handle Database Startup Failure Due to Incorrect User Type? This section describes how to handle database startup failure due to incorrect user type. Switch to user dbuser.13 What Should I Do When the Number of Database Connections Is Insufficient? This section describes what to do when the number of database connections is insufficient.2.6 How to View Database Deadlock Information This section describes how to check the deadlock information about the Sybase database.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started? This section describes how to check whether the Sybase is started. You can switch to user dbuser. 14.2. 14.12 What Should I Do When the Client Is Disconnected Due to Damaged System Tables in the Database? This section describes what to do when the client is disconnected due to damaged system tables in the database.sh This section describes why the Sybase is not started after the execution of the script svc_profile.9 Why the Sybase Backup Database Abort This section describes how to solve the Sybase backup abort. Run the su . 14.2.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.dat' already in use Message? This section describes how to handle the '/export/home/sybdev/master. l l Log in to the server as dbuser and switch to dbuser state. 14. S10) 14.7 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After the Server Restarted This section describes why the Sybase is not started after the M2000 is restarted. 14.10 Why the Mouse Pointer Changes into an Hourglass upon History Alarm Query This section describes how to handle the problem that the mouse pointer changes into an hourglass upon history alarm query. 14.2.2.11 What Should I Do When the Database Cannot Be Started Properly? This section describes what to do when the database cannot be started properly. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .2. 14. 14.sh.

00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?.) (3) Run the following commands: -bash-3. (1) Run the following commands: -bash-3. Ltd.00$ . 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. perform the following steps: 1./startserver -f .dbuser command as user root.2.71 server ASE's default unicode sort order is 'binary'. You can switch to user dbuser.71 server Recovery complete. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50..71 server 'bin_iso_1' (ID = 50) 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. l l Log in to the server as dbuser and switch to dbuser state. press Enter. run the exit to roll back to user root./RUN_SYB NOTE About 30s is required for starting the database service./RUN_SYB_back Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.00$ nohup . (A virtual page is 2048 bytes. 2. Start the Sybase.00$ .2.71 server Master device size: 400 megabytes.71 server 'iso_1' (ID = 1). 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. After you check the Sybase status.2 How to Start the Sybase This section describes how to start the Sybase service. Question How to start the Sybase service? Answer To start the Sybase service. 14-37 . NOTE Switch to user dbuser from user root.71 server ASE's default sort order is: 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. 14./showserver UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME CMD dbuser 341 339 0 Oct 21 ? 0:01 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/ backupserver -SSYB_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install dbuser 3104 3103 1 Oct 25 ? 312:20 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/ dataserver -sSYB -d/data/master_dev. or 204800 virtual pages. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) -bash-3. (2) When the following output is displayed.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.dat -e/opt/sybase/ If the output includes dataserver and backupserver. 3. Wait until the database service is started./startserver -f . it indicates that the data service process and the backup service process of the database are already started. Check whether the Sybase is started by referring to 14. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. Switch to user dbuser. Run the su .71 server on top of default character set: 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50.

the Sybase starts automatically upon a restart of the operating system. If the M2000 server is installed. 14. Switch to user dbuser. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Run the following commands: -bash-3. In actual situations. Run the following command to view the name of the Sybase server: -bash-3. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . After the Sybase is started. l l Log in to the server as dbuser and switch to dbuser state. S10) l l In the previous command..14 FAQs (Sun) NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 2. If any command result exists. SYB is the name of the database server./RUN_SYB_back 14-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. replace this name with the real name. Switch to user dbuser from user root. perform the following steps: 1.dbuser command as user root. Question How do I stop the Sybase service? Answer To stop the Sybase. Log in to the server as user dbuser.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> shutdown SYB_BACKUP 2> go 1> shutdown 2> go NOTE l Run the ps -ef | grep sybase | grep -v grep command to check whether the Sybase database is stopped. Switch to user dbuser from user root. 2. 1.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase? This section describes how to stop the Sybase. After you stop the Sybase.2. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. You can switch to user dbuser. it indicates that the Sybase database is stopped. As shown in the following command result. l l 14.2./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . run the exit to roll back to user root.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. run the exit to roll back to user root. Ltd. Run the su . run the kill -9 PID of Sybase command to forcibly stop the Sybase process.4 How to View the Name of the Sybase Server This section describes how to view the name of the Sybase server when the Sybase database is running. If no command result exists.

Alarms are generated due to lack of alarm database space.5 How to Handle Database Alarms This section describes why database alarms are generated and how to handle these database alarms. refer to 8. and other databases. Alarms are generated due to lack of alarm database space. swmdb database. l Alarms are generated in the pmdb alarm database. l Alarms are generated in the fmdb alarm database. Decrease the number of measured objects and measured counters by operating on the M2000 client. The data in the database is not dumped in time. Alarms are generated due to lack of database space. Cause Analysis and Solution The alarms generated in the M2000 database are caused by lack of database space and low alarm threshold. Problem Description Alarms are generated in the M2000 database. Modify the alarm threshold on the M2000 client. Decrease the number of the NEs under the management of the M2000. such as the fmdb database and the pmdb database. Cause analysis The pmdb alarm database does not delete the outdated performance data in time. which leads to a scenario in which the outdated performance data is not dumped. For details about how to check and modify the settings for alarm data dump. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 14. Solution – – Modify the configuration file on the M2000 server and restart performance services. Cause analysis The alarm dump mechanism is not configured correctly.. refer to 8. 14-39 Solution – – Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The number of managed NEs exceeds the management capacity of the M2000. Solution Check and modify the settings for alarm data dump on the M2000 client. Cause analysis – – – The alarm threshold is configured extremely low. – l Alarms are generated in the omcdb database. Check and modify the settings for performance data dump. which leads to a scenario in which the alarm data is not dumped immediately.3 Clearing M2000 Databases. Ltd.2.3 Clearing M2000 Databases. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details on how to check and modify the settings for performance data dump.

run the following commands: 1> dbcc traceon(3604) 2> go DBCC execution completed. 2. S10) Check and modify the settings for data dump on the M2000 client. Log in to the Solaris as user dbuser. contact a user with System Administrator (SA) role.3 Clearing M2000 Databases. perform the following steps: 1. If DBCC printed error messages.----------./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . Question How to check the deadlock information about the Sybase database when a fault occurs? Answer To view the database deadlock information. To check further information./RUN_SYB_back The class column will display the cursor name for locks associated with a cursor for the current user and the cursor id for other users. As shown in the following command result. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . Run the following commands: -bash-3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. The database name is master. Non Cursor Lock shows no dead lock is available. For details about how to check and modify the settings for data dump. fid spid loid locktype table_id page row dbname class context -----.. 14.----------.-----.2.--------------------------------------------------------0 10 20 Sh_intent 464004684 0 0 master Non Cursor Lock (1 row affected) (return status = 0) NOTE In the command result.---------------. refer to 8.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result.---------------------------.table_id=464004684.14 FAQs (Sun) – M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 14-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_lock 2> go NOTE After the Sybase server is started.spid=10.--------------. Ltd. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3.6 How to View Database Deadlock Information This section describes how to check the deadlock information about the Sybase database.

as an example. Ltd.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. SQL Server creates the default file with the default configuration.log. Question Why does the Sybase not start after the M2000 server restarts? This takes SYB. which is the name of the database server..cfg' has been written and the previous version has been renamed to '/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . '/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.076' NOTE After the Sybase server is started. NOTE The commands check the messages of spid=10.7 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After the Server Restarted This section describes why the Sybase is not started after the M2000 is restarted.cfg for storing the default settings of the Sybase. does not exist. If DBCC printed error messages. S10) NOTE 14 FAQs (Sun) The command output displays the traced information on the monitor.2. As shown in the following command result. kernel Configuration file '/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. 1> use master 2> go 1> select object_name(464004684) 2> go -----------------------------spt_values (1 row affected) 1> dbcc sqltext(10) 2> go DBCC execution completed.cfg' does not exist.table_id=464004684 of the master database./RUN_SYB_back Causes The file SYB. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . Find that the record similar with the following contents is available: kernel Configuration Error: Configuration file.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. Open the Sybase system log SYB. 14-41 . it creates new SYB.cfg. kernel Warning: A configuration file was not specified and the default file '/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. If the system cannot find SYB. 14.cfg records the settings of the Sybase. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3. contact a user with System Administrator (SA) role.cfg'.

2. such as M2000 server installation path/3rdTools/sybase.cfg. The specific file name is recorded in the system log of the Sybase.2 How to Start the Sybase. Ltd.cfg is generated once the Sybase is installed. must set the value of $SYBASE to the Sybase installation folder to start the 14-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. however. Therefore.sh in M2000 Installation Directory.*. that is.cfg # chown -R dbuser:staff /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0 # su . # cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0 # cp SYB.cfg is renamed as SYB.cfg. root becomes the owner of SYB. SYB.cfg.dbuser 2. If user root starts the Sybase and changes Sybase settings through isql. you need to set the value of $SYBASE in svc_profile.cfg. is not authorized to read SYB. Log in to the server as user root. dbuser remains as the owner of SYB.076 SYB. dbuser cannot read SYB. dbuser in the M2000 system. Solution When the Sybase creates SYB. If dbuser starts the Sybase. Description After you run the script svc_profile. For details. Start the Sybase.sh to the related folder of the M2000.log. SYB. The file SYB. You.sh. start the Sybase as user dbuser. the Sybase renames the existing SYB.SYB. that is.. and this file cannot be deleted.cfg even after root changes the Sybase settings through isql. after being installed.2. The M2000 server.076 as SYB.cfg Ownership After the Sybase is installed. The M2000 server default installation path is /opt/OMC. the owner of SYB. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . restarts the Sybase through dbuser on boot. the Sybase service is not started.cfg as SYB. see 14.cfg are not consistent with those required by the M2000 system. Thus. The solution is to rename SYB.cfg and reset the ownership of this file. however. The user account dbuser.sh This section describes why the Sybase is not started after the execution of the script svc_profile. To avoid this problem. Analysis The M2000 needs to support multiple Sybase versions.076. In this example. The Sybase cannot find the file because the Sybase is not authorized to read this file. S10) The major cause is that the default values in SYB. 14.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The M2000 server default installation path is /opt/OMC.cfg is the user who has installed the Sybase. perform the following steps: 1.8 Why the Sybase Is Not Started After Run svc_profile. To handle the faults.

The Sybase default installation path is /opt/sybase/.2./RUN_SYB_back In the previous command.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. SYB is the name of the database server. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Sybase service.2. the Sybase service fails to start. As shown in the following command result. if you set the value of $SYBASE in svc_profile./startserver -f . Question Why does the Sybase backup database stop abnormally? Answer Run the nohup command before you start the Sybase. Solution Before you start the Sybase service. replace this name with the real name. the cursor indicates every 125 records that the system is busy.00$ nohup . Ltd. 2.. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server.sh to the related folder of the M2000.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/ -bash-3. The two settings conflict./RUN_SYB_back 14. In this case./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Run the following command: -bash-3. 1.sh in Sybase installation path. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3. Log in to the Solaris as user dbuser. 14-43 . run SYBASE.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In actual situations.10 Why the Mouse Pointer Changes into an Hourglass upon History Alarm Query This section describes how to handle the problem that the mouse pointer changes into an hourglass upon history alarm query.9 Why the Sybase Backup Database Abort This section describes how to solve the Sybase backup abort. Question After you view the query results of history alarms by using the up and down arrows or scroll bar. 14. NOTE After the Sybase server is started. Each busy interval lasts about 10 seconds.

2./RUN_SYB_back 3. Ltd. 14-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Obtain the configuration information of the current database in M2000 server installtion path/etc/conf/ifmssvc. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. <param name="dbname">fmdb</param>: Alarm database name.xml. Run the following commands after you access the database: 1> use fmdb 2> go 1> update statistics tbl_his_alm 2> go NOTE l l fmdb is the alarm database name. -bash-3. <param name="dbusername">sa</param>: Sybase user name. <param name="dbuserpasswd" type="encrypt">f4310554853445</ param>: Encypted Sybase user password. tbl_his_alm is the history database table name. S10) Answer The Sybase database returns the results slowly. obtain the name from ifmssvc. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .2.11 What Should I Do When the Database Cannot Be Started Properly? This section describes what to do when the database cannot be started properly. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa NOTE After the Sybase server is started.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. Find the following configuration items: <databaseparam name="databaseparam"> <dbtag name="ifms_common"> <param name="dbservername">SYB</param> <param name="dbusername">sa</param> <param name="dbuserpasswd" type="encrypt">f4310554853445</param> <param name="dbname">fmdb</param> <param name="dblib">libctl63-md. You need to update the statistics manually..14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. This causes the Sybase to return the results slowly. The statistics cannot be updated automatically. As shown in the following command result.xml. 14.so</param> <param name="dbType">SYBASE</param> <param name="dbMonitor">enable</param> </dbtag> NOTE l l l l <param name="dbservername">SYB</param>: Sybase database server name. Access the Sybase database. 1./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh .

Replace SYB in actual situations. If the shared memory is not correctly set. the owner of the files under the /data directory is changed. and the unit is MB. 14-45 .cfg and /opt/sybase/SYB. the IP address information recorded in the / opt/sybase/interfaces file is not changed. indicating that memory is incorrect. during the startup of the Sybase.. -bash-3. obtain the name of the database server.00$ ls | grep RUN_SYB If the system displays the following information.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3. and the user group is staff. the system displays a message.cfg configuration file is dbuser.cfg -rwxrwxrwx SYB. l In the file system database. On the server. After you change the IP address of the server. The value of the set shmsys:shminfo_shmmax field in /etc/system is the server shared memory information.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. The value of the shared memory is x1024x1024/2. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.krg file is not successfully deleted. The correct owner of the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. you can infer that the name of the database server is SYB1: RUN_SYB1 RUN_SYB1_back Solution contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. NOTE l l l SYB in the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. Based on the system output. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Question How do I do when the database cannot be started properly? Cause l The information about server shared memory information is not set in /etc/system. the /opt/sybase/SYB. # ls -l /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. installing the Sybase fails. 14. Ltd. and the user group is staff.2.krg files is the name of the Sybase database server.cfg 1 dbuser staff 9926 Sep 2 10:50 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/ l After the Sybase database is stopped.cfg configuration file of the Sybase database is incorrect. Thus.12 What Should I Do When the Client Is Disconnected Due to Damaged System Tables in the Database? This section describes what to do when the client is disconnected due to damaged system tables in the database. run the following command. l The owner of the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/SYB. The correct owner of the database files under the /data directory is dbuser.

1.2. # su . -bash-3.log log file. In this case./startserver -f . For details.2 Viewing the States of M2000 Services.2. If the M2000 services are running. If the Sybase service is running.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?. Check the operation status of the M2000 services.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. 3.2. see 7. address) = (1.log files is the name of the Sybase database server.2. stop it. Run the following command to start the data service process of the database: -bash-3..4 Stopping the M2000 Services.00$ ls | grep RUN_SYB If the system displays the following information.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3. On the server. 4. which indicates that the system table in the master database is damaged.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3. For details about how to stop the M2000 services. S10) Question The client is disconnected from the server./RUN_SYB -m 14-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about how to stop the Sybase services.dbuser For details about how to view the Sybase service. 0x000120003fdaa478) 02:00000:00344:2008/05/27 14:14:38. you can infer that the name of the database server is SYB1: RUN_SYB1 RUN_SYB1_back Solution The infected with signal 11 (SIGSEGV) message is in the database log file. When viewing the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/ SYB.84 kernel Address 0x0000000080998990 Current process (0xfee0214) (tmp_alldrop+0x84). run the following command. Based on the system output. obtain the name of the database server. Log in to the server as user root. Ltd. siginfo (code. the following message is displayed: 02:00000:00344:2008/05/27 14:14:38.00$ . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .84 kernel ************************************ 02:00000:00344:2008/05/27 14:14:38. see 14. see 7. Replace SYB in actual situations. see 14.84 kernel NOTE pc: 0x0000000080f4e7b8 l l SYB in the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB. Check whether the M2000 services are running.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Check whether the Sybase service is running.84 kernel infected with signal 11 (SIGSEGV) 02:00000:00344:2008/05/27 14:14:38. stop them. you need to recover the database. 2.

Question The client is disconnected from the server. -bash-3.71 server 'bin_iso_1' (ID = 50) 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. 6. Retry when there are fewer active users.log log file. Wait until the database service is started.71 server Master device size: 400 megabytes. Run the installmaster script to recover the master database.2.State: 3 There are not enough 'user connections' available to start a new process.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> shutdown 2> go 7. When viewing the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB. Start the M2000 services.) 5.2. or 204800 virtual pages. Ltd.00$ isql -Sname of the database server -Usa -Ppassword of user sa -i $SYBASE/ASE-15_0/scripts/installmaster When the system displays the following message. (A virtual page is 2048 bytes. and the isql is disconnected from the database. the following message is displayed: 01:00000:00012:2008/05/28 01:34:38. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. Wait until the database is recovered.2 How to Start the Sybase.71 server ASE's default unicode sort order is 'binary'. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50.3 Starting the M2000 System Services. Replace SYB with the actual server name. SYB refers to the name of the database server.2. For details. you can infer that the database is successfully recovered.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 14. Restart the Sybase. Loading of master database is complete. Run the following command to stop the data service process of the database: -bash-3. NOTE Recovering the database takes about 14 minutes.13 What Should I Do When the Number of Database Connections Is Insufficient? This section describes what to do when the number of database connections is insufficient.12 server 01:00000:00012:2008/05/28 01:34:38. see 7. press Enter. In the previous command.71 server ASE's default sort order is: 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. For details about how to start the M2000 services. 8.71 server 'iso_1' (ID = 1).71 server Recovery complete. If the following output is displayed. Start the Sybase database. 14-47 .71 server on top of default character set: 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50. see 14. 00:00000:00001:2008/12/11 10:53:50.12 server Error: 1601.. Severity: 17. S10) NOTE 14 FAQs (Sun) The startup of the database services takes about 30 seconds. or ask your System Administrator to reconfigure ASE with more Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

4. 2.----------. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 'max memory' should be greater than 'total logical memory' '845328' required for the configuration. -bash-3. Switch to user dbuser.-------------------. # su . Msg 5861. On the server.----------------------.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_configure "number of user connections". 800 2> go l When the system displays the following message.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. see 7. you can infer that the modification succeeds. For details about how to stop the M2000 services. Based on the system output.dbuser Run the following commands to change the maximum number of connections to 800. you can infer that the system has insufficient memory. proceed with 5. Run the exit command to exit isql. 1. 3. (return status = 1) 5. If the M2000 services are running. you can infer that the name of the database server is SYB1: RUN_SYB1 RUN_SYB1_back Solution The database log file contains the Error: 1601 message. Ltd. State 1: Server 'SYB'.----------.2. Replace SYB in actual situations. previous value 800.---------number of user connections 25 350538 800 800 number dynamic (1 row affected) Resulting configuration value and memory use have not changed from previous values: new configuration value 800. NOTE M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Level 16.log files is the name of the Sybase database server. Parameter Name Default Memory Used Config Value Run Value Unit Type -----------------------------.. In this case. obtain the name of the database server.14 FAQs (Sun) user connections. Line 860: The current 'max memory' value '845536'.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3.00$ ls | grep RUN_SYB If the system displays the following information. is not sufficient to change the parameter 'number of user connections' to '32766'. You need to modify the number of database connections. stop them. which indicates that the number of database connections is insufficient. Procedure 'sp_configure'. Run the following command to check the database memory: 1> sp_configure "max memory" 14-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (return status = 0) l If the system displays the following message. -bash-3. S10) l l SYB in the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB. Log in to the server as user root. run the following command.

2.dat' already in use message.15 What Should I Do to Handle Database Startup Failure Due to Incorrect User Type? This section describes how to handle database startup failure due to incorrect user type.dat' already in use message.31 kernel SySAM: Failed to get status of file / Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. On the server.. see 14.00$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install -bash-3. errno=2 No such file or directory. 14. You can ingnore the problem.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 14-49 .00$ ls | grep RUN_SYB If the system displays the following information.1 How Do I Check Whether the Sybase Is Started?. Replace SYB in actual situations. obtain the name of the database server. contact Huawei technical support engineers for assistance. Based on the system output.14 How to Handle the '/export/home/sybdev/master.properties. Before you start the database.2. the system displays the following message: 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27. run the following command.24 server kiconfig: read of config block failed NOTE l l SYB in the /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB.24 kernel kdconfig: unable to read primary master device 00:00000:00000:2009/10/24 23:43:08. check whether it is already started.log files is the name of the Sybase database server.31 kernel SySAM: Failed to get status of file / opt/OMC/3rdTools/sybase/ASE-15_0/sysam/SYB. Question When the database is started. Question The database log file /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB. 14. you can infer that the name of the database server is SYB1: RUN_SYB1 RUN_SYB1_back Solution The database log file records the '/export/home/sybdev/master. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 2> go Then. -bash-3.dat' already in use Message? This section describes how to handle the '/export/home/sybdev/master. which indicates that the database is started during it is running. Ltd.28 kernel 3rdTools/sybase/SYSAM-2_0/licenses SySAM: Using licenses from: /opt/OMC/ 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27.dat' already in use by an ASE 00:00000:00000:2009/10/24 23:43:08.2.24 kernel basis_dlock: file '/export/home/sybdev/master. 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27.log records the following message: 00:00000:00000:2009/10/24 23:43:08.

S10) opt/OMC/3rdTools/sybase/ASE-15_0/sysam/sysam..00$ . 14.3.properties. 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27.31 kernel SySAM: Failed to get status of file / opt/OMC/3rdTools/sybase/ASE-15_0/sysam/SYB. Ltd.properties file: errno=2 No such file or directory. errno=2 No such file or directory. Start the Sybase database.properties. 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 14-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.31 kernel There is no valid license for ASE server product.31 kernel fails.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. For details.sh 3.3 About TCP/IP Network This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the TCP/IP network.2 How to Start the Sybase. 14. 2. Installation date is not found or installation grace period has expired. 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27. The user who starts the database uses the environment variables of the M2000.1 Why the Network Port Is Abnormal This section describes how to handle the problem of the abnormal network port.properties.3.1 Why the Network Port Is Abnormal This section describes how to handle the problem of the abnormal network port.2.2 How to Connect the Client to the Server with More than One IP Address This section describes how to set up the connection between the client and the server using multiple IP addresses.31 kernel SySAM: Failed to get status of file / opt/OMC/3rdTools/sybase/ASE-15_0/sysam/SYB. Run the following commands: # chown -R dbuser:staff /opt/Sybase # chown -R dbuser:staff /export/home/sybdev # su . Log in to the server as user root. errno=2 No such file or directory. errno=2 No such file or directory. Server will not boot Solution The database startup failure is caused by incorrect user type.31 kernel SySAM: Failed to open /opt/OMC/ 3rdTools/sybase/ASE-15_0/sysam/SYB. 1. License manager initialization 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27. see 14.3. 00:00000:00000:2007/11/20 06:37:27.dbuser -bash-3. 14.template. /opt/sybase/SYBASE. 14. The correct method is to use the environment variables of the Sybase to start the database.

If the value is false. the M2000 updates the data with the NEs and processes the data.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. # eeprom # eeprom "local-mac-address?"=true 3.2. To know how to stop the M2000. No performance data or alarm data is processed during the process where you change the server IP address. If the M2000 services server is running. To specify an IP address for M2000 services. 3. # su . why does the Sun Fire E4900 server respond slowly? Answer The cause is that the two ports have the same MAC address. 2. 14. Stop M2000 services and the Sybase before you change the IP address of the M2000 server. change the value to true.2.2 How to Connect the Client to the Server with More than One IP Address This section describes how to set up the connection between the client and the server using multiple IP addresses. After the services are resumed. Check the network connection.00$ exit Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. -bash-3. the client cannot set up a connection with the server. Switch to dbuser and run the following commands to stop the Sybase.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. # ifconfig -a Check the MAC addresses of the two ports.. Log in to server as user root.dbuser To know how to stop the Sybase. Otherwise. Switch back to user root. Ltd. specify one for M2000 services.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) Question During the login from the Sun Netra 240 console through telnet. Question Why cannot the client set up a connection with the server? Answer If the server has multiple IP addresses. refer to 7. 14-51 .3. Restart the Solaris. To solve the problem. perform the following steps: 1. stop the M2000 services. refer to 14. 4. perform the following steps: 1. Check the value of local-mac-address?. 2.

70. sync.cfg. and then add # on the left of 10.161.121. 14. # /usr/sbin/shutdown -g0 -y -i6 If the M2000 software is installed. 14. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . 14..70. 14. the M2000 administration console can function as the time source of the lower-layer server. 14.0.70.161.4 What Should I Do When I Fail to Stop the M2000 Services? This section describes how to handle the failure to stop the M2000 services.4.200 to comment off this line. and the M2000 server and NEs can synchronize time with the administration console in encryption mode.4. 14-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Why M2000 Services Restart Abnormally This section describes how to handle the problem of the abnormal restart of the M2000 services. 14. The host name corresponds to one IP address for connecting clients and NEs.4. sync.4. sync. Edit /etc/hosts.4.4.0.161. 14.5. After the setting.4. the server is configured with two IP addresses: 10. the host name is aries. Ltd. sync.7 How Do I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the Administration Console (In Encryption Mode)? After setting the administration console as the intermediary-layer NTP server in encryption mode.200 and 10. the Sybase and the M2000 services restart automatically after the Solaris restarts. # sync.121. sync. S10) 5.2 Why M2000 Services Stop Abnormally This section describes how to handle the problem of abnormal stop of the M2000 services.6 How to Set the M2000 Administration Console as the Intermediary-Layer NTP Server (In Encryption Mode) This section describes how to set the M2000 administration console to synchronize time with the upper-layer server in encryption mode.3 What Should I Do When I Fail to Start the M2000 Services? This section describes how to handle the failure to start the M2000 services.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.8 How to Set the M2000 Server as the NTP Client (In Encryption Mode) This section describes how to set the M2000 server as the NTP client to synchronize time with the upper-layer server in encryption mode.208 aries loghost 6. you need to check the running status of the NTP services on the administration console to ensure that they are running properly.1 localhost #10.4. # # Internet host table # 127. For example.200 aries loghost 10. The later one is used for connecting clients.208.5. In M2000 server installation path/etc/conf/tao. 14. 14.4 About Server Software This section describes some FAQs and solutions related to the M2000 server software. Restart the Solaris. Open /etc/hosts.5 Why M2000 Dynamic Data Backup Fails This section describes how to handle the failure to back up the dynamic M2000 data.

12 How Should I Power On the T5220 Server Through the Serial Port of the SC This section describes how to power on the T5220 server through the serial port of the SC. Question Why do M2000 services restart abnormally? Answer The possible causes are as follows: l l The Sybase is faulty. The M2000 system is faulty. such as CPU usage. and disk usage. 4.00$ exit 6.. For details. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to 14. perform the following steps: 1.10 How Should I Handle an Incremental Backup Failure? This section describes the causes of the failure to back up the M2000 dynamic data incrementally. # su . and Disk The M2000 periodically exports the report of system performance. Set the Sybase database parameter total memory and modify the RUN_SYB file. To know how to start the Sybase.2.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?.4. Based on the report.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.2.4. you can analyze the load and performance of the hardware system.2. 5.4. stop the M2000 services. To solve the problem. 14. Memory. that is.3 Starting the M2000 System Services.1 Why M2000 Services Restart Abnormally This section describes how to handle the problem of the abnormal restart of the M2000 services. Switch to dbuser and run the following commands to stop the Sybase.9 How Should I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the M2000 Server (In Encryption Mode)? After setting the M2000 server as the NTP client in encryption mode. /opt/OMC and start the M2000 services. 14.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?. refer to 7. memory usage. Start the Sybase. To know how to stop the M2000. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 14.4. -bash-3.11 How Should I Periodically Monitoring the CPU. This section also describes how to solve this problem. Change to the default installation path of the M2000.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. refer to 14. Set the Sybase parameters.2. 2.4. Log in to the server as user root. refer to software installation manual related to each server type. 3. refer to 7. Ltd.dbuser To know how to stop the Sybase. 14. you need to check the running status of the NTP services on the server to ensure that the NTP services are running properly. 14-53 . To know how to start the M2000 services. If the M2000 services server is running. 14.

To solve this problem. Log in to the server as user root. Ltd. 2. The system output is as follows: 14-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Question The M2000 services fail to be started.. For details.3 What Should I Do When I Fail to Start the M2000 Services? This section describes how to handle the failure to start the M2000 services. .4.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) ./svc_profile. Check system logs. Question Run the following command: # svc_adm -cmd status When the value of not running in the command result is greater than 0. If any service is not started. 14. contact Huawei technical support engineers for support. run the following command to start it: # svc_adm -cmd restartsvc name of the service that is not started NOTE If the service fails to be started. Switch to the installation path of the M2000.2 Querying the System Logs of the M2000. the service is stopped abnormally. The default installation path of the M2000 is /opt/OMC. 4. Check system logs.2 Why M2000 Services Stop Abnormally This section describes how to handle the problem of abnormal stop of the M2000 services. 14. see 6.4. How to solve this problem? Answer The possible causes are as follows: l l An error occurs during program running The startup is stopped manually. # cd M2000 installation path 3. Causes l Cause 1: You run the start_svc command directly to start the M2000 services without running the environment script.sh # start_svc Do not stop the startup process manually. Start M2000 services. S10) 7. perform the following steps: 1. # .

3. /opt/OMC/svc_profile. sysagent port is in use 31000. and therefore the M2000 services fail to be started.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Run the following command to terminate the daemon process. the TAO process fails when you start the M2000 services..sh NOTE The default installation directory of the M2000 server is /opt/OMC. failed to start KernelMonitor. Run the following commands to restart the M2000 services: # start_svc 14. and changes on the server configuration. 14-55 . perform the following steps: 1. # kill_daem Run the following command to delete the old system files: # cd $IMAP_ROOT/var/share # rm *ior* 4. Run the environment script. maybe imapsysd is running. Solution to Cause 1 To rectify this fault. maybe ServiceManager is running. perform the following steps: 1. The system output is as follows: starting TAO Naming Service [FAIL ] starting TAO Notification Service [FAIL] l Cause 3: The port is occupied.4. # . S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) command not found l Cause 2: The system file is damaged due to reasons such as upgrade. 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 What Should I Do When I Fail to Stop the M2000 Services? This section describes how to handle the failure to stop the M2000 services. abnormal power-off. Log in to the server as user root.maybe KernelMonitor is already running. 2. Log in to the server as user root. Therefore.. 2. Ltd. TAO Naming Service is running TAO Notification Service is running port is in use 31019. The system output is similar to the following information: ============================ Starting System . Run the following commands to start the M2000 services: # start_svc Solution to Cause 2 and Cause 3 To rectify the fault.. Replace the directory according to the actual situation.

Log in to the server as user root.4. perform the following steps: 1. S10) Question Why is that the following commands fail to be executed? l l stop_svc kill_svc Answer If the system output is command not found. Thus. Run the environment script.dbuser -bash-3.5 Why M2000 Dynamic Data Backup Fails This section describes how to handle the failure to back up the dynamic M2000 data. It generates several sub-processes during the backup. 2. For details.00$ isql -Sdatabase server name -Usa -Ppassword of user sa 1> sp_helpsort 2> go 14-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Sybase backupserver process is executed during system backup. the possible cause is that you do not run the environment script before running these commands. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Why does the system backup fail? Causes l l The character set settings for the server and the client are not consistent. # su . the system backup fails. Solution for Cause 1 The solution for cause 1 is to unify the character settings of the server and client. Question During system backup. Ltd.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. 14.. see M2000 Command Reference. Perform the following steps: 1. Check character set of the server. the progress bar stops at 30%. the sub-processes keep running. If the backupserver process is stopped abnormally. To rectify this fault.

S10) NOTE 14 FAQs (Sun) After the Sybase server is started. Set the client character set according to the language environment and server character set. Sort Order = 50. As shown in the following command result. iso_1 locale = fr. ISBN 0-13-031063-8 .Western European 8-bit character set. bin_iso_1 Binary ordering.00$ cd /opt/sybase/locales -bash-3./RUN_SYB 0:00 /bin/sh . delete the processes titled 3270 and 3271.dat Find the following content. # kill -93270 3271 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.00$ exit Solution for Cause 2 The solution for cause 2 is to stop the sub-processes.00$ ps -ef | grep RUN_ | grep -v grep In the command result. Ensure that the character set settings are the same as the settings on the server. the name of the database server in this example is SYB: dbuser 17046 dbuser 17050 1 1 0 0 Dec 11 ? Dec 11 ? 0:00 /bin/sh . [sun_svr4] . iso_1 -bash-3.00$ vi locales. Perform the following steps: 1. refer to "man setlocale()" locale = C. # ps -ef | grep svc_backuprestore root 3486 1318 0 08:42:17 root 3270 18934 0 08:41:19 svc_backuprestore -cmd backup -m root 3271 3270 4 08:41:19 -cmd backup -m all pts/8 0:00 grep svc_backuprestore ? 0:00 sh -c /opt/OMC/bin/ all 2> /dev/null ? 0:08 /opt/OMC/bin/svc_backuprestore 3. Delete manually other processes except grep svc_backuprestore. Ltd. In this example. Characters.00$ echo $LANG C 3.. 2.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun./RUN_SYB_back Collation Name Collation ID -----------------------------. 14-57 . in Order 2. iso_1 ISO 8859-1 (Latin-1) . -bash-3. -bash-3. Run the following command for process query.-----------Loadable Sort Table Name -----------------------------Sort Order Description -----------------------------------------------------------------Character Set = 1. Log in to the server as user root. the value after the RUN_ is the name of the database server. for the ISO 8859/1 or Latin-1 character set ( iso_1). french. us_english. Check the current language environment. run the following command to view the name of the database server: -bash-3. from Solaris International Developer's Guide .

it cannot be used as the upper-layer time server of the M2000 administration console. to be the intermediary-layer time server. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . date.4. You have logged in to the M2000 administration console as user root. Delete manually the other processes in the database except backupserver. the M2000 administration console can function as the time source of the lower-layer server. The server running on the Windows operating system uses the SNTP protocol.. Ltd. and authentication code of the upper-layer NTP server to the file according to the following syntax: At the same time. You have obtained the identifier. If no server is available to be set as the intermediary-layer time server. Run the following commands to edit the /etc/inet/ntp. delete the processes titled 6217 and 6218. key type. l l Context l l Normally. and time of the M2000 administration console are correctly set. and the M2000 server and NEs can synchronize time with the administration console in encryption mode. Write only one data item in each line.keys file: # TERM=vt100. the M2000 server is set as the NTP client. Thus. and authentication code of the upper-layer NTP server. that is. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp. l Procedure 1. # ps -ef | grep syb | grep -v dataserver | grep -v grep dbuser 380 1 0 08:53:29 ? 0:02 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/ backupserver -SSYB_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install dbuser 6217 380 0 08:52:34 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/ sybmultbuf 19 11 14 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB_b dbuser 6218 6217 0 08:52:34 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/ sybmultbuf 19 11 14 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/SYB_b 5. identifier key type authentication code 14-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Run the following command for process query. key type. In this example. set the administration console of the M2000 system.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. S10) 4. the Netra 240 server. After the setting. # kill -96217 6218 14. The time zone. Prerequisite l l You have configured the upper-layer NTP server in encryption mode.keys Add the identifier. The upper-layer time server of the M2000 administration console requires that the NTP protocol must be used.6 How to Set the M2000 Administration Console as the Intermediary-Layer NTP Server (In Encryption Mode) This section describes how to set the M2000 administration console to synchronize time with the upper-layer server in encryption mode. you can define the authentication code required for synchronizing the time between a lower-layer NTP client and the current server.

1. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp.conf file and exit the vi editor. Run the following command to modify the rights of the ntp. For example. N refers to the DES algorithm in NTP format. Add enable auth to the file. Run the following commands to open the /etc/inet/ntp. NOTE prefer indicates that the IP address of the NTP server is synchronized preferentially.XType.214. 14-59 . The value 1 indicates that the local host functions as the standard time source. server IP address of upper-layer NTP server 1 key identifier 1 prefer server IP address of upper-layer NTP server 2 key identifier 2 5. Ensure that each line maps to one NTP server. S refers to the DES algorithm in standard format. A key type is a character and refers to the encryption algorithm for calculating NTP services.conf file: # cp /etc/inet/ntp. 6. Separate the two identifiers with a space.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. In front of broadcast 224. and the authentication code is k0ssL09a during the synchronization of the time between the client and the current server. add server IP address of the upper-layer NTP server key identifier prefer to specify the IP address and identifier of the upper-layer NTP server. the identifier is 12. Save the ntp. and then run the :wq! command to save the file and exit.keys # chmod 400 /etc/inet/ntp. and the corresponding authentication codes are tPol3kRS and l2082skt.1 ttl 4. press Esc. add # to comment out this line to disable the broadcast mode. Assume that the MD5 algorithm is used.conf 4.XType.127.conf # TERM=vt100.conf Task Instance Assume that the administration console synchronizes the upper-layer time servers whose IP addresses are 10. 3. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.212 and 10.keys file and the ntp.0 stratum 0 to 1. An authentication code is used as the input parameter corresponding to an algorithm.127.161. Change XType in server 127.161. Ltd. the identifiers are 5 and 3.94. 8. and M refers to the MD5 algorithm.keys file and exit the vi editor.0 and fudge 127. add multiple lines. 10.0. Delete 0 from trustedkey 0 to add the identifier of the upper-layer NTP server and the identifier used by the NTP client for synchronizing time with the current server. 9. the upper-layer time server uses the MD5 algorithm. A refers to the ASCII algorithm.0 stratum 0. After editing the file. 11.conf file: # chmod 400 /etc/inet/ntp. Each line in the file must contain one unique identifier. Delete stratum 0 from fudge 127. If multiple upper-level NTP servers exist.127.127. The format of an authentication code depends on the corresponding algorithm. In front of server 127. S10) NOTE 14 FAQs (Sun) l l An identifier refers to a positive integer ranging from 1 to 4294967295.. press Esc.0.Xtype. Save the ntp. 7. l 2. and then run the :wq! command to save the file and exit. After editing the file.94.server /etc/inet/ntp.1.

2. For details.1 ttl 4 keys /etc/inet/ntp.1. you need to check the running status of the NTP services on the administration console to ensure that they are running properly.161. Ltd.keys enable auth trustedkey 5 3 12 Postprocessing After setting the M2000 administration console as the intermediary-layer NTP server.127. Wait for about five minutes. During system test.XType.0 #broadcast 224.0 fudge 127.0. the remote field shows the address and status of the time source of the M2000 server.1.3 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Administration Console. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .keys trustedkey 0 The contents of the /etc/inet/ntp. Run the following command to check the information about the clock synchronization path: # ntptrace 14-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.127. if you run the ntpq -p command.1.conf file after the modification are as follows: server 10.127.0. Context After the NTP server and client are started.1.94. the system displays Timeout or Not Synchronized. the system requires five minutes for system test. 3.1 ttl 4 keys /etc/inet/ntp.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. You have logged in to the M2000 administration console as user root.5.7 How Do I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the Administration Console (In Encryption Mode)? After setting the administration console as the intermediary-layer NTP server in encryption mode.0 fudge 127.161. If you run the ntptrace command.214 key 3 server 127.94. 14. see 2.. Procedure 1.4.XType.keys file are as follows: 5 M tPol3kRS 3 M l2082skt 12 M k0ssL09a The contents of the /etc/inet/ntp.212 key 5 prefer server 10. S10) The contents of the created /etc/inet/ntp.127. Run the following command to view the information about the time source: # ntpq -p In the result of the ntpq -p command.0 stratum 0 broadcast 224. and then run the ntpq -p command and the ntptrace command to query the status of the NTP services. you need to start the NTP services on the administration console.conf file before the modification are as follows: server 127. the displayed address of the remote time source does not contain *.

and then type as. synch distance 0. Ltd. The value 1 in the st column indicates that the host is located at stratum 1.71.15.71. If auth is ok.01007. 4. run the ntptrace -v command. ntpq> exit Task Instance The administration console functions as the intermediary-layer NTP server.71.15.. synch distance 0.4.02032 10.730 0. Run the following command to check the status of NTP authentication: # ntpq ntpq> as The system output is similar to the following information: ind assID status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt =========================================================== 1 28852 f614 yes yes ok sys.01 # ntptrace localhost: stratum 2. The symbol * indicates that the NTP services are running properly.peer reachable 1 In the system output. offset -0. that the IP address of the upper-level server is 10. offset 0. it indicates that the NTP services are successfully authenticated.000714. Run the ntpq command.peer reachable 1 2 15821 9014 yes yes none insane reachable 1 ntpq> exit *10. refid 'LCL' # ntpq ntpq> as ind assID status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt =========================================================== 1 15820 f614 yes yes ok sys.000043. The result of the ntptrace command indicates that the host is located at stratum 2. # ntpq -p remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset disp ============================================================================== *10.LCL. For details.8 How to Set the M2000 Server as the NTP Client (In Encryption Mode) This section describes how to set the M2000 server as the NTP client to synchronize time with the upper-layer server in encryption mode.69: stratum 1.69 in the result of the ntpq -p command indicates that the IP address of the NTP server that the host is synchronized with is 10.56 -0. and that the upper-level server is at stratum 1.71.000 10. 14-61 .69.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun.00 0.15. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) The ntptrace command traces the NTP synchronization path from the host to the top-layer NTP server. if auth is ok.15. 1 u 13 64 377 0.69.69 .71. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it indicates that the authentication between the host and the upper-layer NTP server is successful.06 LOCAL(0) LOCAL(0) 3 l 12 64 377 0.15. 14.

and authentication code of the upper-layer NTP server. The format of an authentication code depends on the corresponding algorithm.. Run the following commands to open the /etc/inet/ntp. key type. After editing the file. An authentication code is used as the input parameter corresponding to an algorithm. see 7. Save the ntp. If any Sybase service is running. and authentication code of the upper-layer NTP server to the file according to the following syntax: Write only one data item in each line.dbuser For details about how to stop the Sybase services. identifier key type authentication code NOTE l l An identifier refers to a positive integer ranging from 1 to 4294967295. S10) Prerequisite l l You have configured the upper-layer NTP server in encryption mode. it cannot be used as the upper-layer time server of the M2000 server.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Add server IP address of the upper level NTP server key identifier at the end of the file to specify the IP addresses and identifiers of upper-layer NTP servers.conf # TERM=vt100. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) 14-62 . Each line in the file must contain one unique identifier.client /etc/inet/ntp. 2. You have logged in to the server as user root. For details.00$ exit 3. Ltd.conf 6. date. press Esc. key type. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp. N refers to the DES algorithm in NTP format. 5. Run the following commands to edit the /etc/inet/ntp.2. l 4. Procedure 1. The time zone. Each line maps to one NTP server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. If any M2000 service is running. S refers to the DES algorithm in standard format. You have obtained the identifier. l l Context The upper-layer time server of the M2000 server requires that the NTP protocol must be used. Thus.3 How Do I Stop the Sybase?.keys Add the identifier.4 Stopping the M2000 Services. and time of the M2000 server are set correctly. A refers to the ASCII algorithm. The server running on the Windows operating system uses the SNTP protocol. and then run the :wq! command to save the file and exit. stop it.keys file: # TERM=vt100. export TERM # vi /etc/inet/ntp. -bash-3. A key type is a character and refers to the encryption algorithm for calculating NTP services.conf file: # cp /etc/inet/ntp. see 14.keys file and exit the vi editor. run the following command to stop it: # su . and M refers to the MD5 algorithm.

Task Instance Assume that the M2000 server is set to synchronize the time of the upper-layer time server whose IP address is 10. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.keys trustedkey N N in the last line refers to the identifier used for NTP authentication. see 2. If multiple upper-layer NTP servers exist. see 14. 10. Save the ntp.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and then run the :wq! command to save the file and exit. you need to start the NTP services on the server. 14-63 .keys # chmod 400 /etc/inet/ntp. 9.2.conf 11.2. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) 7.97 key 12 enable auth keys /etc/inet/ntp.6 Starting the NTP Service on the M2000 Server.1.conf file: # chmod 400 /etc/inet/ntp. press Esc.1 Postprocessing After setting the M2000 server as the NTP client. In front of multicastclient 224.keys trustedkey 12 #multicastclient 224. the identifier is 12. Run the following commands to modify the rights of the ntp. run the following command to start them: # su .71.00$ exit 12.0. start them. For details.1.conf file after the modification are as follows: server 10. write the identifiers of these servers in one line. After editing the file.3 Starting the M2000 System Services.1.15.2 How to Start the Sybase.1 The contents of the /etc/inet/ntp.keys file and the ntp.71. The contents of the created /etc/inet/ntp. add # to comment out the line to disable the multicast client.0. Ltd. Separate the identifiers with spaces.1.5.conf file and exit the vi editor. If the M2000 services are stopped in 1. trustedkey 3 4 8.. and the key type is k0ssL09a. NOTE Either the multicast client or the upper-lay NTP server takes effect. If the Sybase services are stopped in 2. For details. Add the following contents to the file: enable auth keys /etc/inet/ntp.conf file before the modification are as follows: multicastclient 224.15. the upper-layer time server uses the MD5 algorithm. For example. -bash-3.97. see 7.0.dbuser For details about how to start the Sybase services.keys file are as follows: 12 M k0ssL09a The contents of the /etc/inet/ntp.

Procedure 1. Wait for about five minutes. if you run the ntpq -p command. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . Run the following command to check the status of NTP authentication: # ntpq ntpq> as The system output is similar to the following information: ind assID status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt =========================================================== 1 28852 f614 yes yes ok sys.9 How Should I Check the Running Status of the NTP Services on the M2000 Server (In Encryption Mode)? After setting the M2000 server as the NTP client in encryption mode. 3. Ltd. it indicates that the NTP services are successfully authenticated. Run the following command to view the information about the time source: # ntpq -p In the result of the ntpq -p command. S10) 14. Run the following command to check the information about the clock synchronization path: # ntptrace The ntptrace command traces the NTP synchronization path from the host to the top-layer NTP server. # ntpq -p remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset disp ============================================================================== *10.peer reachable 1 In the system output. 2. and then run the ntpq -p command and the ntptrace command to query the status of the NTP services. the system requires five minutes for system test. Context After the NTP server and client are started.71. the displayed address of the remote time source does not contain *.15.4. run the ntptrace -v command.15.44 -0.. the system displays Timeout or Not Synchronized. During system test.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. if auth is ok. 4. You have logged in to the server as user root.428 0. you need to check the running status of the NTP services on the server to ensure that the NTP services are running properly. ntpq> exit Task Instance The M2000 server functions as the NTP client.97 10.69 2 u 29 64 377 0. the remote field shows the address and status of the time source of the M2000 server.71. For details. If you run the ntptrace command.09 # ntptrace 14-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

15. If auth is ok.71.15. synch distance 0. 14-65 Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data.log If the log contains truncate-only transaction dump has been performed. For details.71.89705 10.02142 10. Run the ntpq command. 2.69.71.01059. refid 'LCL' # ntpq ntpq> as ind assID status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt =========================================================== 1 30140 f614 yes yes ok sys. Problem The M2000 dynamic data fails to be backed up incrementally.97. offset -0. l The disk space is insufficient. it indicates that a manual operation is performed on the database so that the database does not record event logs. This section also describes how to solve this problem. # more /opt/OMC/var/logs/backup. The disk space is insufficient.71.000008.97 in the result of the ntpq -p command indicates that the IP address of the NTP server that the host is synchronized with is 10.97. that the IP address of the stratum-2 server is 10.10 How Should I Handle an Incremental Backup Failure? This section describes the causes of the failure to back up the M2000 dynamic data incrementally.2. Cause The causes of the incremental data backup failure are as follows: l l The database logs are not consecutive. synch distance 0.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. and then type as. see 10. 1. it indicates that the database logs are truncated manually. Ltd. Check the backup and restore log. The result of the ntptrace command indicates that the host is located at stratum 3. offset 0.000040.4.15.71.15. it indicates that the authentication between the host and the upper-layer NTP server is successful.15. synch distance 0. If the log contains non-logged operation. The symbol * indicates that the NTP services are running properly.71. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.97: stratum 2.69: stratum 1. Solution l The database logs are not consecutive.peer reachable 1 ntpq> exit *10. Perform a full backup again.000024. The value 2 in the st column indicates that the host is located at stratum 2. 14.15.. offset 0. and that the IP address of the stratum-1 server is 10. S10) 14 FAQs (Sun) localhost: stratum 3.

and disks only at certain time. Context The 3-second period is used for sampling the CPU and the memory and the 1-minute period is used for monitoring disks. The free disk space is low . Remaining Physical Memory(KB). you can analyze the load and performance of the hardware system. Give up backup! 2. The difference between the monitoring of the clients and the monitoring of the server is that the monitoring on the client can export the usage of the CPU. The monitoring on the server. S10) 1. Check the backup and restore log. Based on the report.1. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) .2. The default installation path of the M2000 server software is /opt/OMC. Time. and disks. MEM Occupancy(%). 14. Remaining Swap Memory(KB) l The disk usage report file records disk usage reports in the following format: Hostname. # . # cd /opt/OMC Step 2 Run the environment variant commands. CPU Occupancy(%). . it indicates that the backup space is insufficient.sh Step 3 Enable the function of exporting reports. memory./svc_profile. IO Rate(%) Procedure Step 1 Switch to the default installation path of the M2000 server software. can export the periodically sampled usage of the CPU. Used Rate(%). l The CPU and the memory performance report file records performance reports in the following format: Hostname. Swap Memory(KB). see 10. Used Size(KB).5 Manually Backing Up the M2000 Dynamic Data. Prerequisite You have logged in to the M2000 server as user root. Clear the disk space of the M2000 server.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. For details.log If the log contains the following information. memory. and Disk The M2000 periodically exports the report of system performance. Partition Name. Total Size(KB). however. 14-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 14.17 What Should I Do When the Server Disk Space Is Insufficient?.4. such as CPU usage.. Time. Memory. memory usage.11 How Should I Periodically Monitoring the CPU. Physical Memory(KB). Ltd. For details. Remaining Size(KB). Perform a full backup again.give up buck! The free disk space of /export/home/ is low. # more /opt/OMC/var/logs/backup. and disk usage. 3.

If the PC and SC cannot be connected through the PuTTY. Perform the following steps: 1.csv file in M2000 server installation path/var/monitor/ sysinfo.12 How Should I Power On the T5220 Server Through the Serial Port of the SC This section describes how to power on the T5220 server through the serial port of the SC. l View the performance report. enter IP address of the SC in Host Name (or IP Address). # svc_monitor -cmd start -type system Enable the function of exporting a disk usage report. select SSH. # cd M2000 server installation path/var/monitor/diskinfo # more Disk usage report file name ----End 14. Step 4 View the exported reports. NOTE l l Log in to the http://support. 14-67 . Issue 10 (2010-09-06) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.huawei. The disk usage report is saved as a . The sc> prompt is displayed. The default file name is sysinfo.. see the corresponding software initial installation guide. # cd M2000 server installation path/var/monitor/sysinfo # more Performance report file name l Check the report about disk usage. The communication between the PC and the Ethernet port on the server SC is normal. # svc_monitor -cmd start -type disk l The performance report is saved as a . Enter the user name admin and the password to log in to the SC. ensure that the following conditions are met: l l l The SC of the server is configured. In the PuTTY Configuration window. Ltd.M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. Question How should I power on the T5220 server through the serial port of the SC? Answer Before powering on the server. The password of user admin of the SC is available.com to download the PuTTY to the PC. For details. Start the PuTTY on the PC terminal and set up the connection between the PC and the SC based on the SSH protocol. 2.4. and then click Open to log in to the SC. S10) l 14 FAQs (Sun) Enable the function of exporting a performance report. connect them by using a serial port cable. The default file name is diskinfo.csv file in M2000 server installation path/var/monitor/diskinfo.

In this case. Ltd. the system automatically starts the Solaris. Run the following command to power on the server: sc> poweron Run the console command. it indicates that you have not logged out of the console last time. [view mode]. and then press Enter. Sybase. if the system displays Console session already in use. run the console -f command to connect the server.14 FAQs (Sun) M2000 Administrator Guide (Sun. or M2000 server software after the T5220 is started. If the Solaris. 14-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. NOTE After the console command is executed. If the Solaris operating system is not installed. and then press Enter to connect the server. Sybase. the system is switched to the ok state after the T5220 is started. When the system displays a confirmation message. 4. Issue 10 (2010-09-06) . or M2000 server software is correctly installed. type y. S10) 3.